Subaru 2008 Outback 2.5i LTD L.L. Bean dition 4dr All-wheel User Manual

Black plate (1,1)

北米Model "A2440BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 4/ 27

Foreword

Congratulations on choosing a SUBARU vehicle. This Owner’s

Manual has all the information necessary to keep your SUBARU in

excellent condition and to properly maintain the emission control

system for minimizing emission pollutants. We urge you to read

this manual carefully so that you may understand your vehicle and

its operation. For information not found in this Owner’s Manual,

such as details concerning repairs or adjustments, please contact

the dealer from whom you purchased your SUBARU or the nearest

SUBARU dealer.

The information, specifications and il lustrations found in this

manual are those in effect at the time of printing. FUJI HEAVY

INDUSTRIES LTD. reserves the right to change specifications and

designs at any time without prior notice and without incurring any

obligation to make the same or similar changes on vehicles

previously sold. This Owner’s Manual applies to all models and

covers all equipment, including factory installed options. Some

explanations, therefore may be for equipment not installed in your

vehicle.

Please leave this manual in the vehicle at the time of resale. The

next owner will need the information found herein.

FUJI HEAVY INDUSTRIES LTD., TOKYO, JAPAN

is a registered trademark of FUJI HEAVY INDUSTRIES LTD.

Black plate (2,1)

北米Model "A2440BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 4/ 27

This manual describes the following types of the Legacy series.

1) Legacy Sedan

2) Legacy Station wagon

3) OUTBACK Station wagon

Black plate (3,1)

北米Model "A2440BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 5/ 7

Warranties

& Warranties for U.S.A.

All SUBARU vehicles distributed by

Subaru of America, Inc. and sold at retail

by an authorized SUBARU dealer in the

United States come with the following

warranties:

. SUBARU Limited Warranty

. Emission Control Systems Warranty

. Emissions Performance Warranty

All warranty information, including details

of coverage and exclu sions, is in the

“Warranty and Maintenan ce Bookl et”.

Please read these warranties carefully.

& Warranties for Canada

All SUBARU vehicles distributed by

Subaru Canada, Inc. and sold at retail by

an authorized SUBARU dealer in Canada

come with the following warranties:

. SUBARU Limited Warranty

. Anti-Corrosion Warranty

. Emission Control Warranty

All warranty information, including details

of coverage and exclu sions, is in the

“Warranty and Service Booklet”. Please

read these warranties carefully.

CAUTION

If your vehicle is equipped with a

navigation system, the display con-

tains mercury. Therefore, the dis-

play of the navigation system must

be removed before vehicle disposal.

Once the display has been removed,

please reuse, recycle or dispose of

them as hazardous waste.

How to use this Owner’s

Manual

& Using your Owner’s Manual

Before you operate your vehicle, carefully

read this manual. To protect yourself and

extend the service life of your vehicle,

follow the instructions in this manual.

Failure to observe these instructions may

result in serious injury and damage to your

vehicle.

This manual is composed o f fourteen

chapters. Each chapter begins with a brief

table of contents, so you can usually tell at

a glance if that chapter contains the

information you want.

Chapter 1: Seat, seatbelt and SRS

airbags

This chapter informs you how to use the

seat and seatbelt and contains precau-

tions for the SRS airbags.

Chapter 2: Keys and doors

This chapter informs you how to operate

the keys, locks and windows.

Chapter 3: Instruments and controls

This chapter informs you about the opera-

tion of instrument panel indicators and

how to use the instruments and other

switches.

– CONTINUED –

Black plate (4,1)

北米Model "A2440BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 5/ 7

Chapter 4: Climate control

This chapter informs you how to operate

the climate control.

Chapter 5: Audio

This chapter informs you how to operate

your audio system.

Chapter 6: Interior equipment

This chapter informs you how to operate

interior equipment.

Chapter 7: Starting and operating

This chapter informs you how to start and

operate your SUBARU.

Chapter 8: Driving tips

This chapter informs you how to drive your

SUBARU in various conditions and ex-

plains some safety tips on driving.

Chapter 9: In case of emergency

This chapter informs you what to do if you

have a problem while driving, such as a

flat tire or engine overheating.

Chapter 10: Appearance care

This chapter informs you how to keep your

SUBARU looking good.

Chapter 11: Maintenance and service

This chapter informs you when you need

to take your SUBARU to the dealer for

scheduled maintenance and informs you

how to keep your SUBARU running

properly.

Chapter 12: Specifications

This chapter informs you about dimension

and capacities of your SUBARU.

Chapter 13: Consumer information and

Reporting safety defects

This chapter informs you about Tire

information, Uniform tire quality grading

standards and Reporting safety defects.

Chapter 14: Index

This is an alphabetical listing of all that’sin

this manual. You can use it to quickly find

something you want to read.

& Safety warnings

You will find a number of WARNINGs,

CAUTIONs and NOTEs in this manual.

These safety warnings alert you to poten-

tial hazards that could result in injury to

you or others.

Please read these safety warnings as well

as all other portions of this manual care-

fully in order to gain a better understand-

ing of how to use your SUBARU vehicle

safely.

WARNING

A WARNING indicates a situation in

which serious injury or death could

result if the warning is ignored.

CAUTION

A CAUTION indicates a situation in

which injury or damage to your

vehicle, or both, could result if the

caution is ignored.

NOTE

A NOTE gives information or sugges-

tions how to make better use of your

vehicle.

& Safety symbol

You will find a circle with a slash through it

in this manual. This symbol means “ Do

not”, “Do not do this”,or“Do not let this

happen”, depending upon the context.

Black plate (5,1)

北米Model "A2440BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 5/ 7

Vehicle symbols

There are some of the symbols you may

see on your vehicle.

For warning and indicator lights, refer to

“Warning and indicator lights” in the

illustrated index section in this chapter.

Mark Name

WARNING

CAUTION

Passengers’ windows lock

Fuel

Front fog lights

Parking lights

Hazard warning flasher

Seat heater

Mark Name

Child restraint lower an-

chorages

Child restraint top tether an-

chorages

Horn

Windshield wiper deicer

Wiper intermittent

Windshield wiper and washer

Rear window wiper and

washer

Lights

Parking lights, tail lights, li-

cense plate lights and instru-

ment panel illumination

Headlights

Turn signal

Mark Name

Illumination brightness

Engine hood

Trunk lid (Sedan)

Fan speed

Instrument panel outlets

Instrument panel outlets and

foot outlets

Foot outlets

Windshield defroster and foot

outlets

Windshield defroster

Rear window defogger/Out-

side mirror defogger

Air recirculation

– CONTINUED –

Black plate (6,1)

北米Model "A2440BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 5/ 7

Mark Name

Outside air

Engine oil

Washer

Door lock (Transmitter)

Door unlock (Transmitter)

Trunk lid (Sedan) or rear gate

(Station wagon) (Transmitter)

Safety precautions when

driving

& Seatbelt and SRS airbag

WARNING

. All persons in the vehicle should

fasten their seatb elts B EFORE

the vehicle starts to move. Other-

wise, the possibility of serious

injury becomes greater in the

event of a sudden stop or acci-

dent.

. To obtain maximum protection in

the event of an accident, the

driver and all passengers in the

vehicle should always wear seat-

belts when the vehicle is moving.

The SRS (Supplemental Restraint

System) airbag does not do away

with the need to fasten seatbelts.

In combination with the seat-

belts, it offers the best combined

protection in case of a serious

accident.

Not wearing a seatbelt increases

the chance of severe injury or

death in a crash even when the

vehicle has the SRS airbag.

. The SRS airbags deploy with

considerable speed and force.

Occupants who are out of proper

position when the SRS airbag

deploys could suffer very serious

injuries. Because the SRS airbag

needs enough space for deploy-

ment, the driver should always

sit upright and well back in the

seat as far from the steering

wheel as practical while still

maintaining full vehicle control

and the front passenger should

move the seat as far back as

possible and sit upright and well

back in the seat.

Carefully read the sections “Seat, seatbelt

and SRS airbags” in chapter 1 of this

Owner’s Manual for instructions and pre-

cautions concerning the seatbelt system

and SRS airbag system.

Black plate (7,1)

北米Model "A2440BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 5/ 7

& Child safety

WARNING

. Never hold a child on your lap or

in your arms while the vehicle is

moving. The passenger cannot

protect the child from injury in a

collision, because the child will

be caught between the passen-

ger and objects inside the vehi-

cle.

. While riding in the vehicle, in-

fants and small children should

always be placed in the REAR

seat in an infant or child restraint

system which is appropriate for

the child’s age, height and

weight. If a child is too big for a

child restraint system, the child

should sit in the REAR seat and

be restrained using the seatbelts.

According to accident statistics,

children are safer when properly

restrained in the rear seating

positions than in the front seat-

ing positions. Never allow a child

to stand up or kneel on the seat.

. Put children aged 12 and under in

the REAR seat properly re-

strained at all times in a child

restraint device or in a seatbelt.

The SRS airbag deploys with

considerable speed and force

and can injure or even kill chil-

dren, especially if they are 12

years of age and under and are

not restrained or improperly re-

strained . Because children are

lighter and weaker than adults,

their risk of being injured from

deployment is greater.

. NEVER INSTALL A REARWARD

FACING CHILD SAFETY SEAT IN

THE FRONT SEAT. DOING SO

RISKS SERIOUS INJURY OR

DEATH TO THE CHILD BY PLA-

CING THE CHILD’S HEAD TOO

CLOSE TO THE SRS AIRBAG.

. Always use the child safety locks

whenever a child rides in the rear

seat. Serious injury could result

if a child accidentally opened the

door and fell out. Refer to the

“Door locks” section in chapter

. Always lock the passenger’s win-

dows using the lock switch when

children are riding in the vehicle.

Failure to follow this procedure

could result in injury to a child

operating the power window. Re-

fer to the “Power windows” sec-

tion in chapter 2.

. Never leave unattended children

in the vehicle. They could acci-

dentally injure themselves or

others through inadvertent op-

eration of the vehicle. Also, on

hot or sunny days, temperature

in a closed vehicle could quickly

become high enough to cause

severe or possibly fatal injuries

to them.

. Help prevent young children from

locking themselves in the trunk.

When leaving the vehicle, either

close all windows and lock all

doors or cancel the inside trunk

lid release. Also make certain

that the trunk is closed. On hot

or sunny days, the temperature

in a trunk could quickly become

high enough to cause death or

serious heat-related injuries in-

cluding brain damage to anyone

locked inside, particularly for

small children.

Carefully read the sections “Child restraint

systems”, “*SRS airbag (Supplemental

Restraint System airbag)” , and “Seatbelts”

in chapter 1 of this Owner’s Manual for

instructions and precautions concerning

the child restraint system, seatbelt system

and SRS airbag system.

– CONTINUED –

Black plate (8,1)

北米Model "A2440BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 5/ 7

& Engine exhaust gas (carbon

monoxide)

WARNING

. Never inhale engine exhaust gas.

Engine exhaust gas contai ns

carbon monoxide, a colorless

and odorless gas which is dan-

gerous, or even lethal, if inhaled.

. Always properly maintain the en-

gine exhaust system to prevent

engine exhaust gas from enter-

ing the vehicle.

. Never run the engine in a closed

space, such as a garage, except

for the brief time needed to drive

the vehicle in or out of it.

. Av oid remaining in a parked

vehicle for a lengthy time while

the engine is running. If that is

unavoidable, then use the venti-

lation fan to force fresh air into

the vehicle.

. Always keep the front ventilator

inlet grille free from snow, leaves

or other obstructions to ensure

that the ventilation system al-

ways works properly.

. If at any time you suspect that

exhaust fumes are entering the

vehicle, have the problem

checked and corrected as soon

as possible. If you must drive

under these co nditions, drive

only with all windows fully open.

. Keep the trunk lid or rear gate

closed while driving to prevent

exhaust gas from entering the

vehicle.

& Drinking and driving

WARNING

Drinking and then driving is very

dangerous. Alcohol in the blood-

stream delays your reaction and

impairs your perception, judgment

and attentiveness. If you drive after

drinking – even if you drink just a

little – it will increase the risk of

being involved in a serious or fatal

accident, injuring or killing yourself,

your passengers and others. In

addition, if you are injured in the

accident, alcohol may increase the

severity of that injury.

Please don’t drink and drive.

Drunken driving is one of the most

frequent causes of accidents. Since alco-

hol affects all people differently, you may

have consumed too much alcohol to drive

safely even if the level of alcohol in your

blood is below the legal limit. The safest

thing you can do is never drink and drive.

However if you have no choice but to

drive, stop drinking and sober up comple-

tely before getting behind the wheel.

& Drugs and driving

WARNING

There are some drugs (over the

counter and prescription) that can

delay your reaction time and impair

your perception, judgment and at-

tentiveness. If you drive after taking

them, it may increase your, your

passengers’ and other persons’ risk

of being involved in a serious or

fatal accident.

If you are taking any drugs, check with

your doctor or pharmacist or read the

literature that accompanies the medication

to determine if the drug you are taking can

impair your driving ability. Do not drive

after taking any medications that can

make you drowsy or otherwise affect your

ability to safely operate a motor vehicle. If

Black plate (9,1)

北米Model "A2440BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 5/ 7

you have a medical condition that requires

you to take drugs, please consult with

your doctor.

Never drive if you are under the influence

of any illicit mind-altering drugs. For your

own health and well-being, we urge you

not to take illegal drugs in the first place

and to seek treatment if you are addicted

to those drugs.

& Driving when tired or sleepy

WARNING

When you are tired or sleepy, your

reaction will be delayed and your

perception, judgment and attentive-

ness will be impaired. If you drive

when tired or sleepy, your, your

passengers’ and other persons’

chances of being inv olved in a

serious accident may increase.

Please do not continue to drive but

instead find a safe place to rest if you

are tired or sleepy. On long trips, you

should make periodic rest stops to refresh

yourself before continuing on your journey.

When possible, you should share the

driving with others.

& Car phone/cell phone and

driving

CAUTION

Do not use a car phone/cell phone

while driving; it may distract your

attention from driving and can lead

to an accident. If you use a car

phone/cell phone, pull off the road

and park in the a place before using

your phone. In some States/Pro-

vinces, only hands-free phones

may legally be used while driving.

& Modification of your vehicle

CAUTION

Your vehicle should not be modified

other than wi th genuine Subaru

parts and accessories. Other types

of modifications could affect its

performance, safety or durability,

and may even violate governmental

regulations. In addition, damage or

performance problems resulting

from modification may not be cov-

ered under warranties.

& Driving with pets

Unrestrained pets can interfere with your

driving and distract your attention from

driving. In a collision or sudden stop,

unrestrained pets or cages can be thrown

around inside the vehicle and hurt you or

your passengers. Besides, the pets can

be hurt under these situations. It is also for

their own safety that pets should be

properly restrained in your vehicle. Re-

strain a pet with a special traveling

harness which can be secured to the rear

seat with a seatbelt or use a pet carrier

which can be secured to the rear seat by

routing a seatbelt through the carrier’s

handle. Never restrain pets or pet carriers

in the front passenger’s seat. For further

information, consult your veterinarian,

local animal protectio n society or pet

shop.

& Tire pressures

WARNING

Driving at high speeds with exces-

sively low tire pressures can cause

the tires to deform severely and to

rapidly become ho t. A sharp in-

crease in temperature could cause

tread separation, and destruction of

the tires. The resulting loss of

– CONTINUED –

Black plate (10,1)

北米Model "A2440BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 5/ 7

vehicle control could lead to an

accident.

Check and, if necessary, adjust the

pressure of each tire (including the spare)

at least once a month and before any long

journey.

Check the tire pressure when the tires are

cold.

Use a pressure gauge to adjust the tire

pressures to the values shown on the tire

placard.

Refer to the “Tires and wheels” section in

chapter 11 for detailed information.

& California proposition 65

warning

WARNING

Engine exhaust, some of its consti-

tuents, and certain vehicle compo-

nents c ontain or emit chemicals

known to the State of California to

cause cancer and birth defects or

other reproductive harm. In addi-

tion, certain fluids in vehicles and

certain components of product wear

contain or emit chemicals known to

the State of California to cause

cancer and birth defects or other

reproductive harm.

Black plate (1,1)

Table of contents

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags

Keys and doors

Instruments and controls

Climate control

Audio

Interior equipment

Starting and operating

Driving tips

In case of emergency

Appearance care

Maintenance and service

Specifications

Consumer information and Reporting safety defects

Index

北米Model "A2440BE-B" Edited: 2007/ 4/ 27

Black plate (12,1)

北米Model "A2440BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 5/ 7

Illustrated index

& Exterior

1) Engine hood lock release (page 11-4)

2) Headlight switch (page 3-46)

3) Bulb replacement (page 11-51)

4) Wiper switch (page 3-50)

5) Moonroof (page 2-27)

6) Roof rail (page 8-15)

7) Door locks (page 2-5)

8) Tire pressure (page 11-36)

9) Flat tires (page 9-4)

10) Tire chains (page 8-13)

11) Fog light switch (page 3-48)

12) Tie-down hooks (page 9-14)

13) Towing hook (page 9-14)

Black plate (13,1)

北米Model "A2440BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 5/ 7

1) Rear window defogger button

(page 3-54)

2) Fuel filler lid and cap (page 7-5)

3) Child safety locks (page 2-20)

4) Tie-down hooks (page 9-14)

5) Towing hook (page 9-14)

6) Trunk lid (page 2-23)

7) Rear gate (page 2-26)

8) Bulb replacement (page 11-55)

9) Rear wiper switch (page 3-52)

– CONTINUED –

Black plate (14,1)

北米Model "A2440BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 5/ 7

& Interior

! Passenger compartment area

1) Lower anchorages for child restraint

system (page 1-35)

2) Seatbelt (page 1-13)

3) Center console (page 6-5)

4) Front seat (page 1-2)

5) Rear seat (page 1-9)

Black plate (15,1)

北米Model "A2440BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 5/ 7

1) Top tether anchorages (page 1-37)

2) Dome lights (page 6-2)

3) Sun visors (page 6-3)

4) Cargo area light (page 6-2)

5) Rear center seatbelt (page 1-19)

6) Cargo area cover (page 6-12)

– CONTINUED –

Black plate (16,1)

北米Model "A2440BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 5/ 7

1) Parking brake lever (page 7-44)

2) Gear shift lever (MT) (page 7-14/

page 7-16)

3) Select lever (AT) (page 7-18/page 7-24)

4) Information display (page 3-41)

5) Clock (page 3-40)

6) Dashboard storage compartment

(page 6-4)

7) Navigation system (See navigation sys-

tem instruction manual.)

8) Glove box (page 6-5)

9) Hazard warning flasher switch (page 3-5)

10) Audio (page 5-1)

11) Climate control (page 4-1)

12) Pocket (page 6-7)

13) Accessory power outlet (page 6-8)

14) Tilt/telescopic steering wheel (page 3-58)

15) SI-DRIVE selector (page 7-32)

16) Cup holder (page 6-7)

Black plate (17,1)

北米Model "A2440BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 5/ 7

& Instrument panel

1) Door locks (page 2-5)

2) Illumination brightness control

(page 3-47)

3) Remote control mirror (page 3-57)

4) Windshield wiper deicer (page 3-53)

5) Vehicle Dynamics Control OFF switch

(page 7-42)

6) Audio control buttons (page 5-26)

7) Light control lever (page 3-45)

8) Combination meter (page 3-5/page 3-24)

9) Wiper control lever (page 3-49)

10) Paddle shift (page 7-28)

11) Cruise control (page 7-46)

12) S# switch for SI-DRIVE (page 7-32)

13) Horn (page 3-59)

14) SRS airbag (page 1-40)

15) Multi-information display operatio n

switch (page 3-9)

16) Fuse box (page 11-48)

17) Hood lock release knob (page 11-4)

18) Power windows (page 2-20)

– CONTINUED –

Black plate (18,1)

北米Model "A2440BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 5/ 7

& Light control and wiper control levers/switches

1) Parking light switch (page 3-48)

2) Windshield wiper (page 3-49)

3) Mist (page 3-51)

4) Windshield washer (page 3-52)

5) Rear window wiper and washer switch

(page 3-52)

6) Wiper control lever (page 3-50)

7) Light control lever (page 3-45)

8) Fog light switch (page 3-48)

9) Headlight ON/OFF (page 3-46)

10) Headlight flasher High/Low beam

change (page 3-46)

11) Turn signal (page 3-47)

Black plate (19,1)

北米Model "A2440BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 5/ 7

& Combination meter

! U.S.-spec. models (with SI-DRIVE)

1) Temperature gauge (page 3-7)

2) Tachometer (page 3-6)

3) Shift-up indicator light (MT models)

(page 3-38)

4) Speedometer (page 3-6)

5) Fuel gauge (page 3-6)

6) Trip meter A/B selection and trip meter

reset knob (page 3-10)

7) ECO gauge (page 3-8)

8) Selector lever and gear position indicator

(AT models) (page 3-39)

9) Multi-information display (page 3-9)

10) S# PREP indicator light (page 3-38)

– CONTINUED –

Black plate (20,1)

北米Model "A2440BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 5/ 7

! U.S.-spec. models (without SI-DRIVE)

1) Temperature gauge (page 3-27)

2) Tachometer (page 3-26)

3) Speedometer (page 3-24)

4) Fuel gauge (page 3-26)

5) Trip meter A/B selection and trip meter

reset knob (page 3-25)

6) Low fuel warning light (page 3-27)

7) Trip meter and odometer (page 3-25)

8) Selector lever position indicator

(page 3-39)

9) Gear position indicator (page 3-39)

Black plate (21,1)

北米Model "A2440BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 5/ 7

! Canada-spec. models (with SI-DRIVE)

1) Temperature gauge (page 3-7)

2) Tachometer (page 3-6)

3) Shift-up indicator light (MT models)

(page 3-38)

4) Speedometer (page 3-6)

5) Fuel gauge (page 3-6)

6) Trip meter A/B selection and trip meter

reset knob (page 3-10)

7) ECO gauge (page 3-8)

8) Selector lever and gear position indicator

(AT models) (page 3-39)

9) Multi-information display (page 3-9)

10) S# PREP indicator light (page 3-38)

– CONTINUED –

Black plate (22,1)

北米Model "A2440BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 5/ 7

! Canada-spec. models (without SI-DRIVE)

1) Temperature gauge (page 3-27)

2) Tachometer (page 3-26)

3) Speedometer (page 3-24)

4) Fuel gauge (page 3-26)

5) Trip meter A/B selection and trip meter

reset knob (page 3-25)

6) Low fuel warning light (page 3-27)

7) Trip meter and odometer (page 3-25)

8) Selector lever position indicator

(page 3-39)

9) Gear position indicator (page 3-39)

Black plate (23,1)

北米Model "A2440BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 5/ 7

& Warning and indicator lights

Mark Name Page

Seatbelt warning light 3-29

Front passenger’s seat-

belt warning light

3-29

SRS airbag system

warning light

3-30

CHECK ENGINE warn-

ing light/Malfunction in-

dicator lamp

3-31

Charge warning light 3-32

Oil pressure warning

light

3-32

AT OIL temperature

warning light (AT mod-

els)

3-32

/ ABS warning light 3-34

Brake system warning

light

3-35

/ Door open warning light

3-36

Mark Name Page

/ Low fuel warning light 3-35

All-Wheel Drive warning

light (AT models)

3-36

Vehicle Dynamics Con-

trol operation indicator

light (if equipped)

3-36

Vehicle Dynamics Con-

trol warning light (if

equipped)/Vehicle Dy-

namics Control OFF in-

dicator light (if equipped)

3-37

Security indicator light 3-38

Turn signal indicator

lights

3-39

High beam indicator

light

3-40

Cruise control indicator

light

3-40

Cruise control set indi-

cator light

3-40

Headlight indicator light 3-40

Mark Name Page

Low tire pressure warn-

ing light (if equipped)

3-32

Front passenger’s fron-

tal airbag ON indicator

light

3-31

Front passenger’s fron-

tal airbag OFF indicator

light

3-31

SPORT mode indicator

light (AT models) (if

equipped)

3-38

Shift-up indicator light

(MT models) (if

equipped)

3-38

S# PREP indicator light

(if equipped)

3-38

– CONTINUED –

Black plate (24,1)

北米Model "A2440BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 5/ 7

& Trunk/cargo area

1) Jack handle (page 9-19)

2) Jack (page 9-19)

3) Spare tire (page 9-2)

Black plate (25,1)

北米Model "A2440BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 5/ 7

Function settings

A SUBARU dealer can change the settings of the functions shown in the following table to meet your personal requirements. Contact

the nearest SUBARU dealer for details. If your vehicle is equipped with navigation system, the settings for some of these functions can

be changed using the monitor. For details, please refer to the Owner’s Manual supplement for the monitor.

Item Function Possible settings Default setting Page

Alarm system Alarm system Operation / Non-operation Operation 2-15

Monitoring start delay time (after closure

of doors)

0 second / 30 seconds 30 seconds 2-17

Impact sensor operation (only vehicles

with shock sensors (dealer option))

Operation / Non-operation Non-operation 2-19

Passive arming Operation / Non-operation Non-operation 2-18

Remote keyless entry sys-

tem

Hazard warning flasher Operation / Non-operation Operation 2-8

Audible signal Operation / Non-operation Operation 2-10

Key lock-in prevention Key lock-in prevention Operation / Non-operation Operation 2-7

Remote engine start system

(dealer option)

Horn chirp confirmation ON/OFF ON 7-11

Rear window defogger Rear window defogger Operation for 15 minutes /

Continuous operation

Operation for 15 minutes 3-54

Windshield wiper deicer (if

equipped)

Windshield wiper deicer Operation for 15 minutes /

Continuous operation

Operation for 15 minutes 3-53

Map light/Dome light Operation in conjunction with remote

keyless entry system

OFF / Short / Normal / Long Normal 6-2

Map light Operation in conjunction with remote

keyless entry system and opening door

ON / OFF ON 6-2

Battery drainage prevention

function

Battery drainage prevention function Operation / Non-operation Operation 2-6

Black plate (1,1)

北米Model "A2440BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 5/ 7

Front seats........................................................... 1-2

Manual seat ........................................................ 1-3

Power seat (if equipped) ...................................... 1-4

Memory function (Driver’s seat, if equipped) ........ 1-5

Head restraint adjustment.................................... 1-7

Active head restraint ........................................... 1-7

Lumbar support (if equipped) .............................. 1-8

Seat heater (if equipped) .................................... 1-8

Rear seats............................................................ 1-9

Folding down the rear seatback ........................... 1-9

Head restraint adjustment................................... 1-10

Armrest (if equipped) ......................................... 1-12

Loading long objects (Sedan) ............................. 1-12

Seatbelts ............................................................. 1-13

Seatbelt safety tips............................................. 1-13

Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR) ................... 1-14

Automatic/Emergency Locking Retractor

(A/ELR) ............................................................ 1-14

Seatbelt warning light and chime ........................ 1-15

Fastening the seatbelt ........................................ 1-16

Seatbelt maintenance ......................................... 1-23

Front seatbelt pretensioners ............................. 1-24

System monitors ................................................ 1-25

System servicing ............................................... 1-26

Precautions against vehicle modification ............ 1-27

Child restraint systems ..................................... 1-27

Where to place a child restraint system.............. 1-28

Choosing a child restraint system ...................... 1-30

Installing child restraint systems with A/ELR

seatbelt ........................................................... 1-30

Installing a booster seat..................................... 1-33

Installation of child restraint systems by use of

lower and tether anchorages (LATCH) .............. 1-35

Top tether anchorages ....................................... 1-37

*SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint

System airbag)................................................ 1-40

Vehicle with SRS airbags and lap/shoulder

restraints for driver, front passenger, and

window-side rear passengers........................... 1-40

Subaru advanced frontal airbag system.............. 1-45

SRS side airbag and SRS curtain airbag............. 1-55

SRS airbag system monitors.............................. 1-61

SRS airbag system servicing ............................. 1-63

Precautions against vehicle modification ............ 1-64

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags

Black plate (28,1)

北米Model "A2440BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 5/ 7

1-2 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags

Front seats

WARNING

. Never adjust the seat while driv-

ing to avoid the possibility of

loss of vehicle control and of

personal injury.

. Before adjusting the seat, make

sure the hands and feet of rear

seat passengers or luggage are

clear of the adjusting mechan-

ism.

. Seatbelts provide maximum re-

straint when the occupant sits

well back and upright in the seat.

To reduce the risk of sliding

under the seatbelt in a collision,

the front seatbacks should be

always used in the upright posi-

tion while the vehicle is running.

If the fr ont seatbacks are not

used in the upright position in a

collision, the risk of sliding under

the lap belt and of the lap belt

sliding up over the abdomen will

increase, and both can result in

serious internal injury or death.

. The SRS a irbags deploy with

considerable speed and force.

Occupants who are out of proper

position when the SRS airbag

deploys could suffer very serious

injuries. Because the SRS airbag

needs enough space for deploy-

ment, the driver should always

sit upright and well back in the

seat as far f rom the steering

wheel as practical while still

maintaining full vehicle control

and the front passenger should

move the seat as far back as

possible and sit upright and well

back in the seat.

WARNING

Put children aged 12 and under in

the rear seat properly restrained at

all times. The SRS airbag deploys

with considerable speed and force

and can injure or even kill children,

especially if they are 12 years of age

and under and are not restrained or

improperly restrained. Because chil-

dren are lighter and weaker than

adults, their risk of being injured

from deployment is greater. Conse-

quently, we strongly recommend

that ALL children (including those

in child seats and those that have

outgrown child restraint devices) sit

in the REAR seat properly re-

strained at all times in a child

restraint device or in a seatbelt,

whichever is appropriate for the

child’s age, height and weight.

Secure ALL types of child restraint

devices (including forward facing

child seat) in the REAR seats at all

times.

NEVER INSTALL A REARWARD FA-

CING CHILD SEAT IN THE FRONT

SEAT. DOING SO RISKS SERIOUS

INJURY OR DEATH TO THE CHILD

BY PLACING THE CHILD’S HEAD

TOO CLOSE TO THE SRS AIRBAG.

Black plate (29,1)

北米Model "A2440BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 5/ 7

According to accident statistics,

children are safer when properly

restrained in the rear seating posi-

tions than in the front seating posi-

tions. For instructions and precau-

tions concerning child restraint sys-

tems, refer to the “Child restraint

systems” section in this chapter.

& Manual seat

! Fore and aft adjustment

Pull the lever upward and slide the seat to

the desired position. Then release the

lever and move the seat back and forth to

make sure that it is securely locked into

place.

! Reclining the seatback

WARNING

To prevent the passenger from slid-

ing under the seatbelt in the event of

a collision, always put the seatback

in the upright position while the

vehicle is in motion. Also, do not

place objects such as cushions

between the passenger and the

seatback. If you do so, the risk of

sliding under the lap belt and of the

lap belt sliding up over the abdomen

will increase, and both can result in

serious internal injury or death.

Pull the reclining lever up and adjust the

seatback to the desired position. Then

release the lever and make sure the seat

is securely locked into place.

The seatback placed in a reclined position

can spring back upward with force when

released. When operating the reclining

lever to return the seatback, hold it lightly

so that it may be raised back gradually.

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags 1-3

– CONTINUED –

Black plate (30,1)

北米Model "A2440BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 5/ 7

1-4 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags

! Seat height adjustment (Driver’s

seat)

The height of the seat can be adjusted by

moving the seat cushion adjustment lever

up and down.

When the lever is pushed down, the seat

is lowered.

When the lever is pulled up, the seat rises.

& Power seat (if equipped)

! Fore and aft adjustment

To adjust the seat forward or backward,

move the control switch forward or back-

ward.

NOTE

During backward-forward adjustment

of the seat, you cannot adjust the seat

cushion angle or seat height.

! Reclining the seatback

WARNING

To prevent the passenger from slid-

ing under the seatbelt in the event of

a collision, always put the seatback

in the upright position while the

vehicle is in motion. Also, do not

place objects s uch as cushions

between the passenger and the

seatback. If you do so, the risk of

sliding under the lap belt and of the

lap belt sliding up over the abdomen

will increase, and both can result in

serious internal injury or death.

Black plate (31,1)

北米Model "A2440BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 5/ 7

To adjust the angle of the seatback, move

the control switch.

! Seat cushion angle adjustment

(Driver’s seat)

To adjust the seat cushion angle, pull up

or push down the front end of the control

switch.

! Seat height adjustment (Driver’s

seat)

To adjust the seat height, pull up or push

down the rear end of the control switch.

& Memory function (Driver’s

seat, if equipped)

Two of your favorite seat positions can be

registered. Register the seat position with

button “1” or “2” and retrieve the seat

position by pressing either button.

The foll owing seat positions can be

registered:

. Forward/backward position of the seat

. Angle of seatback

. Angle of seat cushion

. Height of seat

! Registration of seat position

WARNING

. Never adjust the seat while driv-

ing to avoid the possibility of

loss of vehicle control and of

personal injury.

. Before adjusting the seat, make

sure the hands, feet and posses-

sions of rear seat passengers are

clear of the adjusting mechan-

ism.

. Before registering the seat posi-

tion, confirm that the shift lever is

in the “P” position (AT models) or

the parking brake lever is applied

(MT models).

1. Shift the shift lever in the “P” position

(AT models) or apply the parking brake

(MT models).

2. Adjust the seat position.

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags 1-5

– CONTINUED –

Black plate (32,1)

北米Model "A2440BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 5/ 7

1-6 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags

3. While pressing the “SET” button, press

the desired button “1” or “2”.

4. The chirp sounds once, and the seat

position is registered.

! Retrieval of seat position

WARNING

. Never retrieve the seat position

while driving to avoid the possi-

bility of loss of vehicle control

and of personal injury.

. Perform the seat position retrie-

val before driving. Before retriev-

ing the seat posi tion, confirm

that the shift lever is in the “P”

position (AT models) or the park-

ing brake lever is applied (MT

models). Do not drive until the

retrieval of the seat position is

complete.

. Be sure to press the registered

button of your seat position to

retrieve the seat position. If the

seat position is not optimum, an

incorrect driving position dis-

turbs driving and also the seat-

belt does not function correctly,

which could result in serious

injury or death.

. To retrieve the seat position,

make sure the hands, feet or

luggage of rear seat passengers

are clear of the seat adjusting

mechanism.

. When any trouble or malfunction

occurs during the retrieval of the

seat position, stop the retrieval of

the seat position using the con-

trol switch for man ual adjust-

ment.

1. Shift the shift lever in the “P” position

(AT models) or apply the parking brake

(MT models).

2. Press the desired button “1” or “2”.

3. The chirp sounds once and the seat

moves to the registered position.

4. When the seat moves to the registered

position, the chirp sounds twice.

WARNING

. Be sure to press the registered

button of your seat position to

retrieve the seat position. If the

seat position is not the optimum,

an incorrect driving position dis-

turbs driving and also the seat-

belt does not function correctly,

which could result in serious

Black plate (33,1)

北米Model "A2440BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 5/ 7

injury or death.

. To retrieve the seat position,

mak e sure the hands, feet or

luggage of rear seat passengers

are clear of the seat adjusting

mechanism.

NOTE

. If a new position is registered for the

same button, the previous seat posi-

tion is deleted.

. If the battery is disconnected, the

registered seat position is not deleted.

& Head restraint adjustment

To raise the head restraint, pull it up. To

lower it, push the head restraint down

while pressing the release button on the

top of the seatback.

The head restraint should be adjusted so

that the center of the head restraint is

closest to the top of the occupant’s ears.

WARNING

Never drive the vehicle with the

head restraints removed because

they are designed to reduce the risk

of serious neck injury in the event

that the vehicle is struck from the

rear.

& Active head restraint

The f ront se ats o f you r vehi cle a re

equipped with active head restraints. They

automatically tilt forward slightly in the

event the vehicle is struck from the rear,

decreasing the amount of rearward head

movement and thus reducing the risk of

whiplash. For maximum effectiveness the

head restraint should be adjusted so that

the center of the head restraint is closest

to the top of the occupant’s ears.

CAUTION

. Each active head restraint is

effective only when its height is

properly adjusted and the driver/

passenger sits in the correct

position on the seat.

. If your vehicle is involved in a

rear-end collision, have an

authorized SUBARU dealer in-

spect the active head restraints.

. The active head restraints may

not operate in the event the

vehicle experiences only a slight

impact in the rear.

. The active head restraints may be

damaged if they are pushed hard

from behind or subjected to

shock. As a result, they may not

function if the vehicle suffers a

rear impact.

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags 1-7

– CONTINUED –

Black plate (34,1)

北米Model "A2440BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 5/ 7

1-8 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags

& Lumbar support (if equipped)

Pull the lever forward or backward.

Pulling the lever forward will increase the

amount of support for your lower back.

Seat heater (if equipped)

The seat heater is equipped in the front

seats.

The seat heater operates when the igni-

tion switch is either in the “Acc” or “ON”

position.

Each seat heater has four levels of

adjustment. To use the heater in the

right-hand seat, turn the “R” adjustment

knob forward until the “

” mark reaches

the desired position. To activate the heater

in the left-hand seat, turn the “L” adjust-

ment knob forward until the “

” mark

reaches the desired position. Each heater

warms the seat most quickly with the “

”

mark on the adjustment knob in the

furthest-forward position. An indicator light

on the adjustment knob for each seat

heater comes on when that seat heater is

activated.

When the vehicle’s interior is warmed

enough or before you leave the vehicle,

be sure to turn the switch off.

CAUTION

. There is a possibility that people

with delicate skin may suffer

slight burns even at low tempera-

tures if they use the seat heater

for a long period of time. When

using the heater, always be sure

to warn the persons concerned.

. Do not put anything on the seat

which insulates against heat,

such as a blanket, cushion, or

similar items. This may cause the

seat heater to overheat.

NOTE

Use of the seat heater for a long period

of time while the engine is not running

can cause battery discharge.

Black plate (35,1)

北米Model "A2440BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 5/ 7

Rear seats

WARNING

Seatbelts provide maximum re-

straint when the occupant sits well

back and upright in the seat. Do not

put cushions or any other materials

between occupants and seatbacks

or seat cushions. If you do so, the

risk of sliding under the lap belt and

of the lap belt sliding up over the

abdomen will increase, and both can

result in serious internal injury or

death.

WARNING

Never stack luggage or other cargo

higher than the top of the seatback

because it could tumble forward and

injure passengers in the event of a

sudden stop or accident.

& Folding down the rear seat-

back

WARNING

. After returning the rear seat to its

original position, be certain to

place all of the seatbelts and the

tab attached to the seat cushion

above the seat cushion. And

make certain that the shoulder

belts are fully visible.

. Never allow passengers to ride

on the folded rear seatback or in

the cargo area or trunk. Doing so

may result in serious injury or

death.

. Secure skis and other lengthy

items properly to prevent them

from being thrown around inside

the vehicle and causing serious

injury during a sudden stop, a

sudden steering maneuver or a

rapid acceleration.

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags 1-9

– CONTINUED –

Black plate (36,1)

北米Model "A2440BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 5/ 7

1-10 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags

! Sedan models

1) Lock

2) Unlock

3) Release button

Insert the key into the key cylinder on the

seatback, unlock the seatback by turning

the key counterclockwise, and then fold

the seatback down while pushing the

release button.

To return the seatback to its original

position, raise the seatback until it locks

into place and make sure that it is securely

locked.

! Wagon models

Unlock the seatback by pushing the

release button and then fold the seatback

down.

To return the seatback to its original

position, raise the seatback until it locks

into place and make sure that it is securely

locked.

& Head restraint adjustment

WARNING

Never drive the vehicle with the

head restraints remove d because

they are designed to reduce the risk

of serious neck injury in the event

that the vehicle is struck from the

rear.

! Rear windows side seating position

CAUTION

The head restraint is not intended to

be used at the lowest position.

Before sitting on the seat, raise the

head restraint to an appropriate

position depending on your sitting

height.

Black plate (37,1)

北米Model "A2440BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 5/ 7

Sedan

Station wagon

To raise the head restraint, pull it up.

To lower it, push the head restraint down

while pressing the release button on the

top of the seatback.

The head restraint should be adjusted so

that the center of the head restraint is

closest to the top of the occupant’s ears.

When the seats are not occupied, lower

the head restraints to improve rearward

visibility.

! Rear center seating position (Sta-

tion wagon)

CAUTION

The head restraint is not intended to

be used at the l owest position.

Before sitting on the seat, raise the

head restraint to an appropriate

position depending on your sitting

height.

To raise the head restraint, pull it up.

To lower it, push the head restraint down

while pressing the release button on the

top of the seatback.

When the rear center seating position is

occupied, place the head restraint in its

highest position. When the rear center

seating position is not occupied, lower the

head restraint to improve rearward visibi-

lity.

! Rear center seating position (Se-

dan)

The head restraint for the center seating

position of the rear seat cannot be

adjusted.

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags 1-11

Black plate (38,1)

北米Model "A2440BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 5/ 7

1-12 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags

Armrest (if equipped)

Sedan

Station wagon

To lower the armrest, pull on the top edge

of the armrest.

WARNING

To avoid the possibility of serious

injury, passengers must never be

allowed to sit on the center armrest

while the vehicle is in motion.

& Loading long objects (Sedan)

1) Lock

2) Unlock

Folding down the armrest and opening the

seatback panel affords a loading space for

long objects.

To open the seatback panel, unlock with

the key lock and pull the seatback panel

down while pulling the release tab.

WARNING

. Secure long objects properly to

prevent them from shooting for-

ward and causing serious injury

during a sudden stop or sharp

cornering. Tie long objects down

with a rope or something equiva-

lent.

. Avoid loading objects longer

than 6.6 ft (2 m) and heavier than

55 lbs (25 kg). Such objects can

interfere with the driver’s proper

operation of the vehicle, possibly

causing an accident and serious

injury.

Black plate (39,1)

北米Model "A2440BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 5/ 7

NOTE

To protect your belongings in the trunk

from theft, it is recommended that you

lock the seatback panel.

Seatbelts

& Seatbelt safety tips

WARNING

. All persons in the vehicle should

fasten their seatb elts B EFORE

the vehicle starts to move. Other-

wise, the possibility of serious

injury becomes greater in the

event of a sudden stop or acci-

dent.

. All belts should fit snugly in order

to provide full restraint. Loose

fitting belts are not as effective in

preventing or reducing injury.

. E ach seatbelt is designed to

support only one person. Never

use a single belt for two or more

persons – even children. Other-

wise, in an accident, serious

injury or death could result.

. Replace all seatbelt assemblies

including retractors and attach-

ing hardware worn by occupants

of a vehicle that has been in a

serious accident. The entire as-

sembly should be replaced even

if damage is not obvious.

. Put children aged 12 and under in

the rear seat properly restrained

at all times. The SRS airbag

deploys with considerable speed

and force and can injure or even

kill children, especially if they are

12 years of age and under and

are not restrained or improperly

restrained. Because children are

lighter and weaker than adults,

their risk of being injured from

deployment is greater. C onse-

quently, we strongly recommend

that ALL children (including

those in child seats and those

that have outgrown child re-

straint devices) sit in the REAR

seat properly restrained at all

times in a child restraint device

or in a seatbelt, whichever is

appropriate for the child’s height

and weight.

Secure ALL types of child re-

straint devices (including for-

ward facing child seats) in the

REAR seats at all times.

NEVER INSTALL A REARWARD

FACING CHILD SEAT IN THE

FRONT SEAT. DOING SO RISKS

SERIOUS INJURY OR DEATH TO

THE CHILD BY PLACING THE

CHILD’S HEAD TOO CLOSE TO

THE SRS AIRBAG.

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags 1-13

– CONTINUED –

Black plate (40,1)

北米Model "A2440BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 5/ 7

1-14 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags

According to accident statistics,

children are safer when properly

restrained in the rear seating

positions than in the front seat-

ing positions. For instructions

and precautions concerning the

child restraint system, refer to

the “Child restraint systems”

section in this chapter.

Your vehicle is equipped with a crash

sensing and diagnostic module, which will

record the use of the seatbelt(s) by the

driver and front passenger when any of

the SRS frontal, side and curtain airbags

deploys.

! Infants or small children

Use a child restraint system that is

suitable for your vehicle. Refer to the

“Child restraint systems” section in this

chapter.

! Children

If a child is too big for a child restraint

system, the child should sit in the rear seat

and be restrained using the seatbelts.

According to accident statistics, children

are safer when properly restrained in the

rear seating positions than in the front

seating positions. Never allow a child to

stand up or kneel on the seat.

If the shoulder portion of the belt crosses

the face or neck, adjust the shoulder belt

anchor height (window-side seating posi-

tions only) and then if necessary move the

child closer to the belt buckle to help

provide a good shoulder belt fit. Care must

be taken to securely place the lap belt as

low as possible on the hips and not on the

child’s waist. If the shoulder portion of the

belt cannot be properly positioned, a child

restraint system should be used. Never

place the shoulder belt under the child’s

arm or behind the child’s back.

! Expectant mothers

Expectant mothers also need to use the

seatbelts. They should consult their doctor

for specific recommendations. The lap belt

should be worn securely and as low as

possible over the hips, not over the waist.

& Emergency Locking Retrac-

tor (ELR)

The driver’s seatbelt has an Emergency

Locking Retractor (ELR).

The emergency locking retractor allows

normal body movement but the retractor

locks automatically during a sudden stop,

impact or if you pull the belt very quickly

out of the retractor.

& Automatic/Emergency Lock-

ing Retractor (A/ELR)

Each passenger’s seatbelt has an Auto-

matic/Emergency Locking Retractor (A/

ELR). The Automatic/Emergency Locking

Retractor normally functions as an Emer-

gency Locking Retractor (ELR). The A/

ELR has an additional locking mode

“Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)

mode” intended to secure a child restraint

system. When the seatbelt is once drawn

out completely and is then retracted even

slightly, the retractor locks the seatbelt in

that position and the seatbelt cannot be

extended. As the belt is rewinding, clicks

will be heard which indicate the retractor

functions as ALR. When the seatbelt is

retracted fully, ALR mode is released.

When securing a child restraint system on

the passengers’ seats, the seatbelt must

be changed over to the Automatic Locking

Black plate (41,1)

北米Model "A2440BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 5/ 7

Retractor (ALR) mode.

When the child restraint system is re-

moved, make sure that the retractor is

restored to the Emergency Locking Re-

tractor (ELR) function by allowing the

seatbelt to retract fully.

For instructions on how to convert the

retractor to the ALR mode and restore it to

the ELR mode, refer to the “Child restraint

systems” section in this chapter.

& Seatbelt warning light

and chime

Your vehicle is equipped with a seatbelt

warning device at the driver’s and front

passenger’s seat, as required by current

safety standards.

With the ignition switch turned to the “ON”

position, this device reminds the driver

and front passenger to fasten their seat-

belts by illuminating the warning lights in

the locations indicated in the following

illustration and sounding a chime.

Driver’s warning light (Vehicle with SI-

DRIVE)

Driver’s warning light (Vehicle without SI-

DRIVE)

Front passenger’s warning light

! Operation

If the driver and/or front passenger have/

has not yet fastened the seatbelt(s) when

the ignition switch is turned to the “ON”

position, the seatbelt warning light(s) will

flash for 6 seconds, to warn that the

seatbelt(s) is/are unfastened. If the dri-

ver’s seatbelt is not fastened, a chime will

also sound simultaneously.

NOTE

. If the driver’s and/or front passen-

ger’s seatbelt(s) are/is still not fastened

6 seconds later, the seatbelt warning

device operates as follows according

to the vehicle speed.

. At speeds lower than approxi-

mately 9 mph (15 km/h)

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags 1-15

– CONTINUED –

Black plate (42,1)

北米Model "A2440BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 5/ 7

1-16 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags

The warning light(s) for unfastened

seatbelt(s) will alternate between

steady illumination and flashing at

15-second intervals. The chime will

not sound.

. At speeds higher than approxi-

mately 9 mph (15 km/h)

The warning light(s) for unfastened

seatbelt(s) will alternate between

flashing and steady illumination at

15-second intervals and the chime

will sound while the warning light(s)

is/are flashing.

. It is possible to cancel the warning

operation th at follows the 6-second

warning after turning ON the ignition

switch . When the ignition switch is

turned ON next time, however, the

complete sequence of the warning

operation resumes. For further details

about canceling the warning operation,

please contact your SUBARU dealer.

If there is no passenger on the front

passenger’s seat, the seatbelt warning

device for the front passenger’s seat will

be deactivated. The front passenger’s

occupant detection system monitors

whether or not there is a passenger on

the front passenger’s seat.

Observe the following precautions. Failure

to do so may prevent the device from

functioning correctly or cause the device

to fail.

. Do not install any accessory such as a

table or TV onto the seatback.

. Do not store a heavy load in the

seatback pocket.

. Do not allow the rear seat occupant to

place his/her hands or legs on the front

passenger’s seatback, or allow him/her to

pull the seatback.

. Do not use front seats with their back-

ward-forward position and seatback not

being locked into place securely. If any of

them are not locked securely, adjust them

again. For adjusting procedure, refer to

“Manual seat” in the front seats section in

Chapter 1 in this Owner’s Manual. (Mod-

els equipped with manual seats only)

If the seatbelt warning device for the front

passenger’s seat does not function cor-

rectly (e.g., it is activated even when the

front passenger’s seat is empty or it is

deactivated even when the front passen-

ger has not fastened his/her seatbelt),

take the following actions.

. Ensure that no article is placed on the

seat other than a child restraint system

and the child occupant.

. Ensure that there is no article left in the

seatback pocket.

. Ensure that the backward-forward po-

sition and seatback of front passenger’s

seat are locked into place securely by

moving the seat back and forth. (Models

equipped with manual seats only)

If the seatbelt warning device for front

passenger’s seat still does not function

correctly after taking relevant corrective

actions described above, immediately

contact your SUBARU dealer for an

inspection.

& Fastening the seatbelt

WARNING

. Never use a belt that is twisted or

reversed. In an accident, this can

increase the risk or severity of

injury.

. Keep the lap belt as low as

possible on your hips. In a colli-

sion, this spreads the force of the

lap belt over stronger hip bones

instead of a cross the weaker

abdomen.

. Seatbelts provide maximum re-

straint when the occupant sits

well back and upright in the seat.

To reduce the ri sk of sliding

under the seatbelt in a collision,

the front seatbacks should be

always used in the upright posi-

Black plate (43,1)

北米Model "A2440BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 5/ 7

tion while the vehicle is running.

If the fr ont seatbacks are not

used in the upright position in a

collision, the risk of sliding under

the lap belt and of the lap belt

sliding up over the abdomen will

increase, and both can result in

serious internal injury or death.

. Do not put cushions or any other

materials between occupants

and seatbacks or seat cushions.

If you do so, the risk of sliding

under the lap belt and of the lap

belt sliding up over the abdomen

will increase, and both can result

in serious i nternal injury or

death.

WARNING

Never place the shoulder belt under

the arm or behind the back. If an

accident occurs, this can increase

the risk or severity of injury.

CAUTION

Metallic parts of the seatbelt can

become very hot in a vehicle that

has been closed up in sunny weath-

er; they could burn an occupant. Do

not touch such hot parts until they

cool.

! Front seatbelts

1. Adjust the seat position:

Driver’s seat: Adjust the seatback to the

upright position. Move the seat as far from

the steering wheel as practical while still

maintaining full vehicle control.

Front passenger’s seat: Adjust the seat-

back to the upright position. Move the seat

as far back as possible.

2. Sit well back in the seat.

3. Pick up the tongue plate and pull the

belt out slowly. Do not let it get twisted. If

the belt stops before reaching the buckle,

return the belt slightly and pull it out more

slowly. If the belt still cannot be unlocked,

let the belt retract slightly after giving it a

strong pull, then pull it out slowly again.

4. Insert the tongue plate into the buckle

until you hear a click.

5. To make the lap part tight, pull up on

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags 1-17

– CONTINUED –

Black plate (44,1)

北米Model "A2440BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 5/ 7

1-18 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags

the shoulder belt.

6. Place the lap belt as low as possible

on your hips, not on your waist.

! Adjusting the front seat shoulder

belt anchor height

The shoulder belt anchor height should be

adjusted to the position best suited for the

driver/front passenger. To lower the an-

chor height, push the release button and

slide the anchor down. To raise the anchor

height, slide the anchor up. Pull down on

the anchor to make sure that it is locked in

place.

Always adjust the anchor height so that

the shoulder belt passes over the middle

of the shoulder without touching the neck.

WARNING

When wearing the seatbelts, make

sure the shoulder portion of th e

webbing does not pass over your

neck. If it does, adjust the seatbelt

anchor to a lower position. Placing

the shoulder belt over the neck may

result in neck injury during sudden

braking or in a collision.

! Unfastening the seatbelt

Push the button on the buckle.

Before closing the door, make sure that

the belts are retracted properly to avoid

catching the belt webbing in the door.

! Rear seatbelts (except rear center

seatbelt)

1. Sit well back in the seat.

2. Pick up the tongue plate and pull the

belt out slowly. Do not let it get twisted. If

the belt stops before reaching the buckle,

return the belt slightly and pull it out more

slowly. If the belt still cannot be unlocked,

let the belt retract slightly after giving a

strong pull on it, then pull it out slowly

again.

3. Insert the tongue plate into the buckle

until you hear a click.

Black plate (45,1)

北米Model "A2440BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 5/ 7

4. To make the lap part tight, pull up on

the shoulder belt.

5. Place the lap belt as low as possible

on your hips, not on your waist.

! Unfastening the seatbelt

Push the button on the buckle.

Before closing the door, make sure that

the belts are retracted properly to avoid

catching the belt webbing in the door.

! Rear center seatbelt

1) Center seatbelt tongue plate

2) Connector (tongue)

3) Connector (buckle)

4) Center seatbelt buckle

WARNING

Fastening the seatbelt with the web-

bing twisted can increase the risk or

severity of injury in an accident.

When fastening the belt after it is

pulled out from the retractor, espe-

cially when inserting the connec-

tor’s tongue plate into the mating

buckle (on right-hand side), always

check that the webbing is not

twisted.

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags 1-19

– CONTINUED –

Black plate (46,1)

北米Model "A2440BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 5/ 7

1-20 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags

WARNING

Be sure to fasten both tongue plates

to the respective buckles. If the

seatbelt is used only as a shoulder

belt (with the connector’s tongue

plate not fastened to the connec-

tor’s buckle on the right-hand side),

it cannot properly restrain the wear-

er in position in an accident, possi-

bly resulting in serious injury or

death.

Sedan models

Rear center seatbelt is stowed in the

recess on the rear shelf behind the rear

seat head restraint.

Wagon models

Rear center seatbelt is stowed in the

recess of the ceiling.

1. Remove the connector (tongue) plate

from the slot in the recess by pulling the

connector (tongue) plate.

Sedan models

Wagon models

Black plate (47,1)

北米Model "A2440BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 5/ 7

2. Pull out the seatbelt slowly from the

retractor.

3. After confirming that the webbing is not

twisted, insert the connector (tongue)

attached at the webbing end into the

buckle on the right-hand side until a click

is heard. If the belt stops before reaching

the buckle, return the belt slightly and pull

it out more slowly. If the belt still cannot be

unlocked, let the belt retract slightly after

giving it a strong pull, then pull it out slowly

again.

4. After fastening the seatbelt, make sure

that the “

” mark on the conn ector

(tongue) and the “

” mark on the buckle

face outwards.

5. Insert the center seatbelt tongue plate

into the center seatbelt buckle marked

“CENTER” on the left-hand side until it

clicks.

6. To make the lap part tight, pull up on

the shoulder belt. And place the lap belt as

low as possible on your hips, not on your

waist.

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags 1-21

– CONTINUED –

Black plate (48,1)

北米Model "A2440BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 5/ 7

1-22 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags

! Unfastening the seatbelt

Push the release button of the center

seatbelt buckle (on the left-hand side) to

unfasten the seatbelt.

1. Insert a key or other hard pointed

object into the slot in the connector

(buckle) on the right-hand side and push

it in, and the connector (tongue) plate will

disconnect from the buckle.

Sedan models

Wagon models

2. Allow the retractor to roll up the belt.

You should hold the webbing end and

guide it back into the retractor while it is

rolling up. Neatly store the tongue plate in

the recess and then insert the connector

(tongue) plate into the slot.

Black plate (49,1)

北米Model "A2440BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 5/ 7

Sedan models

Wagon models

CAUTION

. Do not allow the retractor to roll

up the seatbelt too quickly.

Otherwise, the metal tongue

plates may hit against the trim,

resulting in damaged trim.

. Have the seatbelt fully rolled up

so that the to ngue plates are

neatly stored. A hanging tongue

plate can swing and hit against

the trim during driving, causing

damage to the trim.

& Seatbelt maintenance

To clean the seatbelts, use a mild soap

and lukewarm water. Never bleach or dye

the belts because this could seriously

affect their strength.

Inspect the seatbelts and attachments

including the webbing and all hardware

periodically for cracks, cuts, gashes,

tears, damage, loose bolts or worn areas.

Replace the seatbelts even if only minor

damage is found.

CAUTION

. Keep the belts free of polishes,

oils, chemicals and particularly

battery acid.

. Never attempt to make modifica-

tions or changes that will prevent

the seatbelt from operating prop-

erly.

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags 1-23

Black plate (50,1)

北米Model "A2440BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 5/ 7

1-24 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags

Front seatbelt pretensioners

The driver’s and front passenger’s seat-

belts have a seatbelt pretensioner. The

seatbelt pretensioners are designed to be

activated in the event of an accident

involving a moderate to severe frontal

collision.

The pretensioner sensor also serves as a

SRS frontal airbag sensor. If the sensor

detects a certain predetermined amount of

force during a frontal collision, the front

seatbelt is quickly drawn back in by the

retractor to take up the slack so that the

belt more effectively restrains the front

seat occupant.

When a seatbelt pretensioner is activated,

an operating noise will be heard and a

small amount of smoke will be released.

These occurrences are normal and not

harmful. This smoke does not indicate a

fire in the vehicle.

Once the seatbelt pretensioner has been

activated, the seatbelt retractor remains

locked. Consequently, the seatbelt can not

be pulled out and retracted and therefore

must be replaced.

NOTE

. Seatbelt pretensioners are not de-

signed to activate in minor frontal

impacts, in side or rear impacts or in

roll-over accidents.

. The driver’s seat and passenger’s

seat pretensioners and frontal airbag

operate simultaneously.

. Pretensioners are designed to func-

tion on a one-time-only basis. In the

event that a pretensioner is activated,

both the driver’s and front passenger’s

seatbelt retractor assemblies must be

replaced and only by an authorized

SUBARU dealer. When replacing seat-

belt retractor assemblie s, use only

genuine SUBARU parts.

. If either front seatbelt does not

retract or cannot be pulled out due to

a malfunction or activation of the

pretensioner, contact your SUBARU

dealer as soon as possible.

. If the front seatbelt retractor assem-

bly or surrounding area has been

damaged, contact your SUBARU dealer

as soon as possible.

. When you sell your vehicle, we urge

you to explain to the buyer that it has

seatbelt pretensioners by alerting him

to the contents of this section.

WARNING

. To obtain maximum protection,

occupants should sit in an up-

right position with their seatbelts

properly fastened. Refer to the

“Seatbelts” section in this chap-

ter.

. Do not modify, remove or strike

the front seatbelt retractor as-

semblies or surrounding area.

This could result in accidental

activation of the seatbelt preten-

sioners or could make the sys-

tem inoperative, possibly result-

ing in serious injury. Seatbelt

pretensioners have no user-ser-

viceable parts. For required ser-

vicing of front seatbelt retractors

equipped with seatbelt preten-

sioners, see your nearest

SUBARU dealer.

. When discarding front seatbelt

Black plate (51,1)

北米Model "A2440BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 5/ 7

retractor assemblies or scrap-

ping the entire vehicle due to

collision damage or for other

reasons, consult your SUBARU

dealer.

& System monitors

SRS airbag system warning light (Vehicle

with SI-DRIVE)

SRS airbag system warning light (Vehicle

without SI-DRIVE)

A diagnostic system continually monitors

the readiness of the seatbelt pretensioner

while the vehicle is being driven. The

seatbelt pretensioners share the control

module with the airbag system. Therefore,

if any malfunction occurs in a seatbelt

pretensioner, the SRS airbag system

warning light will illuminate. The SRS

airbag system warning light wi ll show

normal system operation by lighting for

approximately 6 seconds when the igni-

tion switch is turned to the “ON” position.

The following components are monitored

by the indicator:

. Front sub sensor (Right-hand side)

. Front sub sensor (Left-hand side)

. Airbag control module (including im-

pact sensors)

. Frontal airbag module (Driver’s side)

. Frontal airbag module (Front passen-

ger’s side)

. Side airbag sensor (Center pillar right-

hand side)

. Side airbag sensor (Center pillar left-

hand side)

. Side airbag module (Driver’s side)

. Side airbag module (Front passenger’s

side)

. Curtain airbag sensor (Rear wheel

house right-hand side)

. Curtain airbag sensor (Rear wheel

house left-hand side)

. Curtain airbag module (Right side)

. Curtain airbag module (Left side)

. Satellite safing sensor (Under the rear

center seat)

. Seatbelt pretensioner (Driver’s side)

. Seatbelt pretensioner (Front passen-

ger’s side)

. Seatbelt buckle switch (Front passen-

ger’s side)

. Front passenger’s seatbelt tension

sensor

. Front passenger’s occupant detection

system weight sensor

. Front passenger’s occupant detection

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags 1-25

– CONTINUED –

Black plate (52,1)

北米Model "A2440BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 5/ 7

1-26 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags

control module

. Front passenger’s frontal airbag ON

and OFF indicator

. All related wiring

WARNING

If the warning light exhibits any of

the following conditions, there may

be a malfunction in the seatbelt

pretensioners and/or SRS airbag

system. Immediately take your vehi-

cle to your nearest SUBARU dealer

to have the system checked. Unless

checked and properly repaired, the

seatbelt pretensioners and/or SRS

airbags will operate improperly (e.g.

SRS airbags may inflate in a very

minor collision or not inflate in a

severe collision), which may in-

crease the risk of injury.

. Flashing or flickering of the warn-

ing light

. No illumination of the warning

light when the ignition switch is

first turned to the “ON” position

. Continuous illumination of the

warning light

. Illumination of the warning light

while driving

& System servicing

WARNING

. When discarding a seatbelt re-

tractor assembly or scrapping

the entire vehicle damaged by a

collision, consult your SUBARU

dealer.

. Tampering with or disconnecting

the system’s wiring could result

in accidental activation of the

seatbelt pretensioner and/or air-

bag or could make the system

inoperative, which may result in

serious injury. The wiring har-

nesses of the seatbelt preten-

sioner and SRS airbag systems

are covered with yellow insula-

tion and the connectors of the

system are yellow for easy iden-

tification. Do not use electrical

test e quipment on any circuit

related to the seatbelt preten-

sioner and airbag systems. For

required servicing of the seatbelt

pretensi oner, see yo ur ne arest

SUBARU dealer.

CAUTION

The front sub sensors are located in

both front fenders and the airbag

control module including the impact

sensors is located under the center

console. If you need service or

repair in those areas or near the

front seatbelt retractors, have an

authorized SUBARU dealer perform

the work.

NOTE

If the front part of the vehicle is

damaged in an accident to the extent

that the seatbelt pretensioner does not

operate, contact your SUBARU dealer

as soon as possible.

Black plate (53,1)

北米Model "A2440BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 5/ 7

& Precautions against vehicle

modification

Always consult your SUBARU dealer if

you want to install any accessory parts to

your vehicle.

CAUTION

Do not perform any of the following

modifications. Such modifications

can interfere with proper operation

of the seatbelt pretensioners.

. Attachment of any equi pment

(bush bar, winches, snow plow,

skid plate, etc.) other than genu-

ine SUBARU accessory parts to

the front end.

. Modification of the suspension

system or front end structure.

. Installation of a tire of different

size and construction from the

tires specified on the vehicle

placard attached to the door

pillar or specified for individual

vehicle models in this Owner’s

Manual.

Child restraint systems

Infants and small children should always

be placed in an infant or child restraint

system in the rear seat while riding in the

vehicle. You should use an infant or child

restraint system that meets Federal Motor

Vehicle Safety Standards or Canada

Motor Vehicle Safety Standards, is com-

patible with your vehicle and is appro-

priate for the child’s age and size. All child

restraint systems are designed to be

secured in vehicle seats by lap belts or

the lap belt portion of a lap/shoulder belt

(except those covered under the section in

this manual, entitled “Installation of child

restraint systems by use of lower and

tether anchorages (LATCH)”).

Children could be endangered in an

accident if their child restraints are not

properly secured in the vehicle. When

installing the child restraint system, care-

fully follow the manufacturer’s instructions.

According to accident statistics, children

are safer when properly restrained in the

rear seating positions than in the front

seating positions.

All U.S. states and Canadian provinces

require that infants and small children be

restrained in an approved child restraint

system at all times while the vehicle is

moving.

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags 1-27

– CONTINUED –

Black plate (54,1)

北米Model "A2440BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 5/ 7

1-28 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags

WARNING

Never let a passenger hold a child

on his or her lap while the vehicle is

moving. The passenger cannot pro-

tect the child from injury in a colli-

sion, because the child will be

caught between the passenger and

objects inside the vehicle. Addition-

ally, holding a child in your lap or

arms in the front seat exposes that

child to another serious danger.

Since the SRS airbag deploys with

considerable speed and force, the

child could be injured or even killed.

WARNING

Children s hould b e properl y re-

strained at all times. Never allow a

child to stand up, or to kneel on any

seat. Unrestrained children will be

thrown forward during sudden stop

or in an accident and can be injured

seriously.

Additionally, children standing up or

kneeling on or in front of the front

seat are exposed another serious

danger. Since the SRS airbag de-

ploys with considerable speed and

force, the child could be injured or

even killed.

& Where to place a child re-

straint system

The following are SUBARU’s recommen-

dations on where to place a child restraint

system in your vehicle.

A: Front passenger’s seat

You should not install a child restraint

system (including a booster seat) due to

the hazard to children posed by the

passenger’s airbag.

B: Rear seat, window-side seating

positions

Recommended positions for all types of

child restraint systems.

In these positions, Automatic/Emergency

Locking Retractor (A/ELR) seatbelts and

lower anchorages (bars) are provided for

Black plate (55,1)

北米Model "A2440BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 5/ 7

installing a child restraint system.

Some types of child restraints might not be

able to be secured firmly due to projection

of the seat cushion.

In this seating position, you should use

only a child restraint system that has a

bottom base that fits snugly against the

contours of the seat cushion and can be

securely retained using the seatbelt.

C: Rear seat, center seating position

Installing a child restraint system is not

recommended, although the A/ELR seat-

belt and an upper anchorage (tether

anchorage) are provided in this position.

Some types of child restraints might not be

able to be secured firmly due to projection

of the seat cushion.

In this seating position, you should use

only a child restraint system that has a

bottom base that fits snugly against the

contours of the seat cushion and can be

securely retained using the seatbelt.

WARNING

Put children aged 12 and under in

the rear seat properly restrained at

all times. The SRS airbag deploys

with considerable speed and force

and can injure or even kill children,

especially if they are 12 years of age

and under and are not restrained or

improperly restrained. Because chil-

dren are lighter and weaker than

adults, their risk of being injured

from deployment is greater.

For that reason, be sure to secure

ALL types of child restraint devices

(including forward facing child

seats) in the REAR seats at all times.

You should choose a restraint de-

vice which is appropriate for the

child’s age, height and weight. Ac-

cording to accident statistics, chil-

dren are safer when properly re-

strained in the rear seating posi-

tions than in the front seating posi-

tions.

WARNING

SINCE YOUR VEHICLE IS

EQUIPPED WITH A PASSENGER’S

SRS AIRBAG, DO NOT INSTALL A

REARWARD FACING CHILD

SAFETY SEAT IN THE FRONT PAS-

SENGER’S SEAT. DOING SO RISKS

SERIOUS INJURY OR DEATH TO

THE CHILD BY PLACING THE

CHILD’S H EAD TOO CLOSE TO

THE SRS AIRBAG.

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags 1-29

– CONTINUED –

Black plate (56,1)

北米Model "A2440BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 5/ 7

1-30 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags

& Choosing a child restraint

system

Choose a child restraint system that is

appropriate for the child’s age and size

(weight and height) in order to provide the

child with proper protecti on. The child

restraint system should meet all applic-

able requirements of Federal Motor Vehi-

cle Safety Standards for United States or

Canada Motor Vehicle Safety Standards

for Canada. It can be identified by looking

for the label on the child restraint system

or the manufacture’s statement of com-

pliance in the document attached to the

system. Also it is important for you to

make sure that the child restraint system

is compatible with the vehicle in which it

will be used.

& Installing child restraint sys-

tems with A/ELR seatbelt

WARNING

. Child restraint systems and seat-

belts can become hot in a vehicle

that has been closed up in sunny

weather; they could burn a small

child. Check the child restraint

system before you place a child

in it.

. Do not leave an unsecured child

restraint system in your vehicle.

Unsecured child restraint sys-

tems can be thrown around in-

side of the vehicle in a sudden

stop, turn or accident; they can

strike and injure vehicle occu-

pants as well as result in serious

injuries or death to the child.

CAUTION

When you install a child restraint

system, follow the manufacturer’s

instructions supplied with it. After

installing the child restraint system,

check to e nsure that it is held

securely in position. If it is not held

tight and secure, the danger of your

child suffering personal injury in the

event of an accident may be in-

creased.

! Installing a rearward facing child

restraint

1. Place the child restraint system in the

rear seating position.

2. Run the lap and shoulder belt through

Black plate (57,1)

北米Model "A2440BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 5/ 7

or around the child restraint system

following the instructions provided by its

manufacturer.

3. Insert the tongue plate into the buckle

until you hear a click.

4. Take up the slack in the lap belt.

5. Pull out the seatbelt fully from the

retractor to change the retractor over from

the Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR)

to the Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)

function. Then, allow the belt to rewind

into the retractor. As the belt is rewinding,

clicks will be heard which indicate the

retractor functions as ALR.

6. Push and pull the child restraint

system forward and from side to side to

check if it is firmly secured.

Sometimes a child restraint can be more

firmly secured by pushing it down into the

seat cushion and then tightening the

seatbelt.

7. Pull at the shoulder portion of the belt

to confirm that it cannot be pulled out (ALR

properly functioning).

8. To remove the child restraint system,

press the release button on the seatbelt

buckle and allow the belt to retract

completely. The belt will return to the

ELR mode.

WARNING

NEVER INSTALL A REARWARD FA-

CING CHILD SEAT IN THE FRONT

PASSENGER’SSEAT.DOINGSO

RISKS SERIOUS INJURY OR DEATH

TO THE CHILD BY PLACING THE

CHILD’S HEAD TOO CLOSE TO THE

SRS AIRBAG.

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags 1-31

– CONTINUED –

Black plate (58,1)

北米Model "A2440BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 5/ 7

1-32 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags

NOTE

When the child restraint system is no

longer in use, remove it and restore the

ELR function of the retractor. That

function is restored by retracting the

seatbelt fully.

! Installing forward facing child re-

straint

1. Place the child restraint system in the

seating position.

2. Run the lap and shoulder belt through

or around the child restraint system

following the instructions provided by its

manufacturer.

3. Insert the tongue plate into the buckle

until you hear a click.

4. Take up the slack in the lap belt.

5. Pull out the seatbelt fully from the

retractor to change the retractor over from

the Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR)

to the Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)

function. Then, allow the belt to rewind

into the retractor. As the belt is rewinding,

clicks will be heard which indicate the

retractor functions as ALR.

6. Before having a child sit in the child

restraint system, move it back and forth

and right and left to check if it is firmly

secured. Sometimes a child restraint can

be more firmly secured by pushing it down

into the seat cushion and then tightening

the seatbelt.

7. Pull at the shoulder portion of the belt

to confirm that it cannot be pulled out (ALR

properly functioning).

Black plate (59,1)

北米Model "A2440BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 5/ 7

Sedan

Station wagon

8. If the child restraint system requires a

top tether, latch the hook onto the top

tether anchor and tighten the top tether.

Refer to the “Top tether anchorages” for

additional instructions.

9. To remove the child restraint system,

press the release button on the seatbelt

buckle and allow the belt to retract

completely. The belt will return to the

ELR mode.

NOTE

When the child restraint system is no

longer in use, remove it and restore the

ELR f unction of the retractor. That

function is restored by allowing the

seatbelt to retract fully.

& Installing a booster seat

WARNING

. Child restraint systems and seat-

belts can become hot in a vehicle

that has been closed up in sunny

weather; they could burn a small

child. Check the child restraint

system before you place a child

in it.

. Do not leave an unsecured child

restraint system in your vehicle.

Unsecured child restraint sys-

tems can be thrown around in-

side of the vehicle in a sudden

stop, turn or accident; they can

strike and injure vehicle occu-

pants as well as result in serious

injuries or death to the child.

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags 1-33

– CONTINUED –

Black plate (60,1)

北米Model "A2440BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 5/ 7

1-34 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags

CAUTION

When you install a child restraint

system, follow the manufacturer’s

instructions supplied with it. After

installing the child restraint system,

check to ensure that it is held

securely in position. If it is not held

tight and secure, the danger of your

child suffering personal injury in the

event of an accident may be in-

creased.

1. Place the booster seat in the rear

seating position and sit the child on it. The

child should sit well back on the booster

seat.

2. Run the lap and shoulder belt through

or around the booster seat and the child

following the instructions provided by its

manufacturer.

3. Insert the tongue plate into the buckle

until you hear a click. Take care not to

twist the seatbelt.

Make sure the shoulder belt is positioned

across the center of child’s shoulder and

that the lap belt is positioned as low as

possible on the child’s hips.

4. To remove the booster seat, press the

release button on the seatbelt buckle and

allow the belt to retract.

WARNING

. Never use a belt that is twisted or

reversed. In an accident, this can

increase the risk or severity of

injury to the child.

. Never place the shoulder belt

under the child’s arm or behind

the child’s back. If an accident

occurs, this can increase the risk

or severity of injury to the child.

. The seatbelt should fit snugly in

order to provide full restraint.

Loose fitting belts are not as

effective in preventing or redu-

cing injury.

. Place the lap belt as low as

possible on the child’s hips. A

high-positioned lap belt will in-

crease the risk of sliding under

the lap belt and of the lap belt

sliding up over the abdomen, and

both can result in serious inter-

nal injury or death.

. Make sure the shoulder belt is

positioned across the center of

child’s shoulder. Placing the

shoulder belt over the neck may

result in neck injury during sud-

den braking or in a collision.

Black plate (61,1)

北米Model "A2440BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 5/ 7

& Installation of child restraint

systems by use of lower and

tether anchorages (LATCH)

WARNING

. Child restraint systems and seat-

belts can become hot in a vehicle

that has been closed up in sunny

weather; they could burn a small

child. Check the child restraint

system before you place a child

in it.

. Do not leave an unsecured child

restraint system in your vehicle.

Unsecured child restraint sys-

tems can be thrown around in-

side of the vehicle in a sudden

stop, turn or accident; they can

strike and injure vehicle occu-

pants as well as result in serious

injuries or death to the child.

CAUTION

When you install a child restraint

system, follow the manufacturer’s

instructions supplied with it. After

installing the child restraint system,

check to ensure that it is held

securely in position. If it is not held

tight and secure, the danger of your

child suffering personal injury in the

event of an accident may be in-

creased.

Some types of child restraint systems can

be installed on the rear seat of your

vehicle without use of the seatbelts. Such

child restraint systems are secured to the

dedicated anchorages provided on the

vehicle body.

The lower and tether anch orages are

sometimes referred to as t he LATCH

system (Lower Anchors and Tethers for

CHildren).

Your vehicle is equipped with four lower

anchorages (bars) and three upper an-

chorages (tether anchorages) for accom-

modating such child restraint systems.

The lower anchorages (bars) are used for

installing a child restraint system only on

the rear seat window-side seating posi-

tions. For each window-side seating posi-

tion, two lower anchorages are provided.

Each lower anchorage is located behind

the cover of seatback bottom.

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags 1-35

– CONTINUED –

Black plate (62,1)

北米Model "A2440BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 5/ 7

1-36 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags

Sedan

Station wagon

The tether anchorages (upper an-

chorages) are provided for all the seating

positions (center and both window-side

ones) of the rear seat.

You will find marks “ ” at the bottom of the

rear seat seatbacks. These marks indicate

the positions of the lower anchorages

(bars).

Each lower anchorage is located behind

the cover of seatback bottom.

CAUTION

When you install a child restraint

system, follow the manufacturer’s

instructions supplied with it. After

installing the child restraint system,

check to ensure that it is held

securely in position. If it is not held

tight and secure, the danger of your

child suffering personal injury in the

event of an accident may be in-

creased.

Peel off the anchorage cover from the

selected side of the rear seatback to

expose the anchorages (bars) to be used

for installation of the child restraint system.

1. While following the instructions sup-

plied by the child restraint system manu-

Black plate (63,1)

北米Model "A2440BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 5/ 7

facturer, connect the lower hooks onto the

lower anchorages located at “

” marks on

the bottom of the rear seatback. When the

hooks are connected, make sure the

adjacent seatbelts are not caught.

2. If your child restraint system is of a

flexible attachment type (which uses

tether belts to connect the child restraint

system properly to the lower anchorages),

while pushing the child restraint into the

seat cushion, pull both left and right lower

tether belts up to secure the child restraint

system firmly by taking up the slack in the

belt.

3. Connect the top tether hook to the

tether anchorage and firmly tighten the

tether. For information on how to set the

top tether, read the following “Top tether

anchorages”.

4. Before seating a child in the child

restraint system, try to move seat back

and forth and left and right to verify that it

is held securely in position.

5. To remove the child restraint system,

follow the reverse procedures of installa-

tion.

If you have any question concerning this

type of child restraint system, ask your

SUBARU dealer.

& Top tether anchorages

Your vehicle is equipped with three top

tether anchorages so that a child restraint

system having a top tether can be

installed in the rear seat. When installing

a child restraint system using top tether,

proceed as follows, while observing the

instructions by the child restraint system

manufacturer.

Since a top tether can provide additional

stability by offering another connection

between a child restraint system and the

vehicle, we recommend that you use a top

tether whenever one is required or avail-

able.

! Tether anchorage location

! Sedan

Three tether anchorages are installed on

the rear shelf behind the rear seat head

restraint. Open the cover flap to use each

anchorage.

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags 1-37

– CONTINUED –

Black plate (64,1)

北米Model "A2440BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 5/ 7

1-38 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags

! Station wagon

Three tether anchorages, i.e., ones for the

right, center and left positions, are already

installed on the rear edge of the roof.

Open the cover flap to use each ancho-

rage.

! To hook the top tether

! Sedan

1. Remove the head restraint at the

seating position where the child seat has

been installed with the seatbelt or lower

anchorages; lift up the head restraint while

pressing the release button.

Store the head restraint in the trunk. Avoid

placing the head restraint in the passen-

ger compartment to prevent it from being

thrown around in the passenger compart-

ment in a sudden stop or a sharp turn.

2. Open the cover flap s to use the

anchorages.

3. Fasten the top tether hook of the child

restraint system to the appropriate upper

anchorage.

Black plate (65,1)

北米Model "A2440BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 5/ 7

4. Tighten the top tether securely.

CAUTION

Do not route the top tether over the

head restraint. It may happen that

the top tether cannot be fastened

tightly.

When the child restraint system is to

be secured using the top tether,

pass the top tether under the head

restraint between the head restraint

stay posts. If the top tether still

cannot be fastened tightly, remove

the head restraint.

! Station wagon

1. Remove the head restraint at the

seating position where the child restraint

system has been installed with the seat-

belt or lower anchorages; lift up the head

restraint while pressing the release button.

Store the head restraint in the cargo area.

Avoid placing the head restraint in the

passenger compartment to prevent it from

being thrown around in the passenger

compartment in a sudden stop or a sharp

turn.

2. Open the cover flaps to use the

anchorages.

3. Fasten the top tether hook of the child

restraint system to the appropriate upper

anchorage.

4. Tighten the top tether securely.

CAUTION

Always remove the head restraint

when mounting a chi ld restra int

system with a top tether. Otherwise,

it may happen that the top tether

cannot be fastened tightly.

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags 1-39

Black plate (66,1)

北米Model "A2440BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 5/ 7

1-40 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags

*SRS airbag (Supplemental

Restraint System airbag)

*SRS: This stands for supplemental re-

straint system. This name is used be-

cause the airbag system supplements the

vehicle’s seatbelts.

Your vehicle is equipped with a crash

sensing and diagnostic module, which will

record the use of the seatbelt(s) by the

driver and/or front passenger when any of

the SRS frontal, side and curtain airbags

deploys.

& Vehicle with SRS airbags and

lap/shoulder restraints for

driver, front passenger, and

window-side rear passengers

Your vehicle is equipped with a supple-

mental restraint system in addition to a

lap/shoulder belt at each front seating

position and each rear window-side seat-

ing positions. The supplemental restraint

system (SRS) consists of six airbags.

The configurations are as follows:

. Driver’s and front passenger’s frontal

airbags

. Driver’s and front passen ger’s side

airbags

. Curtain airbags (for driver, front pas-

senger, and window-side rear passen-

gers)

These SRS airbags are designed only

as a supplement to the primary protec-

tion provided by the seatbelt.

The system also controls front seatbelt

pretensioners. For operation instructions

and precautions concerning the seatbelt

pretensioner, refer to the “ Front seatbelt

pretensioners” section in this chapter.

WARNING

. To obtain maximum protection in

the event of an accident, the

driver and all passengers in the

vehicle should always wear seat-

belts when the vehicle is moving.

The SRS airbag is designed only

as a supplement to the primary

protection provided by the seat-

belt. It does not do away with the

need to fasten seatbelts. In com-

bination with the seatbelts, it

offers the best combined protec-

tion in case of a serious accident.

Not wearing a seatbelt increases

the chance of severe injury or

death in a crash even when the

vehicle has the SRS airbag.

For instructions and precautions

concerning the seatbelt system,

refer to the “Seatbelts” section in

this chapter.

. Do not sit or lean unnecessarily

close to the SRS airbag. Because

the SRS airbag deploys wi th

considerable speed – faster than

the blink of an eye – and force to

protect in high speed collisions,

the force of an airbag can injure

an occupant whose body is too

close to SRS airbag.

It is also important to wear your

seatbelt to help avoid injuries

that can result when the SRS

airbag contacts an occupant not

in proper position such as one

thrown forward during pre-acci-

dent braking.

Even when properly positioned,

there remains a possibility that

an occupant may suffer minor

injury such as abrasions and

bruises to the face or arms

because of the SRS airbag de-

ployment force.

. The SRS airbags deploy with

considerable speed and force.

Occupants who are out of proper

position when the SRS airbag

deploys could suffer very serious

Black plate (67,1)

北米Model "A2440BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 5/ 7

injuries. Because the SRS airbag

needs enough space for deploy-

ment, the driver should always

sit upright and well back in the

seat as far f rom the steering

wheel as practical while still

maintaining full vehicle control

and the front passenger should

move the seat as far back as

possible and sit upright and well

back in the seat.

. Do not place any objects over or

near the SRS airbag cover or

between you and the SRS airbag.

If the SRS airbag deploys, those

objects could interfere with its

proper operation and could be

propelled inside the vehicle and

cause injury.

WARNING

. Put children aged 12 and under in

the rear seat properly restrained

at all time s. The SRS airbag

deploys with considerable speed

and force and can injure or even

kill children, especially if they are

12 years of age and under and

are not restrained or improperly

restrained. Because children are

lighter and weaker than adults,

their risk of being injured from

deployment is greater.

Consequently, we strongly re-

commend that ALL children (in-

cluding those in child seats and

those that have outgrown child

restraint devices) sit in the REAR

seat properly restrained at all

times in a child restraint device

or in a seatbelt, whichever is

appropriate for the child’s age,

height and weight.

Secure ALL types of child re-

straint devices (including for-

ward facing child seats) in the

REAR seats at all times.

According to accident statistics,

children are safer when properly

restrained in the rear seating

positions than in the front seat-

ing positions.

For instructions and precautions

concerning the child restraint

system, refer to the “Child re-

straint systems” section in this

chapter.

. NEVER INSTALL A REARWARD

FACING CHILD SEAT IN THE

FRONT SEAT. DOING SO RISKS

SERIOUS INJURY OR DEATH TO

THE CHILD BY PLACING THE

CHILD’S HEAD TOO CLOSE TO

THE SRS AIRBAG.

. Never allow a child to stand up,

or to kneel on the front passen-

ger’s seat, or never hold a child

on your lap or in your arms. The

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags 1-41

– CONTINUED –

Black plate (68,1)

北米Model "A2440BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 5/ 7

1-42 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags

SRS airbag deploys with consid-

erable force and can injure or

even kill the child.

CAUTION

. When the SRS airbag deploys,

some smoke will be released.

This smoke could cause breath-

ing problems for people with a

history of asthma or other

breathing trouble. If you or your

passengers have breathing pro-

blems after SRS airbag deploys,

get fresh air promptly.

. A deploying SRS airbag releases

hot gas. Occupants could get

burned if they come into direct

contact with the hot gas.

NOTE

When you sell your vehicle, we urge

you to explain to the buyer that it is

equipped with SRS airbags by alerting

him or her to the applicable section in

this Owner’s Manual.

Black plate (69,1)

北米Model "A2440BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 5/ 7

! Components

Sedan

1) Airbag control module (including impact

sensors)

2) Frontal airbag module (driver’s side)

3) Frontal airbag module (front passenger’s

side)

4) Front sub sensor (left-hand side)

5) Front sub sensor (right-hand side)

6) Side airbag module (driver’s side)

7) Side airbag module (front passenger’s

side)

8) Side airbag sensor (center pillar left-hand

side)

9) Side airbag sensor (center pillar right-

hand side)

10) Airbag wiring (yellow)

11) Seatbelt pretensioner (driver’s side)

12) Seatbelt pretensioner (front passenger’s

side)

13) Curtain airbag sensor (rear wheel house

right-hand side)

14) Curtain airbag sensor (rear wheel house

left-hand side)

15) Curtain airbag module (right side)

16) Curtain airbag module (left side)

17) Seatbelt buckle switch (front passenger’s

side)

18) Front passenger’s seatbelt tension sen-

sor

19) Front passe nger’s occupant detection

system weight sensor

20) Front passe nger’s occupant detection

control module

21) Front passenger’s frontal airbag ON and

OFF indicator

22) SRS airbag system warning light

23) Satellite safing sensor (under the rear

center seat)

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags

1-43

– CONTINUED –

Black plate (70,1)

北米Model "A2440BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 5/ 7

1-44 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags

Station wagon

1) Airbag control module (including impact

sensors)

2) Frontal airbag module (driver’s side)

3) Frontal airbag module (front passenger’s

side)

4) Front sub sensor (left-hand side)

5) Front sub sensor (right-hand side)

6) Side airbag module (driver’s side)

7) Side airbag module (front passenger’s

side)

8) Side airbag sensor (center pillar left-hand

side)

9) Side airbag sensor (center pillar right-

hand side)

10) Airbag wiring (yellow)

11) Seatbelt pretensioner (driver’s side)

12) Seatbelt pretensioner (front passenger’s

side)

13) Curtain airbag sensor (rear wheel house

right-hand side)

14) Curtain airbag sensor (rear wheel house

left-hand side)

15) Curtain airbag module (right side)

16) Curtain airbag module (left side)

17) Seatbelt buckle switch (front passenger’s

side)

18) Front passenger’s seatbelt tension sen-

sor

19) Front passe nger’s occupant detection

system weight sensor

20) Front passe nger’s occupant detection

control module

21) Front passenger’s frontal airbag ON and

OFF indicator

22) SRS airbag system warning light

23) Satellite safing sensor (under the rear

center seat)

Black plate (71,1)

北米Model "A2440BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 5/ 7

& Subaru advanced frontal air-

bag system

Your vehicle is equipped with a Subaru

advanced frontal airbag system that com-

plies with the new advanced frontal airbag

requirements i n the amended Federal

Motor Vehicle Safety Standard (FMVSS)

No. 208.

The Subaru advanced frontal airbag sys-

tem automatically determines the deploy-

ment force of the driver’s SRS frontal

airbag at the time of deployment as well as

whether or not to activate the front

passenger’s SRS frontal airbag and, if

activated, the deployment force of the

SRS frontal airbag at the time of deploy-

ment.

Your vehicle has warning labels on the

driver’s and front passenger’s sun visors

beginning with the phrase “EVEN WITH

ADVANCED AIR BAGS” and a tag

attached to the glove box lid beginning

with the phrase “Even with Advanced Air

Bags”. Make sure that you carefully read

the instructions on the warning labels and

tag.

Always wear your seatbelt. The Subaru

advanced frontal airbag system is a

supplemental restraint system and must

be used in combination with a seatbelt. All

occupants should wear a seatbelt or be

seated in an appropriate child restraint

system.

The driver’s SRS frontal airbag is stowed

in the center portion of the steering wheel.

The front passenger’s SRS frontal airbag

is stowed near the top of the dashboard

under an “SRS AIRBAG” mark.

In a moderate to severe frontal collision,

the driver’s and front passenger’s SRS

frontal airbags deploy and supplement the

seatbelts by reducing the impact on the

driver’s and front passenger’s head and

chest.

WARNING

NEVER INSTALL A REARWARD FA-

CING CHILD SAFETY SEAT IN THE

FRONTSEAT.DOINGSORISKS

SERIOUS INJURY OR DEATH TO

THE CHILD BY PLACING THE

CHILD’S H EAD TOO CLOSE TO

THE SRS AIRBAG.

WARNING

Never allow a child to stand up, or to

kneel on the front passenger’s seat.

The SRS airbag deploys with con-

siderable force and can injure or

even kill the child.

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags 1-45

– CONTINUED –

Black plate (72,1)

北米Model "A2440BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 5/ 7

1-46 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags

WARNING

Never hold a child on your lap or in

your arms. The SRS airbag deploys

with considerable force and can

injure or even kill the child.

WARNING

The SRS airbag deploys with con-

siderable speed and force. Occu-

pants who are out of proper position

when the SRS airbag deploys could

suffer very serious injuries. Be-

cause the SRS airbag needs enough

space for deployment, the driver

should always sit upright and well

back in the seat as far from the

steering wheel as practical while

still maintaining full vehicle control

and the front passenger should

move the seat as far back as

possible and sit upright and well

back in the seat.

It is also important to wear your

seatbelt to help avoid injuries that

can result when the SRS airbag

contacts an occupant not in proper

position such as one thrown toward

the front of the vehicle during pre-

accident braking.

WARNING

Do not put any objects over the

steering wheel pad and dashboard.

If the SRS frontal airbag deploys,

those objects could interfere with its

proper operation and could be pro-

pelled inside the vehicle and cause

injury.

Black plate (73,1)

北米Model "A2440BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 5/ 7

WARNING

Do not attach accessories to the

windshield, or fit an extra-wide mir-

ror over the rear view mirror. If the

SRS airbag deploys, those objects

could become projectiles that could

seriously injure vehicle occupants.

! Driver’s SRS frontal airbag

The driver’s SRS frontal airbag uses a

dual stage inflator. The inflator operates in

different ways depending on the severity

of impact.

Have the system inspected by your

SUBARU dealer immediately if the SRS

airbag system warning light comes on.

NOTE

The driver’s SRS side airbag, SRS

curtain airbag a nd seatbe lt preten-

sioner are not controlled by the Subaru

advanced frontal airbag system.

! Front passenger’s SRS frontal air-

bag

The front passenger’s SRS frontal airbag

uses a dual stage inflator. The inflator

operates in different ways depending on

the severity of impact.

The total load on the seat is monitored by

the passenger’s occupant detection sys-

tem weight sensor under the seat.

The system has another sensor that

monitors the tension of the front passen-

ger seatbelt. Using the total seat load and

seatbelt tension data from the sensors,

the occupant detection system determines

whether the front passenger’s SRS frontal

airbag should or should not be inflated.

The occupant detection system may not

inflate the front passenger’s SRS frontal

airbag even when the driver’s SRS frontal

airbag deploys. This is normal.

Observe the following precautions. Failure

to do so may prevent the Subaru ad-

vanced frontal airbag system from func-

tioning correctly or cause the system to

fail.

. Do not apply any strong impact to the

front passenger’s seat such as by kicking.

. Do not spill liquid on the front passen-

ger’s seat. If liquid is spilled, wipe it off

immediately.

. Do not remove or disassemble the front

passenger’s seat.

. Do not install any accessory (such as

an audio amplifier) other than a genuine

SUBARU accessory under the front pas-

senger’s seat.

. Do not place anything (shoes, umbrel-

la, etc.) under the front passenger’s seat.

. The front passenger’s seat must not be

used with the head restraint removed.

. Do not leave any article including a

child restraint system on the front passen-

ger’s seat or the seatbelt tongue and

buckle engaged when you leave your

vehicle.

. Do not place a magnet near the

seatbelt buckle and the seatbelt retractor.

. Do not use front seats with their back-

ward-forward position and seatback not

being locked into place securely. If any of

them are not locked securely, adjust them

again. For adjusting procedure, refer to

“Manual seat” in the front seats section in

Chapter 1 in this Owner’s Manual. (Mod-

els equipped with manual seats only)

If the seatbelt buckle switch and/or front

passenger’s occupant detection system

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags 1-47

– CONTINUED –

Black plate (74,1)

北米Model "A2440BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 5/ 7

1-48 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags

have failed, the SRS airbag system

warning light will illuminate. Have the

system inspected by your SUBARU deal-

er immediately if the SRS airbag system

warning light comes on.

If your vehicle has sustained impact, this

may affect the proper function of the

Subaru advanced frontal airbag system.

Have your vehicle inspected at your

SUBARU dealer.

NOTE

The front passenger’s SRS side airbag,

SRS curtain airbag and seatbelt pre-

tensioner are n ot controlled by the

Subaru advanced frontal airbag sys-

tem.

! Passenger’s frontal airbag ON and

OFF indicators

or : Front passenger’s frontal airbag

ON indicator

or : Front passenger’s frontal airbag

OFF indicator

The front passenger’s frontal airbag ON

and OFF indicators show you the status of

the front passenger’s SRS frontal airbag.

The indicators are located between the

map lights.

When the ignition switch is turned to the

“ON” position, both the ON and OFF

indicators illuminate for 6 seconds during

which time the system is checked. Follow-

ing the system chec k, both indicators

extinguish for 2 seconds. After that, one

of the indicators illuminates depending on

the status of the front passenger’s SRS

frontal airbag determined by the Subaru

advanced frontal airbag system monitor-

ing.

If the front passenger’s SRS frontal airbag

is activated, the passenger’s frontal airbag

ON indicator will illuminate while the OFF

indicator will remain extinguished.

If the front passenger’s SRS frontal airbag

is deactivated, the passenger’s frontal

airbag ON indicator will remain extin-

guished while the OFF indicator will

illuminate.

If both the ON and OFF indicators remain

lit or extinguish ed simulta neousl y, the

system is faulty. Contact your SUBARU

dealer immediately for an inspection.

! Conditions in which front passen-

ger’s SRS frontal airbag is not

activated

The front passenger’s SRS frontal airbag

will not be activated when any of the

following conditions are met regarding the

front passenger’s seat:

. The seat is empty.

. The seat is equipped with a rearward

facing child restraint system and an infant

is restrained with it. (See WARNING that

follows.)

. The seat is equipped with a forward

facing child restraint system and a small

child is restrained with it. (See WARNING

Black plate (75,1)

北米Model "A2440BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 5/ 7

that follows.)

. The seat is equipped with a booster

seat and a small child is in the booster

seat. (See WARNING that follows.)

. The seat is relieved of the occupant

load for a time exceeding the predeter-

mined monitoring time period.

. The seat is occupied by a child who

has outgrown a child restraint system

(See WARNING that follows.) or by a

small adult.

. The front passenger’s occupant detec-

tion system is faulty.

WARNING

NEVER INSTALL A REARWARD FA-

CING CHILD SEAT IN THE FRONT

PASSENGER’S SEAT EVEN IF THE

FRONT PASSENGER’S SRS FRON-

TAL AIRBAG IS DEACTIVATED. Be

sure to install it in the REAR seat in

a correct manner. Also, it is strongly

recommended that any forward fa-

cing child seat or booster seat be

installed in the REAR seat, and that

even children who have outgrown a

child restraint system be also

seated in the REAR seat. This is

because children sitting in the front

passenger’s seat may be killed or

severely inj ured should the front

passenger’s SRS frontal airbag de-

ploy. REAR seats are the safest

place for children.

When the front passenger’s seat is occu-

pied by a child, observe the following

precautions. Failure to do so may increase

the load on the front passenger’s seat,

activating the front passenger’sSRS

frontal airbag even though that seat is

occupied by a child.

. Do not place any article on the seat

other than the child occupant and a child

restraint system.

. Do not place more than one child on

the seat.

. Do not install any accessory such as a

table or TV onto the seatback.

. Do not store a heavy load in the

seatback pocket.

. Do not allow the rear seat occupant to

place his/her hands or legs on the front

passenger’s seatback, or allow him/her to

pull the seatback.

! If the front passenger’s frontal air-

bag ON indicator illuminates and the

OFF indicator extinguishes even

when an infant or a small child is in

a child restraint system (including

booster seat)

Turn the ignition switch to the “ LOCK”

position if the front passenger’s frontal

airbag ON indicator illuminates and the

OFF indicator extinguishes even when an

infant or a small child is in a child restraint

system (including booster seat). Remove

the child restraint system from the seat. By

referring to the child restraint manufac-

turer’s recommendations as well as the

child restraint system installation proce-

dures in the “Child restraint systems”

section in this chapter, correctly install

the child restraint system. Turn the ignition

switch to the “ON” position and make sure

that the front passenger’s frontal airbag

ON indicator goes out and the OFF

indicator comes on.

If still the ON indicator remains illuminated

while the OFF indicator extinguishes, take

the following actions.

. Ensure that no article is placed on the

seat other than the child restraint system

and the child occupant.

. Ensure that there is no article left in the

seatback pocket.

. Ensure that the backward-forward po-

sition and seatback of front passenger’s

seat are locked into place securely by

moving the seat back and forth. (Models

equipped with manual seats only)

If the ON indicator still illuminates while

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags 1-49

– CONTINUED –

Black plate (76,1)

北米Model "A2440BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 5/ 7

1-50 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags

the OFF indicator extinguishes after taking

relevant corrective actions described

above, relocate the child restraint system

to the rear seat and immediately contact

your SUBARU dealer for an inspection.

NOTE

When a child who has outgrown a child

restraint system or a small adult is

seated in the front passenger’s seat,

the Subaru advanced frontal airbag

system may or may not activate the

front passenger’s SRS frontal airbag

depending on the occupant’s seating

posture. If the front passenger’s SRS

frontal airbag is activated (the ON

indicator illuminates while the OFF

indicator extinguishes), take the follow-

ing actions.

. Ensure that no article is placed on

the seat other than the occupant.

. Ensure that there is no article left in

the seatback pocket.

If the ON indicator still illuminates while

the OFF indicator extinguishes despite

the fact that the actions noted above

have been taken, seat the child/small

adult in the rear seat and immediately

contact your SUBARU dealer for an

inspection. Even if the system has

passed the dealer inspection, it is

recommended that on subsequent trips

the child/small adult always take the

rear seat.

Children who have outgrown a child

restraint system should always wear the

seatbelt irrespective of whether the airbag

is deactivated or activated.

! Conditions in which front passen-

ger’s SRS frontal airbag is activated

The front passenger’s SRS frontal airbag

will be activated for deployment upon

impact when any of the following condi-

tions is met regarding the front passen-

ger ’s seat.

. When the seat is occupied by an adult.

. When a heavy article is placed on the

seat.

When the front passenger’s seat is occu-

pied by an adult, observe the following

precautions. Failure to do so may lessen

the load on the front passenger’s seat,

deactivating the front passenger’s SRS

frontal airbag despite the fact that the seat

is occupied by an adult.

. Do not allow the rear seat occupant to

lift the front passenge r’s seat cushion

using his/her feet.

. Do not place any article under the front

passenger’s seat, or squeeze any article

from behind and under the seat. This may

lift the seat cushion.

. Do not squeeze any article between

the front passenger’s seat and side trim/

pillar, door or center console box. This

may lift the seat cushion.

! If the passenger’s frontal airbag OFF

indicator illuminates and the ON

indicator extinguishes even when

the front passenger’s seat is occu-

pied by an adult

This can be caused by the adult incor-

rectly sitting in the front passenger’s seat.

Turn the ignition switch to the “ LOCK”

position. Ask the front passenger to set

the seatback to the upright position, sit up

straight in the center of the seat cushion,

correctly fasten the seatbelt, position his/

her legs out forward, and adjust the seat to

the rearmost position. Turn the ignition

switch to the “ON” position. If the OFF

indicator remains illuminated while the ON

indicator remains extinguished, take the

following actions.

. Turn the ignition switch to the “LOCK”

position.

. Ensure that there is no article, book,

shoe, or other object trapped under the

seat, at the rear of the seat, or on the side

of the seat.

. Ensure that the backward-forward po-

sition and seatback of front passenger’s

seat are locked into place securely by

Black plate (77,1)

北米Model "A2440BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 5/ 7

moving the seat back and forth. (Models

equipped with manual seats only)

. Next, turn the ignition switch to the

“ON” position and wait 6 seconds to allow

the system to complete self-checking.

Following the system check, both indica-

tors extinguish for 2 seconds. Now, the

ON indicator should illuminate while the

OFF indicator remains extinguished.

If the OFF indicator still illuminates while

the ON indicator remains extinguished,

ask the occupant to move to the rear seat

and immediately contact your SUBARU

dealer for an inspection.

! Effect vehicle modifications made

for persons with disabilities may

have on Subaru advanced frontal

airbag system operation (U.S. only)

Changing or moving any parts of the front

seats, seat belts, front bumper, front side

frame, instrument panel, combination me-

ter, steering wheel, steering column, tire,

suspension or floor panel can affect the

operation of the Subaru advanced airbag

system. If you have any questions, you

may contact the following Subaru distribu-

tors:

<Continental U.S., Alaska and the District

of Columbia>

Subaru of America, Inc.

Customer Dealer Services Department

P.O. Box 6000

Cherry Hill, NJ 08034-6000

1-800-SUBARU3 (1-800-782-2783)

Servco Subaru Inc., dba Subaru Hawaii

2850 Pukoloa Street, Suite 202, Honolulu,

HI 96819

808-839-2273

<Guam>

Shen’s Corporation dba Prestige Automo-

bile

491, East Marine Drive, Route 1 Dededo,

Guam

671-633-2698

Trebol Motors

P.O. Box 11204, San Juan, Puerto Rico

00910

787-793-2828

There are currently no Subaru distributors

in any other U.S. territories. If you are in

such an area, please contact the Subaru

distributor or dealer from which you

bought your vehicle.

! Operation

1) Driver’s side

2) Passenger’s side

The SRS airbag can function only when

the ignition switch is in the “ON” position.

The Subaru advanced frontal airbag sys-

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags 1-51

– CONTINUED –

Black plate (78,1)

北米Model "A2440BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 5/ 7

1-52 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags

tem is designed to determine the activa-

tion or deactivation condition of the front

passenger’s SRS frontal airbag depend-

ing on the total load on the front passen-

ger’s seat monitored by the front passen-

ger’s occupant detection system weight

sensor. For this reason, only the driver’s

SRS frontal airbag may deploy in the

event of a collision, but this does not mean

failure of the system.

If the front sub sensors inside both front

fenders and the impact sensors in the

airbag control module detect a predeter-

mined amount of force during a frontal

collision, the control module sends signals

to the airbag module(s) (only driver’s

module or both driver’s and front passen-

ger’s modules) instructing the module(s)

to inflate the SRS frontal airbag(s). The

driver’s and front passenger ’s SRS frontal

airbags use dual stage inflators. The two

inflators of each airbag are triggered either

sequentially or simultaneously, depending

on the severity of impact in the case of the

driver’s SRS frontal airbag and depending

on the severity of impact and the total load

on the seat in the case of the front

passenger’s SRS frontal airbag. After

deployment, the SRS airbag immediately

starts to deflate so that the driver’s vision

is not obstructed. The time required from

detecting impact to the deflation of the

SRS airbag after deployment is shorter

than the blink of an eye.

Both when only the driver’s SRS frontal

airbag deploys and the driver’s and front

passenger’s SRS frontal airbags deploy,

the driver’s and front passenger’s seatbelt

pretensioners operate at the same time.

Although it is highly unlikely that the SRS

airbag would activate in a non-accident

situation, should it occur, the SRS airbag

will deflate quickly, not obscuring vision

and will not interfere with the driver’s

ability to maintain control of the vehicle.

When the SRS airbag deploys, a sudden,

fairly loud inflation noise will be heard and

some smoke will b e relea sed. The se

occurrences are a normal result of the

deployment. This smoke does not indicate

a fire in the vehicle.

CAUTION

Do not touch the SRS airbag system

components around the steerin g

wheel and dashboard w ith bare

hands right after deployment. Doing

so can cause burns because the

components can be very hot as a

result of deployment.

The driver’s SRS frontal airbag and front

passenger’s SRS frontal airbag are de-

signed to deploy in the event of an

accident involving a moderate to severe

frontal collision. It is basically not designed

to deploy in lesser frontal impacts be-

cause the necessary protection can be

achieved by the seatbelt alone. Also, they

are basically not designed to deploy in

side or rear impacts or in roll-over acci-

dents because deployment of only the

driver’s SRS frontal airbag or both driver’s

and front passenger’s SRS frontal airbags

would not help the occupant in those

situations. The driver’s and front passen-

ger’s SRS frontal airbags are designed to

function on a one-time-only basis.

SRS airbag deployment depends on the

level of force experienced in the passen-

ger compartment during a collision. That

level differs from one type of collision to

another, and it may have no bearing on

the visible damage done to the vehicle

itself.

Black plate (79,1)

北米Model "A2440BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 5/ 7

! Examples of accident in which the

driver’s/driver’s and front passen-

ger’s SRS frontal airbag(s) will most

likely deploy.

A head-on collision against a thick con-

crete wall at a vehicle speed of 12 to 19

mph (20 to 30 km/h) or higher activates

only the driver’s SRS frontal airbag or both

driver’s and front passenger ’s SRS frontal

airbags. The airbag(s) will also be acti-

vated when the vehicle is exposed to a

frontal impact similar in fashion and

magnitude to the co llision described

above.

! Examples of the types of accidents

in which it is possible that the

driver’s/driver’s and front passen-

ger’s SRS frontal airbag(s) will de-

ploy.

The only the driver’s SRS frontal airbag or

both driver’s and front passenger’s SRS

frontal airbags may be activated when the

vehicle sustains a hard impact in the

undercarriage area from the road surface

(such as when the vehicle plunges into a

deep ditch, is severely impacted or

knocked hard against an obstacle on the

road such as a curb).

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags 1-53

– CONTINUED –

Black plate (80,1)

北米Model "A2440BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 5/ 7

1-54 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags

! Examples of the types of accidents

in which deployment of the driver’s/

driver’s and front passenger’s SRS

frontal airbag(s) is unlikely to occur.

There are many types of collisions which

might not necessarily require deployment

of driver’s/driver’s and front passenger’s

SRS frontal airbag(s). If the vehicle strikes

an object, such as a telephone pole or

sign pole, or if it slides under a truck’s load

bed, or if it sustains an oblique offset

frontal impa ct, the driver’s/driver’sand

front passenger’s SRS frontal airbag(s)

may not deploy depending on the level of

accident forces involved.

! Examples of the types of accidents

in which the driver’s/driver’s and

front passenger’s SRS frontal

airbag(s) will basically not deploy.

The driver’s and front passenger’s SRS

frontal airbags are designed basically not

Black plate (81,1)

北米Model "A2440BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 5/ 7

to deploy if the vehicle is struck from the

side or from behind, or if it rolls onto its

side or roof, or if it is involved in a low-

speed frontal collision.

1) First impact

2) Second impact

In an accident where the vehicle is

impacted more than once, the driver’s

and/or front passenger’s SRS frontal

airbag(s) will deploy only once on the first

impact.

Example: In the case of a double collision,

first with another vehicle, then against a

concrete wall in immediate succession,

once either or both of the driver’s and front

passenger’s SRS frontal airbags is/are

activated on the first impact, it/they will not

be activated on the second impact.

& SRS side airbag and SRS

curtain airbag

The SRS side airbag is stored in the door

side of each front seat seatback, which

bears an “SRS AIRBAG ” label.

In a moderate to severe side impact

collision, the SRS side airbag on the

impacted s ide of the vehicle deploys

between the occupant and the door panel

and supplements the seatbelt by reducing

the impact on the occupant’s chest and

waist. The SRS side airbag operates only

for front seat occupants.

The SRS curtain airbag on each side of

the cabin is stored in the roof side

(between the front pillar and a point over

the rear seat). An “SRS AIRBAG” mark is

located at the top of each center pillar.

In a moderate to severe side impact

collision, the SRS curtain airbag on the

impacted s ide of the vehicle deploys

between the occupant and the side

window and supplements the seatbelt by

reducing the impact on the occupant’s

head.

WARNING

The SRS side airbag and SRS

curtain airbag are designed as only

a supplement to the primary protec-

tion provided by the seatbelt. They

do not do away with the need to

fasten seatbelts. It is also important

to wear your seatbelt to help avoid

injuries that can result when an

occupant is not seated in a proper

upright position.

WARNING

. Do not sit or lean unnecessarily

close to either front door. The

SRS side airbag is stored in both

front seat seatbacks next to the

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags 1-55

– CONTINUED –

Black plate (82,1)

北米Model "A2440BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 5/ 7

1-56 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags

door, and it provides protection

by deploying rapidly (faster than

the blink of an eye) in the event of

a side impact collision. However,

theforceofSRSsideairbag

deployment may cause injuries

if your head or other parts of the

body are too close to the SRS

side airbag.

. Since your vehicle is equipped

with SRS curtain airbags, do not

sit or lean unnecessarily close to

the front or rear door on either

side. Also, do not put your head,

arms and hands out of the win-

dow. The SRS curtain airbag on

each side of the cabin is stored in

the roof side (between the front

pillar and a point over the rear

seat), and it provides protection

by deploying rapidly (faster than

the blink of an eye) in the event of

a side impact. However, the force

of its deployment may cause

injuries if your head is too close

to it.

WARNING

Do not rest your arm on either front

door or its internal trim. It could be

injured in the event of SRS side

airbag deployment.

Black plate (83,1)

北米Model "A2440BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 5/ 7

WARNING

. Never allow a child to kneel on

the front passenger’s seat facing

the side window or to wrap his/

her arms around the front seat

seatback. In the event of an

accident, the force of the SRS

side airbag de ployment could

injure the child seriously b e-

cause his/her head or arms or

other parts of the body are too

close to the SRS side airbag.

Since your vehicle is also

equipped with a front passen-

ger’s SRS frontal airbag, children

aged 12 and under should be

placed in the rear seat anyway

and should be properly re-

strained at all times.

. Never allow a child to kneel on

any passenger’s seat facing the

side window or put their head,

arms and hands out of the win-

dow. In the event of an accident,

the force of the SRS curtain

airbag deployment could injure

the child seriously because his/

her head is close to the SRS

curtain airbag.

WARNING

. Do not attach accessories to the

door trim or near either SRS side

airbags and do not place objects

near the SRS side airbags. In the

event of the SRS side airbag

deployment, they could be pro-

pelled dangerously toward the

vehicle’s occupants and cause

injuries.

. Do not attach a hands-free micro-

phone or any other accessory to

a front pillar, a center pillar, a rear

pillar, the windshield, a side win-

dow, an assist grip, or any other

cabin surface that would be near

a deploying SRS curtain airbag.

A hands-free microphone or

other accessory in such a loca-

tion could be propelled through

the cabin with great force by the

curtain airbag, or it could prevent

correct deployment of the curtain

airbag. In either case, the result

could be serious injuries.

. Do not hang coat hangers or

other hard or pointed objects on

the coat hooks. If such items

were hanging on the coat hooks

during deployment of the SRS

curtain airbags, they could cause

serious injuries by coming off the

coat hooks and b eing th rown

through the cabin or by prevent-

ing deployment of th e curtai n

airbags.

Before hanging clothing on the

coat hooks, make sure there are

no sharp objects in the pockets.

Hang clothing directly on the

coat hooks without using hang-

ers.

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags 1-57

– CONTINUED –

Black plate (84,1)

北米Model "A2440BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 5/ 7

1-58 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags

WARNING

Do not put any kind of cover or

clothes or other objects over either

front seatback and do not attach

labels or stickers to the front seat

surface on or near the SRS side

airbag. They could prevent proper

deployment of the SRS side airbag,

reducing protection available to the

front seat’s occupant.

! Operation

The SRS side airbag and SRS curtain

airbag can function only when the ignition

switch is in the “ON” position.

The driver’s and front passenger’s SRS

side airbags and SRS curt ain airbags

deploy independently of each other since

each has its own impact sensor. There-

fore, they may not both deploy in the same

accident. Also, the SRS side airbag and

SRS curtain airbag deploys independently

of the driver’s and front passenger’s SRS

frontal airbags in the steering wheel and

instrument panel.

An impact sensor, which senses impact

force, is located in each of the left and

right center pillars and rear wheel houses.

Another impact sensor, which also senses

impact force, is located under the rear

center seat. If one of the center pillar

impact sensors and the impact sensor that

is located under the rear center seat

together sense an impact force above a

predetermined level in a side collision, the

control module causes both the SRS side

airbag and curtain airbag on the impacted

side to inflate regardless of whether the

rear wheel house impact sensor on the

same side senses an impact. If one of the

rear wheel house impact sensors and the

impact sensor that is located under the

rear center seat together sense a suffi-

ciently strong impact force, the control

module causes only the SRS curtain

airbag on the impacted side to inflate.

After the deployment, the SRS side airbag

immediately starts to deflate. The time

required from detection of an impact to

deflation of an SRS side airbag after

deployment is shorter than the blink of

an eye.

The SRS curtain airbag remains inflated

for a while following deployment then

slowly deflates.

The SRS side airbag and SRS curtain

airbag deploy even when no one occupies

the seat on the side on which an impact is

applied.

When the SR S side airbag and SRS

Black plate (85,1)

北米Model "A2440BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 5/ 7

curtain airbag deploy, a sudden, fairly loud

inflation noise will be heard and some

smoke will be relea sed. These occur-

rences are a normal result of the deploy-

ment. This smoke does not indicate a fire

in the vehicle.

CAUTION

Do not touch the SRS side airbag

system components around the

front seat seatback with bare hands

right after deployment. Doing so can

cause burns because the compo-

nents can be very hot as a result of

deployment.

After deployment, do not touch any

part of the SRS curtain airbag

system (from the front pillar to the

part of the roof side over the rear

seat). Doing so can cause burns

beca use the components can be

very hot as a result of deployment.

The SRS side airbag and SRS curtain

airbag are designed to deploy in the event

of an accident involving a moderate to

severe side impact collision. It is basically

not designed to deploy in a lesser side

impact. Also, it is basically not designed to

deploy in frontal or rear impacts because

SRS side airbag and SRS curtain airbag

deployment would not help the occupant

in those situations.

Each SRS side airbag and SRS curtain

airbag are designed to function on a one-

time-only basis.

SRS side airbag and SRS curtain airbag

deployment depend on the level of force

experienced in the passenger compart-

ment during a side impact collision. That

level differs from one type of collision to

another, and it may have no bearing on

the visible damage done to the vehicle

itself.

! Example of the type of accident in

which the SRS side airbag and SRS

curtain airbag will most likely de-

ploy.

A severe side impact near the front seat

activates the SRS side airbag and SRS

curtain airbag.

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags 1-59

– CONTINUED –

Black plate (86,1)

北米Model "A2440BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 5/ 7

1-60 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags

! Examples of the types of accidents in which the SRS side airbag and SRS

curtain airbag are unlikely to deploy.

1) The vehicle is involved in an oblique

side-on impact.

2) The vehicle is involved in a side-on

impact in an area outside the vicinity of

the passenger compartment.

3) The vehicle strikes a telephone pole or

similar object.

4) The vehicle is involved in a side-on

impact from a motorcycle.

5) The vehicle rolls onto its side or roof.

There are many types of collisions which

might not necessarily require SRS side

airbag and SRS curtain airbag deploy-

ment. In the event of accidents like those

illustrated, the SRS side airbag and SRS

curtain airbag may not deploy depending

on the level of accident forces involved.

Black plate (87,1)

北米Model "A2440BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 5/ 7

! Examples of the types of accidents

in which the SRS side airbag and

SRS curtain airbag will basically not

deploy.

1) The vehicle is involved in frontal collision

with another vehicle (moving or station-

ary).

2) The vehicle is struck from behind.

The SRS side airbag and SRS curtain

airbag ar e basical ly not designed to

deploy if the vehicle is involved in a frontal

collision or is struck from behind. Exam-

ples of such accidents are illustrated.

1) First impact

2) Second impact

A) SRS curtain airbag

B) SRS side airbag

In an accident where the vehicle is struck

from the side more than once, the SRS

side airbag and SRS curtain airbag deploy

only once on the first impact.

Example: In the case of a double side

impact collision, first with one vehicle and

immediately followed by another from the

same direction, once the SRS side airbag

and SRS curtain airbag are activated on

the first impact, they will not be activated

on the second.

& SRS airbag system monitors

Vehicle with SI-DRIVE

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags

1-61

– CONTINUED –

Black plate (88,1)

北米Model "A2440BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 5/ 7

1-62 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags

Vehicle without SI-DRIVE

A diagnostic system continually monitors

the readiness of the SRS airbag system

(including front seatbelt pretensioners)

while the vehicle is being driven. The

SRS airbag system warning light “AIR-

BAG” will show normal system operation

by lighting for approximately 6 seconds

when the ignition switch is turned to the

“ON” position.

The following components are monitored

by the indicator:

. Front sub sensor (Right-hand side)

. Front sub sensor (Left-hand side)

. Airbag control module (including im-

pact sensors)

. Frontal airbag module (Driver’s side)

. Frontal airbag module (Front passen-

ger ’s side)

. Side airbag sensor (Center pillar right-

hand side)

. Side airbag sensor (Center pillar left-

hand side)

. Side airbag module (Driver’s side)

. Side airbag module (Front passenger’s

side)

. Curtain airbag sensor (Rear wheel

house right-hand side)

. Curtain airbag sensor (Rear wheel

house left-hand side)

. Curtain airbag module (Right side)

. Curtain airbag module (Left side)

. Satellite safing sensor (under the rear

center seat)

. Seatbelt pretensioner (Driver’s side)

. Seatbelt pretensioner (Front passen-

ger ’s side)

. Seatbelt buckle switch (Front passen-

ger ’s side)

. Front passenger’s seatbelt tension

sensor

. Front passenger’s occupant detection

system weight sensor

. Front passenger’s occupant detection

control module

. Front passenger’s frontal airbag ON

and OFF indicator

. All related wiring

WARNING

If the warning light exhibits any of

the following conditions, there may

be a malfunction in the seatbelt

pretensioners and/or SRS airbag

system. Immediately take your vehi-

cle to your nearest SUBARU dealer

to have the system checked. Unless

checked and properly repaired, the

seatbelt pretensioners and/or SRS

airbags will operate improperly (e.g.

SRS airbags may inflate in a very

minor collision or not inflate in a

severe collision), which m ay in-

crease the risk of injury.

. Flashing or flickering of the warn-

ing light

. No illumination of the warning

light when the ignition switch is

first turned to the “ON” position

. Continuous illumination of the

warning light

. Illumination of the warning light

while driving

Black plate (89,1)

北米Model "A2440BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 5/ 7

& SRS airbag system servicing

WARNING

. When discarding an airbag mod-

ule or scrapping the entire vehi-

cle damaged by a collision, con-

sult your SUBARU dealer.

. The SRS airbag has no user-

serviceable parts. Do not use

electrical test equipment on any

circuit related to the SRS airbag

system. For required servicing of

the SRS airbag, see your nearest

SUBARU dealer. Tampering with

or disconnecting the system’s

wiring could result in accidental

inflation of the SRS airbag or

could make the system inopera-

tive, which may result in serious

injury. The wiring harnesses of

the SRS airbag system are cov-

ered with yellow insulation and

system connectors are yellow for

easy identification.

CAUTION

If you need service or repair in areas

listed in the following, have an

authorized SUBARU dealer perform

the work. The SRS airbag control

module, impact sensors and airbag

modules are stored in these areas.

. Under the center console

. Inside each front fender

. Steering wheel and column and

nearby areas

. Top of the dashboard on front

passenger’s s ide and nearby

areas

. Each front seat and nearby area

. Inside each center pillar

. In each roof side (from the front

pillar to a point over the rear seat)

. Between the rear seat cushion

and rear wheel house on each

side

. Under the rear center seat

In the event that the SRS airbag is

deployed, replacement of the system

should be performed only by an author-

ized SUBARU dealer. When the compo-

nents of the SRS airbag system are

replaced, use only genuine SUBARU

parts.

NOTE

In the following cases, contact your

SUBARU dealer as soon as possible.

. The front part of the vehicle was

involved in an accident in which the

only the driver’s SRS frontal airbag or

both driver’s and front passenger’s

SRS frontal airbags did not deploy.

. The pad of the steering wheel, the

cover over the front passenger’s SRS

frontal airbag, or either roof side (from

the front pillar to a point over the rear

seat) is scratched, cracked, or other-

wise damaged.

. Center pillar, rear wheel house or

rear sub frame, or an area near these

parts, was involved in an accident in

which the SRS side airbag and SRS

curtain airbag did not deploy.

. The fabric or leather of either front

seatback is cut, frayed, or otherwise

damaged.

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags 1-63

– CONTINUED –

Black plate (90,1)

北米Model "A2440BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 5/ 7

1-64 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags

& Precautions against vehicle

modification

WARNING

. To avoid accidental activation of

the system or rendering the sys-

tem inoperative, which may re-

sult in serious injury, no modifi-

cations should be made to any

components or wiring of the SRS

airbag system.

This includes following modifica-

tions:

. Installation of custom steering

wheels

. Attachment of additional trim

materials to the dashboard

. Installation of custom seats

. Replacement of seat fabric or

leather

. Installation of additional fabric

or leather on the front seat

. Attachment of a hands-free

microphone or any other ac-

cessory to a front pillar, a

center pillar, a rear pillar, the

windshield, a side window, an

assist grip, or any other cabin

surface that would be near a

deploying SRS curtain airbag.

. Installation of additional elec-

trical/electronic equipment

such as a mobil e two-way

radioonorneartheSRS

airbag syste m components

and/or wiring is not advisable.

This could interfere with prop-

er operation of the SRS airbag

system.

CAUTION

Do not perform any of the following

modifications. Such modifications

can interfere with proper operation

of the SRS airbag system.

. Attachment of any equipment

(bush bar, winches, snow plow,

skid plate, etc.) other than genu-

ine SUBARU accessory parts.

. Modification of the suspension

system or front end structure.

. Installation of a tire of different

size and construction from the

tires specified on the vehicle

placard attached to the driver’s

door pillar or specified for indivi-

dual vehicle models in this Own-

er’s Manual.

. Attach ment of any equipme nt

(side steps or side sill protectors,

etc.) other than genuine SUBARU

accessory parts to the side body.

Always consult your SUBARU dealer if

you want to install any accessory parts on

your vehicle.

Black plate (3,1)

北米Model "A2440BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 5/ 7

Keys ..................................................................... 2-2

Key number ........................................................ 2-2

Immobilizer .......................................................... 2-3

Security ID plate.................................................. 2-3

Security indicator light ........................................ 2-4

Key replacement ................................................. 2-4

Door locks ........................................................... 2-5

Locking and unlocking from the outside .............. 2-5

Locking and unlocking from the inside ................ 2-6

Battery drainage prevention function ................... 2-6

Power door locking switches............................. 2-7

Key lock-in prevention function ........................... 2-7

Remote keyless ent ry system ............................ 2-8

Locking the doors ............................................... 2-9

Unlocking the doors............................................ 2-9

Unlocking the trunk lid/rear gate .......................... 2-9

Illuminated entry ................................................. 2-9

Vehicle finder function........................................ 2-10

Sounding a panic alarm...................................... 2-10

Selecting audible signal operation ...................... 2-10

Replacing the battery ......................................... 2-10

Replacing lost transmitters................................. 2-12

Alarm system ..................................................... 2-15

System alarm operation...................................... 2-15

Activating and deactivating the alarm system ..... 2-15

If you have accidentally triggered the alarm

system ............................................................ 2-16

Arming the system ............................................ 2-16

Disarming the system ........................................ 2-18

Valet mode ........................................................ 2-18

Passive arming.................................................. 2-18

Tripped sensor identification .............................. 2-19

Shock sensors (dealer option)............................ 2-19

Child safety locks .............................................. 2-20

Windows............................................................. 2-20

Power windows ................................................. 2-20

Trunk lid (Sedan) ............................................... 2-23

To open and close the trunk lid from outside...... 2-23

To open the trunk lid from inside........................ 2-23

To lock and unlock the trunk lid release

lever................................................................ 2-24

Internal trunk lid release handle ......................... 2-24

Rear gate (Station wagon) ................................ 2-26

Moonroof (if equipped)...................................... 2-27

Tilting/sliding moonroof (Sedan)......................... 2-27

Moonroof (Station wagon) .................................. 2-28

Keys and doors

Black plate (94,1)

北米Model "A2440BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 5/ 7

2-2 Keys and doors

Keys

1) Master key

2) Submaster key

3) Valet key

4) Key number plate

5) Security ID plate

Three types of keys are provided for your

vehicle.

Master key, submaster key and valet key.

The master key and submaster key fit all

locks on your vehicle.

. Ignition switch

. Driver’s door

. Glove box

. Trunk lid release lever

The valet key fits only the ignition switch

and door locks. You can keep the trunk

and glove box locked when you leave your

vehicle and valet key at a parking facility.

CAUTION

Do not attach a large key holder or

key case to either key. If it bangs

against your knees while you are

driving, it could turn the ignition

switch from the “ON” position to the

“Acc” or “LOCK” position, thereby

stopping the engine.

& Key number

1) Key number plate

2) Security ID plate

The key number is stamped on the key

number plate attached to the key set.

Write down the key number and keep it in

another safe place, not in the vehicle. This

number is needed to make a replacement

key if you lose your key or lock it inside the

vehicle.

For information on making replacement

keys for vehicles with the immobilizer

system, refer to the “Immobilizer” section

in this chapter.

Black plate (95,1)

北米Model "A2440BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 5/ 7

Immobilizer

The immobilizer system is designed to

prevent an unau thorized person f rom

starting the engine. Only keys registered

with your vehicle’s immobilizer system can

be used to operate your vehicle. Even if

an unregistered key fits into the ignition

switch and can be turned to the “START”

position, the engine will automatically stop

after several seconds.

Each immobilizer key contains a trans-

ponder in which the key’s ID code is

stored. When a key is inserted into the

ignition switch and turned to the “ON”

position, the transponder transmits the

key’s ID code to the immobilizer system’s

receiver. If the transmitted ID code

matches the ID code registered in the

immobilizer system, the system allows the

engine to be started. Since the ID code is

transmitted and acted upon almost in-

stantly, the immobilizer system does not

impede normal starting of the engine.

If the engine fails to start, pull out the key

once before trying again. (Refer to the

“Ignition switch” section [chapter 3].)

This device complies with Part 15 of

the FCC Rules and with RSS-210 of

Industry Canada. Operation is subject

to the following two conditions: (1) This

device may not cause harmful inter-

ference, and (2) this device must

accept any interference received, in-

cluding interference that may cause

undesired operation.

Changes or modifications not ex-

pressly approved by the party respon-

sible for compliance could void the

user’s authority to operate the equip-

ment.

NOTE

To protect your vehi cle from th eft,

please pay close attention to the fol-

lowing security precautions:

. Never leave your vehicle unattended

with its keys inside.

. Before leaving your vehicle, close all

windows and lock the doors and rear

gate (Station wagon).

. Do not leave spare keys or any

record of your key number in the

vehicle.

CAUTION

. Do not place the key under direct

sunlight or anywhere it may

become hot.

. Do not get the key wet. If the key

gets wet, wipe it dry with a cloth

immediately.

& Security ID plate

1) Key number plate

2) Security ID plate

The security ID is stamped on the security

ID plate attached to the key set. Write

down the security ID and keep it in

another safe place, not in the vehicle.

This number is needed to make a replace-

ment key if you lose your key or lock it

inside the vehicle.

This number is also needed for replace-

ment or repair of the engine control unit,

integrated unit, and combination meter.

Keys and doors 2-3

– CONTINUED –

Black plate (96,1)

北米Model "A2440BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 5/ 7

2-4 Keys and doors

& Security indicator light

Vehicle with SI-DRIVE

Vehicle without SI-DRIVE

The security indicator light deters potential

thieves by indicating that the vehicle is

equipped with an immobilizer system. It

begins flashing approximately 60 seconds

after the ignition switch is turned from the

“ON” position to the “Acc” or “LOCK”

position or immediately after the key is

pulled out.

If the security indicator light does not flash,

the immobilizer system may be faulty. If

this occurs, contact your SUBARU dealer

as soon as possible.

In case an unauthorized key is used (e.g.

an imitation key), the security indicator

light comes on.

NOTE

Even if the security indicator light

flashes irregularly or its fuse blows

(the light does not flash if its fuse is

blown), the immobilizer system will

function normally.

& Key replacement

Your key number plate and security ID

plate will be required if you ever need a

replacement key made. Any new key must

be registered for use with your vehicle’s

immobilizer system before it can be used.

Up to four keys can be registered for use

with one vehicle.

For security, all the keys registered with

your vehicle’s immobilizer system will

have their ID codes erased and re-

registere d when a new key is made.

Therefore, all of your vehicle’s keys must

be presented when a new key is regis-

tered. Any key that is not re-registered

when a new key is made cannot be used

after the other keys are re-registered. For

information on replacement keys and on

the registration of keys with your immo-

bilizer sys tem, co ntac t your SUBARU

dealer.

NOTE

A vehicle that is equipped with the

remote engine start system as the

dealer option can register up to three

keys for use with one vehicle.

Black plate (97,1)

北米Model "A2440BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 5/ 7

Door locks

& Locking and unlocking from

the outside

To lock the driver’s door from the outside

with the key, turn the key toward the rear.

To unlock the door, turn the key toward the

front.

Lift the outside door handle to open an

unlocked door.

Locking without the key

1) Rotate the lock lever rearward.

2) Close the door.

To lock the door from the outside without

the key, rotate the lock lever rearward and

then close the door.

Locking without the key

1) Push the power door locking swit ch

forward.

2) Close the door.

To lock the door from the outside using the

power door locking switch, push the

switch forward (“LOCK” side) and then

close the door. In this case, all closed

doors and the rear gate (Station wagon)

are locked at the same time.

Always make sure that all doors and the

rear gate are locked before leaving your

vehicle.

NOTE

Make sure that you do not leave the key

inside the vehicle before locking the

doors from the outside without the key.

Keys and doors 2-5

– CONTINUED –

Black plate (98,1)

北米Model "A2440BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 5/ 7

2-6 Keys and doors

& Locking and unlocking from

the inside

WARNING

Keep all doors locked when you

drive, especially when small chil-

dren are in your vehicle.

Along with the proper use of seat-

belts and child restraints, locking

the doors reduces the chance of

being thrown out of the vehicle in an

accident.

It also helps prevent passengers

from falling out if a door is acciden-

tally opened, and intruders from

unexpectedly opening doors and

entering your vehicle.

To lock the door from the inside, rotate the

lock lever rearward.

To unlock the door from the inside, rotate

the lock lever forward.

The red mark on the lock lever appears

when the door is unlocked.

Pull the inside door handle to open an

unlocked door.

Always make sure that all doors and the

rear gate (Station wagon) are closed and

locked before starting to drive.

& Battery drainage prevention

function

When a door or the rear gate (Station

wagon) is not completely closed and the

dome light, ignition switch light, and door

open warning light remain illuminated as a

result, the lights are automatically turned

off by the battery drainage prevention

function after 10 minutes of illumination

to prevent the battery from going dead.

The operational/non-operational setting of

this function can be changed by a

SUBARU dealer. Contact the nearest

SUBARU dealer if you would like to

change the setting.

NOTE

. When lea ving the vehicle, please

make sure that all doors and the rear

gate (Station wagon) are completely

closed.

. The battery drainage prevention

function does not operate while the

key is in the ignition switch.

Black plate (99,1)

北米Model "A2440BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 5/ 7

Power door locking switches

Driver’s switch

Front passenger’s switch

All doors and the rear gate (Station

wagon) can be locked and unlocked by

the power door locking switches located at

the driver’s side and the front passenger’s

side doors.

To lock all doors (including the rear gate of

a Station wagon), push the switch to the

front (“LOCK”) position.

To unlock all doors (including the rear gate

of a Station wagon), pull the switch to the

rear position.

When you close the doors after you set

the door locks, the doors remain locked.

NOTE

Make sure that you do not leave the key

inside the vehicle before locking the

doors from the outside using the power

door locking switches.

& Key lock-in prevention func-

tion

This function prevents the doors from

being locked with the key still in the

ignition switch.

! Behavior with key lock-in preven-

tion function operative

With the driver’s door open, the doors are

automatically kept unlocked even if the

door locking switch is pushed to the front

(“LOCK”) position.

! Behavior with key lock-in preven-

tion function non-operative

. If the lock lever is turned to the rear

(“LOCK”) position with the driver’s door

open and the driver’s door is then closed

with the lock lever in that position, the

driver’s door is locked.

. If the spare key is used to lock the

driver’s door from the outside of the

vehicle, the door is locked.

This function’s operative/non-operati ve

setting can be changed by a SUBARU

dealer. Contact a SUBARU dealer for

details.

NOTE

When leaving the vehicle, make sure

you are holding the key before locking

the doors.

Keys and doors 2-7

Black plate (100,1)

北米Model "A2440BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 5/ 7

2-8 Keys and doors

Remote keyless entry system

CAUTION

. Do not expose the transmitter to

severe shocks, such as those

experienced as a result of drop-

ping or throwing.

. Do not take the transmitter apart

except when replacing the bat-

tery.

. Do not get the transmitter wet. If it

gets wet, wipe it dry with a cloth

immediately.

This device complies with Part 15 of

the FCC Rules and with RSS-210 of

Industry Canada. Operation is subject

to the following two conditions: (1) This

device may not cause harmful inter-

ference, and (2) this device must

accept any interference received, in-

cluding interference that may cause

undesired operation.

Changes or modifications not ex-

pressly approved by the party respon-

sible for compliance could void the

user’s authority to operate the equip-

ment.

The transmitter for the remote keyless

entry system is located inside the key

head.

The keyless entry system has the follow-

ing functions.

. Locking and unlocking the doors (and

rear gate on the Station wagon) without a

key

. Locking and unlocking the doors (and

trunk lid on the Sedan) without key

. Unlocking the rear gate on the Station

wagon without key

. Unlocking the trunk lid on the Sedan

without key

. Sounding a panic alarm

. Arming and disarming the alarm sys-

tem. See the next section “Alarm system”

for detailed information.

The operable distance of the keyless entry

system is approximately 30 feet (10

meters). However, this distance will vary

depending on environmental conditions.

The system’s operable distance will be

shorter in areas near a facility or electronic

equipment emitting strong radio waves

such as a power plant, broadcast station,

TV tower, or remote controller of home

electronic appliances.

NOTE

The keyless entry system does not

operate when the ignition key is in-

serted in the ignition switch.

: Trunk lid/rear gate unlock button

: Unlock/disarm button

: Lock/arm button

A: Panic button

Black plate (101,1)

北米Model "A2440BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 5/ 7

& Locking the doors

Press the “ ” button to lock all doors and

rear gate (Station wagon). An electronic

chirp will sound once and the turn signal

lights will flash once.

If any of the doors (or the rear gate/trunk

lid) is not fully closed, an electronic chirp

will sound five times and the turn signal

lights will flash five times to alert you that

the doors (or the rear gate/trunk lid) are

not properly closed. When you close the

door, it will automatically lock and then an

electronic chirp will sound once and the

turn signal lights will flash once.

& Unlocking the doors

Press the “ ” button to unlock the driver’s

door. An electronic chirp will sound twice

and the turn signal lights will flash twice.

To unlock all doors and the rear gate

(Station wagon), briefly press the “

”

button a second time within 5 seconds.

NOTE

If the interval between the first and

second presses of the “

” button (for

unlocking of all of the doors and the

rear gate) is extremely short, the sys-

tem may not respond.

& Unlocking the trunk lid/rear

gate

! Sedan

The trunk lid unlocks when the “

”

button is pressed continuously for at least

2 seconds. An electronic chirp will sound

twice and the turn signal lights will flash

twice.

! Station wagon

Pressing the “

” button opens the rear

gate.

An electronic chirp will sound twice and

the turn signal lights will flash twice.

& Illuminated entry

Interior lights such as map light and dome

light will illuminate when the “

” button is

Keys and doors 2-9

– CONTINUED –

Black plate (102,1)

北米Model "A2440BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 5/ 7

2-10 Keys and doors

pressed. These lights stay illuminated for

approximately 30 seconds if any of the

doors or the rear gate (Station wagon) is

not opened.

If the “

” button is pressed before 30

seconds have elapsed, these lights will go

out.

To activate this function, set the following

interior light switches to the indicated

positions:

Map light: OFF position

Dome light: Middle position

Cargo area light: DOOR position

A SUBARU dealer can change the illumi-

nation period setting of the interior lights in

accordance with your preference. Contact

the nearest SUBARU dealer for details.

& Vehicle finder function

Use this function to find your vehi cle

parked among many vehicles in a large

parking lot. Provided you are within 30 feet

(10 meters) of the vehicle, pressing the “

”

button three times in a 5-second period

will cause your vehicle’s horn to sound

once and its turn signal lights to flash three

times.

NOTE

If the interval between presses is too

short when you press the “

” button

three times, the system may not re-

spond to the signals from the remote

transmitter.

& Sounding a panic alarm

To activate the alarm, press the “PANIC”

button once.

The horn will sound and the turn signal

lights will flash.

To deactivate the panic alarm, press any

button on the remote transmitter. Unless a

button on the remote transmitter is

pressed, the alarm will be deactivated

after approximately 30 seconds.

& Selecting audible signal op-

eration

Using an electronic chirp, the system will

give you an audible signal when the doors

lock and unlock. If desired, you may turn

the audible signal off.

Do the following to deactivate the audible

signal. You can also use the same steps

to restore the function.

1. Sit in the driver’s seat and shut all

doors and the rear gate.

2. Hold down the UNLOCK side of the

power door locking switch.

3. While holding down the “UNLOCK”

side of the power door locking switch, pull

the key out and re-insert it into the ignition

switch at least 6 times within 10 seconds

after Step 2.

4. Open and close the driver’s door once

within 10 seconds after Step 3.

5. The turn signal lights flash 3 times to

indicate completion of the setting.

You may have the above settings done by

your SUBARU dealer.

& Replacing the battery

CAUTION

. Do not let dust, oil or water get on

or in the transmitter when repla-

cing the battery.

. Be careful not to damage the

printed circuit board in the trans-

Black plate (103,1)

北米Model "A2440BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 5/ 7

mitter when replacing the battery.

. Be careful not to allow children to

touch the battery and any re-

moved parts; chil dren could

swallow them.

If the transmitter fails to operate when

used within the standard distance, this

may indicate a weak battery. Replace the

battery as soon as possible. The battery

can be replaced by your authorized

SUBARU dealer. If you replace the battery

by yourself, use utmost care that no dust,

oil or water enters the transmitter.

To replace the battery:

1. Remove the screw on the transmitter

case.

2. Open the key unit case using a flat-

head screwdriver.

3. Remove the transmitter case.

4. Open the transmitter case.

Keys and doors 2-11

– CONTINUED –

Black plate (104,1)

北米Model "A2440BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 5/ 7

2-12 Keys and doors

1) Negative (−) side facing up

5. Replace the old battery with a new

battery (Type CR1620 or equivalent)

making sure to install the new battery with

the negative (−) side facing up.

6. Refit the removed half of the transmit-

ter case.

7. Reinstall the transmitter case to the

key unit.

After the battery is replaced, the trans-

mitter must be synchronized with the

keyless entry system’s control unit.

Press either the “

” or “ ” button

six

times

to synchronize the unit.

& Replacing lost transmitters

If you lose a transmi tter or want to

purchase additional transmitters (up to

four can be programmed), you should re-

program all of your transmitters for secur-

ity reasons. It is recommended that you

have your dealer program all of your

transmitters into your system.

! Programming the transmitters

The keyless entry system is equipped with

a special code learning feature that allows

you to program new transmitter codes into

the system or to delete old ones. The

systemcanlearnuptofourunique

transmitter codes. The four transmitter

codes may be the same or different.

Programming transmitter codes into

system:

Key unit tag

Transmitter circuit board

To register a new transmitter with the

keyless entry system, it is necessary to

program the transmitter’s code (identifica-

tion number) into the system. A tag

showing the code is affixed to the key

unit, and another is affixed to the circuit

board inside the transmitter. If there is no

tag, open the transmitter case and make a

note of the eight-digit number. Program

the number into the system in accordance

with the following procedure:

1. Firmly close the doors and the rear

gate (Station wagon) or trunk lid (Sedan).

2. Open the driver’sdoor,sitonthe

driver’s seat, and close the door.

3. Perform the following steps within 45

seconds.

Black plate (105,1)

北米Model "A2440BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 5/ 7

(1) Open and close the driver’s door

once.

1) LOCK

2) ON

(2) Insert the key into the ignition

switch, then turn it from the “LOCK”

position to the “ON” position 10 times

within 15 seconds.

NOTE

. When you complete step (2), an

electronic tone will sound once.

. If you do not perform steps (1) and

(2) within 45 seconds, an error will

occur. An electronic tone will not

sound. In this event, perform the whole

procedure again beginning with part 1.

4. Open and close the door once within

15 seconds.

NOTE

. When part 4 of the procedure is

completed, an electronic tone will

sound for 30 seconds.

. If you do not perform the operations

in part 4 within 15 seconds, an error

will occur and the electronic tone will

not sound. In this event, perform the

registration steps again beginning with

part 3 of the procedure.

5. Before the electronic tone stops

sounding, press the power door lock knob

to the “LOCK” side the same number of

times as the leftmost digit of the transmit-

ter code. For example, press the lock knob

eight times if the leftmost digit of the code

is 8.

NOTE

. The electronic tone will stop sound-

ing when you start entering the num-

ber.

. If you do not start entering the

number using the lock knob before

the electronic tone stops sounding, an

error will occur. In this event, perform

the registration steps again beginning

with part 3 of the procedure.

. If the interval between one push of

Keys and doors 2-13

– CONTINUED –

Black plate (106,1)

北米Model "A2440BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 5/ 7

2-14 Keys and doors

the knob and the next exceeds five

seconds, an error will occur. In this

event, perform the procedure again

beginning with part 4. If an error occurs

six times, perform the procedure again

starting with part 3.

6. When you have finished entering the

number, pull the lock knob to the “UN-

LOCK” side within 5 seconds.

NOTE

. An electronic tone will sound.

. If you pull the lock knob to the

“UNLOCK” side when more than 5

seconds have passed, an error will

occur. In this event, perform the proce-

dure again beginning with part 4. If an

error occurs six times, perform the

procedure again starting with part 3.

7. Perform parts 5 and 6 of the procedure

for each of the remaining digits of the

transmitter code beginning with the sec-

ond digit (counting from the left) and

finishing with the eighth digit.

NOTE

. When you finish entering the eighth

digit, an electronic tone will sound for

30 seconds.

. If the interval between one push of

the knob and the next exceeds 5

seconds, an error will occur. In this

event, perform the procedure again

beginning with part 4. If an error occurs

six times, perform the procedure again

starting with part 3.

8. Before the electronic tone stops

sounding, use the power door lock knob

to again enter the transmitter code begin-

ning with the leftmost digit.

NOTE

If you do not start entering the number

using the lock knob before the electro-

nic tone stops sounding, an error will

occur. In this event, perform the proce-

dure again beginning with part 3.

9. When you have finished entering the

code a second time, an electronic tone will

sound for 1 second to indicate completion

of registration, provided the code entered

the second time is identical to that entered

the first time.

NOTE

If the code entered the second time is

not identical to the code entered the

first time, an error will occur. In this

event, perform the procedure again

beginning with part 5. If an error occurs

five times, perform the procedure again

starting with part 3.

10. If you wish to program another trans-

mitter code into the system (up to four

transmitter codes can be programmed into

the system), perform the procedure begin-

ning with part 4. When you have finished

programming all of the necessary trans-

mitter codes into the system, remove the

key from the ignition switch.

11. Test every registered transmitter to

confirm correct operation.

! Deleting old transmitter codes

The control unit of the keyl ess entry

system has four memory locations to store

transmitter codes, giving it the ability to

operate with up to four transmitters. When

you lose a transmitter, the lost transmit-

ter’s code remains in the memory. For

security reasons, lost transmitter codes

should be deleted from the memory.

To delete old transmitter codes, program

Black plate (107,1)

北米Model "A2440BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 5/ 7

four transmitter codes into the system. If

you have only one current transmitter,

program it four times. If you have two

current transmitters, program each one

twice. If you have three current transmit-

ters, program two of them once and the

third one twice. This process will leave

only current transmitter codes in the

system’s memory.

NOTE

Make sure no one else is operating

their keyless entry system within range

of your vehicle when programming

transmitters. If someone else were to

operate their remote transmitter while

you are programming your transmit-

ters, it is possible that their transmitter

code will be programmed into your

system, allowing them unauthorized

access to your vehicle.

Alarm system

The alarm system helps to protect your

vehicle and valuables from theft. The horn

sounds and the turn signal lights flash if

someone attempts to break into your

vehicle.

The system can be armed and disarmed

with the remote transmitter.

The system does not operate when the

key is inserted into the ignition switch.

Your vehicle’s alarm system has been set

for activation at the time of shipment from

the factory. You can set the system for

deactivation yourself or have it done by

your SUBARU dealer.

& System alarm operation

The alarm system will give the following

alarms when triggered:

. The vehicle’s horn will sound and the

turn signal lights will flash for 30 seconds.

. If any door (or the rear gate/trunk lid)

remains open after the 30-second period,

the horn will continue to sound for a

maximum of 3 minutes. If the door (or

the rear gate/trunk lid) is closed while the

horn is sounding, the horn will stop

sounding with a delay of up to 30 seconds.

The alarm is triggered by:

. Opening a door, the rear gate or trunk

lid

. Physical impact to the vehicle, such as

forced entry (only vehicles with shock

sensors (dealer option))

& Activating and deactivating

the alarm system

To change the setting of your vehicle’s

alarm system for activation or deactiva-

tion, do the following.

1. Disarm the alarm system (refer to

“Disarming the system” in this section).

2. Sit in the driver’s seat and shut all

doors (and the rear gate if your vehicle is a

Station wagon).

3. Turn the ignition switch to the “ON”

position.

4. Hold down the UNLOCK side of the

driver’s power door locking switch, open

the driver’s door within the following 1

second, and wait 10 seconds without

releasing the switch. The setting will then

be changed as follows:

If the system was previously activated:

For a vehicle without SI-DRIVE, the

odometer/trip meter screen displays “AL

oF”, and for a vehicle with SI-DRIVE, the

multi-information display shows “Security

Keys and doors 2-15

– CONTINUED –

Black plate (108,1)

北米Model "A2440BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 5/ 7

2-16 Keys and doors

alarm: OFF” and the horn sounds twice,

indicating that the system is now deacti-

vated.

If the system was previously deacti-

vated:

For a vehicle without SI-DRIVE, the

odometer/trip meter screen displays “AL

on”, and for a vehicle with SI-DRIVE, the

multi-information display shows “Security

alarm: ON” and the horn sounds once,

indicating that the system is now acti-

vated.

NOTE

You may have the above setting

change done by your SUBARU dealer.

& If you have accidentally trig-

gered the alarm system

! To stop the alarm

Do any of the following operations:

. Insert the key in the door lock of the

driver’s door and turn it to the unlock

position.

. Press any button on the remote trans-

mitter.

. Turn the ignition switch to the “ON”

position.

& Arming the system

! To arm the system using remote

transmitter

1. Close all windows and the moonroof (if

so equipped).

2. Remove the key from the ignition

switch.

3. Open the doors and get out of the

vehicle.

4. Make sure that the engine hood (and

the trunk lid on the Sedan) are locked.

5. Close all doors (and the rear gate on

the Station wagon).

: Press to Arm the system.

: Press to Disarm the system.

Vehicle with SI-DRIVE

Vehicle without SI-DRIVE

6. Briefly press the “ ” button (for less

than 2 seconds). All doors (and the rear

gate on the Station wagon) will lock, an

electronic chirp will sound once, the turn

Black plate (109,1)

北米Model "A2440BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 5/ 7

signal lights will flash once, and the

indicator lights will start flashing rapidly.

After rapid flashing for 30 seconds (stand-

by time), the indicator lights will then flash

slowly (twice approximately every 2 sec-

onds), indicating that the system has been

armed for surveillance.

If any of the doors, (rear gate or trunk lid)

is not fully closed, an electronic chirp

sounds five times, the turn signal lights

flash five times to alert you that the doors

(or the rear gate) are not properly closed.

When you close the door, the system will

automatically arm and doors will automa-

tically lock.

! To arm the system using power

door locking switches

1. Close all windows.

2. Remove the key from the ignition

switch.

3. Open the doors and get out of the

vehicle.

4. Make sure that the engine hood is

locked.

5. Close the doors (and the rear gate on

the station wagon) but leave only the

driver’s door or the front passenger’s door

open.

6. Push the front side (“LOCK” side) of

the power door locking switch to set the

door locks.

7. Close the door. An electronic chirp will

sound once, the turn signal lights will flash

once and the indicator lights will start

flashing rapidly. After rapid flashing for 30

seconds (standby time), th e indic ator

lights will then flash slowly (twice approxi-

mately every 2 seconds), indicating that

the system has been armed for surveil-

lance.

NOTE

. The system can be armed even if the

engine hood, the windows and/or

moonroofs are opened. Always make

sure that they are fully closed before

arming the system.

. The 30-second standby time can be

eliminated if you prefer. Have it per-

formed by your SUBARU dealer.

. If your vehicle is a Sedan and you

unlock the trunk using the remote

transmitter’s “

” buttonwiththe

alarm system armed, the system will

be temporarily placed in a standby

state. The system will go back to the

surveillance s tate upon locking the

trunk.

. The system is in the standby mode

for a 30-second period after locking the

doors with the remote transmitter. The

security indicator light will flash at

short intervals during this period.

. If any of the following actions is

done during the standby period, the

system will not switch to the surveil-

lance state.

. Doors are unlocked using the

remote transmitter.

. Any door (including the rear gate

of a Station wagon or the trunk of a

Sedan) is opened.

. Ignition switch is turned to the

“ON” position.

Keys and doors 2-17

– CONTINUED –

Black plate (110,1)

北米Model "A2440BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 5/ 7

2-18 Keys and doors

& Disarming the system

Briefly press the “ ” button (for less than

2 seconds) on the remote transmitter. The

driver’s door will unlock, an electronic

chirp will sound twice, the turn signal

lights will flash twice and the indicator

light will go off.

To unlock all other doors and the rear gate

(Station wagon), briefly press the “

”

button a second time within 5 seconds.

NOTE

If the interval between the first and

second presses of the “

” button (for

unlocking of all of the doors and the

rear gate) is extremely short, the sys-

tem may not respond.

Or the system can be disarmed by the

following method, too.

. Insert the key in the door lock of the

driver’s door and turn it to the unlock

position.

! Emergency disarming

If you cannot disarm the system using the

transmitter (i.e. the transmitter is lost,

broken or the transmitter battery is too

weak), you can disarm the system without

using the transmitter.

The system can be disarmed if you turn

the ignition switch from the “LOCK” to the

“ON” position with a registered key.

Insert the key in the door lock of the

driver’s door and turn it to the unlock

position.

& Valet mode

When you choose the valet mode, the

alarm system does not operate. In valet

mode, the remote transmitter is used only

for locking and unlocking the doors and

rear gate (Station wagon) and panic

activation.

To enter the valet mode, change the

setting of your vehicle’s alarm system for

deactivation mode. (Refer to “Activating

and deactivating the alarm system” in this

section.) The security indicator light will

continue to flash once every 3 seconds

indicating that the system is in the valet

mode.

To exit valet mode, change the setting of

your vehicle’s alarm system for activation

mode. (Refer to “Activating and deactivat-

ing the alarm system” in this section.)

& Passive arming

When passive arming mode has been

programmed by the dealer, arming of the

system is automatically accomplished

without using the remote transmitter. Note

that in this mode, DOORS MUST BE

MANUALLY LOCKED.

! To enter the passive mode

If you wish to program the passive arming

mode, have it done by your SUBARU

dealer.

! Arming the system

CAUTION

In passive mode, the system will

automatically activate the alarm but

WILL NOT automatically lock the

doors. In order to lock the doors

you must either lock them as in-

dicated in step 4 below or with the

key once they have been closed.

Failure to lock the doors manually

will result in a higher security risk.

1. Turn the ignition switch to the “ON”

position.

Black plate (111,1)

北米Model "A2440BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 5/ 7

1) LOCK

2) ON

2. Turn the ignition switch from “ON” to

“LOCK” position and remove the key from

the ignition switch.

3. Open the doors and get out of the

vehicle.

4. Before closing the doors, lock all doors

with the inside door lock levers.

5. Close the doors. The syst em will

automatically arm after one minute.

In the passive mode, the system can also

be armed with the remote transmitter or

with the power door locking switches. If

the remote transmitter or power door

locking switch is used to lock the vehicle,

arming will take place immediately regard-

less of whether or not the passive mode

has been selected.

! Disarming the system

To disarm the system, briefly press the

“

” button on the transmitter.

& Tripped sensor identification

The security indicator light flashes when

the alarm system has been triggered.

Also, the number of flashes indicates the

location of unauthorized intrusion or the

severity of impact on the vehicle.

. When the ignition switch is turned to

the “ON” position, the indicator light will

light for 1 second and then flash as

follows:

When a door or rear gate (Station

wagon) was opened: 5 times

When the trunk (Sedan) was opened:

4 times

Whenastrongimpactormultiple

impacts were sensed: twice (only

vehicles with shock sensors (dealer

option))

When a light impact was sensed: once

(only vehicles with shock sensors

(dealer option))

& Shock sensors (dealer op-

tion)

The shock se nsors tri gger the alarm

system when they sense impacts applied

to the vehicle and when any of their

electric wires is cut. The alarm system

causes the horn to sound and the turn

signal lights to flash for a short time when

the sensed impact is weak, but it warns of

Keys and doors 2-19

– CONTINUED –

Black plate (112,1)

北米Model "A2440BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 5/ 7

2-20 Keys and doors

a strong impact or multiple impacts by

sounding the horn and flashing the turn

signal lights, both lasting approximately 30

seconds.

If you desire, your SUBARU dealer can

connect them and set them for activation

or deactivation.

NOTE

. The shock sensors are not always

able to sense impacts caused by break-

ing in, and cannot sense an impact that

does not cause vibration (such as

breaking the gl ass us ing a res cue

hammer).

. The shock sensors may sense vi-

bration like those shown in the follow-

ing and trigger the alarm system.

Select the settings of the alarm system

and shock sensors appropriately de-

pending on where you usually park

your vehicle.

Example:

Vibration from construction site

Vibration in multistory car park

Vibration from trains

. You can have the sensitivity of the

shock sensors adjusted to your pre-

ference by your SUBARU dealer.

Child safety locks

WARNING

Always use the child safety lock

whenever a child rides in the rear

seat. Serious injury could result if a

child accidentally opened the door

and fell out.

Each rear door has a child safety lock that

prevents the doors from being opened

even if the inside door handle is pulled.

When the child safety lock lever is in the

lock position, the door cannot be opened

from inside regardless of the position of

the inner door handle lock lever. The door

can only be opened from the outside.

Windows

& Power windows

WARNING

To avoid serious personal injury

caused by entrapment, you must

do the following.

. When operating the power win-

dows, be extremely careful to

prevent anyone’s fingers, arms,

neck or head from being caught

in the window.

. Always lock the passengers’ win-

dows using the lock switch when

children are riding in the vehicle.

. Before leaving the vehicle, al-

ways remove the key from the

ignition switch for safety and

never allow an unattended child

to remain in the vehicle. Failure

to follow this procedure could

result in injury to a child operat-

ing the power window.

The power windows operate only when

the ignition switch is in the “ON” position.

Black plate (113,1)

北米Model "A2440BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 5/ 7

! Driver’s side switches

1) Lock switch

2) For driver’s window

3) For front passenger’s window

4) For rear left passenger’s window

5) For rear right passenger’s window

All door windows can be controlled by the

power window switch cluster at the driver

side door.

! Operating the driver’s window

1) Open

2) Automatically open

To open:

Push the switch down lightly and hold it.

The window will open as long as the

switch is held.

This switch also has a one-touch auto

down feature that allows the window to be

opened fully without holding the switch.

Push the switch down until it clicks and

release it, and the window will fully open.

To stop the window halfway, pull the

switch up lightly.

To close:

Pull the switch up lightly and hold it. The

window will close as long as the switch is

held.

! Operating the passengers’ windows

Keys and doors 2-21

– CONTINUED –

Black plate (114,1)

北米Model "A2440BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 5/ 7

2-22 Keys and doors

To open the passengers’ windows, push

the appropriate switch down and hold it

until the window reache s the desired

position.

To close the window, pull the switch up

and hold it until it reaches the desired

position.

! Locking the passengers’ windows

To lock the passengers’ windows, push

the lock switch. When the lock switch is in

the “LOCK” position, the passengers’

windows cannot be opened or closed.

Press the switch again to cancel the

passengers’ window locking.

! Passengers’ side switches

Front passenger’s window switch

1) Open

2) Close

To open the window, push the switch

down and hold it until the window reaches

the desired position.

Black plate (115,1)

北米Model "A2440BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 5/ 7

Rear passengers’ window switches

1) Open

2) Close

To close the window, pull the switch up

and hold it until the window reaches the

desired position.

When the lock swi tch on the power

window switch cluster, l ocated on the

driver’s side door, is in the “LOCK”

position, the passengers’ windows cannot

be operated with the passengers’

switches.

Trunk lid (Sedan)

WARNING

. To prevent dangerous exhaust

gas fro m entering the vehicle,

always keep the trunk lid closed

while driving.

. Help prevent young children from

locking themselves in the trunk.

When leaving the vehicle, either

close all windows and lock all

doors or cancel the inside trunk

lid release. Al so make certain

that the trunk is closed. On hot

or sunny days, the temperature

in the trunk could quickly be-

come hi gh enough to cause

death or serious heat-related in-

juries including brain damage to

anyone locked inside, particu-

larly for small children.

& To open and close the trunk

lid from outside

The trunk lid can be opened using the

remote keyless entry system. Refer to

“Remote keyless entry system” section in

this chapter.

To close the trunk lid, lightly press the

trunk lid down until the latch engages.

NOTE

Do not leave your valuables in the

trunk when you leave your vehicle.

& To open the trunk lid from

inside

Pull the trunk lid release lever upward.

Keys and doors 2-23

– CONTINUED –

Black plate (116,1)

北米Model "A2440BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 5/ 7

2-24 Keys and doors

& To lock and unlock the trunk

lid release lever

When you entrust your vehicle key to

another person, you can lock the trunk lid

release lever to prevent luggage in the

trunk from being stolen. To lock the trunk

lid release lever, insert the master key or

submaster key into the key cylinder at the

rear of the release lever and turn it

counterclockwise. To unlock the trunk lid

release lever, turn the key clockwise.

& Internal trunk lid release

handle

The internal trunk lid release handle is a

device designed to open the trunk lid from

inside the trunk. In the event children or

adults become locked inside the trunk, the

handle allows them to open the lid. The

handle is located on the inside of the trunk

lid.

To open the trunk lid from inside the trunk,

press the yellow handle downward as

indicated by the arrow on the handle. This

operation unlocks the trunk lid. Then, push

up the lid.

The handle is made of material that

remains luminescent for approximately

an hour in the dark trunk space after it is

exposed to ambient light even for a short

time.

WARNING

Never allow any child to get in the

trunk and play with t he release

handle. If the driver starts the vehi-

cle without knowing that a child is

inside the trunk and the child opens

the lid using the release handle, the

child could fall out and be killed or

seriously injured.

CAUTION

. Do not close the lid while grip-

ping the release handle. The

handle may be damaged.

. Do not use the handle as a hook

to fasten straps or ropes to

secure your cargo in the trunk.

Such use may result in damage

of the handle.

. Load the trunk so that cargo can

not strike the release handle. If

the cargo hits the handle while

the vehicle is being driven, the

handle may be pushed down and

the trunk lid may open. That may

cause cargo to fall out of the

trunk, which could create a traffic

safety hazard.

Black plate (117,1)

北米Model "A2440BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 5/ 7

! Inspection

Perform the following steps at least twice

a year to check the release handle for

correct operation.

1. Open the trunk lid.

2. Use a screwdriver with a thin blade.

Slide the screwdriver blade from the slit

aperture of the lock assembly fully to the

end until you hear a click.

This places the latch in the locked posi-

tion.

3. Move the release handle, from outside

the vehicle, in the direction of the arrow to

check if the latch is released.

If the latch is not released, contact your

SUBARU dealer.

In that case, use the key to release the

latch, then close the trunk lid.

Also, if the movement of the release

handle feels restricted or not entirely

smooth during operation, or the handle

and/or handle base is cracked, contact

your SUBARU dealer.

Keys and doors 2-25

Black plate (118,1)

北米Model "A2440BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 5/ 7

2-26 Keys and doors

Rear gate (Station wagon)

The rear gate can be locked and unlocked

using either the keyless entry system or

the power door locking switch.

Refer to the “Power door locking switches”

and “Remote keyless entry system” sec-

tion in this chapter.

To open the rear gate, first unlock the rear

gate lock then pull the outside handle up.

To close the rear gate, lower it slowly and

push down firmly until the latch engages.

The rear gate can be lowered easily if you

pull it down holding the recessed grip.

WARNING

. To prevent dangerous exhaust

gas fro m entering the vehicle,

always keep the rear gate closed

while driving.

. Do not attempt to shut the rear

gate while holding the recessed

grip. Also avoid closing the rear

gate by pulling on the recessed

grip from inside the cargo space.

There is a danger of your hand

being caught and injured.

CAUTION

. Do not jam a plastic bag in or

place cellophane tape on the rear

gate stays or scratch the stays

while loading or unloading cargo.

That could cause leakage of gas

from the stays, which may result

in their inability to hold the rear

gate open.

. Be careful not to hit your head or

face on the rear gate when open-

ing or closing the rear gate and

when loading or unloading car-

go.

NOTE

Should the rear gate be unable to be

unlocked due to a discharged battery, a

fault in the doo r locking/unlocking

system or other causes, you can

unlock it by manually operating the

rear gate lock release lever.

For the procedure, refer to “Rear gate

(Station wagon) – if the rear gate

cannot be unlocked” section in chapter

Black plate (119,1)

北米Model "A2440BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 5/ 7

Moonroof (if equipped)

WARNING

. Never let anyone’s hands, arms,

head or any objects protrude

from the moonroof. A person

could be seriously injured if the

vehicle stops suddenly or turns

sharply or if the vehicle is in-

volved in an accident.

To avoid serious personal injury

caused by entrapment, you must

do the following.

. Before closing the moonroof,

make sure that no one’s hands,

arms, head or other objects will

be accidentally caught in the

moonroof.

. Before leaving the vehicle, al-

ways remove the key from the

ignition switch for safety and

never allow an unattended child

to remain in the vehicle. Failure

to follow this procedure could

result in injury to a child operat-

ing the moonroof.

. Never try to check the anti-en-

trapment function by deliberately

placing part of your body in the

moonroof.

CAUTION

. Do not sit on the edge of the open

moonroof.

. Do not operate the moonroof if

falling snow or extremely cold

conditions have caused it to

freeze shut.

. The anti-entrapment function

does not operate when the moon-

roof is being tilted down. Be sure

to confirm that it is safe to do so

before tilting the moonroof down.

The moonroof has both tilting and sliding

functions.

The moonroofs operate only when the

ignition switch is in the “ON” position.

& Tilting/sliding moonroof (Se-

dan)

! Tilt function

1) Tilt up

2) Tilt down

The tilting function will only operate when

the moonroof is fully closed.

Push the rear side of the “Tilt” switch to

raise the moonroof.

Push the front side of the “Tilt” switch to

lower the moonroof.

Release the switch after the moonroof has

been raised or has been lowered com-

pletely. Pushing the switch continuously

may cause damage to the moonroof.

Keys and doors 2-27

– CONTINUED –

Black plate (120,1)

北米Model "A2440BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 5/ 7

2-28 Keys and doors

NOTE

One-touch operation does not take

place when the moonroof is tilted up

and down. Push the switch continu-

ously to tilt the moonroof up and down.

! Sliding function

1) Open

2) Close

Push the “Open/Close” switch rearward to

open the moonroof. The sun shade will

also be opened together with the moon-

roof.

Push the “ Open/Close” switch forward to

close the moonroof. The moonroof will

stop halfway if you continue to press on

the switch. Release the switch once and

push it again to close the moonroof

completely.

To stop the moonroof at a selected mid-

way position while opening or closing it,

momentarily push the switch to the

“OPEN” or “CLOSE” side.

After washing the vehicle or after it rains,

wipe away water on the roof prior to

opening the moonroof to prevent drops

of water from falling into the passenger

compartment.

! Anti-entrapment function

When the moonroof senses an object

trapped between its glass and the vehi-

cle’s roof during closure, it automatically

moves back to either of the following

positions according to the point at which

it senses the object:

. When the moonroof senses the object

at a point between the halfway stop

position and fully closed position, it moves

back to the halfway stop position and

stops there.

. When the moonroof senses the object

at a point between the halfway stop

position and fully open position, it moves

back to the fully open position and stops

there.

The anti-entrapment function may also be

activated by a strong shock on the moon-

roof even when there is nothing trapped.

NOTE

For the sake of safety, it is recom-

mended that you avoid driving with the

moonroof fully opened.

! Sun shade

The sun shade can be slid forward or

backward by hand while the moonroof is

closed.

If the moonroof is opened, the sun shade

also moves back.

& Moonroof (Station wagon)

The front moonroof has a tilting function

and the rear moonroof has a sliding

function.

Both moonroofs operate only when the

ignition switch is in the “ON” position.

Black plate (121,1)

北米Model "A2440BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 5/ 7

! Tilting moonroof

1) Open

2) Close

To tilt up the front moonroof, open the sun

shade and pull the switch to the “OPEN”

side.

To tilt down the front moonroof, push the

switch to the “CLOSE” side, then quickly

release it. If you wish to stop the tilting-

down motion of the front moonroof part-

way, either pull the switch to the “OPEN”

side or push it to the “CLOSE” side.

! Sliding moonroof

1) Open

2) Close

To fully open the rear moonroof, tilt up the

front moonroof then pull the switch to the

“OPEN” side and quickly release it. The

rear moonroof will stop at a position

approximately 6.7 in (17 cm) from its fully

closed position.

After confirming safety, pull the switch to

the “OPEN” side again and quickly release

it. The rear moonroof will open to its fully

open position. To stop the rear moonroof

at some selected mid-way point while it is

moving toward its fully open position,

momentarily push the switch to the

“CLOSE” or “OPEN” side.

To fully close the rear moonroof, push the

switch to the “CLOSE” side then quickly

release it.

The rear moonroof will stop at a position

approximately 5.9 in (15 cm) before its

fully cl osed position. After confirming

safety, pull the switch to the “CLOSE”

side again and quickly release it. The rear

moonroof will fully close. The front moon-

roof can then be fully closed.

! Anti-entrapment function

When the moonroof senses an object

trapped between its glass and during

closure, it automatically moves back by

5.9 in (15 cm) from that point and then

stops. The anti-entrapment function may

also be activated by a strong shock on the

moonroof even when there is nothing

trapped.

NOTE

. For the sake of safety, it is recom-

mended that you avoid driving with the

moonroof fully opened.

. Driving with the moonroof fully open

can cause an annoying sound to gen-

erate at high speeds. If such a condi-

tion has been encountered, use the

moonroof at the initial stop position of

6.7 in (17 cm).

Keys and doors 2-29

– CONTINUED –

Black plate (122,1)

北米Model "A2440BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 5/ 7

2-30 Keys and doors

! Sun shade

The sun shade can be slid forward or

backward by hand while the moonroof is

closed.

If the moonroof is opened, the sun shade

also moves back.

Black plate (5,1)

北米Model "A2440BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 5/ 7

Ignition switch ..................................................... 3-3

LOCK.................................................................. 3-3

Acc ..................................................................... 3-4

ON ...................................................................... 3-4

START ................................................................ 3-4

Key reminder chime ............................................ 3-5

Ignition switch light............................................. 3-5

Hazard warning flasher....................................... 3-5

Meters and gauges (Vehicle with SI-DRIVE)...... 3-5

Combination meter illumination ........................... 3-5

Speedometer....................................................... 3-6

Tachometer ......................................................... 3-6

Fuel gauge.......................................................... 3-6

Temperature gauge ............................................. 3-7

ECO gauge ......................................................... 3-8

Multi-information display

(Vehicle with SI-DRIVE).................................... 3-9

Display ............................................................... 3-9

Operation switch ................................................. 3-9

Odometer and trip meter .................................... 3-10

Current and average fuel consumption ............... 3-11

Outside temperature and journey time ................ 3-12

Driving range on remaining fuel.......................... 3-14

Clock (Vehicle with Navigation System)............... 3-15

SI-DRIVE display ................................................ 3-15

Meter settings .................................................... 3-15

Warning messages and driver’s information........ 3-20

Meters and gauges

(Vehicle without SI-DRIVE) ............................. 3-24

Combination meter illumination .......................... 3-24

Canceling the function for meter/gauge needle

movement upon turning on the ignition

switch ............................................................. 3-24

Speedometer ..................................................... 3-24

Odometer .......................................................... 3-25

Double trip meter............................................... 3-25

Tachometer ....................................................... 3-26

Fuel gauge ........................................................ 3-26

Temperature gauge ............................................ 3-27

Warning and indicator lights............................. 3-28

Seatbelt warning light and chime ....................... 3-29

SRS airbag system warning light........................ 3-30

Front passenger’s frontal airbag ON and OFF

indicators ........................................................ 3-31

CHECK ENGINE warning light/Malfunction

indicator lamp ................................................. 3-31

Charge warning light.......................................... 3-32

Oil pressure warning light .................................. 3-32

AT OIL TEMPerature warning light

(AT models) ..................................................... 3-32

Low tire pressure warning light (U.S.-spec.

models) ........................................................... 3-32

ABS warning light.............................................. 3-34

Brake system warning light................................ 3-35

Low fuel warning light ....................................... 3-35

Door open warning light .................................... 3-36

All-Wheel Drive warning light (AT models) .......... 3-36

Vehicle Dynamics Control operation indicator

light (if equipped)............................................. 3-36

Vehicle Dynamics Control warning light (if

equipped)/Vehicle Dynamics Control OFF

indicator light (if equipped) .............................. 3-37

Instruments and controls

Black plate (6,1)

北米Model "A2440BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 5/ 7

Instruments and controls

Security indicator light ....................................... 3-38

SPORT mode indicator light (4-speed AT models)

(if equipped)..................................................... 3-38

Shift-up indicator light (MT models)

(if equipped)..................................................... 3-38

S# PREP indicator light (if equipped) .................. 3-38

Selector lever position indicator (AT models)

(if equipped)..................................................... 3-39

Gear position indicator (AT models)

(if equipped)..................................................... 3-39

Selector lever and gear position indicator (AT

models) (if equipped)........................................ 3-39

Turn signal indicator lights ................................. 3-39

High beam indicator light ................................... 3-40

Cruise control indicator light .............................. 3-40

Cruise control set indicator light......................... 3-40

Headlight indicator light ..................................... 3-40

Front fog light indicator light .............................. 3-40

Clock (Vehicle without Navigation

System) ............................................................ 3-40

Information display (2.5-liter non-tur bo

model without Navigation System) ................ 3-41

Outside temperature indicator ............................ 3-41

Current fuel consumption ................................... 3-43

Average fuel consumption .................................. 3-43

Driving range on remaining fuel ......................... 3-44

Journey time ..................................................... 3-45

Light control switch........................................... 3-45

Headlights ......................................................... 3-46

High/low beam change (dimmer) ........................ 3-46

Headlight flasher ............................................... 3-46

Daytime running light system ............................. 3-47

Turn signal lever ................................................ 3-47

Illumination brightness control ......................... 3-47

Parking light swit ch........................................... 3-48

Front fog light switch (if equipped) .................. 3-48

Wiper and washer.............................................. 3-49

Windshield wiper and washer switches .............. 3-50

Rear window wiper and washer switch (Station

wagon) ............................................................ 3-52

Windshield wiper deicer (if equipped).............. 3-53

Rear window defogger button .......................... 3-54

Mirrors ................................................................ 3-55

Inside mirror...................................................... 3-55

Auto-dimming mirror/compass (if equipped) ....... 3-55

Outside mirrors ................................................. 3-57

Tilt/telescopic steering wheel ........................... 3-58

Horn.................................................................... 3-59

Black plate (125,1)

北米Model "A2440BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 5/ 7

Ignition switch

WARNING

. Never turn the ignition switch to

“LOCK” while the vehicle is

being driven or towed because

that will lock the steering wheel,

preventing steering control. And

when the engine is turned off, it

takes a much greater effort than

usual to steer.

. Before leaving the vehicle, al-

ways remove the key from the

ignition switch for safety and

never allow an unattended child

to remain in the vehicle. Failure

to follow this procedure could

result in injury to a child or

others. Children could operate

the power windows, the sunroof

or other controls or even make

the vehicle move.

CAUTION

Do not attach a large key holder or

key case to either key. If it banged

against your knees or hands while

you were driving, it could turn the

ignition switch from the “ON” posi-

tion to the “Acc” or “LOCK” posi-

tion, thereby stopping the engine.

Also, if the key is attached to a

keyholder or to a large bunch of

other keys, centrifugal force may act

on it as the vehicle moves, resulting

in unwanted turning of the ignition

switch.

The ignition switch has four positions:

LOCK, Acc, ON and START.

NOTE

. Keep the ignition switch in the

“LOCK” position when the engine is

not running.

. Using electrical accessories for a

long time with the ignition switch in the

“ON” or “Acc” position can cause the

battery to go dead.

. If the ignition switch will not move

from the “LOCK” position to the “Acc”

position, turn the steering wheel

slightly to the left and right as you turn

the ignition switch.

& LOCK

The key can only be inserted or removed

in this position. The ignition switch will lock

the steering wheel when you remove the

key.

If turning the key is difficult, turn the

steering wheel slightly to the right and left

as you turn the key.

! Automatic transmission vehicles

The key can be turned from “Acc” to

“LOCK” only when the selector lever is in

the “P” position.

Instruments and controls 3-3

– CONTINUED –

Black plate (126,1)

北米Model "A2440BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 5/ 7

3-4 Instruments and controls

! Manual transmission vehicles

The key can be turned from “Acc” to

“LOCK” only when the key is pushed in

while turning it.

& Acc

In this position the electrical accessories

(radio, accessory power outlet, etc.) can

be used.

& ON

This is the normal operating position after

the engine is started.

& START

CAUTION

Do not turn the ignition switch to the

“START” position while the engine

is running.

The engine is started in this position. The

starter cranks the engine to start it. When

the key is released (after the engine has

started), the key automatically returns to

the “ON” position.

If your registered key fails to start the

engine, pull out the key once (the security

indicator light will blink), and then insert

the key in the ignition switch and turn it to

the “START” position and again try to start

the engine.

NOTE

The engine may not start in the follow-

ing cases:

. The key grip is touching another key

or a metallic key holder.

. The key is near another key that

contains an immobilizer transponder.

. The key is near or touching another

transmitter.

Black plate (127,1)

北米Model "A2440BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 5/ 7

& Key reminder chime

The reminder chime sounds when the

driver’s door opens and the key is in the

“LOCK” or “Acc” positions. The chime

stops when the key is removed from the

ignition switch.

& Ignition switch light

For easy access to the ignition switch in

the dark, the ignition switch light comes on

when any of the doors are opened. The

light remains on for a several seconds and

gradually goes out after all doors are

closed or if the key is inserted in the

ignition switch.

Hazard warning flasher

The hazard warning flasher is used to

warn other drivers when you have to park

your vehicle under emergency conditions.

The hazard warning flasher works with the

ignition switch in any position.

To turn on the hazard warning flasher,

push the hazard warning button on the

instrument panel. To turn off the flasher,

push the button again.

NOTE

When the hazard warning flasher is on,

the turn signals do not work.

Meters and gauges (Vehicle

with SI-DRIVE)

NOTE

Liquid-crystal displays are used in

some of the meters and gauges in the

combination meter. You will find their

indications hard to see if you wear

polarized glasses.

& Combination meter illumina-

tion

When the ignition switch is turned to the

“ON” position, the various parts of the

combination meter are illuminated in the

following sequence:

1. Meter needles, gauge needles and

multi-information display light up.

2. Meter needles and gauge needles

each show MAX position.

3. Meter needles and gauge needles

each show MIN position.

4. Dials in meters and gauges light up.

5. Regular illumination (for driving) be-

gins.

NOTE

The above sequence of operations may

not take place if you quickly turn the

Instruments and controls 3-5

– CONTINUED –

Black plate (128,1)

北米Model "A2440BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 5/ 7

3-6 Instruments and controls

ignition switch to start the engine. This

is not an indication of a problem.

& Speedometer

The speedome ter shows the vehicle

speed.

& Tachometer

The tachometer shows the engine speed

in thousands of revolutions per minute.

CAUTION

Do not operate the engine with the

pointer of the tachometer in the red

zone. In this range, fuel injection will

be cut by the engine control module

to protect the engine from overrev-

ving. The engine will resume run-

ning normally after the engine speed

is reduced below the red zone.

NOTE (3.0-liter models only)

To protect the engine while the “P” or

“N” position is selected, the engine is

controlled such that the engine speed

does not become too high even if the

accelerator pedal is fully depressed.

& Fuel gauge

The fuel gauge shows the approximate

amount of fuel remaining in the tank.

When the ignition switch is in the “LOCK”

or “Acc” position, the fuel gauge shows “E”

even if the fuel tank contains fuel.

The gauge may move slightly during

braking, turning or acceleration due to fuel

level movement in the tank.

If you press the trip knob while the ignition

switch is in the “LOCK” or “Acc” position,

the fuel gauge’s dial and needle will light

up and the needle will indicate the amount

of fuel remaining in the tank.

If, while the fuel gauge needle is indicating

the amount of fuel remaining in the tank,

you (a) do not press the trip knob for 5

seconds or (b) open and close the driver’s

door, the fuel gauge needle will drop to the

“E” position and the dial and needle will go

off.

The dial of the fuel gauge flashes five

times when the amount of remaining fuel

reaches 2.6 US gal (10 liters, 2.2 lmp gal).

If you turn the ignition switch to the

“LOCK” position and back to the “ON”

position, the dial will again flash five times.

Black plate (129,1)

北米Model "A2440BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 5/ 7

NOTE

You will see the “ ” sign in the fuel

gauge.

This indicates that the fuel filler door

(lid) is located on the right side of the

vehicle.

! Low fuel warning light

1) Low fuel warning light

The low fuel warning light comes on when

the tank is nearly empty [Approximately

2.6 US gal (10 liters, 2.2 lmp gal)].

It only operates when the ignition switch is

in the “ON” position.

NOTE

This light does not go out unless the

tank is replenished up to an internal

fuel quantity of approximately 4.0 US

gal (15 liters, 3.3 lmp gal).

CAUTION

Promptly put fuel in the tank when-

ever the low fuel warning light

comes o n. Engine misfires as a

result of an empty tank could cause

damage to the engine.

& Temperature gauge

1) Normal operating range

The temperature gauge shows engine

coolant temperature when the ignition

switch is in the “ON” position.

The coolant temperature will vary in

accordance with the outside temperature

and driving conditions.

Instruments and controls 3-7

– CONTINUED –

Black plate (130,1)

北米Model "A2440BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 5/ 7

3-8 Instruments and controls

We recommend that you drive moderately

until the pointer of the temperature gauge

reaches near the middle of the range.

Engine operation is optimum with the

engine coolant at this temperature range.

And high revving operation while the

engine is not warmed up enough should

be avoided.

CAUTION

If the pointer exceeds the normal

operating range, safely stop the

vehicle as soon as possible.

Refer to “In case of emergency” in

chapter 9.

& ECO gauge

The ECO gauge shows the difference

between the average rate of fuel con-

sumption and the current rate of fuel

consumption. Using the average rate of

fuel consumption since the trip meter was

last reset, if the current rate of fuel

consumption is higher than the average

rate of fuel consumption, the indicator

needle points to the “+” or right side, and if

the current rate of fuel consumption is

lower than the average rate of f uel

consumption, the indicator needle points

to the “−” or left side. When the indicator

needle is pointing to the “+” or right side, it

indicates fuel-efficient driving.

NOTE

. T he ECO gauge shows only an

approximate indication.

. After resetting the trip meter, the

average rate of fuel consumption is not

shown until driving 0.6 mile (1 km).

Until that time, the ECO gauge does not

operate.

Black plate (131,1)

北米Model "A2440BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 5/ 7

Multi-information display

(Vehicle with SI-DRIVE)

& Display

& Operation switch

CAUTION

To ensure safety, do not attempt to

change the function of the indicator

during driving, as an accident could

result.

1) Next (up)

2) Information display

3) Back (down)

Use the “ ” and “ ” switches to change

the display screen forward and backward.

The “

/SET” switch is used to show the

warning message again after a warning

message has been displayed once, and it

is also used to enter the desired setting

menu.

With the ignition switch in the “ON”

position, each successive push of the

operation switch changes the display in

the following sequence:

*: Only for vehicles equipped with a

navigation system

Instruments and controls 3-9

– CONTINUED –

Black plate (132,1)

北米Model "A2440BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 5/ 7

3-10 Instruments and controls

& Odometer and trip meter

! Odometer

U.S.-spec. models

Canada-spec. models

This indication shows the total distance

that the vehicle has been driven.

If you press the trip knob when the ignition

switch is in the “LOCK” or “Acc” position,

the odometer/trip meter will light up. If you

donotpressthetripknobwithin5

seconds of illumination of the odometer/

trip meter, the odometer/trip meter will go

off.

The odometer/trip meter will also go off if

you open and close the driver’sdoor

within 5 seconds of illumination of the

odometer/trip meter.

! Double trip meter

U.S.-spec. models

Canada-spec. models

This indication shows the distance that the

vehicle has been driven since you last set

it to zero.

To set the trip meter to zero, select the A

trip or B trip meter by pushing the trip knob

and keep the knob pushed for more than 2

seconds.

If you press the trip knob when the ignition

switch is in the “LOCK” or “Acc” position,

the odometer/trip meter will light up. It is

possible to set the trip meter to zero while

the odometer/trip meter is lit up. If you do

not press the trip knob within 5 seconds of

illumination of the odometer/trip meter, the

odometer/trip meter will go off. Also, if you

open and close the driver’s door within 5

seconds of illumination of the odometer/

trip meter, the odometer/trip meter will go

Black plate (133,1)

北米Model "A2440BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 5/ 7

off.

NOTE

If the connection between the combina-

tion meter and battery is broken for any

reason such as vehicle maintenance or

fuse replacement, the data recorded on

the trip meter will be lost.

& Current and average fuel

consumption

U.S.-spec. models

Canada-spec. models

1) Current fuel consumption

2) Average fuel consumption

Current fuel consumption shows the rate

of fuel consumption at the present mo-

ment. Average fuel consumption shows

the average rate of fuel consumption since

the trip meter was last reset.

When the vehicle speed is less than

approximately 6 mph (9.5 km/h), the

current fuel consumption is not displayed.

The displayed number with “A” is the

average fuel consumption corresponding

to the A trip meter indication, and the

displayed number with “B” is the average

fuel consumption corresponding to the B

trip meter indication.

Those A and B i ndications can be

changed by depressing the trip knob.

When either of the trip meter indications is

reset, the correspon ding aver age fuel

consumption value is also reset.

NOTE

. The indicated values vary in accor-

dance with changes in the vehicle’s

running conditions. Also, the indicated

values may differ slightly from the

actual va lues and should thus be

treated only as a guide.

. When either trip meter indication is

reset, the average fuel consumption

corresponding to that trip meter indica-

tion is not shown until the vehicle has

subsequently covered a distance of 1

mile (or 1 km).

Instruments and controls 3-11

– CONTINUED –

Black plate (134,1)

北米Model "A2440BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 5/ 7

3-12 Instruments and controls

& Outside temperature and

journey time

! Outside temperature

U.S.-spec. models

Canada-spec. models

1) Outside temperature

2) Journey time

The indicator shows the outside tempera-

ture in a range from −22 to 1228F(−30 to

508C).

The indicator can give a false reading

under any of the following conditions:

. When there is too much sun.

. During idling; while running at low

speeds in a traffic jam; when the engine

is restarted immediately following a shut-

down.

. When the actual outside temperature

falls outside the specified indicator range.

U.S.-spec. models

Canada-spec. models

When the outside temperature is 378F

(38C) or lower, the display flashes “OUT

TEMP 378F(38 C)” for 3 seconds and

gives a notice to the driver that the road

surface may be frozen. After 3 seconds, it

returns to its original indication of the

outside temperature and journey time.

If the outside temperature drops to 378F

(38C) or lower while the display is giving

an indication other th an the outside

temperature, th e displ ay shows “OUT

TEMP 378F(38C)” for 3 seconds before

returning to its original indication.

If the display is already indicating an

outside temperature of 378F(38C) or lower

when the ignition switch is turned to the

“ON” position, the display does not shows

“OUT TEMP 378F(38C)”.

Black plate (135,1)

北米Model "A2440BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 5/ 7

NOTE

The outside temperature indication

may differ from the actual outside

temperature. The indication “OUT

TEMP 378F(38C)” should be treated

only as a guide. Be sure to check the

condition of the road surface before

driving.

! Journey time

U.S.-spec. models

Canada-spec. models

1) Outside temperature

2) Journey time

The journey time shows the time that has

elapsed since the ignition switch was

turned to the “START” position.

After 2 hours have passed for the journey

time, the display indication flashes “ E/T

2:00” at the center of the display for 3

seconds and gives a notice to the driver to

take a rest. After 3 seconds, it returns to its

original indication of the outside tempera-

ture and journey time.

If you continue to drive your vehicle

without stopping the engine, the display

flashes the journey time for 3 seconds at

the center of the display after each

additional hour has elapsed.

If the display shows an indication other

than the journey time, the display switches

to the journey time for 3 seconds for each

additional hour that has elapsed after the

first 2 hours. After 3 seconds, it returns to

its original indication. However, if the

journey time indication overlaps with an-

other indication, the journey time indica-

tion is shortened.

NOTE

The journey time is reset when the

ignition switch is turned to the “LOCK”

position. It is also reset if the ignition

switch is turned to the “ LOCK” or

“Acc” position prior to restarting of

the engine.

Instruments and controls 3-13

– CONTINUED –

Black plate (136,1)

北米Model "A2440BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 5/ 7

3-14 Instruments and controls

& Driving range on remaining

fuel

U.S.-spec. models

Canada-spec. models

The driving range indicates the distance in

units of 10 miles (10 km) that can be

driven by taking into consideration the fuel

remaining in the tank and the average rate

of fuel consumption over the last 30 miles

(30 km).

U.S.-spec. models

Canada-spec. models

If the driving range is shown as “ ”,

there is only a tiny amount of fuel left in the

tank. You must refuel the vehicle immedi-

ately.

NOTE

The driving range on remaining fuel is

only a guide. The indicated value may

differ from the actual driving range on

remaining fuel, so you must immedi-

ately fill the tank when the low fuel

warning light comes on.

Black plate (137,1)

北米Model "A2440BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 5/ 7

& Clock (Vehicle with Naviga-

tion System)

The clock receives the correct time from

the navigation system. To adjust the time

shown by the clock, refer to the separate

“Operating Instructions for Monitor Sys-

tem” and adjust the time of the navigation

system.

CAUTION

To ensure safety, do not attempt to

set the time during driving, as an

accident could result.

& SI-DRIVE display

1) Sport Sharp (S#) mode

2) Sport (S) mode

3) Intelligent (I) mode

4) Throttle angle

*: This display means that the Sport Sharp

(S#) mode is in the selected condition.

This displ ay ind icate s the c urren t SI-

DRIVE mode with its throttle angle.

For details of SI-DRIVE mode, refer to the

“SI-DRIVE (E xcept 2.5-l iter non-Turbo

models)” section in chapter 7.

& Meter settings

The following items can be set or regis-

tered on the multi-information display as

desired.

. Initial movements of the meter/gauge

needles

. Present date & time

. Birthday

. Anniversary

Within 12 seconds after turning on the

ignition switch, press the “

/SET” switch

for at least 2 seconds.

The display can be switched as shown

below by pressing the “

” or “ ” switch.

*: “Present date & time”, “Birthday” and

“Anniversary” can be registered in the

“Date/Time” setting menu.

Refer to the following procedure for further

steps.

! Initial movement setting

It is possible to activate or deactivate the

initial movement of the meter needles and

gauge needles that takes place when the

ignition switch is turned to the “ON”

position.

Instruments and controls 3-15

– CONTINUED –

Black plate (138,1)

北米Model "A2440BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 5/ 7

3-16 Instruments and controls

To change the current setting, take the

following steps.

1. Within 12 seconds after turning on the

ignition switch, press the “

/SET” switch

for at least 2 seconds.

2. The display shows “ METER

SETTING”, and then changes to the

setting screen.

3. When the setting screen is displayed,

select “Initial movement” by pressing the

“

” or “ ” switch. And press the “ /

SET” switch to enter the setting process.

4. Select “ON” for activated initial move-

ment or “OFF” for deactivated initial move-

ment by pressing the “

” or “ ” switch.

And press the “

/SET” switch to decide

the desired setting.

If you do not need to change the previous

setting, select “

” and press the “ /SET”

switch.

5. Select “End” by pressing the “ ” or

“

” switch. And press the “ /SET” switch

to finish the meter setting menu.

NOTE

. Your vehi cle’s initial movement

setting of the meter/gauge needles

has been set for activation “ON” at

the time of shipment from the factory.

. If you turn the ignition switch to the

“Acc” position, turn the ignition switch

to the “LOCK” position, or open and

close the driver’s door during the

setting procedure, the new setting will

be canceled.

. It is not possible to cancel sequen-

tial illumination of the combination

meter while sequential illumination is

actually taking place. Cancel sequen-

Black plate (139,1)

北米Model "A2440BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 5/ 7

tial illumination when regular illumina-

tion (for driving) has begun.

! Date/Time settings

The following items can be set or regis-

tered in the “Date/Time” setting menu.

. Present date & time

. Birthday

. Anniversary

NOTE

To enter “Birthday” and “Anniversary”,

“Present date & time” must be set.

To enter the “Date/Time” setting menu,

take the following steps.

1. Within 12 seconds after turning on the

ignition switch, press the “

/SET” switch

for at least 2 seconds.

2. The display shows “ METER

SETTING”, and then changes to the

setting screen.

3. When the setting screen is displayed,

select “Date/Time” by pressing the “

” or

“

” switch. And press the “ /SET” switch

to enter the “Date/Time” settings.

After the Date/Time setting screen has

been d isplayed, the dis play can be

switched as shown below by pressing

the “

” or “ ” switch.

Refer to the following procedure for further

steps.

! Present date & time

1. Press “

” or “ ” until “Present date &

time” is displayed, and press “

/SET”.

Instruments and controls 3-17

– CONTINUED –

Black plate (140,1)

北米Model "A2440BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 5/ 7

3-18 Instruments and controls

2. Select an item that you desire to set

with “

” and “ ” , and press “ /SET”.

3. Select a value for the setting item with

“

” and “ ”, and confirm the setting with

“

/SET”.

4. Repeat step 3 to enter the date and

time. When completed, select “OK”, and

press “

/SET”.

! Birthday

1. Press “

” or “ ” until “Birthday” is

displayed, and press “

/SET”.

2. Select an item that you desire to set

with “

” and “ ”, and press “ /SET ” .

3. Select a value for the setting item with

“

” and “ ”, and confirm the setting with

“

/SET”.

4. Repeat step 3 to enter the date and

time. When completed, select “OK” and

press “

/SET”.

When a birthday is registered and the date

that was set nears, a message is dis-

played when the ignition switch is turned

on.

Black plate (141,1)

北米Model "A2440BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 5/ 7

From a week before to the day before

On the date that was set

! Anniversary

1. Press “

” or “ ” until “Anniversary” is

displayed and press “

/SET”.

2. Select an item that you desire to set

with “

” and “ ”, and press “ /SET ” .

3. Select a value for the setting item with

“

” and “ ”, and confirm the setting with

“

/SET”.

4. Repeat step 3 to enter the date and

time. When completed, select “OK”, and

press “

/SET”.

When an anniversary is registered and the

date that was set nears, a message is

displayed when the ignition switch is

turned on.

From a week before to the day before

Instruments and controls

3-19

– CONTINUED –

Black plate (142,1)

北米Model "A2440BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 5/ 7

3-20 Instruments and controls

On the date that was set

! Clear all dates

1. Press “

” or “ ” until “Clear all dates”

is displayed and press “

/SET”.

2. Select “YES” or “NO” and press “ /

SET”.

NOTE

When “YES” is selected, the dates for

“Birthday” and “Anniversary” can be

reset. Note that “Present date & time”

will not be reset.

& Warning messages and dri-

ver’s information

When the following safety warning or

driver’s information occurs, the interrup-

tive message will be indicated on the

display.

U.S.-spec. models

Black plate (143,1)

北米Model "A2440BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 5/ 7

Canada-spec. models

The display shows the interruptive mes-

sage for 3 seconds and then returns to its

original display. At this time, the specified

warning message leaves the “

” mark on

the lower left side of the display. When the

“

” mark is indicated, it is possible to

display the warning message again by

pressing the “

/SET” switch.

If the interruptive message overlaps with

another indication, the interruptive mes-

sage is shortened.

Instruments and controls 3-21

– CONTINUED –

Black plate (144,1)

北米Model "A2440BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 5/ 7

3-22 Instruments and controls

Warning messages Details

Door open warning

When any of the doors, the rear gate (Station wagon) or the trunk lid

(Sedan) is not fully closed, it is indicated by the corresponding part of the

door light.

Always make sure this warning message is out before you start to drive.

The display shows the interruptive warning message for 3 seconds.

Parking brake warning

This warning message comes on with the parking brake applied while the

ignition switch is in the “ON” position. It goes out when the parking brake is

fully released.

The display shows the interruptive warning message for 3 seconds and

then returns to its original display. The interruptive warning message will be

displayed again after 20 seconds.

Run mode change system warning

This warning message indicates a malfunction of the “SI-DRIVE mode”

change. If this warning message is shown on the display, contact your

nearest SUBARU dealer and have the SI-DRIVE mode system inspected.

The display shows the interruptive warning message for 3 seconds.

Engine coolant temperature warning

When the engine coolant temperature reaches 2488F (1208C), this warning

message is indicated. If this warning message is displayed, refer to the

“

Engine overheating” section in chapter 9 for details the necessary measures.

The display shows the interruptive warning message for 3 seconds.

Black plate (145,1)

北米Model "A2440BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 5/ 7

Driver’s information Details

Low temperature information

This message is displayed when the outside temperature is 378F(38C).

When this message appears on the display, be careful because the road

surface may be frozen. For details of this indication, refer to the “

Outside

temperature and journey time” section in this chapter.

Rest information

This message shows that the continuous driving time has reached 2 hours,

and a notice is displayed to take a rest. If you continue to drive the vehicle

without stopping the engine, the display is indicated after every hour that

has elapsed. For details of this indication, refer to the “

Outside temperature

and journey time” section in this chapter.

Instruments and controls 3-23

Black plate (146,1)

北米Model "A2440BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 5/ 7

3-24 Instruments and controls

Meters and gauges (Vehicle

without SI-DRIVE)

NOTE

Liquid-crystal displays are used in

some of the meters and gauges in the

combination meter. You will find their

indications hard to see if you wear

polarized glasses.

& Combination meter illumina-

tion

When the ignition switch is turned to the

“ON” position, the various parts of the

combination meter are illuminated in the

following sequence:

1. Combination meter dials light up.

2. Meter needles and gauge needles

each show MAX position.

3. Meter needles and gauge needles

each show MIN position.

4. Regular illumination (for driving) be-

gins.

NOTE

The above sequence of operations may

not take place if you quickly turn the

ignition switch to start the engine. This

is not an abnormality.

& Canceling the function for

meter/gauge needle move-

ment upon turning on the

ignition switch

It is possible to activate or deactivate the

movement of th e mete r needl es and

gauge needles that takes place when the

ignition switch is turned to the “ON”

position.

Turn the ignition switch to the “Acc”

position. With the A trip meter indication

selected, briefly press the trip knob twice.

You can now establis h the activa ted/

deactivated setting for movement of the

meter needles and gauge needles. To

change the current setting, press the trip

knob for at least 2 seconds.

: Activated

: Deactivated

Briefly press the knob to return to the A trip

meter indication.

If you turn the ignition switch to the

“LOCK” position, turn the ignition switch

to the “ON” position, or open and close the

driver’s door during the setting procedure,

the new setting will be canceled. Also, if

you do not press the trip knob for a period

of 10 seconds, the new setting will be

canceled.

NOTE

It is not possible to cancel sequential

illumination of the combination meter

while sequential illumination is actually

taking place. Cancel sequential illumi-

nation when regular illumination (for

driving) has begun.

& Speedometer

The speedo meter shows the veh icle

speed.

Black plate (147,1)

北米Model "A2440BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 5/ 7

& Odometer

This meter displays the odometer when

the ignition switch is in the “LOCK”, “Acc”

or “ON” position.

The odometer shows the total distance

that the vehicle has been driven.

If you press the trip knob when the ignition

switch is in the “LOCK” position, the

odometer/trip meter will light up. If you

do not press the trip knob within 10

seconds of illumination of the odometer/

trip meter, the odometer/trip meter will go

off.

Also, if you open and close the driver’s

door within 10 seconds of illumination of

the odometer/trip meter, the odometer/trip

meter will go off.

& Double trip meter

This meter displays the two trip meters

when the ignition switch is in the “LOCK”,

“Acc” or “ON” position.

The trip meter shows the distance that the

vehicle has been driven since you last set

it to zero.

To change the mode indication, briefly

push the knob.

Each press of the knob changes the mode

indication alternately.

To set the trip meter to zero, select the A

trip or B trip meter by pushing the knob

and keep the knob pushed for more than 2

seconds.

If you press the trip knob when the ignition

switch is in the “LOCK” position, the

odometer/trip meter will light up. It is

possible to switch between the A trip

meter and B trip meter indications while

the odometer/trip meter is lit up. If you do

not press the trip knob within 10 seconds

of illumination of the odometer/trip meter,

the odometer/trip meter will go off.

Also, if you open and close the driver’s

door within 10 seconds of illumination of

the odometer/trip meter, the odometer/trip

meter will go off.

CAUTION

To ensure safety, do not attempt to

change the function of the indicator

during driving, as an accident could

result.

NOTE

If the connection between the combina-

tion meter and battery is broken for any

reason such as vehicle maintenance or

fuse replacement, the data recorded on

the trip meter will be lost.

Instruments and controls 3-25

– CONTINUED –

Black plate (148,1)

北米Model "A2440BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 5/ 7

3-26 Instruments and controls

! Vehicle communication system

fault indication

The vehicle communication system car-

ries various types of information (vehicle

speed, running conditions, etc.) to control

modules. In the event of a fault in this

communication system, the trip meter will

show “

”.

If the trip meter shows “

”, immediately

contact the nearest SUBARU dealer and

have the vehicle communication system

inspected.

NOTE

If you press the trip knob while the trip

meter is showing “

”, the trip meter

indication will appear for 10 seconds.

& Tachometer

The tachometer shows the engine speed

in thousands of revolutions per minute.

CAUTION

Do not operate the engine with the

pointer of the tachometer in the red

zone. In this range, fuel injection will

be cut by the engine control module

to protect the engine from overrev-

ving. The engine will resume run-

ning normally after the engine speed

is reduced below the red zone.

& Fuel gauge

The fuel gauge shows the approximate

amount of fuel remaining in the tank.

The gauge does not return to “E” even

though the ignition switch is in the “Acc” or

“LOCK” position.

The gauge may move slightly during

braking, turning or acceleration due to fuel

level movement in the tank.

If you press the trip knob while the ignition

switch is in the “LOCK” position, the fuel

gauge’s dial will light up and the needle

will indicate the amount of fuel remaining

in the tank.

If, while the fuel gauge needle is indicating

the amount of fuel remaining in the tank,

you (a) do not press the trip knob for 10

seconds or (b) open and close the driver’s

Black plate (149,1)

北米Model "A2440BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 5/ 7

door, the fuel gauge needle will drop to the

“E” position and the dial, needle, and rim

will go off.

NOTE

You will see the “ ” sign in the fuel

gauge.

This indicates that the fuel filler door

(lid) is located on the right side of the

vehicle.

! Low fuel warning light

1) Low fuel warning light

The low fuel warning light comes on when

the tank is nearly empty [Approximately

2.6 US gal (10 liters, 2.2 lmp gal)].

It only operates when the ignition switch is

in the “ON” position.

NOTE

This light does not go out unless the

tank is replenished up to an internal

fuel quantity of approximately 4.0 US

gal (15 liters, 3,3 lmp gal).

CAUTION

Promptly put fuel in the tank when-

ever the low fuel warning light

comes o n. Engine misfires as a

result of an empty tank could cause

damage to the engine.

& Temperature gauge

1) Normal operating range

The temperature gauge shows engine

coolant temperature when the ignition

switch is in the “ON” position.

The coolant temperature will vary in

accordance with the outside temperature

and driving conditions.

Instruments and controls 3-27

– CONTINUED –

Black plate (150,1)

北米Model "A2440BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 5/ 7

3-28 Instruments and controls

We recommend that you drive moderately

until the pointer of the temperature gauge

reaches near the middle of the range.

Engine operation is optimum with the

engine coolant at this temperature range.

Also, high revving operation while the

engine is not sufficiently warmed up

should be avoided.

CAUTION

If the pointer exceeds the normal

operating range, safely stop the

vehicle as soon as possible.

Refer to “In case of emergency” in

chapter 9.

Warning and indicator lights

Several of the warning and indicator lights

come on momentarily and then go out

when the ignition switch is initially turned

to the “ON” position. This permits check-

ing the operation of the bulbs.

Apply the parking brake and turn the

ignition switch to the “ON” position. The

following lights come on:

: Seatbelt warning light

(The seatbelt warning light goes out only

when the driver fastens the seatbelt.)

: Front passenger’s seatbelt warning

light

(The seatbelt warning light goes out only

when the front seat passenger fastens the

seatbelt.)

: SRS airbag system warning light

: CHECK ENGINE warning light/Mal-

function indicator lamp

: Charge warning light

: Oil pressure warning light

: AT OIL temperature warning light (AT

models)

/ : ABS warning light

: Vehicle Dynamics Control operation

indicator light (if equipped)

: Vehicle Dynamics Control warning light

(if equipped)/Vehicle Dynamics Control

OFF indicator light (if equipped)

/ : Brake system warning light

: All-Wheel Drive warning light (AT

models)

: Low tire pressure warning light (if

equipped)

: SPORT mode indicator light (AT

models) (if equipped)

/ : Front passenger’s frontal airbag

ON indicator light

/ : Front passenger’s frontal airbag

OFF indicator light

or : Low fuel warning light

or : Door open warning light

: Cruise control indicator light

: Cruise control set indicator light

: Shift-up indicator light (MT models) (if

equipped)

: S# PREP indicator light (if equipped)

If any lights fail to come on, it indicates a

burned-out bulb or a malfunction of the

Black plate (151,1)

北米Model "A2440BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 5/ 7

corresponding system.

Consult your authorized SUBARU dealer

for repair.

& Seatbelt warning light

and chime

Your vehicle is equipped with a seatbelt

warning device at the driver’s and front

passenger’s seat, as required by current

safety standards.

With the ignition switch turned to the “ON”

position, this device reminds the driver

and front passenger to fasten their seat-

belts by illuminating the warning lights in

the locations indicated in the following

illustration and sounding a chime.

Driver’s warning light (Vehicle with SI-

DRIVE)

Driver’s warning light (Vehicle without SI-

DRIVE)

Front passenger’s warning light

! Operation

If the driver and/or front passenger have/

has not yet fastened the seatbelt(s) when

the ignition switch is turned to the “ON”

position, the seatbelt warning light(s) will

flash for 6 seconds, to warn that the

seatbelt(s) is/are unfastened. If the dri-

ver’s seatbelt is not fastened, a chime will

also sound simultaneously.

NOTE

. If the driver’s and/or front passen-

ger’s seatbelt(s) are/is still not fastened

6 seconds later, the seatbelt warning

device operates as follows according

to the vehicle speed.

. At speeds lower than approxi-

mately 9 mph (15 km/h)

The warning light(s) for unfastened

seatbelt(s) will alt ernate between

steady illumination and flashing at

15-second intervals. The chime will

not sound.

. At speeds higher than approxi-

mately 9 mph (15 km/h)

The warning light(s) for unfastened

seatbelt(s) will alt ernate between

flashing and steady illumination at

15-second intervals and the chime

will sound while the warning light(s)

is/are flashing.

. It is possible to cancel the warning

operation that follows the 6-second

warning after turning ON the ignition

Instruments and controls 3-29

– CONTINUED –

Black plate (152,1)

北米Model "A2440BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 5/ 7

3-30 Instruments and controls

switch . When the ignition switch is

turned ON next time, however, the

complete sequence of the warning

operation resumes. For further details

about canceling the warning operation,

please contact your SUBARU dealer.

If there is no passenger on the front

passenger’s seat, the seatbelt warning

device for the front passenger’s seat will

be deactivated. The front passenger’s

occupant detection system monitors

whether or not there is a passenger on

the front passenger’s seat. Observe the

following precautions. Failure to do so

may prevent the device from functioning

correctly or cause the device to fail.

. Do not install any accessory such as a

table or TV onto the seatback.

. Do not store a heavy load in the

seatback pocket.

. Do not allow the rear seat occupant to

place his/her hands or legs on the front

passenger’s seatback, or allow him/her to

pull the seatback.

. Do not use front seats with their back-

ward-forward position and seatback not

being locked into place securely. If any of

them are not locked securely, adjust them

again. For adjusting procedure, refer to

the “Manual seat” in the front seats section

in chapter 1 in this O wner’s Manual.

(Models equipped with manual seats only)

If the seatbelt warning device for the front

passenger’s seat does not function cor-

rectly (e.g., it is activated even when the

front passenger’s seat is empty or it is

deactivated even when the front passen-

ger has not fastened his/her seatbelt),

take the following actions.

. Ensure that no article is placed on the

seat other than a child restraint system

and its child occupant.

. Ensure that there is no article left in the

seatback pocket.

. Ensure that the backward-forward po-

sition and seatback of front passenger’s

seat are locked into place securely by

moving the seat back and forth. (Models

equipped with manual seats only)

If still the seatbelt warning device for front

passenger’s seat does not function cor-

rectly after taking relevant corrective ac-

tions described above, immediately con-

tact your SUBARU dealer for an inspec-

tion.

& SRS airbag system

warning light

When the ignition switch is turned to the

“ON” position, the SRS airbag system

warning light will come on for approxi-

mately 7 seconds and go out. This shows

the SRS frontal airbag and SRS side

airbag and SRS curtain airbag and seat-

belt pretensioners are in normal operation.

WARNING

If the warning light exhibits any of

the following conditions, there may

be a malfunction in the seatbelt

pretensioners and/or SRS airbag

system. Immediately take your vehi-

cle to your nearest SUBARU dealer

to have the system checked. Unless

checked and properly repaired, the

seatbelt pretensioners and/or SRS

airbags will operate improperly (e.g.

SRS airbags may inflate in a very

minor collision or not inflate in a

severe collision), which m ay in-

crease the risk of injury.

. Flashing or flickering of the warn-

ing light

. No illumination of the warning

light when the ignition switch is

first turned to the “ON” position

. Continuous illumination of the

warning light

. Illumination of the warning light

while driving

Black plate (153,1)

北米Model "A2440BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 5/ 7

& Front passenger’s frontal

airbag ON and OFF indica-

tors

or : Front passenger’s frontal airbag

ON indicator

or : Front passenger’s frontal airbag

OFF indicator

The front passenger’s frontal airbag ON

and OFF indicators show you the status of

the front passenger’s SRS frontal airbag.

The indicators are located between the

map lights.

When the ignition switch is turned to the

“ON” position, both the ON and OFF

indicators illuminate for 6 seconds during

which time the system is checked. Follow-

ing the system chec k, both indicators

extinguish for 2 seconds. After that, one

of the indicators illuminates depending on

the status of the front passenger’s SRS

frontal airbag determined by the Subaru

advanced frontal airbag system monitor-

ing.

If the front passenger’s SRS frontal airbag

is activated, the passenger’s frontal airbag

ON indicator will illuminate while the OFF

indicator will remain extinguished.

If the front passenger’s SRS frontal airbag

is deactivated, the passenger’sfrontal

airbag ON indicator will remain extin-

guished whi le the OFF indicator will

illuminate.

If both the ON and OFF indicators remain

lit or extinguished si multane ously, the

system is faulty. Contact your SUBARU

dealer immediately for an inspection.

& CHECK ENGINE warn-

ing light/Malfunction

indicator lamp

CAUTION

If the CHECK ENGINE warning light/

malfunction indicator lamp comes

on while you are driving, have your

vehicle checked/repaired by your

SUBARU dealer as soon as possi-

ble. Continued vehicle operation

without having the emission control

system checked and repaired as

necessary could cause serious da-

mage, which may not be covered by

your vehicle’s warranty.

If this light comes on steadily or blinks

while the engine is running, it may indicate

that th ere is a problem or pote ntial

problem somewhere in the emission con-

trol system.

! If the light comes on steadily:

If the light comes on steadily while driving

or does not go out after the engine starts,

an emission control system malfunction

has been detected.

You should have your vehicle checked by

an authorized SUBARU dealer immedi-

ately.

NOTE

This light also comes on when the fuel

filler cap is not tightened until it clicks.

If you have recently refueled your vehicle,

the cause of the CHECK ENGINE warning

light/malfunction indicator lamp coming on

could be a loose or missing fuel filler cap.

Remove the cap and retighten it until it

clicks. Make sure nothing is interfering

with the sealing of the cap. Tightening the

cap will not make the CHECK ENGINE

warning light/malfunction indicator lamp

Instruments and controls 3-31

– CONTINUED –

Black plate (154,1)

北米Model "A2440BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 5/ 7

3-32 Instruments and controls

turn off immediately. It may take several

driving trips. If the light does not go out,

take your vehicle to y our authorized

SUBARU dealer immediately.

! If the light is blinking:

If the light is blinking while driving, an

engine misfire condition has been de-

tected which may damage the emission

control system.

To prevent serious damage to the emis-

sion control system, you should do the

following.

. Reduce vehicle speed.

. Avoid hard acceleration.

. Avoid steep uphill grades.

. Reduce the amount of cargo, if possi-

ble.

. Stop towing a t railer as soon as

possible.

The CHECK ENGINE warning light/mal-

function indicator lamp may stop blinking

and come on steadily after several driving

trips. You should have your vehicle

checked by an authorized SUBARU deal-

er immediately.

& Charge warning light

If this light comes on when the engine is

running, it may indicate that the charging

system is not working properly.

If the light comes on while driving or does

not go out after the engine starts, stop the

engine at the first safe opportunity and

check the alternator belt. If the belt is

loose, broken or if the belt is in good

condition but the light remains on, contact

your nearest SUBARU dealer immedi-

ately.

& Oil pressure warning

light

CAUTION

Do not operate the engine with the

oil pressure warning light on. This

may cause serious engine damage.

If this light comes on when the engine is

running, it may indicate that the engine oil

pressure is low and the lubricating system

is not working properly.

If the light comes on while driving or does

not go out after the engine starts, stop the

engine at the first safe opportunity and

check the engine oil level. If the oil level is

low, add oil immediately. If the engine oil is

at the proper level but the light remains on,

contact your nea rest S UBA RU de aler

immediately.

& AT OIL TEMPerature

warning light (AT mod-

els)

The AT oil temperature warning light

comes on when the ignition switch is

turned to the “ON” position and goes out

after approximately 2 seconds.

If this light comes on when the engine is

running, it may indicate that the automatic

transmission fluid temperature is too hot.

If the light comes on while driving,

immediately stop the vehicle in a safe

place and let the engine idle until the

warning light goes off.

! Automatic transmission control

system warning

If the light flashes after the engine starts, it

may indicate that the automatic transmis-

sion control system is not working prop-

erly. Contact your nearest SUBARU deal-

er for service immediately.

& Low tire pressure

warning light (U.S.-spec.

models)

When the ignition switch is turned to the

“ON” position, the low tire pressure warn-

ing light will come on for approximately 2

seconds to check that the tire pressure

monitoring system (TPMS) is functioning

Black plate (155,1)

北米Model "A2440BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 5/ 7

properly. If there is no problem and all tires

are properly inflated, the light will go out.

Each tire, including the spare (if provided),

should be checked monthly when cold

and inflated to the inflation pressure

recommended by the vehicle manufac-

turer on the vehicle placard or tire inflation

pressure label. (If your vehicle has tires of

a different size than the size indicated on

the vehicle placard or tire inflation pres-

sure label, you should determine the

proper inflation pressure for those tires.)

As an added safety feature, your vehicle

has been equipped with a tire pressure

monitoring system (TPMS) that illuminates

a low tire pressure telltale when one or

more of your tires is significantly under-

inflated. Accordingly, when the low tire

pressure telltale illuminates, you should

stop and check your tires as soon as

possible, and inflate them to the proper

pressure. Driving on a significantly under-

inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and

can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also

reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life,

and may affect the vehicle’s handling and

stopping ability.

Please note t hat the TPMS is not a

subst itute for proper tire ma intenance,

and it is the drive r’s responsi bili ty to

maintain correct tire pressure, even if

under-inflation has not reached the level

to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire

pressure telltale.

Your vehicle has also been equipped with

a TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate

when the system is not operating properly.

The TPMS malfunction indicator is com-

bined with the low tire pressure telltale.

When the system detects a malfunction,

the telltale will flash for approximately one

minute and then remain contin uously

illuminated. This sequence will continue

upon subsequent vehicle start-ups as long

as the malfun ction exists. When the

malfunction indicator is illuminated, the

system may not be able to detect or signal

low tire pressure as intended. TPMS

malfunctions may occur for a variety of

reasons, including the installation of re-

placement or alternate tires or wheels on

the vehicle that prevent the TPMS from

functioning properly. Always check the

TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing

one or more tir es or wh eels on your

vehicle to ensure that the replacement or

alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS

to continue to function properly.

Should the warning light illuminate stea-

dily after blinking for approximately one

minute, have the system inspected by

your nearest SUBARU dealer as soon as

possible.

WARNING

If this light does not come on briefly

after the ignition switch is turned ON

or the light illuminates steadily after

blinking for approximately one min-

ute, you should have your Tire

Pressure Monitoring System

checked at a SUBARU dealer as

soon as possible.

If this light comes on while driving,

never brake suddenly and k eep

driving straight ahead while gradu-

ally reducing speed. Then slowly

pull off the road to a safe place.

Otherwise an accident involving

serious vehicle damage and serious

personal injury could occur.

If this light still comes on while

driving after adjusting the tire pres-

sure, a tire may have significant

damage and a fast leak that causes

the tire to lose air rapidly. If you have

a flat tire, replace it with a spare tire

as soon as possible.

When a spare tire is mounted or a

wheel rim is replaced without the

original pressure sensor/transmitter

being transferred, the Low tire pres-

sure warning light will illuminates

steadily after blinking for approxi-

mately one minute. This indicates

Instruments and controls 3-33

– CONTINUED –

Black plate (156,1)

北米Model "A2440BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 5/ 7

3-34 Instruments and controls

the TPMS is unable to monitor all

four road wheels. Contact your

SUBARU dealer as soon as possible

for tire and sensor replacement and/

or system resetting. If the light

illuminates steadily after blinking

for approximately one minute,

promptly contact a SUBARU dealer

to have the system inspected.

CAUTION

The tire pressure monitoring system

is NOT a substitute for manually

checking tire pressure. The tire

pressure should be checked peri-

odically (at least monthly) using a

tire gauge. After any change to tire

pressure(s), the tire pressure mon-

itoring system will not re-check tire

inflation pressures until the vehicle

is first driven more than 20 mph (32

km/h). After adjusting the tire pres-

sures, increase the vehicle speed to

at least 20 mph (32 km/h) to start the

TPMS re-checking of the tire infla-

tion pressures. If the tire pressures

are now above the severe l ow

pressure threshold, the low tire

pressure warning light should go

off a few minutes later. Therefore, be

sure to install the specified size for

the front and rear tires.

& ABS warning light

The ABS warning light comes on when the

ignition switch is turned to the “ON”

position and goes out after approximately

2 seconds.

This is an indication that the ABS system

is working properly.

CAUTION

If the warning light behaves as

follows, the ABS system may not

work properly.

When the warning light is on, the

ABS function shuts down; however,

the conventional brake system con-

tinues to operate normally.

. The warning light does not come

on when the ignition switch is

turned to the “ON” position.

. The warning light comes on when

the ignition switch is turned to

the “ON” position, but it does not

go out even when the vehicle

speed exceeds approximately 8

mph (12 km/h).

. The warning light comes on dur-

ing driving.

If any of these conditions occur,

have the ABS system repaired at

the first available opportunity by

your SUBARU dealer.

The ABS warning light comes on together

with the brake system warning light if the

EBD system becomes faulty. For further

details of the EBD system fault warning,

refer to “Brake system warning light”.

NOTE

If the warning light behavior is as

described in the following, the ABS

system may be considered normal.

. The warning light comes on right

after the engine is started but goes out

immediately, remaining off.

. The warning light remains on after

the engine has been started, but it goes

out when the vehicle speed reaches

approximately 8 mph (12 km/h).

. The warning light comes on during

driving, but it goes out immediately and

remains off.

When driving with an insufficient battery

voltage such as when the engine is jump

started, the ABS warning light may come

on. This is due to the low battery voltage

and does not indicate a malfunction.

When the battery becomes fully charged,

the light will go out.

Black plate (157,1)

北米Model "A2440BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 5/ 7

& Brake system

warning light

WARNING

. Driving with the brake system

warning light on is dangerous.

This indicates your brake system

may not be working properly. If

the light remains on, have the

brakes inspected by a SUBARU

dealer immediately.

. If at all in doubt about whether

the brakes are operating prop-

erly, do not drive the vehicle.

Have your vehicle towed to the

nearest SUBARU dealer for re-

pair.

This light has the following three functions:

! Parking brake warning

The light comes on with the parking brake

applied while the ignition switch is in the

“ON ” position. It goes out when the

parking brake is fully released.

! Brake fluid level warning

This light comes on when the brake fluid

level has dropped to near the “MIN” level

of the brake fluid reservoir with the ignition

switch in the “ON” position and with the

parking brake fully released.

If the brake system warning light should

come on while driving (with the parking

brake fully released and with the ignition

switch positioned in “ON”), it could be an

indication of leaking of brake fluid or worn

brake pads. If this occurs, immediately

stop the vehicle at the nearest safe place

and check the brake fluid level. If the fluid

level is below the “MIN” mark in the

reservoir, do not drive the vehicle. Have

the vehicle towed to the nearest SUBARU

dealer for repair.

! Electronic Brake Force Distribution

(EBD) system warning

The brake system warning light also

illuminates if a malfunction occurs in the

EBD system. In that event, it comes on

together with the ABS warning light.

The EBD system may be faulty if the

brake system warning light and ABS

warning light illuminate simultaneously

during driving.

Even if the EBD system fails, the conven-

tional braking system will still function.

However, the rear wheels will be more

prone to locking when the brakes are

applied harder than usual and the vehi-

cle’s motion may therefore become some-

what harder to control.

If the brake system warning light and ABS

warning light illuminate simultaneously,

take the following steps:

1. Stop the vehicle in the nearest safe,

flat place.

2. Shut down the engine, then restart it.

3. Release the par king brake. If both

warning lights go out, the EBD system

may be faulty.

Drive carefully to the nearest SUBARU

dealer and have the system inspected.

4. If both warning lights come on again

and stay illuminated after the engine has

been restarted, shut down the engine

again, apply the parking brake, and check

the brake fluid level.

5. If the brake fluid level is not below the

“MIN” mark, the EBD system may be

faulty. Drive carefully to the nearest

SUBARU dealer and have the system

inspected.

6. If the brake fluid level is below the

“MIN” mark, DO NOT drive the vehicle.

Instead, have the vehicle towed to the

nearest SUBARU dealer for repair.

& Low fuel warning

light

The low fuel warning light comes on when

the tank is nearly empty approximately 2.6

US gal (10.0 liters, or 2.2 Imp gal). It only

operates when the ignition switch is in the

“ON” position.

Instruments and controls 3-35

– CONTINUED –

Black plate (158,1)

北米Model "A2440BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 5/ 7

3-36 Instruments and controls

NOTE

This light does not go out unless the

tank is replenished up to an internal

fuel quantity of approximately 3.7 US

gal (14 liters, 3.1 Imp gal).

CAUTION

Promptly put fuel in the tank when-

ever the low fuel warning light

comes o n. Engine misfires as a

result of an empty tank could cause

damage to the engine.

& Door open warning

light

When any of the doors, the rear gate

(Station wagon) or the trunk lid (Sedan) is

not fully closed, the door open warning

light comes on.

For a vehicle without SI-DRIVE, the

open door is indicated by the correspond-

ing part of the door open warning light.

For a vehicle with SI-DRIVE, the opening

door is indicated on the multi-information

display.

Always make sure this light is out before

you start to drive.

& All-Wheel Drive

warning light

(AT models)

WARNING

Continued driving with the AWD

warning light flashing can lead to

powertrain damage. If the AWD

warning light flashes, promptly park

in a safe place then check whether

all four tires are the same diameter

and whether any of the tires has a

puncture or has lost air pressure for

some other reason.

The All-Wheel Drive warning light comes

on when the ignition switch is turned to the

“ON” position and goes out after the

engine has started.

! For 5-speed automatic transmis-

sion vehicles

This light flashes if the vehicle is driven

with tires of different diameters fitted on its

wheels or with the air pressure exces-

sively low in any of its tires.

! For 4-speed automatic transmis-

sion vehicles

This light comes on when All-Wheel Drive

is disengaged and the drive mechanism is

switched to Front Wheel Drive for main-

tenance or similar purposes.

This light flashes if the vehicle is driven

with tires of different diameters fitted on its

wheels or with the air pressure exces-

sively low in any of its tires.

& Vehicle Dynamics

Control operation indi-

cator light (if equipped)

This light comes on when the ignition

switch is ON and goes out approximately

2 seconds later.

It blinks when the skid suppression func-

tion is activated. It illuminates when only

the traction control function is operating.

The Vehicle Dynamics Control system is

probably faulty under any of the following

conditions. Have your vehicle checked at

a SUBARU dealer immediately.

. The light does not come on when the

ignition switch is turned to the “ON”

position.

. The light does not go out even after a

period of approximately 2 seconds after

the ignition switch has been turned to the

“ON” position.

Black plate (159,1)

北米Model "A2440BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 5/ 7

& Vehicle Dynamics

Control warning light (if

equipped)/Vehicle Dy-

namics Control OFF in-

dicator light (if

equipped)

This warning light has both the function of

indicating faults in the Vehicle Dynamics

Control system and the function of indicat-

ing that the Vehicle Dynamics Control

system has been deactivated.

It comes on in the event of a fault in the

system and is on when the system is not

operating.

This warning light comes on when the

ignition switch is turned to the “ON”

position and goes out after the engine

has started. It indicates that the Vehicle

Dynamics Control system is in normal

operation.

! Vehicle Dynamics Control warning

light

The Vehicle Dynamics Control system is

probably inoperative under any of the

following conditions. Have your vehicle

checked at a SUBARU dealer immedi-

ately.

. The warning light does not come on

when the ignition switch is turned to the

“ON” position.

. The warning light comes on while the

vehicle is running.

. If the electrical circuit of the Vehicle

Dynamics Control system itself becomes

faulty, the warning light only comes on. At

this time, the ABS (Anti-lock Brake Sys-

tem) remains fully operational.

. The warning light comes on when the

electronic control system of the ABS/

Vehicle Dynamics Control system be-

comes faulty.

The Vehicle Dynamics Control system

provides its ABS c ontrol through the

electrical circuit of the ABS system.

Accordingly, if the ABS is inoperative, the

Vehicle Dynamics Control system be-

comes unable to provide ABS control. As

a result, the Vehicle Dynamics Control

system also becomes inoperative, caus-

ing the warning light to come on. Though

both the Vehicle Dynamics Control and

ABS systems are inoperative in this case,

the ordinary functions of the brake system

are still available. You will be safe while

driving with this condition, but have your

vehicle checked at a SUBARU dealer as

soon as possible.

NOTE

If the warning light behavior is as

shown in the following, the Vehicle

Dynamics Control system may be con-

sidered normal.

. The warning light comes on right

after the engine is started but goes out

immediately, remaining off.

. The warning light comes on after

engine startup and goes off while the

vehicle is subsequently being driven.

. The warning light comes on during

driving, but it goes out immediately and

remains off.

! Vehicle Dynamics Control OFF in-

dicator light

. It comes on when the Vehicle Dy-

namics Control OFF switch is pressed.

. It also comes on when the Vehicle

Dynamics Control system is deactivated.

NOTE

. The light may stay on for a while

after the engine has been started,

especially in cold weather. This does

not indicate the existence of a problem.

The light should go out as soon as the

engine has warmed up.

. The indicator light comes on when

the engine has developed a problem

and the CHECK ENGINE warning light/

malfunction indicator lamp is on.

The Vehicle Dynamics Control system is

probably faulty under the following condi-

tion. Have your vehicle checked at a

Instruments and controls 3-37

– CONTINUED –

Black plate (160,1)

北米Model "A2440BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 5/ 7

3-38 Instruments and controls

SUBARU dealer as soon as possible.

. The light does not go out even after the

lapse of several minutes (the engine has

warmed up) after the engine has started.

& Security indicator light

This indicator light shows the status of the

alarm system. It also indicates operation

of the immobilizer system.

! Alarm system

It blinks to show the driver the operational

status of the alarm system. For detailed

information, refer to the “Alarm system”

section in chapter 2.

! Immobilizer system

This light blinks approximately 60 seconds

after the ignition switch is turned from

“ON” position to the “Acc” or “LOCK”

position or immediately after the key is

pulled out. (Refer to the “Door locks”

section in chapter 2.)

If the indicator light does not flash, it may

indicate that immobilizer system may be

faulty. C ontact your nearest SUBARU

dealer immediately.

In the event that an unauthorized key (for

example, an unauthorized duplicate) is

used, the security indicator light comes

on.

& SPORT mode indicator

light (4-speed AT mod-

els) (if equipped)

This light comes on when the ignition

switch is turned to the “ON” position and

goes out after the engine has started.

When the selector lever is moved to the

manual gate, the SPORT mode is se-

lected and the indicator light comes on.

(Refer to the “Automatic transmission – 4-

speed” section in chapter 7.)

& Shift-up indicator light

(MT models) (if

equipped)

When the ignition switch is turned to the

“ON” position, the indicator light comes on

for 3 seconds, and then turns off. While

selecting the Intelligent (I) mode of SI-

DRIVE, this indicator light comes on and

informs the upshift timing to the driver for

fuel-efficient driving.

& S# PREP indicator light

(if equipped)

1) S# PREP indicator light

When the engine is not warmed up

sufficiently, the S# PREP indicator light

turns on. While this indicator light is on,

the SI-DRIVE mode cannot be changed to

the Sport Sharp (S#) mode. For details

about the SI-DRIVE mode, refer to the “SI-

DRIVE (Except 2.5-liter non-Turbo mod-

els)” section in chapter 7.

Black plate (161,1)

北米Model "A2440BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 5/ 7

& Selector lever position indi-

cator (AT models) (if

equipped)

This indicator shows the position of the

selector lever.

& Gear position indicator (AT

models) (if equipped)

When the manual mode is selected, the

gear position indicator (which shows the

current gear selection) and the upshift/

downshift indicator light up. (Refer to the

“Autom atic transmission – 4-speed” or

“Automatic transmission – 5-speed” sec-

tion in chapter 7.)

& Selector lever and gear posi-

tion indicator (AT models) (if

equipped)

This indicator shows the position of the

selector lever.

When the manual mode is selected, the

gear position indicator (which shows the

current gear selection) and the upshift/

downshift indicator light up. (Refer to the

“Automatic transmission – 4-speed” or

“Automatic transmission – 5-speed” sec-

tion in chapter 7.)

& Turn signal indicator

lights

These lights show the operation of the turn

signal or lane change signal.

If the indicator lights do not blink or blink

Instruments and controls 3-39

– CONTINUED –

Black plate (162,1)

北米Model "A2440BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 5/ 7

3-40 Instruments and controls

rapidly, the turn signal bulb may be burned

out. Replace the bulb as soon as possible.

Refer to the “Replacing bulbs” section in

chapter 11.

& High beam indicator

light

This light shows that the headlights are in

the high beam mode.

This indicator light also comes on when

the headlight flasher is operated.

& Cruise control indica-

tor light

The cruise control indicator light comes on

when the ignition switch is turned to the

“ON” position and goes out after approxi-

mately 3 seconds.

This light comes on when the “CRUISE”

main switch is pressed.

NOTE

. If you move the cruise control lever

or press the main switch button while

turning the ignition switch “ON”, the

cruise control function is deactivated

and the “CRUISE” indicator light

flashes. To reactivate the cruise control

function, turn the ignition switch back

to the “Acc” or “LOCK” position, and

then turn it again to the “ON” position.

. If this indicator light and the CHECK

ENGINE warning light/malfunction in-

dicator lamp flash simultaneously dur-

ing driving, have the vehicle checked

by your nearest SUBARU dealer.

& Cruise control set in-

dicator light

The cruise control set indicator light

comes on when the ignition switch is

turned to the “ON” position and goes out

after approximately 3 seconds.

This light comes on when vehicle speed

has been set.

& Headlight indicator

light

This indicator light comes on when the

light switch is turned to the “

” position

(to turn on the parking lights) or to the

“

” position (to turn on the headlights).

& Front fog light indicator

light

This indicator light is on while the front fog

lights are on.

Clock (Vehicle without Navi-

gation System)

NOTE

. If your vehicle is a 2.5-liter non-turbo

model equipped with a navigation sys-

tem, refer to the separate “Operating

Instructions for Monitor System”.

. If your vehicle is a turbo model or a

3.0-liter model equipped with a naviga-

tion system, refer to the “Clock (Vehicle

with Navigation System)” in the multi-

information display (vehicle with SI-

DRIVE) section in this chapter.

The clock shows the time while t he

ignition switch is in the “Acc” or “ON”

position.

Black plate (163,1)

北米Model "A2440BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 5/ 7

To adjust the time shown by the clock,

press the “+” button or the “ −” button. The

indicated time will change in one-minute

increm ents. If you keep the button

pressed, the rate at which the indicated

time changes will speed up.

To reset the minutes to “00” with a radio

time signal, push the “SET” button.

Information display (2.5-liter

non-turbo model without Na-

vigation System)

NOTE

If your vehicle is a 2.5-liter non-turbo

model equipped with a navigation sys-

tem, refer to the separate “Operating

Instructions for Monitor System”.

Withtheignitionswitchinthe“ON”

position, each successive push of the

“DISP” button toggles the display in the

following sequence:

& Outside temperature indica-

tor

U.S.-spec. models

Instruments and controls

3-41

– CONTINUED –

Black plate (164,1)

北米Model "A2440BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 5/ 7

3-42 Instruments and controls

Canada-spec. models

The outside temperature indicator shows

the outside temperature in a range from

−22 to 1228F(−30 to 508C).

The indicator can give a false reading

under any of the following conditions:

. When there is too much sun.

. During idling; whil e running a t low

speeds in a traffic jam; when the engine

is restarted immediately following a shut-

down.

. When the actual outside temperature

falls outside the specified indicator range.

! Road surface freeze warning indi-

cation

U.S.-spec. models

Canada-spec. models

When the outside temperature drops to

378F(38C) or lower, the temperature

indication flashes to show that the road

surface may be frozen.

If the outside temperature drops to 378F

(38C) or lower while the display is giving

an indication other th an the outside

temperature, the display switches to the

outside temperature indication and flashes

for 5 second s befor e ret urnin g to i ts

original indication.

If the display is already indicating an

outside temperature of 378F(38C) or lower

when the ignition switch is turned to the

“ON” position, the indication does not

flash.

NOTE

The outsi de te mperature i ndication

may differ from the actual outside

temperature. The road surface freeze

warning indication should be treated

only as a guide. Be sure to check the

condition of the road surface before

driving.

Black plate (165,1)

北米Model "A2440BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 5/ 7

& Current fuel consumption

U.S.-spec. models

Canada-spec. models

This indication shows the rate of fuel

consumption at the present moment.

& Average fuel consumption

U.S.-spec. models

Canada-spec. models

This indication shows the average rate of

fuel consumption since the trip meter was

last reset.

Pressing the trip knob toggles the indica-

tion between the average fuel consump-

tion corresponding to the A trip meter

indication and the average fuel consump-

tion corresponding to the B trip meter

indication.

When either of the trip meter indications is

reset, the correspon ding aver age fuel

consumption value is also reset.

NOTE

. The indicated values vary in accor-

dance with changes in the vehicle’s

running conditions. Also, the indicated

values may differ slightly from the

actual va lues and should thus be

treated only as a guide.

. When either trip meter indication is

reset, the average fuel consumption

corresponding to that trip meter indica-

tion is not shown until the vehicle has

subsequently covered a distance of 1

mile (or 1 km).

Instruments and controls 3-43

– CONTINUED –

Black plate (166,1)

北米Model "A2440BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 5/ 7

3-44 Instruments and controls

& Driving range on remaining

fuel

U.S.-spec. models

Canada-spec. models

The driving range indicates the distance

that can be driven taking into account the

amount of fuel remaining in the tank and

the average rate of fuel consumption.

When the low fuel warning light comes on,

the driving range indication flashes for 5

seconds. (The display first switches to the

driving range indication if it was originally

giving some other indication.)

U.S.-spec. models

Canada-spec. models

If the driving range is shown as “ ”,

there is only a tiny amount of fuel left in the

tank. You must refuel the vehicle immedi-

ately.

NOTE

The driving range on remaining fuel is

only a guide. The indicated value may

differ from the actual driving range on

remaining fuel, so you must immedi-

ately fill the tank when the low fuel

warning light comes on.

Black plate (167,1)

北米Model "A2440BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 5/ 7

& Journey time

The journey time shows the time that has

elapsed since the ignition switch was

turned to the “START” position.

The journey time indication flashes each

time a complete hour has elapsed. If the

display is giving an indication other than

the journey time, the display switches to

the journey time, flashes for 5 seconds,

and returns to its original indication each

time a complete hour has elapsed.

NOTE

The journey time is reset when the

ignition switch is turned to the “LOCK”

position. It is also reset if the ignition

switch is turned to the “LOCK” or

“Acc” position prior to restarting of

the engine.

Light control switch

WARNING

To prevent battery discharge result-

ing from accidentally leaving your

lights on when your vehicle is

parked, the light switch operates

only when the ignition switch is in

the “ON” position. In any other

position, the vehicle’s lights will be

out.

If you park your vehicle on a road-

side at night, use the hazard warn-

ing flasher to alert the other drivers.

The light switch operates only when the

ignition switch is in the “ON” position.

Instruments and controls 3-45

– CONTINUED –

Black plate (168,1)

北米Model "A2440BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 5/ 7

3-46 Instruments and controls

& Headlights

To turn on the headlights, turn the knob on

the end of the turn signal lever.

first position

Parking lights, instrument panel illumina-

tion, front side marker lights and license

plate lights are on.

second position

Headlights, parking lights, instrument pa-

nel illumination, front side marker lights,

tail lights and license plate lights are on.

& High/low beam change (dim-

mer)

To change from low beam to high beam,

push the turn signal lever forward. When

the headlights are on high beam, the high

beam indicator light “

” on the instru-

ment panel is also on.

To switch back to low beam, pull the lever

back to the detent position.

& Headlight flasher

CAUTION

Do not hold the lever in the flashing

position for more than just a few

seconds.

To flash the headlights, pull the lever

toward you and then release it. The high

beam will stay on for as long as you hold

the lever. The headlight flasher works

even though the lighting switch is in the

“OFF” position.

When the headlights are on high beam,

the high beam indicator light “

” on the

instrument panel also comes on.

Black plate (169,1)

北米Model "A2440BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 5/ 7

& Daytime running light system

WARNING

The brightness of the illumination of

the high beam headlights is reduced

by the daytime running light system.

The light switch must always be

turned to the “

” position when it

is dark outside.

The high beam headlights will automati-

cally come on at reduced brightness when

the engine has started, under the following

conditions:

. The parking brake is fully released.

. The light switch is in the “OFF” or “

”

position.

NOTE

When the light switch is in the “ ”

position, the front side marker lights,

parking lights and license plate lights

are illuminated.

Turn signal lever

To activate the right turn signal, push the

turn signal lever up. To activate the left

turn signal, push the turn signal lever

down. When the turn is finished, the lever

will return automatically. If the lever does

not return after cornering, return the lever

to the neutral position by hand.

To signal a lane change, push the turn

signal lever up or down slightly and hold it

during the lane change. The turn signal

indicator lights will flash in the direction of

the turn or lane change. The lever will

return automatically to the neutral position

when you release it.

Illumination brightness con-

trol

The brightness of clock display, audio, air

conditioner, information display and instru-

ment panel illumination dims when the

light switch is in the “

” or “ ”

positions. You can adjust brightness of

the instrument panel illumination for better

visibility.

For turbo and 3.0-liter models, you can

also adjust the brightness of the instru-

ment panel illumination when the lighting

switch is in the OFF position.

To brighten, turn the control dial upward.

To darken, turn the control dial downward.

Instruments and controls 3-47

– CONTINUED –

Black plate (170,1)

北米Model "A2440BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 5/ 7

3-48 Instruments and controls

NOTE

When the control dial is turned fully

upward, the illuminatio n brightness

becomes the maximum and the auto-

matic dimming function does not work

at all.

Parking light switch

The parking light switch operates regard-

less of the ignition switch position.

By pushing the front end of this switch,

following lights will come on.

– Parking lights

– Front and rear side marker lights

– Tail lights

– License plate lights

To turn off, push the rear end of the

parking light switch.

Avoid leaving these lights on for a long

time because that will run down the

battery.

Front fog light switch (if

equipped)

The front fog lights operate only when the

light switch is in the “

” position.

However, the front fog lights turn off when

the headlights are switched to high beam.

To turn on the front fog lights, turn the front

fog light switch on the turn signal lever

upward to the “

” position. To turn off the

front fog lights, turn the switch back down

to the “OFF” position.

Black plate (171,1)

北米Model "A2440BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 5/ 7

Vehicle with SI-DRIVE

Vehicle without SI-DRIVE

The indicator light located on the combi-

nation meter will illuminate when the front

fog lights are on.

Wiper and washer

WARNING

In freezing weather, do not use the

windshield washer until the wind-

shield is sufficiently warmed by the

defroster.

Otherwise t he washer fluid can

freeze on the windshield, blocking

your view.

CAUTION

. Do not operate the washer con-

tinuously for more than 10 sec-

onds, or when the washer fluid

tank is empty. This may cause

overheating of the washer motor.

Check the washer fluid level

frequently, such as at fuel stops.

. Do not operate the wipers when

the windshield or rear window is

dry. This may scratch the glass,

damage the wiper blades and

cause the wiper motor to burn

out. Before operating the wiper

on a dry windshiel d or rear

window, always use the wind-

shield washer.

. In freezing weather, be sure that

the wiper blades are not frozen to

the windshield or rear window

before switching on the wipers.

Attempting to operate the wiper

with the blades frozen to the

window glass could cause not

only the wiper blades to be

damaged but also the wiper mo-

tor to burn out. If the wiper

blades are frozen to the window

glass, be sure to operate the

defroster, wiper deicer (if

equipped) or rear window defog-

ger before turning on the wiper.

. If the wipers stop during opera-

tion because of ice or some other

obstruction on the window, the

wiper motor could burn out even

if the wiper switch is turned off. If

this occurs, promptly stop the

vehicle in a safe place, turn the

ignition switch to the “LOCK”

position and clean the window

glass to allow proper wiper op-

eration.

. Use clean water if windshield

washer fluid is unavailable. In

areas where water freezes in

winter, use SUBARU Windshield

Washer Fluid or the equivalent.

Refer to the “Windshield washer

Instruments and controls 3-49

– CONTINUED –

Black plate (172,1)

北米Model "A2440BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 5/ 7

3-50 Instruments and controls

fluid” section in chapter 11.

Also, when driving the vehicle

when there are freezing tempera-

tures, use non-freezing type wi-

per blades.

. Do not clean the wiper blades

with gasoline or a solvent, such

as paint thinner or benzine. This

will cause d eterioration of th e

wiper blades.

NOTE

. The front wiper motor is protected

against overloads by a circuit breaker.

If the mot or op erates con tinuousl y

under an unusually heavy load, the

circuit breaker may trip to stop the

motor temporarily. If this happens, park

your vehicle in a safe place, turn off the

wiper switch, and wait f or approxi-

mately 10 minutes. The circuit breaker

will reset itself, and the wipers will

again operate normally.

. Clean your wiper blades and win-

dow glass periodically with a washer

solution to prevent streaking, and to

remove accumulations of road salt or

road film. Keep the washer button

depressed at least for 1 second so that

washer solution will be sprinkled all

over the windshield or rear window.

. Grease, wax, insects or other mate-

rial on the windshield or the wiper

blades results in jerky wiper operation

and streaking on the glass. If you

cannot remove those streaks after

operating the washer or if the wiper

operation is jerky, clean the outer sur-

face of the windshield or rear window

and the wiper blades using a sponge or

soft cloth with a neutral detergent or

mild-abrasive cleaner. After cleaning,

rinse the window glass and wiper

blades with clean water. The glass is

clean if no beads form on the glass

when you rinse with water.

. If you cannot eliminate the streaking

even after following this procedure,

replace the wiper blades with new

ones. Refer to the “Replacement of

wiper blades” section (chapter 11) for

replacement instructions.

& Windshield wiper and washer

switches

The wiper operates only when the ignition

switch is in the “ON” or “Acc” position.

! Windshield wipers

Station wagon

Black plate (173,1)

北米Model "A2440BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 5/ 7

Sedan

OFF : Park

: Intermittent

LO: Low speed

HI: High speed

To turn the wipers on, push the wiper

control lever down.

To turn the wipers off, return the lever to

the “OFF” position.

! Mist (for a single wipe)

Station wagon

Sedan

For a single wipe of the wipers, pull the

lever toward you. The wipers operate until

you release the lever.

! Wiper intermittent time control (if

equipped)

Station wagon

Sedan

Instruments and controls

3-51

– CONTINUED –

Black plate (174,1)

北米Model "A2440BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 5/ 7

3-52 Instruments and controls

When the wiper switch is in the “ ”

position, turn the dial to adjust the operat-

ing interval of the wiper.

The operating interval can be adjusted

continuously from the shortest interval to

the longest.

Two click stop positions of the dial may

help you to aim at your desired interval.

The operating interval can be adjusted in

nine steps.

! Washer

Station wagon

Sedan

To wash the windshield, push the washer

button at the end of the wiper control lever.

The washer fluid sprays until you release

the washer button. The wipers operate

while you push the button.

& Rear window wiper and

washer switch (Station wa-

gon)

: Washer (accompanied by wiper operation)

ON: Continuous

INT: Intermittent

OFF: Park

: Washer

! Rear wiper

To turn the rear wiper on, turn the knob on

the end of the wiper control lever upward

to the “INT” or “ON” position.

To turn the wiper off, return the knob on

the end of the lever to the “OFF” position.

With the switch turned to the “INT”

position, the rear wiper will operate inter-

mittently at intervals corresponding to the

vehicle speed (longer when the vehicle

Black plate (175,1)

北米Model "A2440BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 5/ 7

speed is low; shorter when the vehicle

speed is high).

When you subsequently move the selec-

tor lever of the automatic transmission to

the “R” position, the rear wiper will switch

to continuous operation. When you move

the selector lever from the “R” position to

some other position, the rear wiper will

return to intermittent operation.

! Washer

To wash the rear window while the rear

wiper is operating, turn the knob on the

end of the wiper control lever upward to

the “

” position. The washer fluid sprays

until you release the knob.

To wash the rear window when the rear

wiper is not in use, turn the knob on the

end of the wiper control lever downward to

the “

” position. The washer fluid sprays

and the wiper operates until you release

the knob.

Windshield wiper deicer (if

equipped)

The windshield wiper deicer operates only

when the ignition switch is in the “ON”

position.

Before turning on the windshield wiper

deicer, remove any snow from the wind-

shield. To turn on the windshield wiper

deicer, push the button. The indicator light

located on the button lights up while the

windshield wiper deicer is operating.

The windshield wiper deicer will automa-

tically shut off a fter approximatel y 15

minutes. If the windshield wiper blades

have been deiced completely before that

time, push the button to turn it off. It also

turns off when the ignition switch is turned

to the “Acc” or “LOCK” position. If deicing

is not complete, you have to push the

button to turn the deicer on again.

Your SUBARU dealer can set your wind-

shield wiper deicer for continuous opera-

tion. Contact your SUBARU dealer for

details.

Once the windshield wiper deicer has

been set for continuous operation, press-

ing the button results in continuous opera-

tion. The windshield wiper deicer auto-

matically stops operating if any one of the

following conditions occurs during contin-

uous operation.

. The outside temperature becomes

418F(58C) or higher.

. The vehicle speed remains at 9 mph

(15 km/h) or lower for 15 minutes.

. The battery voltage decreases below

the permissible level.

Instruments and controls 3-53

Black plate (176,1)

北米Model "A2440BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 5/ 7

3-54 Instruments and controls

Rear window defogger but-

ton

Vehicle with manual climate control sys-

tem

Vehicle wi th automatic climate control

system

The rear window defogger operates only

when the ignition switch is in the “ON”

position.

The rear window defogger button is

located on the climate control panel.

To turn on the defogger, push the button.

To turn it off, push the button again.

The indicator light located on the button

lights up while the rear window defogger is

operating.

The defogger will automatically shut off

after approximately 15 minutes. If the

window clears before that time, push the

button to turn it off. It also turns off when

the ignition switch is turned to the “Acc” or

“LOCK” position. If defrosting or defogging

is desired when you restart your vehicle,

you have to push the button to turn it on

again.

Your SUBARU dealer can set your rear

window defogger for continuous opera-

tion. Contact your SUBARU dealer for

details.

Once the rear window defogger has been

set for continuous operation, the rear

window defogger repeatedly operates for

15 minutes, stops for two minutes, and

again operates for 15 minutes. If the

battery voltage drops below the permis-

sible level, continuous operation is can-

celed and operation stops as described in

the following.

. If the battery voltage drops below the

permissible level within 15 minutes of

depression of the button, continuous

operation is canceled and the rear window

defogger stops operating 15 minutes later.

. If the battery voltage drops below the

permissible level after the rear window

defogger has, following depression of the

button, operated for 15 minutes, stopped

operating for two minutes, and started

operating again, the rear window defogger

immediately stops operating.

Black plate (177,1)

北米Model "A2440BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 5/ 7

CAUTION

. Do not use sharp instruments or

window cleaner containing abra-

sives to clean the inner surface

of the rear window. They may

damage the conductors printed

on the window.

. To prevent the battery from being

discharged, do not operate the

defogger continuously for any

longer than necessary.

NOTE

If your vehicle is equipped with the

outside mirror defogger, the outside

mirror defogger operates while the rear

window defogger is operating.

Mirrors

Always check that the inside and outside

mirrors are properly adjusted before you

start driving.

& Inside mirror

The inside mirror has a day and night

position. Pull the tab at the bottom of the

mirror toward you for the night position.

Push it away for the day position. The

night position reduces glare from head-

lights.

& Auto-dimming mirror/com-

pass (if equipped)

1) Left button

2) Auto dimming indicator

3) Photosensor

4) Right button

The auto-dimming mirror/compass has an

anti-glare feature which automatically re-

duces glare coming from headlights of

vehicles behind you. It also contains a

built-in compass.

. By pressing and releasing the left

button, the automatic dimming function is

toggled on or off. When the automatic

dimming function is on, the auto dimming

indicator light (green) located to the right

of the button will illuminate.

. By pressing and releasing the right

Instruments and controls 3-55

– CONTINUED –

Black plate (178,1)

北米Model "A2440BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 5/ 7

3-56 Instruments and controls

button, the compass display is toggled on

or off. When the compass is on, an

illuminated compass reading will appear

in the lower part of the mirror.

Even with the mirror in anti-glare mode,

the mirror surface turns bright if the

transmission is shifted into reverse. This

is to ensure good rearward visibility during

reversing.

! Photosensors

The mirror has a photosensor attached on

both the front and back sides. If the glare

from the headlights of vehicles behind you

strikes the mirror, these sensors detect it

and make the reflection surface of the

mirror dimmer to help prevent you from

being blinded. For this reason, use care

not to cover the sensors with stickers, or

other similar items. Periodically wipe the

sensors clean using a piece of dry soft

cotton cloth or an applicator.

! Compass calibration

1. For optimum calibration, switch off all

nonessential electrical accessories (rear

window defogger, heater/air conditioning

system, spotlight, etc.) and ensure all

doors are shut.

2. Drive to an open, level area away from

large metallic objects or structures and

make certain the ignition switch is in the

“ON” position.

3. Press and hold the left button for 3

seconds then release, and the compass

will enter the calibration mode. “CAL” and

direction will be displayed.

4. Drive slowly in a circle until “CAL”

disappears f rom the display (approxi-

mately two or three circles). The compass

is now calibrated.

5. Further calibration may be necessary

should outside influences cause the mirror

to read inaccurately. You will know that

this has occurred if your compass begins

to read in only limited directions. Should

you encounter this situation, return to step

one of the above procedure and recali-

brate the mirror.

! Compass zone adjustment

1. The zone setting is factory preset to

Zone 8. Refer to the “Compass calibration

zone” map attached to the end of this

manual to verify that the compass zone

setting is correct for your geographical

location.

2. Press and hold the right button for 3

seconds then release, and the word

“ZONE” will briefly appear and then the

zone number will be displayed.

3. Press the right-hand button repeatedly

to cycle the display through all possible

zone settings. Stop cycling when th e

correct zone setting for your location is

displayed.

4. Releasing the button for 3 seconds will

exit the zone setting mode.

Black plate (179,1)

北米Model "A2440BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 5/ 7

& Outside mirrors

! Convex mirror (Passenger side)

WARNING

Objects look smaller in a convex

mirror and farther away than when

viewed in a flat mirror. Do not use

the convex mirror to judge the

distance of vehicles behind you

when changing lanes. Use the inside

mirror (or glance backwards) to

determine the actual size and dis-

tance of objects that you view in

convex mirror.

! Remote control mirror switch

The remote control mirrors operate only

when the ignition switch is in the “ON” or

“Acc” position.

1. Turn the knob to the “L” side to adjust

the left-hand mirror or to the “R” side to

adjust the right-hand mirror.

2. Move the knob in the direction you

want to move the mirror.

3. Return the knob to the neutral position

to prevent unintentional operation.

The mirrors can also be adjusted manu-

ally.

! Outside mirror defogger (if

equipped)

Vehicle with manual climate control sys-

tem

Vehicle with automatic cli mate control

system

The outside mirror defogger shares the

button with rear window defogger.

The outside mirror defogger operates only

when the ignition switch is in the “ON”

position.

To turn on the outside mirror defogger,

push the button.

To turn it off, push the button again. The

indicator light located on the button lights

up while the outside mirror defogger is

operating.

The defogger will automatically shut off

after approximately 15 minutes. If the

mirror clears before that time, push the

button to turn it off. It also turns off when

the ignition switch is turned to the “Acc” or

Instruments and controls 3-57

– CONTINUED –

Black plate (180,1)

北米Model "A2440BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 5/ 7

3-58 Instruments and controls

“LOCK” position. If defrosting or defogging

is desired when you restart your vehicle,

you have to push the button to turn it on

again.

NOTE

. While the outside mirror defogger is

operating, the rear window defogger

also operates.

. When the rear window defogger has

been set for continuous operation, the

outside mirror defogger also operates

continuously. Refer to the “ Rear win-

dow defogger button” section in this

chapter.

CAUTION

To prevent the battery from being

discharged, do not operate the de-

fogger continuously for any longer

than necessary.

Tilt/telescopic steering wheel

WARNING

. Do not adjust the steering wheel

tilt/telescopic position while driv-

ing. This may cause loss of

vehicle control and result in

personal injury.

. If the lever cannot be raised to

the fixed position, adjust the

steering wheel again. It is dan-

gerous to drive without locking

the steering wheel. T his may

cause loss of vehicle control

and result in personal injury.

1. Adjust the seat position. Refer to the

“Front seats” section (chapter 1).

2. Pull the tilt/telescopic lock lever down.

3. Move the steering wheel to the desired

level.

4. Pull the lever up to lock the steering

wheel in place.

5. Make sure that the steering wheel is

securely locked by moving it up and down,

and forward and backward.

Black plate (181,1)

北米Model "A2440BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 5/ 7

Horn

To sound the horn, push the horn pad.

Instruments and controls 3-59

Black plate (7,1)

北米Model "A2440BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 5/ 7

Ventilator.............................................................. 4-2

Air flow selection ................................................ 4-2

Center and side ventilators .................................. 4-3

Manual climate control system

(if equipped) ..................................................... 4-3

Control panel ...................................................... 4-3

Heater operation ................................................. 4-5

Air conditioner operation..................................... 4-7

Automatic climate control system

(if equipped) ..................................................... 4-8

Control panel ...................................................... 4-8

Temperature sensors.......................................... 4-11

Operating tips for heater and air

conditioner....................................................... 4-12

Cleaning ventilator grille..................................... 4-12

Efficient cooling after parking in direct

sunlight ........................................................... 4-12

Lubrication oil circulation in the refrigerant

circuit.............................................................. 4-12

Checking air conditioning system before summer

season ............................................................ 4-12

Cooling and dehumidifying in high humidity and

low temperature weather condition................... 4-12

Air conditioner compressor shut-off when engine

is heavily loaded.............................................. 4-13

Refrigerant for your climate control system ........ 4-13

Air filtration system (if equipped)..................... 4-13

Climate control

Black plate (184,1)

北米Model "A2440BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 5/ 7

4-2 Climate control

Ventilator

& Air flow selection

Black plate (185,1)

北米Model "A2440BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 5/ 7

& Center and side ventilators

! Center ventilators

Move the tab up and down or right and left

to adjust the flow direction.

! Side ventilators

1) Open

2) Close

Move the tab up and down or right and left

to adjust the flow direction.

To open the ventilator, turn the side grille

open/close wheel upward to the “

” posi-

tion.

To close it, turn the wheel downward to the

“

” position.

Manual climate control sys-

tem (if equipped)

& Control panel

1) Temperature control dial

2) Fan speed control dial

3) Air flow control dial

4) Air conditioner button

5) Air inlet selection button

6) Rear window defogger button (Refer to

the “Rear window defogger button” sec-

tion in chapter 3.)

Climate control

4-3

– CONTINUED –

Black plate (186,1)

北米Model "A2440BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 5/ 7

4-4 Climate control

! Temperature control dial

This dial regulates the temperature of air

flow from the air outlets over a range from

the blue side (cool) to red side (warm).

! Fan speed control dial

The fan operates only when the ignition

switch is turned to the “ON” position. The

fan speed control dial is used to select

four fan speeds.

! Air flow control dial

This dial has the following five positions:

: Air flows through the instrument panel

outlets.

: Air flows through the instrument panel

outlets and the foot outlets.

: Air flows through the instrument panel

outlets, the foot outlets, and some through

the windshield defroster outlets.

: Air flows through the instrument panel

outlets, the windshield defroster outlets,

and the foot outlets.

: Air flows through the instrument panel

outlets and the windshield defroster out-

lets.

NOTE

In a vehicle equipped with an air

conditioner, when the dial is placed in

the “

” position or “ ” position the

air conditioner compressor automati-

cally operates to quickly defog the

windshield. However the indicator on

the air conditioner button will not come

on. At the same time, the air inlet

selection is automatically set to “out-

side air” mode.

In this state, you cannot select “recir-

culation” mode by manually pressing

the air inlet selection button.

Also, you cannot stop the air condi-

tioner compressor by pressing the air

conditioner button.

Black plate (187,1)

北米Model "A2440BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 5/ 7

! Air conditioner button

The air conditioner operates only when

the engine is running.

Push the air conditioner button while the

fan is in operation to turn on the air

conditioner. The indicator light will come

on.

Push it again to turn off the air conditioner.

! Air inlet selection button

ON position (Recirculation): Interior air is

recirculated inside the vehicle.

Push the air inlet button to the ON

position. The indicator light will come on.

Place this button in the ON position when

you wish to cool the cabin quickly (in a

vehicle with an air conditioner) or are

driving on a dusty road.

OFF position (Outside air): Outside air is

drawn into the passenger compartment.

Push the air inlet button again to the OFF

position. The indicator light will go off.

Place this button in the OFF position when

you reach a road that is not dusty and

when you wish to achieve a comfortable

temperature in the cabin.

WARNING

Continued operation in the ON posi-

tion may fog up the windows. Switch

to the OFF position as soon as the

outside dusty condition clears.

& Heater operation

! Defrosting or defogging the wind-

shield

To direct warm air to the windshield and

front door windows:

1. Set the air inlet selection button to the

OFF position.

2. Set the air flow control dial to the “

”

position.

3. Turn the temperature control dial all

the way to the right.

4. Set the fan speed control dial to the

highest speed.

NOTE

. In a vehicle equipped with an air

conditioner, when the dial is placed in

the “

” position or “ ” position the

air conditioner compressor automati-

cally operates to quickly defog the

windshield. However the indicator on

the air conditioner button will not come

Climate control 4-5

– CONTINUED –

Black plate (188,1)

北米Model "A2440BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 5/ 7

4-6 Climate control

on. At the same time, the air inlet

selection is automatically set to “out-

side air” mode.

In this state, you cannot select “recir-

culation” mode by manually pressing

the air inlet selection button.

Also, you cannot stop the air condi-

tioner compressor by pressing the air

conditioner button.

. Warm air also comes out from the

right and left air outlets. To stop warm

air flow from these outlets, turn the

corresponding wheel to the “

” posi-

tion.

! Heating and defrosting

To direct warm air toward the floor and the

windshield:

1. Set the air inlet selection lever to the

“OFF” position.

2. Set the air flow control dial to the “

”

position.

3. Set the temperature control dial to the

most comfortable level.

4. Set the fan speed control dial to the

desired speed.

NOTE

. In a vehicle equipped with an air

conditioner, when the dial is placed in

the “

” position or “ ” position the

air conditioner compressor automati-

cally operates to quickly defog the

windshield. However the indicator on

the air conditioner button will not come

on. At t he same time, the air inlet

selection is automatically set to “out-

side air” mode.

In this state, you cannot select “recir-

culation” mode by manually pressing

the air inlet selection button.

Also, you cannot stop the air condi-

tioner compressor by pressing the air

conditioner button.

. Warm air also comes out from the

right and left air outlets. To stop warm

air flow from these outlets, turn the

corresponding wheel to the “

” posi-

tion.

! Heating

To direct warm air toward the floor:

1. Set the air inlet selection button to the

OFF position.

2. Set the air flow control dial to the “

”

position.

3. Set the temperature control dial to the

most comfortable level.

4. Set the fan speed control dial to the

desired speed.

NOTE

Warm air also comes out from the right

and left air outlets. To stop warm air

flow from these outlets, turn the corre-

sponding wheel to the “

” position.

! Bi-level heating

This setting allows you to direct air of

different temperatures from the instrument

panel and foot outlets. The air from the

foot outlets is slightly warmer than from

the instrument panel outlets.

1. Set the air inlet selection button to the

OFF position.

2. Set the air flow control dial to the “

”

position.

3. Set the temperature control dial to the

desired temperature level.

4. Set the fan speed control dial to the

desired speed.

Setting the temperature control dial fully

turned to the red area or blue are a

decreases the temperature difference

between the air from the instrument panel

outlets and the air from the foot outlets.

! Ventilation

To force outside air through the instrument

panel outlets:

1. Set the air inlet selection button to the

OFF position.

Black plate (189,1)

北米Model "A2440BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 5/ 7

2. Set the air flow control dial to the “ ”

position.

3. Set the temperature control dial all the

way left.

4. Set the fan speed control dial to the

desired speed.

When driving on a dusty road, set the air

inlet control button to the ON position.

WARNING

Continued operation in the ON posi-

tion may fog up the windows. Switch

to the OFF position as soon as the

outside dusty condition clears.

& Air conditioner operation

! Cooling or dehumidifying

For cooling and dehumidification of the

passenger compartment, air flows through

the instrument panel outlets:

1. Set the air inlet selection button to the

OFF position.

2. Set the air flow control dial to the “

”

position.

3. Set the air conditioner button to the

“ON” position.

4. Set the temperature control dial to the

blue side.

5. Set the fan speed control dial at the

desired speed.

! Defrosting or defogging

To direct warm air to the windshield and

front door windows:

1. Set the air outlet control dial to the

“

” position.

2. Set the temperature control dial to the

red side.

3. Set the fan speed control dial at the

highest speed.

NOTE

In a vehicle equipped with an air

conditioner, when the dial is placed in

the “

” position or “ ” position the

air conditioner compressor automati-

cally operates to quickly defog the

windshield. However the indicator on

the air conditioner button will not come

on. At t he same time, the air inlet

selection is automatically set to “out-

side air” mode.

In this state, you cannot select “recir-

culation” mode by manually pressing

the air inlet selection button.

Also, you cannot stop the air condi-

tioner compressor by pressing the air

conditioner button.

Climate control 4-7

Black plate (190,1)

北米Model "A2440BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 5/ 7

4-8 Climate control

Automatic climate control

system (if equipped)

NOTE

. Operate the automatic climate con-

trol system when the engine is running.

. The blower fan rotates at a low

speed when the engine coolant tem-

perature is low.

For efficient defogging or dehumidify-

ing in cold weather, press the “A/C”

button.

. Even when cooling is not necessary,

setting the te mperature much lower

than the current outlet air temperature

turns on the air conditioner compres-

sor automatically and the “A/C” indi-

cator light on the control panel comes

on.

The automa tic climate control system

automatically controls outlet air tempera-

ture, fan speed, air flow distribution air-

inlet control, and air conditioner compres-

sor ope ration. It activates when the

“AUTO” button is pressed, and is used to

maintain a constant, comfortable climate

within the passenger compartment.

The temperature can be set within a range

of 65 to 858F (18 to 328C).

& Control panel

1) AUTO button

2) Temperature control dial (driver’s side)

3) Defroster button

4) Temperature control dial (passenger’s

side)

5) Rear window defogger button (Refer to

the “Rear window defogger button” sec-

tion in chapter 3.)

6) Air conditioner button

7) Air flow mode selection button

8) Fan speed control button

9) Air inlet selection button

10) OFF button

! AUTO button

AUTO mode operation:

When the “AUTO” button is pressed, the

indicator light “AUTO” on the display

comes on. In this state, fan speed, air

flow distribution, air-inlet control, and air

conditioner compressor operation a re

automatically controlled.

Manual mode operation:

If you operate any of the buttons on the

control panel other than the “OFF” button

and temperature control dial during auto-

matic mode operation, the indicator light

“AUTO” on the control panel will go out.

You can then manually control the system

as desired using the button you operated.

To change the system back to the AUTO

mode, press the “AUTO” button.

Black plate (191,1)

北米Model "A2440BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 5/ 7

! OFF button

The Automatic Climate Control system

turns off (the air conditioner compressor

and fan turn off) when the “OFF” button is

pressed.

When the “OFF ” button is pressed, the

outside air introduction mode (air inlet

selection OFF) is automatically selected.

! Temperature control dial

Driver’s side

Passenger’s side

It is possible to make separate tempera-

ture settings for the driver’ssideand

passenger’s side. Each temperature

setting is shown on the display. With the

dial set at your desired temperature, the

system automatically adjusts the tempera-

ture of air supplied from the outlets such

that the desired temperature is achieved

and maintained.

If the dial is turned fully counterclockwise,

the system gives maximum cooling per-

formance. If the dial is turned fully clock-

wise, the system gives maximum heating

performance.

– Defroster button

To defrost or dehumidify the windshield

and front door windows, push the defros-

ter button “

”. When the “ ” button is

pushed, outside air i s drawn into the

passenger compartment, air flow is direc-

ted towards the windshield and front door

Climate control 4-9

– CONTINUED –

Black plate (192,1)

北米Model "A2440BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 5/ 7

4-10 Climate control

windows, and the indicator light on the

button comes on.

After eliminating the fogging from the

windshield, return the cli mate control

system to the AUTO mode by pushing

the “AUTO” button or turn off by pushing

the “OFF” button.

Alternatively, push the “

” button again

to return the system to the setting that was

selected before you activated the defros-

ter.

! Fan speed control button

The fan speed control button has 6

different fan speed positions.

The fan speed is shown by the display.

! A/C – Air conditioner button

If the windshield starts to fog when the

climate control system is operated in the

AUTO mode, push the air conditioner

button “A/C” to defog and dehumidify.

When this button is pushed, the air

conditioner compressor turns on and the

indicator light “A/C” on the display comes

on. After eliminating the fogging from the

windshield, set the system back to the

AUTO mo de by pushing the “AUTO”

button.

NOTE

The air conditioner compressor does

not operate when the outside air tem-

perature is below 328F(08C).

! Air flow mode selection button

Select th e desir ed ai r fl ow mode by

pushing the air flow mode selection

button. The selected air flow mode is

shown by the display.

(Ventilati on): Air flows through the

instrument panel outlets.

(Bi-level): Air flows through the instru-

ment panel outlets and the foot outlets.

(Heat): Air flows through the instrument

panel outlets, the foot outlets, and some

through the windshield defroster outlets.

(Heat-def): Air flows through the instru-

ment panel outlets, the windshield defros-

ter outlets, and the foot outlets.

Black plate (193,1)

北米Model "A2440BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 5/ 7

! Air inlet selection button

Select air flow by pushing the air inlet

selection button “

/ ”.

The selected air inlet setting is shown on

the control panel.

(Recirculation): Interior air recirculates

inside the passenger compartment. Use

this position when quickly cooling down

the passenger compartment or to prevent

outside air from entering the passenger

compartment. When the recirculation

mode is selected, a “

” indicator light

appears on the display.

(Outside air): Outside air is drawn into

the passenger compartment. When the

climate control system is operated in the

“AUTO” mode, this position is selected

automatically. (There is one exception:

When the temperature control dial is

turned fully counterclockwise, the recircu-

lation mode is automatically selected.)

When the outside air mode is selected, a

“

” indicator light appears on the dis-

play.

WARNING

Continued operation in the “ ”

position may fog up the windows.

Switch to the “

” position as soon

as the outside dusty condition

clears.

NOTE

When driving on a dusty road or behind

a vehicle that emits unpleasant exhaust

gases, set the air inlet selection button

to the “

” position.

From time to time, return the air inlet

selection button to the “

” position

to draw outside air into the passenger

compartment.

& Temperature sensors

1) Solar sensor

2) Interior air temperature sensor

The automatic climate control system

employs several sensors. These sensors

are delicate. If they are treated incorrectly

and become damaged, the system may

not be able to control the interior tempera-

ture correctly. To avoid damaging the

sensors, observe the following precau-

tions:

– Do not subject the sensors to impact.

– Keep water away from the sensors.

– Do not cover the sensors.

The sensors are located as follows:

– Solar sensor: beside windshield

defroster grille

Climate control 4-11

– CONTINUED –

Black plate (194,1)

北米Model "A2440BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 5/ 7

4-12 Climate control

– Interior air temperature sensor: on the

side of the driver-side part of the center

panel

– Outside temperatur e sensor: behind

front grille.

Operating tips for heater and

air conditioner

& Cleaning ventilator grille

Always keep the front ventilator inlet grille

free of snow, leaves, or other obstructions

to ensure efficient heating and defrosting.

Since the condenser is located in front of

the radiator, this area should be kept clean

because cooling performance is impaired

by any accumulation of insects and leaves

on the condenser.

& Efficient cooling after parking

in direct sunlight

After parking in direct sunlight, drive with

the windows open for a few minutes to

allow outside air to circulate into the

heated interior. This results in quicker

cooling by the air conditioner. Keep the

windows closed during the operation of

the air conditioner for maximum cooling

efficiency.

& Lubrication oil circulation in

the refrigerant circuit

Operate the air conditioner compressor at

a low engine speed (at idle or low driving

speeds) a few minutes each month during

the off-season to circulate its oil.

& Checking air conditioning

system before summer sea-

son

Check the air conditioner unit for refriger-

ant leaks, hose conditions, and proper

operation each spring. Have your

SUBARU dealer perform this check.

& Cooling and dehumidifying in

high humidity and low tem-

perature weather condition

Under certain weather conditions (high

relative humidity, low temperatures, etc.) a

small amount of water vapor emission

from the air outlets may be noticed. This

condition is normal and does not indicate

any problem with the air conditioning

system.

Black plate (195,1)

北米Model "A2440BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 5/ 7

& Air conditioner compressor

shut-off when engine is

heavily loaded

To improve acceleration and gas mileage,

the air conditioner compressor is designed

to temporarily shut off during air condi-

tioner operation whenever the accelerator

is fully depressed such as during rapid

acceleration or when driving on a steep

upgrade.

& Refrigerant for your climate

control system

Your air conditioner uses ozone friendly

refrigerant HFC134a. Therefore, the meth-

od of adding, changing or checking the

refrigerant is different from the method for

CFC12 (freon). Consult your SUBARU

dealer for service. Repairs needed as a

result of using the wrong refrigerant are

not covered under warranty.

Air filtration system (if

equipped)

If your vehicle’s air conditioning system is

equipped wit h an air filtration system,

replace the filter element according to

the replacement schedule shown in the

following. This schedule should be fol-

lowed to maintain the filter’s dust collec-

tion ability. Under extremely dusty condi-

tions, the filter should be replaced more

frequently. Have your filter checked or

replaced by your SUBARU dealer. For

replacement, we recommend the use of a

genuine SUBARU air filter kit.

Replacement schedule:

Every 12 months or 9,300 miles (15,000

km) whichever comes first

CAUTION

Contact your SUBARU dealer if the

following occurs, even if it is not yet

time to change the filter:

– Reduction of the air flow through

the vents.

– Windshield gets easily fogged or

misted.

NOTE

The filter can influence the air condi-

tioning, heating and defroster perfor-

mance if not properly maintained.

Climate control 4-13

Black plate (9,1)

北米Model "A2440BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 5/ 7

Antenna system .................................................. 5-2

Printed antenna................................................... 5-2

FM reception....................................................... 5-2

satellite radio rec eption (if equipped)...... 5-2

Installation of accessories.................................. 5-4

Audio set ............................................................. 5-5

Type A audio set (if equipped) ............................. 5-5

Type B audio set (if equipped) ............................. 5-6

Power and sound controls ................................. 5-7

Power switch and volume control ........................ 5-7

Tone and balance control .................................... 5-7

Audio effector switching (type B) ......................... 5-9

FM/AM radio operat ion ...................................... 5-10

FM/AM selection................................................. 5-10

Tuning ............................................................... 5-10

Station preset .................................................... 5-11

Satellite radio operation (if equipped) .............. 5-12

satellite radio ............................................ 5-12

Sirius satellite radio ........................................... 5-12

Satellite radio reception...................................... 5-12

Displaying satellite radio ID of tuner ................... 5-12

Band selection ................................................... 5-13

Channel and category selection .......................... 5-13

Channel preset .................................................. 5-14

Display selection ............................................... 5-15

CD player operation .......................................... 5-15

How to insert a CD (type A)................................ 5-15

How to insert a CD(s) (type B)............................ 5-15

How to play back a CD ...................................... 5-17

To select a track from its beginning.................... 5-18

Fast-forwarding and fast-reversing ..................... 5-18

Repeating .......................................................... 5-19

Random playback .............................................. 5-20

Scan ................................................................. 5-21

Display selection ............................................... 5-22

Folder selection................................................. 5-23

How to eject a CD from the player (type A) ......... 5-23

How to eject CDs from the player (type B) .......... 5-23

When the following messages are displayed....... 5-24

AUX unit operation ............................................ 5-25

AUX jack ........................................................... 5-25

AUX inputs selection button............................... 5-25

Audio control butt ons (if equipped) ................. 5-26

MODE button..................................................... 5-26

Precautions to observe when handling a

compact disc................................................... 5-27

Audio

Black plate (198,1)

北米Model "A2440BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 5/ 7

5-2 Audio

Antenna system

& Printed antenna

CAUTION

Do not use sharp instruments or

window cleaner containing abra-

sives to clean the inner surface of

the window on which the antenna is

printed. Doing so may damage the

antenna printed on the window.

Sedan

Station wagon

The ant enna i s pr inte d on the inner

surface of the rear window glass.

& FM reception

Although FM is normally static free,

reception can be affected by the surround-

ing area, atmospheric conditions, station

strength and transmitter distance. Build-

ings or other obstructions may cause

momentary static, flutter or station inter-

ference. If reception continues to be

unsatisfactory, switch to a stronger station.

satellite radio reception

(if equipped)

is a continental U.S. based satellite

radio service that offers more than 160

coast to coast channels, including music,

news, sports, talk and children ’s program-

ming. XM

provides digital quality audio

and text information, including song title

and artist name. A service fee is required

to receive the XM

service. For more

information, contact XM

www.xmradio.com or call 1-800-XM-

RADIO (1-800-967-2346).

The XM

satellite radio receiver that is

fitted to your vehicle receives the neces-

sary signals from two specially designated

satellites that are in a geostationary orbit

over the equator. One satellite covers the

east coast and the other covers the west

coast. Both of them direct their signals

north. These signals ar e then relayed

throughout the USA by a network of

ground repeater stations. The satellite

radio signals are transmitted as “line of

sight” signals. Line of sight signals can be

blocked by objects such as buildings, but

the network of repeater stations allows

signal coverage within urban areas such

as cities.

You may experience problems in receiving

Black plate (199,1)

北米Model "A2440BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 5/ 7

satellite radio signals in the follow-

ing situations.

. If you are driving northward in a coastal

area

You will notice that the XM

satellite

radio antenna is fixed to the upper right

hand corner of your windscreen.

The signal comes from the south and may

not be able to reach the antenna in some

circumstances when you are driving north.

. If you are driving in a tunnel or a

covered parking area

. If you are driving beneath the top level

of a multi-level freeway

. If you drive under a bridge

. If you are driving next to a tall vehicle

(such as a truck or a bus) that blocks the

signal

. If you are driving in a valley where the

surrounding hills or peaks block the signal

from the south

. If you are driving on a mountain road

where the southern direction is blocked by

mountains

. If you are driving in an area with tall

trees that block the signal (10 m or more),

for example on a road that goes through a

dense forest

. The signal can become weak in some

areas that are not covered by the repeater

station network.

Pleas e note that these may be other

unforeseen circumstances when there

are problems with the reception of XM

satellite radio signals.

Audio 5-3

Black plate (200,1)

北米Model "A2440BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 5/ 7

5-4 Audio

Installation of accessories

Always consult your SUBARU dealer

before installing a citizen band radio or

other transmitting device in your vehicle.

Such devices may cause the electronic

control system to malfunction if they are

incorrectly installed or if they are not

suited for the vehicle.

Black plate (201,1)

北米Model "A2440BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 5/ 7

Audio set

Your SUBARU may be equipped with one of the following audio sets. See the pages

indicated in this section for operating details.

& Type A audio set (if equipped)

The audio set will operate only when the

ignition switch is in the “Acc” or “ON”

position.

. Power and sound controls: refer to

page 5-7

. Radio operation: refer to page 5-10

. Satellite radio operation (if equipped):

refer to page 5-12

. CD (compact disc) player operation:

refer to page 5-15

. AUX unit operation: refer to page 5-25

Audio 5-5

– CONTINUED –

Black plate (202,1)

北米Model "A2440BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 5/ 7

5-6 Audio

& Type B audio set (if equipped)

The audio set will operate only when the

ignition switch is in the “Acc” or “ON”

position.

. Power and sound controls: refer to

page 5-7

. Radio operation: refer to page 5-10

. Satellite radio operation (if equipped):

refer to page 5-12

. CD (compact disc) player operation:

refer to page 5-15

. AUX unit operation: refer to page 5-25

Black plate (203,1)

北米Model "A2440BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 5/ 7

Power and sound controls

& Power switch and volume

control

The dial is used for both power (ON/OFF)

and volume control. The radio is turned

ON and OFF by pushing the dial and the

volume is controlled by turning the dial.

The dial can also be used for tone and

balance adjustment.

& Tone and balance control

The volume control dial normally functions

as a volume control. This dial becomes a

control for Bass, Midrange, Treble, Fader

or Balance when you select the appro-

priate tone and balance control mode.

Choose desired volume level for each

mode by turning the volume control dial.

The control function returns to volume

control mode after approximately 5 sec-

onds.

! To change tone control modes

Each brief press of the “AUDIO” button

changes control modes in the following

sequence starting from vol ume control

mode. (When the radio is first turned on,

the control mode is in the volume control.)

The “AUDIO” button is used for selecting

the following control modes:

Audio 5-7

– CONTINUED –

Black plate (204,1)

北米Model "A2440BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 5/ 7

5-8 Audio

Control mode (Range of levels)

Turn counterclockwise Turn clockwise

Bass control (−6 to +6) For less bass sound For more bass sound

Midrange control (−6 to +6) For less midrange sound For more midrange sound

Treble control (−6 to +6) For less treble sound For more treble sound

Volume control (0 to 40) For less volume For more volume

AUX volume control* (0 to 40) For less volume

For more volume

* Only when an AUX audio product is connected.

! To change balance control modes

Each brief press of the “BAL” button

changes control modes in the following

sequence starting from vol ume control

mode. (When the radio is first turned on,

the control mode is in the volume control.)

The “BAL” button is used for selecting the

following control modes:

Black plate (205,1)

北米Model "A2440BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 5/ 7

Control mode (Range of levels)

Turn counterclockwise Turn clockwise

Fader control (R9 to F9)

To decrease front speaker vo-

lume

To decrease rear speaker vo-

lume

Balance control (L9 to R9)

To increase left speaker vo-

lume and decrease right

speaker volume

To increase right speaker vo-

lume and decrease left speaker

volume

Volume control (0 to 40) For less volume For more volume

AUX volume control* (0 to 40) For less volume

For more volume

* Only when an AUX audio product is connected.

& Audio effector switching

(type B)

1. When continuing to press the “AUDIO”

button, the “SRS WOW” of audio effector

system starts up with a beep sound. The

illumination “

” of the indicator shows

the status of the SRS WOW mode

selection.

2. When continuing to press the “AUDIO”

button in the SRS WOW mode, the beep

sound and the SRS WOW mode finish,

and the “

” turns off.

NOTE

SRS technology is incorporated under

license from SRS Labs, Inc. SRS WOW,

SRS and

symbol are trademarks of

SRS Labs, Inc.

Audio 5-9

– CONTINUED –

Black plate (206,1)

北米Model "A2440BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 5/ 7

5-10 Audio

The SRS WOW mode has the following

qualities.

. Natural feeling of stereophonic ef-

fect

. Rich and varied bass sound

. Crystal-clear sound

FM/AM radio operation

& FM/AM selection

Push the “FM AM” button when the radio

is off to turn on the radio.

Push the “FM AM” button when the radio

is on to select FM1, FM2 or AM reception.

Each brief press of the “FM AM” button

changes the radio in the following se-

quence starting from the last radio band

with you selected.

& Tuning

! Manual tuning

Press the “ ” side of the TUNE/TRACK

button to increase the tuning frequency

and press the tuning button marked “

”

to decrease it.

Each time the button is pressed, the

frequency interval can be changed be-

tween 10 kHz in the AM mode and 0.2

MHz in the FM mode.

If you hold down the “

” side of the

button, the tuning frequency will increase

continuously, and if you hold down the

“

” side of the button, the tuning

frequency will decrease continuously. Re-

lease the button when your desire d

frequency is reached.

Black plate (207,1)

北米Model "A2440BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 5/ 7

NOTE

While you are holding down either side

of the TUNE/TRACK button, the tuning

frequency will not stop changing even

if the frequency of a receivable station

is reached.

! Stereo indicator

The stereo indicator “ST” will come on

when an FM stereo broadcast is received.

! Seek tuning (SEEK)

If you press the “ ” or “ ” side of the

SEEK/SCAN button briefly, the radio will

automatically search for a receivable

station and stop at the first one it finds.

This function may not be available, how-

ever, when radio signals are weak. In such

a situation, perform manual tuning to

select the desired station.

! Scan tuning (SCAN)

If you press the “ ” or “ ” side of the

SEEK/SCAN button for 0.5 second or

longer, the radio will switch to scan mode.

In this mode, the radio scans through the

radio band until a station is found. The

radio will stop at the station for 5 seconds

while displaying the frequency, after which

scanning will continue until the entire band

has been scanned.

Press the “

” or “ ” side of the button

again to cancel the scan mode and to stop

on any displayed frequency.

If you hold down the “

” side of the

button, the radio will scan up the fre-

quency band (from low frequencies to high

frequencies). If you hold down the “

”

side of the button, the radio will scan down

the frequency band (from high frequencies

to low frequencies).

Automatic tuning may not function prop-

erly if the station reception is weakened by

distance from the station or proximity to

tall buildings and hills.

& Station preset

! How to preset stations

1. Press the “FM AM” button to select

FM1, FM2 or AM reception.

2. Press the “

” or “ ” side of the

button or tune the radio manually until the

desired station frequency is displayed.

3. Press one of the preset buttons for

more than 1.5 seconds to store the

frequency. If the button is pressed for less

than 1.5 seconds, the preceding selection

will remain in memory.

NOTE

. If the connection between the radio

and battery is broken for any reason

such as vehicle maintenance or radio

removal, all stations stored in the

preset buttons are cl eared. If thi s

occurs, it is necessary to reset the

preset buttons.

. If a cell phone is placed near the

radio, it may cause the radio to emit

noise when it receives calls. This noise

Audio 5-11

– CONTINUED –

Black plate (208,1)

北米Model "A2440BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 5/ 7

5-12 Audio

does not indicate a radio fault.

! Selecting preset stations

Presetting a station with a preset button

allows you to select that station in a single

operation. Up to six AM, FM1 and FM2

stations each may be preset.

Satellite radio operation (if

equipped)

To receive satellite radio, it is necessary to

install the Subaru genuine satellite recei-

ver (dealer option) and to enter into a

contract. For details, please contact your

SUBARU dealer.

& XM

satellite radio

is a continental U.S. based satellite

radio service that offers more than 160

coast to coast channels, including music,

news, sports, talk and children’s program-

ming. XM

provides digital quality audio

and text information, including song title

and artist name. A service fee is required

to receive the XM

service. For more

information, contact XM

www.xmradio.com or call 1-800-XM-

RADIO (1-800-967-2346).

& Sirius satellite radio

Sirius satellite radio is a recent innovation

that allows the listener to experience

digital sound quality and to have a greater

variety of channels to choose from (more

than 160 channels with the relevant

subscription).

Use of satellite radio (Sirius) requires a

tuner, antenna and a service contract. For

details, please contact yo ur SUBARU

dealer or visit Sirius Satellite Radio at

www.sirius.com or call 1-888-539-SIRIUS

(7474) for more information. Sirius, the

Sirius dog logo, channel names and logos

are trademarks of SIRIUS Satellite Radio

Inc.

& Satellite radio reception

Satellite radio signals are best received in

areas with a clear view of the open sky. In

areas where there are tall buildings, trees,

tunnels or other struc tures that may

obstruct the signal of the satellites, there

may be signal interruptions. Other circum-

stances that may result in signal loss

include driving near a wall, steep cliff, hill

or driving on the lower level of a multi-

tiered road or inside of a parking garage.

To help reduce this condition, satellite

radio providers have installed ground-

based repeaters in heavily popul ated

areas. However, you may still experience

reception problems in some areas.

& Displaying satellite radio ID

of tuner

When you activate satellite radio, you

should have your satellite radio tuner ID

ready because each tuner is identified by

its unique satellite radio tuner ID.

Black plate (209,1)

北米Model "A2440BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 5/ 7

The satellite radio ID will be needed when

you activate satellite radio and receive

satellite radio customer support.

The satellite radio ID can be found on the

audio display by tuning the channel to “0”.

Turn the “TUNE/TRACK ” button to select

the satellite radio channel.

& Band selection

Push the “ SAT” button when the radio is

off to turn on the radio.

Push the “ SAT” button when the radio is

on to select XM1, XM2 or XM3 reception.

& Channel and category selec-

tion

! Channel selection

Press “ ” of the TUNE TRACK button to

select the next channel and press “

” of

the button to select the previous channel.

Keep pressing “

” of the button to

change to the next channel continuously

and keep pressing “

” of the button to

change to the previous channel continu-

ously.

! Category selection

Press “ ” of the FOLDER/CATEGORY

button to select the next category and

press “

” of the button to select the

previous category.

Audio 5-13

– CONTINUED –

Black plate (210,1)

北米Model "A2440BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 5/ 7

5-14 Audio

! Channel scan

Press the “ ” side of the SEEK/SCAN

button to change the radio to the SCAN

mode. In this mode, the radio scans

through the channel until a station is

found. The radio will stop at the station

for 5 seconds while displaying the channel

number, after which scanning will continue

until the entire channel has been scanned

from the low end to the high end.

Press the “

” side of the button again to

cancel the SCAN mode and to stop on any

displayed channel.

& Channel preset

! How to preset channels

1. Press the “SAT” button to select XM1,

XM2 and XM3 reception.

2. Press the SEEK/SCAN button or the

TUNE TRACK button to select the chan-

nel.

3. Press one of the preset buttons for

more than 1.5 seconds to store the

channel. If the button is pressed for less

than 1.5 seconds, the preceding selection

will remain in memory.

NOTE

If the connection between the radio and

battery is broken for any reason such

as vehicle maintenance or radio re-

moval, all channels stored in the preset

buttons are cleared. If this occurs, it is

necessary to reset the preset buttons.

! Selecting preset channels

Presetting a channel with a preset button

allows you to select that channel in a

single operation. Up to six XM1, XM2 and

XM3 channels each may be preset.

Black plate (211,1)

北米Model "A2440BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 5/ 7

& Display selection

Press the “TEXT” button while receiving

the satellite radio to change the display as

follows:

CD player operation

NOTE

. Make sure to always insert a disc

with the label side up. If a disc is

inserted with the label side down, the

player displays “CHECK DISC”.

Refer to “When the following messages

are displayed” in this section.

. If a disc is inserted during a radio

broadcast, the disc will interrupt the

broadcast.

. After the last song finishes, the disc

will automatically return to track 1 (the

first song on the disc) and will auto-

matically play back.

. The player is designed to be able to

play music CD-Rs and music CD-RWs,

but it may not be able to play certain

ones.

. Single CDs (i.e., 8 cm/3 inch CDs)

are not supported, and if inserted, they

will be immediately ejected.

. The file (song) that has protected by

and the player will skip to the next file

(song).

& How to insert a CD (type A)

Hold a disc with a finger in the center hole

while gripping the edge of the disc, then

insert it in to the slot (with the label side

up) and the player will automatically pull

the disc into position.

NOTE

DO NOT INSERT TWO DISCS INTO THE

DISC INSERTION SLOT AT A TIME.

& How to insert a CD(s) (type B)

1. Briefly press the “LOAD” button. If the

magazine in the player has an i dle

position where you can insert a disc, the

disc number indicator associated with the

idle position will blink.

If no indicator blinks, it means that there is

Audio 5-15

– CONTINUED –

Black plate (212,1)

北米Model "A2440BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 5/ 7

5-16 Audio

no idle position in the magazine.

2. When the “LOAD” indicator flashes,

insert the disc. Once you have inserted

the disc, the “LOAD” indicator will go off.

The disc will then be automatically drawn

in, and the player will begin to play back

the first track of the disc.

. To insert more discs in succession,

repeat Steps 1 and 2. The magazine will

be loaded with discs in the ascending

order of position number.

If you do not insert any disc in 15 seconds

after you have pressed the “LOAD” button,

the player will begin to play back the first

track of the last disc you have inserted.

. The disc indicator steadily lights up if a

disc is already inserted in the correspond-

ing position of the magazine.

. While the player is in the loading mode,

if you press “FM AM”, “SAT” or “AUX”

button, the player will enter the standby

mode. Press the “CD” button to start

playback.

! Inserting a disc in a desired posi-

tion

1. Briefly press the “LOAD” button. If the

magazine in the player has an idle

position where you can insert a disc, the

disc number indicator associated with the

idle position will blink.

The positions in the magazine the indica-

tor of which steadily lights up are already

loaded with discs.

2. Press the disc select button at the

position where you want to insert a disc.

3. When the “LOAD” indicator flashes,

insert the disc. Once you have inserted

the disc, the “LOAD” indicator will go off.

The disc will then be automatically drawn

in, and the player will begin to play the first

track on the disc.

. If you wish to insert another disc,

repeat the procedure beginning with step

If you do not insert any disc in 15 seconds

after you have pressed the “LOAD” button,

the player will begin to play back the first

track of the last disc you have inserted.

. While the player is in the loading mode,

if you press “FM AM”, “SAT” or “AUX”

button, the player will enter standby mode.

Black plate (213,1)

北米Model "A2440BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 5/ 7

Press the “CD” button to start playback.

! Loading all the magazine (Full disc

loading mode)

1. If you continue to press the “LOAD”

button for more than 1.5 seconds, the

player will produce beep sound and will

enter the full disc loading mode.

2. When the disc number indicator and

“ALL LOAD” indicator start flashing, insert

a disc within 15 seconds. If a disc is

successfully loaded during this period, the

disc number indicator will stop blinking

and will steadily light.

3. When the loading of a disc is com-

plete, the next disc number indicator will

blink. Then repeat Step 2.

4. When the magazine is filled with discs

by repeating Steps 2 and 3, the player will

start playback of the discs, beginning with

the one inserted first.

If you fail to insert any disc during each 15

seconds interval, the full disc loading

mode will be canceled, and the player will

start playback of the disc inserted first.

& How to play back a CD

! When there is no CD inserted

Insert a CD by referring to “How to insert a

CD (type A)” / “How to insert a CD(s) (type

B)”.

When a CD is loaded, the player will start

playback of the CD, beginning with the

first track.

! When CD is in the player (type A)

When the “CD” button is pressed, the

player will start playback.

! When there are CDs loaded (type B)

Press a desired one of the disc select

buttons the disc number indicator of which

steadily lights up. The player will then start

playback of the selected CD, beginning

with the first track.

If a disc that the player cannot read has

been loaded, the player will display the

message “CHECK DISC”.

Audio 5-17

– CONTINUED –

Black plate (214,1)

北米Model "A2440BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 5/ 7

5-18 Audio

& To select a track from its

beginning

! Forward direction

Briefly press the “ ” side of the TUNE/

TRACK button to skip to the beginning of

the next track/file (track). Each time the

button is pressed, the indicated track/file

(track) number will increase.

NOTE

In an MP3 or WMA folder, skipping past

the last track/file (track) will take you

back to the first track/file (track) in the

folder.

! Backward direction

Briefly press the “ ” side of the TUNE/

TRACK button to skip to the beginning of

the current track/file (track). Each time the

button is pressed, the indicated track/file

(track) number will decrease.

NOTE

In an MP3 or WMA folder, skipping past

the first track/file (track) will take you to

the last track/file (track) in the folder.

& Fast-forwarding and fast-re-

versing

! Fast-forwarding

Press the “ ” side of the TUNE/TRACK

button continuously to fast-forward the

disc/folder.

Release the button to stop fast-forwarding.

NOTE

If you fast-forward to the end of the last

track/file (track), fast-forwarding will

stop and the player will start playback

beginning with the first track/file

(track).

Black plate (215,1)

北米Model "A2440BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 5/ 7

! Fast-reversing

Press the “ ” side of the TUNE/TRACK

button continuously to fast-reverse t he

disc/folder.

Release the button to stop fast-reversing.

NOTE

If you fast-reverse to the beginning of

the first track/file (track), fast-reversing

will stop and the player will start play-

back.

& Repeating

! To repeat the currently playing

track/file (track)

To repeat a track/file (track), briefly press

the “RPT” button while the track/file (track)

is playing. The display will show “RPT”,

and the track/file (track) will be repeated.

To cancel the track/file (track) repeat-play

mode, briefly press the “RPT” button

twice. The “RPT” indication will go off,

and the normal playback mode will be

resumed.

NOTE

. Each time you briefly press the

button, the mode will change to the

next one in the following sequence.

If you accidentally press the button and

cancel the track/file (track) repeat-play

mode, press it again to reselect the

repeat-play mode.

. The repeat-play mode will be can-

celled if you perform any of the follow-

ing steps:

. Press the “RPT” button

. Press the “

” button

. Press the disc select button

. Select the radio or AUX mode

. Press the “

” or “ ” side of the

SEEK/SCAN button on folder re-

peating (MP3 or WMA disc)

. Press the “LOAD” button when

thereisfreespaceintheCD

magazine.

. Turn off the power of the audio

equipment.

. Turn the ignition switch to the

“LOCK” position.

Audio 5-19

– CONTINUED –

Black plate (216,1)

北米Model "A2440BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 5/ 7

5-20 Audio

! To repeat the currently playing disc/

folder

To repeat the currently playing disc/folder,

press the “RPT” button twice while a track/

file (track) is playing. The display will show

“D-RPT” for non-MP3/WMA disc, “F-RPT”

for MP3/WMA folder. And the disc/folder

will be played repeatedly.

To cancel the disc/folder repeat play

mode, press the “RPT” button once more.

The “D-RPT” or “F-RPT” indication will go

off, and the normal playback mode will be

resumed.

NOTE

. Each time you briefly press the

button, the mode will change to the

next one in the following sequence.

If you accidentally press the button and

cancel the d isc/folder repeat-play

mode, press it again to reselect the

disc/folder repeat-play mode.

. For MP3 and WMA discs, they can

play back repeatedly only for the

currently playing file folder. They can-

not play back the whole disc.

. The disc/folder repe at-play mode

will be cancelled if you perform any of

the following steps:

. Press the “RPT” button

. Press the “

” button

. Press the disc select button

. Select the radio or AUX mode

. Press the “

” or “ ” side of the

SEEK/SCAN button in the folder

repeating mode “F-RPT”

. Turn off the power of the audio

equipment.

. Turn the ignition switch to the

“LOCK” position.

& Random playback

! Non-MP3/WMA disc

Press the “RPT” button for 0.5 second or

longer during disc playback to play all of

the tracks on the disc in a random order.

The display will show “RDM”, and all of the

tracks on the disc will be played in a

random order.

To cancel random playback, press the

“RPT” button again for at least 0.5 second.

The “RDM” indication will go off, and the

normal playback mode will be resumed.

NOTE

Random playback will be cancelled if

you perform any of the following steps:

. Press the “RPT” button

. Press the “

” button

Black plate (217,1)

北米Model "A2440BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 5/ 7

. Press the disc select button

. Select the radio or AUX mode

. Press the “LOAD ” button when

there is free space in the CD magazine.

. Turn off the power of the audio

equipment.

. Turn the ignition switch to the

“LOCK” position.

! MP3/WMA disc

Press the “RPT” button for 0.5 second or

longer during disc playback to play all of

the tracks in the folder currently being

played in random order. The display will

show “F-RDM” during the folder random

mode. Press the “ RPT” button again for

0.5 second or longer to play all of the

tracks on the disc in random order. The

display will show “D-RDM” during the disc

random mode.

To cancel the random mode, press the

“RPT” button for 0.5 second or longer

during “D-RDM ” random playback. The

“D-RDM” indication will go off, and the

normal playback mode will be resumed.

NOTE

. Each time you press the button for

0.5 second or longer, the mode will

change to the next one in the following

sequence.

If you accidentally press the button and

cancel the random mode, press it again

to reselect the random mode.

. Random playback will be cancelled

if you perform any of the following

steps:

. Press the “RPT” button

. Press the “

” or “ ” side of the

SEEK/SCAN button in the folder

random mode “F-RDM”

. Press the “

” button

. Press the disc select button

. Select the radio or AUX mode

. Press the “LOAD” button when

thereisfreespaceintheCD

magazine.

. Turn off the power of the audio

equipment.

. Turn the ignition switch to the

“LOCK” position.

& Scan

The scan mode lets you listen to the first

10 seconds of each track/file (track) in

succession. Press the “

” side of the

SEEK/SCAN button for 0.5 second or

longer to start scanning upward beginning

with the track/file (track) following the

currently selected one. Press the “

”

side of the button to start scanning down-

ward beginning with the track/file (track)

preceding the currently selected one.

After all tracks/files (tracks) in the disk/

folder have been scanned, normal play-

back will be resumed. To cancel the scan

mode, press the “

” or “ ” side of the

button for 0.5 second or longer.

Audio 5-21

– CONTINUED –

Black plate (218,1)

北米Model "A2440BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 5/ 7

5-22 Audio

NOTE

The scan mode will be cancelled if you

perform any of the following steps:

. Press the “RPT” button

. Press the “

” or “ ” side of the

TUNE/TRACK button

. Press the “

” or “ ” side of the

SEEK/SCAN button

. Press the “

” button

. Press the disc select button

. Select the radio or AUX mode

. Press the “LOAD ” button when

there is free space in the CD magazine.

. Turn off the power of the audio

equipment.

. Turn the ignition switch to the

“LOCK” position.

& Display selection

If you press the “TEXT” button for 0.5

second or longer during playback of an

MP3/WMA file, the indication will change

to the next one in the following sequence.

! Page (track/folder title) scroll

If, having pressed the “TEXT” button to

select FOLDER NAME or TRACK NAME

display, you press the “TEXT” button

again for at least 0.5 second, the title will

be scrolled so you can see all of it.

NOTE

The display is designed to show titles

for up to three pages (64 characters in

total). However, it may in some cases

show titles for only up to two pages (32

characters in total).

Black plate (219,1)

北米Model "A2440BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 5/ 7

& Folder selection

Press the “ ” side of the SEEK/SCAN

button briefly to select the next folder.

Press the “

” side of the button briefly to

go back to the previous folder. The folder

title will be shown each time you press

one of the buttons.

NOTE

. Sel ecting folders in this way is

possible only within a single disc.

. Only MP3/WMA folders are recog-

nized when an attempt to select the

next or previous folder is made. If no

appropriate folder exists on the disc,

pressing the “

” or “ ” side of the

SEEK/SCAN button s tarts playback

beginning with the first track/file

(track).

& How to eject a CD from the

player (type A)

When a disc is being played back or when

a disc is in the player, press the eject

button “

”. The disc will be ejected.

NOTE

. Avoid driving the vehicle with a CD

sticking out, because vibration might

make it fall out.

. If the disc is left ejected for more

than approximately 15 seconds after

the ignition switc h is turned to the

“OFF” position, a disc protection func-

tion will operate, automatically reload-

ing the disc. In this case, the disc is not

played.

& How to eject CDs from the

player (type B)

! Ejecting a CD from the player

Of the discs loaded, you can select and

remove only one disc.

1. Use the disc select button to select the

disc to be ejected.

Audio 5-23

– CONTINUED –

Black plate (220,1)

北米Model "A2440BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 5/ 7

5-24 Audio

2. Briefly press the “ ” button. The

selected disc will be ejected. The disc

number indicator will flash at this time.

When you remove the ejected disc, the

disc number indicator will go off.

To remove more discs in succession,

repeat Steps 1 and 2.

! Ejecting all discs from the player

(All disc ejection mode)

1. If you continue to p ress the “ ”

button, the player will produce beep sound

and will enter the all disc ejection mode. At

this time, the disc number indicator and

“ALL EJECT” indicator will flash.

2.Removethediscthathasbeen

ejected. The other discs loaded will then

be ejected one after another. If you do not

remove the disc that has been ejected, the

“All disc ejection mode” will be canceled.

NOTE

. Avoid driving the vehicle with a CD

sticking out, because vibration might

make it fall out.

. If you press the “

” button while

the player is in all disc ejection mode,

the mode will be cancelled following

ejection of the disc that is currently

being ejected.

. If you press the “CD” button or

“LOAD” button while the player is in

all disc ejection mode, the player will

draw in the disc s that have be en

ejected and play them.

& When the following mes-

sages are displayed

If one of the following messages is

displayed while operating the CD player,

determine the cause based on the follow-

ing information. If you cannot clear those

messages, please contact your SUBARU

dealer.

! When “PUSH EJECT” is displayed

Press the eject button to unload the disc.

Check the disc for damage or deforma-

tion, and also check that the correct disc is

inserted. Do not try to unload the disc

forcibly. Single CDs (i.e., 8 cm/3 inch CDs)

are not supported, and if inserted, they will

be immediately ejected and this message

will be displayed. If the disc cannot be

unloaded or this message remains dis-

played, please contact your SUBARU

dealer.

Black plate (221,1)

北米Model "A2440BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 5/ 7

! When “CHECK DISC” is displayed

Press the eject button to unload the discs.

Check that the disc is not damaged or

scratched, and also check that the disc is

inserted correctly. This message may

appear when using some CD-RW discs.

Check that the disc type (i.e., 8 cm/3 inch

CDs are not supported) and data format

are correct. This player can only play MP3

and WMA data formats. If the disc cannot

be unloaded or this message remains

displayed, please contact your SUBARU

dealer.

AUX unit operation

& AUX jack

By connecting a commercial audio pro-

duct to the vehicle, such as portable audio

player, you can hear its sound via the

vehicle’s speaker.

Connect the portable audio player and

push the “AUX” button.

For the audio input jack, a stereo mini pin

plug (3.5ø) can be connected. For detailed

information, see the Owner’s Manual of

the portable audio player.

& AUX inputs selection button

Press the “AUX” button when the auxiliary

audio input is off to turn on the auxiliary

audio input.

NOTE

. The output sound of the portable

audio player is not loud, and the sound

via the vehicle’s speakers that are

connected to the vehicle audio set is

very small. If you turn up the volume of

the audio set , the volume becomes

louder. However, when you change

the player to the other portable audio

player, the sound may become a lot

louder. Turn down the volume when

you change between them.

. In some cases, when the sound

volume of the portable audio player is

Audio 5-25

– CONTINUED –

Black plate (222,1)

北米Model "A2440BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 5/ 7

5-26 Audio

low, the sound becomes bad when you

turn up the volume of the vehicle audio

system. In this case, adjust the sound

volume of the portable audio player.

. In some cases, noise occurs be-

cause of a bad connection between the

portable player of the vehicle audio

system or for the player.

Audio control buttons (if

equipped)

These buttons are located on the spokes

of the steering wheel. They allow the

driver to control audio functions without

taking his/her hands off the steering

wheel.

& MODE button

This button is used to select the desired

audio mode. Each time it is pressed, the

mode changes to the next one in the

following sequence:

*1: The frequency last received in the selected

waveband will be displayed.

*2: Only when a CD is in the player.

*3: Only when with an auxiliary audio product is

connected.

! “ ” and “ ” buttons

! With radio mode selected

Press the “

” button or “ ” button. The

radio will seek the next receivable station

and stop on it.

That station’s frequency will be shown on

the audio display.

! With CD mode selected

Press the “

” button to skip forward in the

track/file (track) order. P ress the “

”

button to skip backward in the track/file

Black plate (223,1)

北米Model "A2440BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 5/ 7

(track) order.

The track/file (track) number will be shown

on the audio display.

! With SAT mode selected

Press the “

” button to skip forward in the

channel order. Press the “

” button to

skip backward in the channel order. The

channel will be shown on the audio

display.

! Volume control buttons

Press the “+” button to increase the

volume. Press the “−” button to reduce

the volume.

A number indicating the volume will be

shown on the audio display.

! MUTE button

Press this button if you wish to immedi-

ately cut the volume to zero.

The audio display will show “MUTE”.

If you press the button again, the original

sound volume will return and “MUTE”

goes off.

Precautions to observe when

handling a compact disc

Use only compact discs (CDs, CD-Rs and

CD-RWs) that have the mark shown in the

following. Also, some compact discs

cannot be played.

Audio 5-27

– CONTINUED –

Black plate (224,1)

北米Model "A2440BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 5/ 7

5-28 Audio

. You cannot use a DualDisc in the CD

player. If you insert a DualDisc into the

player, the disc may not come out again,

possibly causing the player to malfunction.

. In cold and/or rainy weather, dew can

form inside the CD player, preventing

normal operation. If this happens, eject

the CD and wait for the player to dry out.

. Skipping may occur when the CD

player is subjected to severe vibration

(for example, when the vehicle is driven

on a rough surface).

. To remove a disc from the case, press

the center of the case and hold both

edges of the disc. If the disc surface is

touched directly, contamination could

cause poor tone quality. Do not touch the

disc surface.

. Use a clean disc whenever possible. If

there are deposits, wipe the disc surface

from the center outward with a dry, soft

cloth. Be sure not to use a hard cloth,

thinner, benzine, alcohol, etc.

. Do not use any disc that is scratched,

deformed, or cracked. Also, do not use

any disc that has a non-standard shape

(for example, a heart shape). Malfunctions

or problems might result.

. A disc is vulnerable to heat. Never

keep it either in places exposed to direct

sunlight, n ear heate rs or in vehicles

parked in the sun or on hot days.

Black plate (225,1)

北米Model "A2440BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 5/ 7

Audio 5-29

Black plate (11,1)

北米Model "A2440BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 5/ 7

Interior light ......................................................... 6-2

Dome light .......................................................... 6-2

Cargo area light (Station wagon).......................... 6-2

Map light .............................................................. 6-2

Sun visors ........................................................... 6-3

Sun visor extension plate .................................... 6-3

Vanity mirror with light ........................................ 6-4

Storage compartment ......................................... 6-4

Glove box ........................................................... 6-5

Center console box ............................................. 6-5

Center panel compartment (if equipped)............... 6-6

Overhead console (if equipped) ........................... 6-7

Pocket ................................................................ 6-7

Cup holder........................................................... 6-7

Front passenger’s cup holder .............................. 6-8

Rear passenger’s cup holder ............................... 6-8

Accessory power outlets .................................... 6-8

Coat hook ........................................................... 6-10

Rear passenger area .......................................... 6-10

Shopping bag hook............................................ 6-11

For Sedan models .............................................. 6-11

For Station wagon models .................................. 6-11

Floor mat ............................................................ 6-12

Cargo area cover (if equipped)......................... 6-12

Using the cover ................................................. 6-12

To remove the cover housing............................. 6-13

To remove the rear gate board ........................... 6-13

Stowage of the cargo area cover and rear gate

board .............................................................. 6-13

To install the cover housing ............................... 6-14

To install the rear gate board ............................. 6-15

Stowage boxes (Station wagon) ....................... 6-15

Convenient tie-down hooks (if equipped) ........ 6-16

Under-floor storage compartment .................... 6-16

HomeLink® Wireless Control System

(if equipped) .................................................... 6-17

Garage door opener programming in the

U.S.A............................................................... 6-18

Programming rolling-code-protected garage door

openers in the U.S.A. ....................................... 6-19

Programming for entrance gates and garage door

openers in Canada........................................... 6-20

Programming other devices ............................... 6-21

Operating the HomeLink® Wireless Control

System............................................................ 6-21

Reprogramming a single HomeLink® button....... 6-21

Erasing HomeLink® button memory ................... 6-21

In case a problem occurs................................... 6-21

Interior equipment

Black plate (228,1)

北米Model "A2440BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 5/ 7

6-2 Interior equipment

Interior light

When leaving your vehicle, make sure the

light is turned off to avoid battery dis-

charge.

& Dome light

The light switch has three positions:

: The light stays on continuously.

Middle position: The light comes on when

any door is opened. The light remains on

for several seconds and gradually goes

out after all doors are closed.

The light also can be turned on by use of

the remote keyless entry transmitter. Refer

to the “Remo te keyless en try system”

section in chapter 2 for detailed informa-

tion.

The setting of the period for which the light

stays on can be changed by a SUBARU

dealer.

Contact the nearest SUBARU dealer for

details.

: The light stays off.

& Cargo area light (Station wa-

gon)

The cargo area light switch has three

positions:

DOOR: The light comes on only when the

rear gate is opened.

Middle position: The light stays off.

: The light stays on continuously.

Map light

Vehicle with moonroof (Sedan)

Vehicle with moonroof (Station wagon)

Black plate (229,1)

北米Model "A2440BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 5/ 7

Vehicle without moonroof

To turn on the map light, push the switch.

To turn it off, push the switch again.

When leaving the vehicle, make sure the

light is turned off to avoid battery dis-

charge.

The light also can be turned on by use of

the remote keyless entry transmitter. Refer

to the “Remo te keyless en try system”

section in chapter 2 for detailed informa-

tion.

The setting of the period for which the light

stays on can be changed by a SUBARU

dealer.

Contact the nearest SUBARU dealer for

details.

Sun visors

To block out glare, swing down the visors.

To use the sun visor at a side window,

swing it down and move it sideways.

& Sun visor extension plate

With the sun visor positioned over the side

window, you can use the sun vis or

extension plate to prevent glare through

the gap between the sun visor and center

pillar. To use the extension plate, pull it

toward the rear of the vehicle. When you

have finished using it, stow it by pushing it

toward the front of the vehicle.

Interior equipment 6-3

– CONTINUED –

Black plate (230,1)

北米Model "A2440BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 5/ 7

6-4 Interior equipment

CAUTION

Do not pull out the extension plate

with the sun visor positioned over

the windshield. The extension plate

woul d obstruct your v iew of the

rearview mirror.

& Vanity mirror with light

CAUTION

Keep the vanity mirror cover closed

while the car is being driven to avoid

dazzle.

To use the vanity mirror, swing down the

sun visor and open the vanity mirror cover.

The light beside the vanity mirror comes

on when the ignition switch is either in the

“Acc” or “ON” position and the mirror cover

is opened.

NOTE

Use of the vanity mirror light for a long

period of time while the engine is not

running can cause battery discharge.

Storage compartment

CAUTION

. Always keep the storage com-

partment closed while driving to

reduce the risk of injury in the

event of sudden stops or an

accident.

. Do not store spray cans, contain-

ers with flammable or corrosive

liquids or any other dangerous

items in the storage compart-

ment.

Black plate (231,1)

北米Model "A2440BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 5/ 7

& Glove box

1) Lock

2) Unlock

To open the glove box, pull the handle. To

close it, push the lid firmly upward.

To lock the glove box, insert the key and

turn it clockwise.

& Center console box

Center console box (front)

If you remove the divider plate from the

dual cup holders, you can use the center

console box as a storage space.

To use as storage space:

Slide the sliding lid (near the parking brake

lever) toward the rear.

Grasp the dual cup holders’ divider plate

at the base. Turn it counterclockwise to

remove it.

Interior equipment 6-5

– CONTINUED –

Black plate (232,1)

北米Model "A2440BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 5/ 7

6-6 Interior equipment

CAUTION

If you hold the divider plate at the

top while turning it counterclock-

wise, it may break.

To use again as cup holders:

Insert the protrusion on the back of the

divider plate into the hole in the center of

the console box. Grasp the divider plate at

the base, and turn it clockwise to fit it.

CAUTION

If you hold the divider plate at the

top while turning it clockwise, it may

break.

Center console box (rear)

Pull up the lock release knob at the bottom

of the front edge of the lid.

& Center panel compartment (if

equipped)

CAUTION

When your vehicle is parked in the

sun or a warm day, the inside of the

center panel heats up. Avoid storing

plastic or other heat-vulnerable or

flammable articles such as a lighter

in the center panel.

To open the center panel compartment,

pull up the edge of the bottom of the panel

lid.

Black plate (233,1)

北米Model "A2440BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 5/ 7

& Overhead console (if

equipped)

To open the console, push on the lid lightly

and it will automatically open.

CAUTION

When your vehicle is parked in the

sun or on a warm day, the inside of

the overhead console heats up.

Avoid storing plastic or other heat-

vulnerable or flammable articles

such as a lighter in the overhead

console.

& Pocket

CAUTION

Do not use the pocket as an ashtray

or leave a lighted cigarette in the

pocket. This could cause a fire.

To use the pocket, push lightly on the lid

below the climate controls.

Cup holder

CAUTION

. When not in use, always keep the

cup holder stored while driving

to reduce the risk of injury in the

event of a sudden stop or an

accident.

. Do not pick up a cup from the cup

holder or put a cup in the holder

while you are driving, as this may

distract you and lead to an

accident.

. Take care to avoid spills. Bev-

erages, if hot, might burn you or

your passengers. Spilled bev-

erages may also damage uphols-

tery or carpets.

Interior equipment 6-7

– CONTINUED –

Black plate (234,1)

北米Model "A2440BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 5/ 7

6-8 Interior equipment

& Front passenger’s cup holder

The dual cup holder is built into the center

console near the parking brake lever.

To access the cup holder, pull the lid

toward the rear.

& Rear passenger’s cup holder

The rear passenger ’s cup hol der is

located on the lower side of the back of

the center console. To use the cup holder,

open the lid by pulling its upper edge.

Accessory power outlets

Outlet beside front pocket

Outlet in center console

Black plate (235,1)

北米Model "A2440BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 5/ 7

Outlet in cargo area

Accessory power outlets are provided

beside the front ashtray, in the center

console and in the cargo area. Electrical

power (12V DC) from the battery is

available at any of the outlets when the

ignition switch is in either the “Acc” or “ON”

position.

You can use an in-car electrical appliance

by connecting it to an outlet.

The maximum power rating of an appli-

ance that can be connected varies among

outlets as shown in the following. Do not

use an appliance which exceeds the

indicated wattage for each outlet.

Outlet beside front pocket: 80W or less

Outlets in center console and cargo area:

120W or less

When using appliances connected to two

or more outlets simultaneously, the total

power consumed by them must not

exceed 120W.

CAUTION

. Do not attempt to use a cigarette

lighter in the accessory power

outlet.

. Do not place any foreign objects,

especially metal ones such as

coins or aluminum foil, into the

accessory power outlet. That

could cause a short circuit. Al-

ways put the cap on the acces-

sory power outlet when it is not

in use.

. Use only electrical appliances

which are designed for 12V DC.

The maximum power rating of an

appliance that can be connected

varies among outlets as shown in

the following. Do not use an

appliance which exceeds the in-

dicated wattage for each outlet.

Outlet beside front pocket: 80W

or less

Outlets in center console and

cargo area: 120W or less

When using appliances con-

nected to two or more outlets

simultaneously, the total power

consumed by them must no t

exceed 1 20W. Overloading the

accessory power outlet can

cause a short circuit. Do not use

double adapters or more than

one electrical appliance.

. If the plug on your electric appli-

ance is either too loose or too

tight for the accessory power

outlet, this can result in a poor

contact or cause the plug to get

stuck. Only use plugs that fit

properly.

. Use of an electric appliance in the

accessory power outlet for a long

period of time while the engine is

not running can cause battery

discharge.

. Before driving your vehicle, make

sure that the plug and the cord

on your electrical appliance will

not interfere with your shifting

gears and operating the accel-

erator and brake pedals. If they

do, do not use the electrical

appliance while driving.

Interior equipment 6-9

– CONTINUED –

Black plate (236,1)

北米Model "A2440BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 5/ 7

6-10 Interior equipment

NOTE

When the lid of the center console is

closed, a g ap remains between the

center console and the lid to allow the

power outlet in the center console to be

used. Pass the electrical appliance’s

cord through this gap.

Coat hook

& Rear passenger area

WARNING

Do not hang coat hangers or other

hard or pointed objects on the coat

hooks. If such items were hanging

on the coat hooks during deploy-

ment of the SRS curtain airbags,

they could cause serious injuries by

coming off the coat hooks and being

thrown through the cabin or by

preventing correct airbag deploy-

ment. Before hanging clothing on

the coat hooks, make sure there are

no pointed objects in the pockets.

Hang clothing directly on the coat

hooks without using hangers.

CAUTION

Never hang anything on the coat

hook that might obstruct the driver’s

view or that could cause injury in

sudden stops or in a collision. And

do not hang items on the coat hook

that weigh 11 lbs (5 kg) or more.

Black plate (237,1)

北米Model "A2440BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 5/ 7

The coat hook is attached to each rear

passenger’s hand grip.

Shopping bag hook

CAUTION

Do not hang items on the shopping

bag hook that weigh 11 lbs (5 kg) or

more.

& For Sedan models

A shopping bag hook is attached to each

inner side wall of the trunk near the trunk

lid opening.

& For Station wagon models

A shopping bag hook is attached to each

side of the cargo area.

To use the hook, push the upper portion

and the shopping bag hook will appear.

Interior equipment 6-11

Black plate (238,1)

北米Model "A2440BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 5/ 7

6-12 Interior equipment

Floor mat

A retaining pin is located on the driver’s

side of the vehicle next to the fuel filler

door release. Fit the grommet in the carpet

onto the pin to prevent the carpet from

moving.

CAUTION

Make sure the driver’s floor mat is

placed back in its proper location

and correctly secured on its retain-

ing pin. Also, do not use more than

one floor mat. If the floor mat slips

forward and interferes with the

movement of the pedals du ring

driving, it could cause an accident.

Cargo area cover (if

equipped)

The cargo area cover is pr ovided for

covering the cargo area and to protect its

contents from direct sunlight. This cover is

detachable to make room for additional

cargo.

& Using the cover

To extend the cover, pull the end of the

cover out of the housing, then insert its

hooks into the catches as sh own. To

rewind it, unhook it from the catches and

it will rewind automatically. You should

hold on to the cover and guide it back into

the cover housing while it is rewinding.

Black plate (239,1)

北米Model "A2440BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 5/ 7

WARNING

Do not place anything on the ex-

tended cover. Putting excessive

weight on the extended cover can

break it and an object on the cover

could tumble forward in the event of

a sudden stop or collision. This

could cause serious injury.

& To remove the cover housing

1. Rewind the cover.

2. Hold down the button on the right-

hand rear quarter panel and lift up the

right-hand cover housing.

3. Remove the cover housing.

& To remove the rear gate

board

1. Remove the top of the rear gate board

from the groove in the rear gate panel.

2. Hold both sides of the bottom edge of

the rear gate board, rotate the rear gate

board toward you, and pull it out down-

ward.

& Stowage of the cargo area

cover and rear gate board

The cargo area cover and rear gate board

can be stowed in under the cargo floor.

1. To open the lid, pull the handle up.

Interior equipment 6-13

– CONTINUED –

Black plate (240,1)

北米Model "A2440BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 5/ 7

6-14 Interior equipment

2. To keep the lid open, hang the hook

(provided on the back of the lid) on the

rear edge of the roof.

3. Remove the left and right parts of the

cargo floor lid.

4. Stow the cover housing and rear gate

board in the cargo area end.

& To install the cover housing

To install the cover housing, insert both

ends of the cover housing into the

retainers.

Black plate (241,1)

北米Model "A2440BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 5/ 7

& To install the rear gate board

Insert (tipped at an angle) the hooks on

the rear gate board into the holes in the

rear gate panel.

Rotate the rear gate board toward you

until its top touches the rear gate panel.

Fit the top of the rear gate board into the

groove in the rear gate panel.

Stowage boxes (Station wa-

gon)

A stowage box is located on each side of

the cargo area. You can access each one

by pushing up and pulling the knob on the

lid.

Interior equipment 6-15

Black plate (242,1)

北米Model "A2440BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 5/ 7

6-16 Interior equipment

Convenient tie-down hooks

(if equipped)

CAUTION

The convenient tie-down hooks are

designed only for securing light

cargo. Never try to secure cargo

that exceeds the capac ity of the

hooks. The maximum load capacity

is 44 lbs (20 kg) per hook.

The cargo area is equipped with four tie-

down hooks so that cargo can be secured

with a luggage net or ropes.

When using the tie-down hooks, turn them

down out of the storing recesses. When

not in use, put the hooks up into the

storing recesses.

Under-floor storage compart-

ment

The subfloor storage compartment is

located under the floor of the trunk or

cargo area and can be used to store small

items. To open the lid, pull the tab or

handle up.

NOTE

When storing a flat tire, put the sub-

floor storage in the trunk or cargo area.

CAUTION

. Always keep the lid of the sub-

floor storage compartment

closed while driving to reduce

the risk of injury in the event of

sudden stop or an accident.

. Do not store spray cans, contain-

ers with flammable or corrosive

liquids or any other dangerous

items in the s ubfloor storage

compartment.

Black plate (243,1)

北米Model "A2440BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 5/ 7

Sedan

Station wagon

Hang the hook provided on the underside

of the lid on the rear edge of the roof to

keep the lid open.

HomeLink® Wireless Control

System (if equipped)

1) HomeLink® buttons

2) Indicator light

3) Hand-held transmitter*

* Not part of your vehicle’s keyless entry

system but of a HomeLink®-compatible

device.

The HomeLink® Wireless Control System,

located on the driver’s sun visor, is a

handy way to operate, from inside of your

vehicle, up to three remote-co ntroll ed

indoor and outdoor devices, such as

garage door openers, entrance gates,

door locks, home lighting, and security

systems. There are three HomeLink®

buttons on the sun visor, each of which

you can program for operation of one

desired device. For details on the device

types which can be operated by this

system, consult the HomeLink website at

www.homelink.com or call 1-800-355-

3515.

Note the following about this system:

If your vehicle is equipped with the

HomeLink® Wireless Control System, it

complies with Part 15 of the Federal

Communication Commission Rules in the

U.S. and the RSS-210 of Industry Canada

in Canada. Its operation is subject to the

following two conditions:

(1) this device may not cause harmful

interference, and (2) this device must

accept any interference received, includ-

ing interference that may cause undesired

operation.

Changes and modifications to this system

by anyone other than an authorized

service facility could void authorization to

use this equipment.

HomeLink and the HomeLink house are

registered trademarks of Johnson Con-

trols, Inc.

WARNING

. When programming the

HomeLink® Wireless Control

System, you may be operating a

Interior equipment 6-17

– CONTINUED –

Black plate (244,1)

北米Model "A2440BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 5/ 7

6-18 Interior equipment

garage door opener or other

device. Make sure that people

and objects are out of the way

of the garage do or opener or

other device to prevent potential

harm or damage.

. Do not use the HomeLink® Wire-

less Control System with any

garage door opener that lacks

the safety stop and reverse fea-

ture as required by applicable

safety standards. A garage door

opener which cannot detect an

object, signaling the door to stop

and reverse, does not meet these

safety standards. Using a garage

door opener without these fea-

tures increases risk of serious

injury or death. For more infor-

mation, consult the HomeLink

website at www.homelink.com

or call 1-800-355-3515.

CAUTION

When programming the HomeLink®

Wireless Control System to operate

a garage door opener or an entrance

gate, unplug the device’s motor

from the outlet during programming

to prevent motor burnout.

NOTE

. After programming your HomeLink®

Wireless Control System for the de-

sired devices, retain the hand-held

transmitters for further programming

or device testing in the event of a

problem.

. It is recommended that you insert a

new battery in the hand-held transmit-

ter of a device to ensure correct

programming.

& Garage door opener pro-

gramming in the U.S.A.

NOTE

When programming the HomeLi nk®

Wireless Control System for a garage

door opener, it is suggested that you

park the vehicle outside the garage.

1. Unplug the motor of the garage door

opener from the outlet.

2. Press and hold the two outside

HomeLink® buttons until the indicator light

begins to flash (after 20 seconds). Re-

lease both buttons.

NOTE

If any of the HomeLink® buttons are

already programmed for other devices,

skip step 2 because it clears the

memory of all the three buttons.

3. Hold the end of the garage door

opener’s hand-held transmitter between

1 and 3 inches (25 and 76 mm) away from

the HomeLink® buttons on the driver’s

sun visor, keeping the indicator light in

view.

Black plate (245,1)

北米Model "A2440BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 5/ 7

4. Using both hands, simultaneously

push the hand-held transmitter button

and the desired HomeLink® button. DO

NOT release the buttons until step 5 has

been completed.

5. Hold down b oth buttons until the

HomeLink® indicator light flashes, first

slowly then rapidly. When the indicator

light flashes rapidly, both buttons may be

released. (The rapidly flashing light indi-

cates successful programming of the new

frequency signal.)

6. Press and hold the programmed but-

ton and check the HomeLink® indicator

light. If the indicator light stays on con-

tinuously, your garage door should acti-

vate and the programming is completed.

If the indicator light flashes rapidly for 2

seconds and then stays on continuously,

your garage door opener may be pro-

tected by a rolling code feature. In this

case you need to perform the additional

steps for “Programming rolling-code-pro-

tected garage door openers in the U.S.A.”

described in the following.

NOTE

Rolling-code-protected garage door

openers are manufactured after 1996.

See the instruction manual of your

garage opener for confirmation.

7. Reconnect the motor of your garage

door opener to the outlet.

8. Test your garage doo r opener by

pressing the programmed HomeLink®

button.

& Programming rolling-code-

protected garage door open-

ers in the U.S.A.

If your garage door opener has a rolling

code feature , program the HomeLink®

Wireless Control System for it by following

steps 1 through 5 in the "Programming

garage door openers in the U.S.A." sec-

tion above and then continuing with the

following steps.

NOTE

The assistance of a second per son

may make the programming quicker

and easier.

1. Locate the training button on the

garage doo r opener motor head unit.

The exact location and color of the button

may vary by brand of garage door opener.

If it is difficult to locate the training button,

refer to your garage door opener’s instruc-

tion manual.

Interior equipment 6-19

– CONTINUED –

Black plate (246,1)

北米Model "A2440BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 5/ 7

6-20 Interior equipment

1) Training button

2. Press the training button on the

garage door opener motor hea d unit

(which activates the “training light” on the

unit). Proceed to step 3 within 30 seconds.

3. Inside the vehicle, firmly press and

release the HomeLink® button that was

programmed in the section above. Press

and release the button a second time to

complete the programming procedure.

NOTE

Some garage door openers may re-

quire you to do the above procedure a

third time to complete the program-

ming.

4. The garage door opener should now

recognize the HomeLink® Wireless Con-

trol System and your garage door opener

should activ ate wh en the HomeLink®

button is pressed.

& Programming for entrance

gates and garage door open-

ers in Canada

1. Unplug the motor of the entrance gate

or garage door opener from the outlet.

2. Press and hold the two outside buttons

until the HomeLink® indicator light begins

to flash (after 20 seconds). Release both

buttons.

NOTE

If any of the HomeLink® buttons are

already programmed for other devices,

skip step 2 because it clears the

memory of all three buttons.

3. Hold the end of the entrance gate’s/

garage door opener’s hand-held transmit-

ter between 1 and 3 inches (25 and 76

mm) away from the HomeLink® buttons

on the driver’s sun visor, keeping the

indicator light in view.

4. Press and hold the desired

HomeLink® button.

5. Press and release (“cycle”) the hand-

held transmitter button every 2 seconds

until step 6 is complete.

6. When the indicator light flashes slowly

and then rapidly after several seconds,

release both buttons.

7. Plug the motor of the entrance gate/

garage door opener to the outlet.

8. Test your entrance gate/garage door

Black plate (247,1)

北米Model "A2440BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 5/ 7

opener by pressing the programmed

HomeLink® button.

& Programming other devices

To program other devices such as door

locks, home lighting and security systems,

contact HomeLink at www.homelink.com

or call 1-800-355-3515.

& Operating the HomeLink®

Wireless Control System

Once programmed, the HomeLink® Wire-

less Control System can be used to

remote-control the devices to which its

buttons are programmed. To activate a

device, simply press the appropriate but-

ton. The indicator light illuminates, indicat-

ing that the signal is being transmitted.

& Reprogramming a single

HomeLink® button

1. Press and hold the HomeLink® button

you wish to reprogram. DO NOT release

the button until step 4 has been com-

pleted.

2. When the HomeLink® indicator light

begins to flash slowly (after 20 seconds),

position the hand-held transmitter of the

device for which you wish to program the

button at 1 to 3 inches (25 to 76 mm) away

from the HomeLink® button surface.

3. Press and hold the hand-held trans-

mitter button. The HomeLink® indicator

light will flash, first slowly and then rapidly.

4. When the indicator light begins to flash

rapidly, release both buttons.

The programming for the previous device

is now erased and the new device can be

operated by pushi ng the HomeLink®

button.

& Erasing HomeLink® button

memory

NOTE

. Performi ng this procedure erases

the memory of all the preprogrammed

buttons simultaneously. The memory

of individual buttons cannot be erased.

. It is recommended that upon the

sale of the vehicle, the memory of all

programmed HomeLink® buttons be

erased for security purposes.

1. Press and hold the two outside buttons

until the indicator light begins to flash

(after 20 seconds).

2. Release both buttons.

& In case a problem occurs

If you cannot activate a device using the

corresponding HomeLink® button after

programming, contact HomeLink at

www.homelink.com or call 1-800-355-

3515 for assistance.

Interior equipment 6-21

Black plate (13,1)

北米Model "A2440BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 5/ 7

Fuel ...................................................................... 7-3

Fuel requirements ............................................... 7-3

Fuel filler lid and cap........................................... 7-5

State emission tes ting (U.S. only)...................... 7-7

Preparing to drive ............................................... 7-8

Starting the engine.............................................. 7-9

Manual transmission vehicle................................ 7-9

Automatic transmission vehicle ........................... 7-9

Stopping the engine........................................... 7-10

Remote engine start system

(dealer option) ................................................. 7-11

Starting your vehicle .......................................... 7-11

Remote start safety features ............................... 7-11

Entering the vehicle while it is running via remote

start................................................................. 7-12

Entering the vehicle following remote engine start

shutdown......................................................... 7-12

Pre-heating or pre-cooling the interior of the

vehicle ............................................................. 7-12

Service mode ..................................................... 7-12

Remote transmitter programming and

programmable feature option............................ 7-12

System maintenance .......................................... 7-13

Manual transmission – 5 speeds ...................... 7-14

Shifting speeds .................................................. 7-15

Driving tips ........................................................ 7-15

Manual transmission – 6 speeds (2.5GT

spec.B) ............................................................. 7-16

Selecting reverse gear........................................ 7-16

Shifting speeds .................................................. 7-17

Driving tips ........................................................ 7-17

Automatic transmission – 4-speed................... 7-18

Selector lever .................................................... 7-18

Selector lever reverse inhibiting function............ 7-20

Selection of manual mode.................................. 7-21

Maximum speeds............................................... 7-22

Driving tips........................................................ 7-22

SPORT mode..................................................... 7-23

Shift lock release............................................... 7-23

Automatic transmission – 5-speed................... 7-24

Selector lever .................................................... 7-25

Selector lever reverse inhibiting function............ 7-26

Selection of manual mode.................................. 7-27

Maximum speeds............................................... 7-29

Driving tips........................................................ 7-29

Shift lock release............................................... 7-29

SI-DRIVE (Except 2.5-liter non-Turbo

models)............................................................ 7-30

Intelligent (I) mode ............................................. 7-31

Sport (S) mode .................................................. 7-31

Sport Sharp (S#) mode....................................... 7-32

SI-DRIVE selector .............................................. 7-32

SI-DRIVE Sport Sharp (S#) switch ...................... 7-32

Rear viscous limited slip differential (LSD)

(if equipped) .................................................... 7-33

Power steering................................................... 7-33

Braking ............................................................... 7-34

Braking tips....................................................... 7-34

Brake system .................................................... 7-34

Disc brake pad wear warning indicators ............. 7-34

ABS (Anti-lock Brake System).......................... 7-35

Starting and operating

Black plate (14,1)

北米Model "A2440BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 5/ 7

Starting and operating

ABS system self-check....................................... 7-35

ABS warning light .............................................. 7-35

Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD)

system ............................................................. 7-36

Steps to take if EBD system fails ........................ 7-37

Vehicle Dynamics Control system

(if equipped) .................................................... 7-38

Vehicle Dynamics Control system monitor .......... 7-39

Vehicle Dynamics Control OFF switch................. 7-42

Tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS)

(if equipped) .................................................... 7-43

Parking your vehicle ......................................... 7-44

Parking brake .................................................... 7-45

Parking tips ....................................................... 7-45

Cruise control .................................................... 7-46

To set cruise control .......................................... 7-46

To temporarily cancel the cruise control ............. 7-47

To turn off the cruise control.............................. 7-48

To change the cruising speed ............................ 7-48

Cruise control indicator light .............................. 7-49

Cruise control set indicator light ........................ 7-49

Black plate (251,1)

北米Model "A2440BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 5/ 7

Fuel

CAUTION

Use of a fuel which is low in quality

or use of an inappropri ate fuel

additive may cause engine damage.

& Fuel requirements

! 2.5-liter non-turbo models

The 2.5-liter non-turbo engine is designed

to operate using unleaded gasoline with

an octane rating of 87 AKI or higher.

! 2.5-liter turbo models

The 2.5-liter turbo engine is designed to

operate using premium unleaded gasoline

with an octane rating of 91 AKI or higher. If

premium unleaded gasoline is not avail-

able, regular unleaded gasoline with an

octane rating of 87 AKI or higher may be

temporarily used. For optimum engine

performance and driveability, it is required

that you use premium grade unleaded

gasoline.

NOTE

Be sure to use premium unleaded

gasoline of 91 AKI or higher for a 2.5-

liter turbo engine model. If other gaso-

line (lower than 91 AKI) is used, knock-

ing, reduced output and poor accelera-

tor response will result.

! 3.0-liter models

The 3.0-liter engine is designed to operate

using unleaded gasoline with an octane

rating of 91 AKI or higher. R egular

unleaded gasoline with an octane rating

of 87 AKI or higher may be used. However

for optimum engine performa nce and

driveability, it is recommended that you

use 91 AKI or higher grade unleaded

gasoline. You may experience reduced

output, poor accelerator response, and

reduced fuel economy when using gaso-

line with an octane rating lower than 91

AKI, depending on your driving habits and

conditions. If you experience any of these

conditions while using a lower octane

rated fuel, you may want to return to using

91 AKI octane rated fuel as soon as

possible. Additionally, if your vehicle

knocks heavily or persistently, or if you

are driving with heavy loads such as when

towing a trailer, the use of 91 AKI or higher

grade unleaded gasoline is required.

! Fuel octane rating

This octane rating is the average of the

Research Octane and Motor Octane

numbers and is commonly referred to as

the Anti Knock Index (AKI).

Using a gasoline with a lower octane

rating can cause persistent and heavy

knocking, which can damage the engine.

Do not be concerned if your vehicl e

sometimes knocks lightly when you drive

up a hill or when you accelerate. See your

dealer or a qualified service technician if

you use a fuel with the specified octane

rating and your vehicle knocks heavily or

persistently.

! Unleaded gasoline

The neck of the fuel filler pipe is designed

to accept only an unleaded gasoline filler

nozzle. Under no circumstances should

leaded gasoline be used because it will

damage the emission control system and

may impair driveability and fuel economy.

! California fuel

If your vehicle was certified to California

Emission Standards as indicated on the

underhood tune-up label, it is designed to

optimize engine and emission control

system performance with gasoline that

meets the clean burning low-sulfur Cali-

fornia gasoline specifications. If you live in

any other state t han California, your

Starting and operating 7-3

– CONTINUED –

Black plate (252,1)

北米Model "A2440BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 5/ 7

7-4 Starting and operating

vehicle will operate on gasoline meeting

Federal specifications. Gasoline sold out-

side California is permitted to have higher

sulfur levels, which may affect the perfor-

mance of your vehicle’s catalytic converter

and may produce a sulfur exhaust odor or

smell. SUBARU recommends that you try

a different brand of unleaded gasoline

having lower sulfur to determine if the

problem is fuel related before returning

your vehicle to an authorized dealer for

service. The CHECK ENGINE warning

light/malfunction indicator lamp may also

turn on. If this occurs, return to your

authorized SUBARU dealer for diagnosis.

If it is determined that the condition is

caused by the type of fuel used, repairs

may not be covered by your warranty.

! MMT

Some gasoline contains an octane-en-

hancing additive called MMT (Methylcy-

clopentadienyl Manganese Tricarbonyl). If

you use such fuels, your emission control

system performance may deteriorate and

the CHECK ENGINE warning light/mal-

function indicator lamp may turn on. If this

happens, r eturn to your authorized

SUBARU Deal er for service. If it is

determined that the condition is caused

by the type of fuel used, repairs may not

be covered by your warranty.

! Gasoline for cleaner air

CAUTION

Do not let fuel spill on the exterior

surfaces of the vehicle. Fuels con-

taining alcoho l may ca use pai nt

damage, which is not covered under

the SUBARU Limited Warranty.

Your use of gasoline with detergent

additives will help prevent deposits from

forming in your engine and fuel system.

This helps keep your engine in tune and

your emission control system working

properly, and is a way of doing your part

for cleaner air. If you continuously use a

high quality fuel with the proper detergent

and other additives, you should never

need to add any fuel system cleaning

agents to your fuel tank.

Many gasolines are now blended with

materials called oxygenates. Use of these

fuels can also help keep the air cleaner.

Oxygenated blend fuels, such as MTBE

(Methyl Tertiary Butyl ether) or ethanol

(ethyl or grain alcohol) may be used in

your vehicle, but should contain no more

than 15% MTBE or 10% ethanol for the

proper operation of your SUBARU.

In addition, some gasoline suppliers are

now producing reformu lated gasolines,

which ar e designed to reduce vehicle

emissions. SUBARU approves the use of

reformulated gasoline.

If you are not sure what the fuel contains,

you should ask your service station

operators if their gasolines contain deter-

gents and oxygenates and if they have

been reformulated to reduce vehicle emis-

sions.

As additional guidance, only use fuels

suited for your vehicle as explained in the

following.

. Fuel should be unleaded and have an

octane rating no lower than that specified

in this manual.

. Methanol (methyl or wood alcohol) is

sometimes mixed with unleaded gasoline.

Methanol can be used in your vehicle

ONLY if it does not exceed 5% of the fuel

mixture AND if it is accompanied by

sufficient quantities of the proper cosol-

vents and corrosion inhibitors required to

prevent damage to the fuel system. Do not

use fuel containing methanol EXCEPT

under these conditions.

. If undesirable driveability problems are

experienced and you suspect they may be

fuel related, try a different brand of gaso-

line before seeking service at your

SUBARU dealer.

Black plate (253,1)

北米Model "A2440BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 5/ 7

. Fuel system damage or dr iveability

problems which result from the use of

improper fuel are not covered under the

SUBARU Limited Warranty.

& Fuel filler lid and cap

CAUTION

Always use a genuine SUBARU fuel

filler cap. If you use the wrong cap, it

may not fit or have proper venting,

and your fuel tank and emission

control system might be damaged.

! Refueling

WARNING

Gasoline vapor is highly flammable.

Before refueling, always first stop

the engine and make sure that there

are n o lighted cigarettes, open

flames or electrical sparks in the

adjacent area.

CAUTION

. Never add any cleaning agents to

the fuel tank. The addition of a

cleaning agent may cause da-

mage to the fuel system.

. Do not let fuel spill on the exterior

surfaces of the vehicle. Fuels

may cause paint damage, which

is not covered under the

SUBARU Limited Warranty.

1. To open the fuel filler lid, pull the lid

release lever up. The lever is on the floor

at the left of the driver’s seat.

2. Open the fuel filler lid.

Starting and operating 7-5

– CONTINUED –

Black plate (254,1)

北米Model "A2440BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 5/ 7

7-6 Starting and operating

1) Open

2) Close

WARNING

When open ing the cap, d o not

remove the cap quickly. Fuel may

be under pressure and spray out of

the fuel filler neck especially in hot

weather, which may cause injury.

3. Remove the fuel filler cap by turning it

slowly counterclockwise.

4. Stop filling the tank after the fuel filler

pump automatically turns off. Do not add

any more fuel.

CAUTION

Make sure that the cap is tightened

until it clicks to prevent fuel spillage

in the event of an accident.

5. Put the cap back on, turn it clockwise

until you hear a clicking noise. Be certain

not to catch the tether under the cap while

tightening.

6. Close the fuel filler lid completely. If

you spill any fuel on the painted surface,

rinse it off immediately. Otherwise, the

painted surface could be damaged.

NOTE

. You will see the “ ” sign in the fuel

gauge. This indicates that the fuel filler

door (lid) is located on the right side of

the vehicle.

. If the fuel filler cap is not tightened

until it clicks or if the tether is caught

under the cap, the CHECK ENGINE

warning light/malfunction indicator

lamp may come on. Refer to the

“Warning and indicator lights” section

located in chapter 3.

CAUTION

Promptly put fuel in the tank when-

ever the low fuel warning light

comes o n. Engine misfires as a

result of an empty tank could cause

damage to the engine.

Black plate (255,1)

北米Model "A2440BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 5/ 7

State emission testing (U.S.

only)

WARNING

Testing of an All-Wheel Drive vehicle

must NEVER be performed on a

single two-wheel dynamometer. At-

tempting to do so will result in

uncontrolled vehicle movement and

may cause an accident or injuries to

persons nearby.

CAUTION

Resultant vehicle damage due to

improper testing is not covered

under the SUBARU Limited War-

ranty and is the responsibility of

the state inspection program or its

contractors or licensees.

At state inspection time, remember to

tell your inspection or service station in

advance not to place your SUBARU

AWD vehicle on a two-wheel dynam-

ometer. Otherwise, serious transmis-

sion damage will result.

Some states have started using dynam-

ometers in their state inspection programs

in order to meet their obligation under

federal law to implement stricter vehicle

emission standards to reduce air pollution

from vehicles. A dynamometer is a tread-

mill or roller-like testing device that allows

your vehicle’s wheels to turn while the

vehicle remains in one place. Depending

on the severity of a state’s air pollution

problems, the states must adopt either a

“basic” or “enhanced” vehicle emission

inspection test. Normally, a portion of the

basic emission test consists of an emis-

sion inspector inserting an analyzer probe

into the exhaust pipe of an idling vehicle

for a short period of time. States with more

severe air pollution problems are required

to adopt an enhanced vehicle emission

test. This test simulates actual driving

conditions on a dynamometer and permits

more accurate measurement of tailpipe

emitted pollution than the basic emission

test.

The U.S. Environmental Protection

Agency (EPA) and states using two-wheel

dynamometers in their emission testing

programs have EXEMPTED SUBARU

AWD vehicles from the portion of the

testing program that involves a two-wheel

dynamometer.

There are some states that use four-wheel

dynamometers in their testing programs.

When properly used, that equipment will

not damage an AWD SUBARU vehicle.

Under no circumstances should the rear

wheels be jacked off the ground, nor

should the driveshaft be disconnected for

state emission testing.

The EPA has issued regulations for

inspecting the On-Board Diagnostic

(OBD) system as part of the state emis-

sions inspection. The OBD system is

designed to detect engine and transmis-

sion problems that might cause vehicle

emissions to exceed allowable limits.

These inspections apply to all 1996 model

year and newer passenger cars and light

trucks. Over 30 states plus the District of

Columbia have implemented the OBD

system inspection.

. The inspection of the OBD system

consists of a visual operational check of

the “CHECK ENGINE” warning light/mal-

function indicator lamp (MIL) and an

examination of the OBD system with an

electronic scan tool while the engine is

running.

. Avehicle

passes the OBD system

inspection if proper the “CHECK ENGINE”

warning light/MIL illumination is observed,

there is no stored diagno stic troubl e

codes, and the OBD system readiness

monitors are complete.

. A vehicle

fails the OBD inspection if the

“CHECK ENGINE” warning light/MIL is

Starting and operating 7-7

– CONTINUED –

Black plate (256,1)

北米Model "A2440BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 5/ 7

7-8 Starting and operating

not properly operating or there is one or

more diagnostic trouble codes stored in

vehicle’s computer with the “CHECK

ENGINE” warning light/MIL illuminated.

. A state emission inspection may reject

(not pass or fail) a vehicle if the number of

OBD system readiness monitors “Not

Ready” is greater than one. Under this

condition, the vehicle operator should be

instructed to drive his/her vehicle for a few

days to set the monitors and return for an

emission re-inspection.

. Owners of rejected or failing vehicles

should contact their SUBARU Dealer for

service.

Preparing to drive

You should perform the following checks

and adjustments every day before you

start driving.

1. Check that all windows, mirrors, and

lights are clean and unobstructed.

2. Check the appearance and condition

of the tires. Also check tires for proper

inflation.

3. Look under the vehicle for any sign of

leaks.

4. Check that the hood, trunk (Sedan)

and rear gate (Station wagon) are fully

closed.

5. Check the adjustment of the seat.

6. Check the adjustment of the inside

and outside mirrors.

7. Fasten your seatbelt. Check that your

passengers have fastened their seatbelts.

8. Check the operation of the warning

and indicato r lig hts when th e ign itio n

switch is turned to the “ON” position.

9. Check the gauges, indicator and warn-

ing lights after starting the engine.

NOTE

Engine oil, engine coolant, brake fluid,

washer fluid and other fluid levels

should be checked daily, weekly or at

fuel stops.

Black plate (257,1)

北米Model "A2440BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 5/ 7

Starting the engine

CAUTION

Do not operate the starter motor

continuously for more than 10 sec-

onds. If the engine fails to start after

operating the starter for 5 to 10

seconds, wait for 10 seconds or

more before trying again.

& Manual transmission vehicle

1. Apply the parking brake.

2. Turn off unnecessary lights and ac-

cessories.

3. Press the clutch pedal to the floor and

shift the shift lever into neutral.

Hold the clutch pedal to the floor while

starting the engine. The starter motor will

only operate when the clutch pedal is

pressed fully to the floor.

4. Turn the ignition switch to the “ON”

position and check the operation of the

warning and indicator lights. Refer to the

“Warning and i ndicator lights” section

(chapter 3).

5. Turn the ignition switch to the “START”

position without depressing the accelera-

tor pedal. Release the key immediately

after the engine has started.

If the engine does n ot start, try the

following.

(1) Turn the ignition switch to the

“LOCK” position and wait for at least

10 seconds. After checking that the

parking brake is firmly set, turn the

ignition switch to the “START” position

while depressing the accelerator pedal

slightly (approximately a quarter of the

full stroke). Release the accelerator

pedal as soon as the engine starts.

(2) If this fails to start the engine, turn

the ignition switch back to the “LOCK”

position and wait for at least 10

seconds. Then fully depress the accel-

erator pedal and turn the ignition

switch to the “START” position. If the

engine sta rts, qui ckly re lease t he

accelerator pedal.

(3) If this fails to start the engine, turn

the ignition switch again to the “ LOCK”

position. After waiting for 10 seconds

or longer, turn the ignition switch to the

“START” position without depressing

the accelerator pedal.

(4) If the engine still refuses to start,

contact your nearest SUBARU dealer

for assistance.

6. Confirm that all warning and indicator

lights have gone off after the engine has

started. The fuel injection system auto-

matically lowers the idle speed as the

engine warms up.

& Automatic transmission ve-

hicle

CAUTION

If you restart the engine while the

vehicle is moving, shift the selector

lever into the “N” position. Do not

attempt to place the selector lever of

a moving vehicle into the “P” posi-

tion.

1. Apply the parking brake.

2. Turn off unnecessary lights and ac-

cessories.

3. Shift the selector lever to the “P” or “N”

position (preferably “P” position). The

starter will only operate when the select

lever is at the “P” or “N” position.

4. Turn the ignition switch to the “ON”

position and check the operation of the

warning and indicator lights. Refer to the

“Warning and indicator lights” section

(chapter 3).

5. Turn the ignition switch to the “START”

position without depressing the accelera-

Starting and operating 7-9

– CONTINUED –

Black plate (258,1)

北米Model "A2440BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 5/ 7

7-10 Starting and operating

tor pedal. Release the key immediately

after the engine has started.

If the engine does not start, try the

following.

(1) Turn the ignition switch to the

“LOCK” position and wait for at least

10 seconds. After checking that the

parking brake is firmly set, turn the

ignition switch to the “START” position

while depressing the accelerator pedal

slightly (approximately a quarter of the

full stroke). Release the accelerator

pedal as soon as the engine starts.

(2) If this fails to start the engine, turn

the ignition switch back to the “LOCK”

position and wait for at least 10

seconds. Then fully depress the accel-

erator peda l and turn the ignition

switch to the “START” position. If the

engine s tarts, qu ickly r elease the

accelerator pedal.

(3) If this fails to start the engine, turn

the ignition switch again to the “ LOCK”

position. After waiting for 10 seconds

or longer, turn the ignition switch to the

“START” position without depressing

the accelerator pedal.

(4) If the engine still refuses to start,

contact your nearest SUBARU dealer

for assistance.

6. Confirm that all warning and indicator

lights have gone out after the engine has

started. The fuel injection system auto-

matically lowers the idle speed as the

engine warms up.

While the engine is warming up, make

sure that the selector lever is at the “P” or

“N” position and that the parking brake is

applied.

Stopping the engine

WARNING

Do not stop the engine when the

vehicle is moving. This will cause

loss of power to the power steering

and the brake booster, making steer-

ing and braking more difficult. It

could also result in accidental acti-

vation of the “LOCK” position on the

ignition switch, causing the steering

wheel to lock.

The ignition switch should be turned off

only when the vehicle is stopped and the

engine is idling.

Black plate (259,1)

北米Model "A2440BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 5/ 7

Remote engine start system

(dealer option)

WARNING

. Do not remote start a vehicle in

an enclosed environment (e.g.

closed garage). Prolonged opera-

tion of a motor vehicle in an

enclosed environment can cause

a harmful build-up of Carbon

Monoxide. Carbon Monoxide is

harmful to your health. Exposure

to high levels of Carbon Monox-

ide can cause headaches, dizzi-

ness or in extreme cases uncon-

sciousness and/or death.

. Before performing any servicing

of the vehicle, temporarily place

the remote engine start system in

service mode to prevent the

system from unexpectedly start-

ing the engine.

& Starting your vehicle

The remote control start system is acti-

vated by pressing the “

” button twice

within 3 seconds on your remote control

transmitter. The system will check certain

pre-conditions before starting, and if all

safety parameters are correct, the engine

will start within 5 seconds. While the

vehicle is operating via remote engine

start, the vehicle’s power window features

will be disabled. Also, the system has a

timer and will shut down after 15 minutes if

you do not operate the vehicle. Press and

hold the “

” button for 2 seconds again to

turn the vehicle off. If the vehicle’s starter

cranks but does not start or starts and

stalls, the remote engine start system will

power off then attempt to start the vehicle

an additional four times. If the vehicle fails

to start after the additional attempts, the

remote engine start system will abort and

return to a non activated state.

& Remote start safety features

For safety and security reasons, the

system will fail to start and beep the horn

twice or shut down the engine during

remote start operati on if any of the

following occur:

. The brake pedal is pressed before the

vehicle ignition switch is turned “on”

. The key was already in the ignition

switch

. The engine hood is opened

. The vehicle’s engine idle speed has

reached a level over 3,000 RPM

. The alarm is triggered by opening a

door or the rear gate.

NOTE

. The security indicator light on the

dashboard will stop flashing while

under remote engine start operation,

but the vehicle is still protected.

. If the vehicle is entered during

remote engine start operation, the

system will not record entry in the

alarm history.

Starting and operating 7-11

– CONTINUED –

Black plate (260,1)

北米Model "A2440BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 5/ 7

7-12 Starting and operating

& Entering the vehicle while it

is running via remote start

1. Unlock the vehicle doors using the

keyless e ntry system. If the vehicle’s

doors are unlocked manually using the

key, the vehicle’s alarm system will trigger

and the remote engine start system will

turn off. Inserting the key into the ignition

switch and turning it to the “ON” position or

pressing the unlock button “

” on the

remote keyless entry transmitter will dis-

arm the alarm system. Refer to the “Alarm

system” section in chapter 2.

2. Enter the vehicle. Do not press the

brake pedal.

3. Insert the key into the ignition switch

and turn to the “ON” position. If the ignition

switch is accidentally turned to the

“START” position, the system’s “starter

anti-grind” feature will prevent the starter

from re-cranking.

4. Press the brake pedal. The remote

starter disengages, the vehicle’s power

window features are re-enabled and the

vehicle will operate normally.

& Entering the vehicle follow-

ing remote engine start shut-

down

An alarm trigger may occur if the vehicle is

opened by the r emote keyless entry

transmitter within a few seconds immedi-

ately following remote engine start shut-

down.

& Pre-heating or pre-cooling

the interior of the vehicle

Before exiting the vehicle, set the tem-

perature controls to the desired setting

and operation. After the system starts the

vehicle, the heater or air-conditioning will

activate and heat or cool the interior to

your setting.

& Service mode

In service mode, the remote start function

is temporarily disabl ed to prevent the

system from un expectedly starting the

engine while being serviced.

! To engage the service mode

Turn the ignition switch to the “ON”

position, depress and hold the brake pedal

then, press and release the “

” button on

the remote control transmitter three times.

The system will pause for 1 second and

then flash the parking lights and honk the

horn three times indicating that the system

is in service mode. When attempting to

activate the remote start system while in

service mode, the parking lights will flash

and the horn will honk two times and will

not start.

! To disengage the service mode

Turntheignitionswitchtothe“ON”

position, depress and hold the brake

pedal, then press and release the “

”

button on the remote control transmitter

three times. The system will pause for 1

second and flash the parking lights 1 time

indicating that the system has exited

service mode.

NOTE

When taking your vehicle in for service,

it is recommended that you inform the

service personnel that your vehicle is

equipped with a remote control start

system.

& Remote transmitter program-

ming and programmable fea-

ture option

New transmitters can be programmed to

the engine starter system in the event that

remote transmitters are lost, stolen or

damaged. The remote engine start system

also has one programmable feature that

can be adjusted for user preference.

The remote engine starter system can be

programmed to either make an audible

horn chirp upon remote start activation or

not. Remote transmitter programming and

feature programming can be adjusted

using the following procedure.

Black plate (261,1)

北米Model "A2440BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 5/ 7

1. Open the driver’s door (the driver’s

door must remain opened throughout the

entire process).

2. Insert the key into the vehicle’s ignition

switch and turn to the “ON” position.

3. Locate the small black programming

button behind the fuse box cover, on the

driver’s side left unde r the dashboard

panel.

4. Press and hold the black programming

button for 10 to 15 seconds. The horn will

honk and the parking lights will flash three

times to indicate that the system has

entered programming mode. At this point

you can perform either action (Step 5 or

Step 6).

5. To program a remote transmitter:

press and release the “

” button on each

transmitter. The horn will honk and the

parking lights will flash one time to indicate

a successful transmitter learn each time

the “

” button is pressed. You can

program up to eight transmitters.

6. To toggle the Horn Confirmation chirps

ON/OFF: press and release the brake to

toggle the feature. The horn will chirp and

the parking lights will flash one time to

indicate Confirmation Horn Chirps are

“OFF”. The horn will honk and the parking

lights will flash 2 times to indicate Con-

firmation Horn Chirps are “ON”. Pressing

the brake pedal repeatedly will toggle the

feature ON or OFF each time.

7. To exit the remote transmitter and

feature programming mode, turn the igni-

tion switch to the “LOCK” position, remove

the key from the ignition switch and test

operation of the remote transmitter(s) and

horn confirmation feature.

& System maintenance

! Changing the remote control bat-

teries

The two 3-volt lithium batteries (model

CR-1220) supplied in your remote control

should last approximately three ye ars,

depending on usage. When the batteries

begin to weaken, you will notice a

decrease in range (distance from the

vehicle that your remote control operates).

Follow the instructions below to change

the remote control batteries.

1. Carefully pry the remote control halves

apart using a small flathead screwdriver.

Starting and operating 7-13

– CONTINUED –

Black plate (262,1)

北米Model "A2440BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 5/ 7

7-14 Starting and operating

2. Remove the circuit board from the

bottom half of the case and slide the white

plastic battery holder out from under the

battery tab releasing the batteries. Re-

move the old batteries and replace with

new ones. Be sure to observe the (+) sign

on the old batteries before removing them

to ensure that the new batteries are

inserted properly (battery “+” should be

pointed away from the transmitter circuit

board on both batteries).

3. Carefully snap the case halves back

together, then test the remote control.

NOTE

This device complies with Part 15 of

the FCC Rules and with RSS-210 of

Industry Canada. Operation is subject

to the following two conditions: (1) This

device may not cause harmful inter-

ference, and (2) this device must

accept any interference received, in-

cluding interference that may cause

undesired operation.

Changes or modifications not ex-

pressly approved by the party respon-

sible for compliance could void the

user’s authority to operate the equip-

ment.

Manual transmission – 5

speeds

WARNING

Do not drive the vehicle with the

clutch disengaged (i.e., when the

clutch pedal is depressed) or with

the shift lever in the neutral position.

Engine braking has no effect in

either of these conditions and the

risk of an accident is consequently

increased.

CAUTION

Shift into reverse ONLY when the

vehicle has completely stopped. It

may cause damage to the transmis-

sion to try shifting into reverse when

the vehicle is moving.

The manual transmission is a fully syn-

chromeshed, 5-forward-speed and 1-re-

verse-speed transmission.

Black plate (263,1)

北米Model "A2440BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 5/ 7

The shift pattern is shown on the shift

lever knob. When shifting from 5th gear to

reverse gear, first return the shift lever to

the neutral position then shift into reverse

gear.

To change gears, fully depress the clutch

pedal, move the shift lever, and gradually

let up on the clutch pedal.

If it is difficult to shift into gear, put the

transmission in neutral, release the clutch

pedal momentarily, and then try again.

& Shifting speeds

! Recommended shifting speeds

The best compromise between fuel econ-

omy and vehicle performance during

normal driving is ensured by shifting up

at the speeds listed in the following table.

Shift up mph (km/h)

1st to 2nd 15 (24)

2nd to 3rd 25 (40)

3rd to 4th 35 (56)

4th to 5th

45 (73)

! Maximum allowable speeds

WARNING

When shifting down a gear, ensure

that the vehicle is not travelling at a

speed exceeding the Maximum Al-

lowable Speed for the gear which is

about to be selected. Failure to

observe this precaution can lead to

engine over-revving and this in turn

can result in engine damage.

In addition, sudden application of

engine brakes when the vehicle is

travelling on a slippery surface can

lead to wheel locking; as a conse-

quence, control of the vehicle may

be lost and the risk of an accident

increased.

The following table shows the maximum

speeds that are possible with each differ-

ent gear.

Never exceed the speed limit below for

each gear position except for brief accel-

eration in an emergency. The tach-

ometer’s needle will enter the red area if

these speeds are exceeded. Failure to

observe this precaution can lead to

excessive eng ine wear and poor fuel

economy.

Non-turbo models

mph (km/h)

Gear

Except

OUTBACK

1st 30 (48) 30 (48)

2nd 50 (81) 52 (82)

3rd 71 (116)

71 (116)

Turbo models

mph (km/h)

Gear

Except

OUTBACK

1st 32 (52) 32 (52)

2nd 54 (88) 54 (88)

3rd 80 (129)

78 (127)

NOTE

Never exceed posted speed limits.

& Driving tips

Do not drive with your foot resting on the

clutch pedal and do not use the clutch to

hold your vehicle at a standstill on an

upgrade. Either of those actions may

Starting and operating 7-15

– CONTINUED –

Black plate (264,1)

北米Model "A2440BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 5/ 7

7-16 Starting and operating

cause clutch damage.

Do not drive with your hand resting on the

shift lever. This may cause wear on the

transmission components.

When it is necessary to reduce vehicle

speed due to slow traffic, turning corners,

or driving up steep hills, downshift to a

lower gear before the engine starts to

labor.

. On steep downgrades, downshift the

transmission to 4th, 3rd or 2nd gear as

necessary; this helps to maintain a safe

speed and to extend brake pad life.

In this way, the engine provides a braking

effect. Remember, if you “ride” (over use)

the brakes while descending a hill, they

may overheat and not work properly.

. The engine may, on rare occasions,

knock when the vehicle rapidly acceler-

ates or rapidly pulls away from a standstill.

This phenomenon does not indicate a

malfunction.

. A slight reduction in output torque may

occur in the models with a 2.5-liter turbo

engine before the engine warms up.

Manual transmission – 6

speeds (2.5GT spec.B)

WARNING

Do not drive the vehicle with the

clutch disengaged (i.e., when the

clutch pedal is depressed) or with

the shift lever in the neutral position.

Engine braking has no effect in

either of these conditions and the

risk of an accident is consequently

increased.

The manual transmission is a fully syn-

chromeshed, 6-forward-speed and 1-re-

verse-speed transmission.

The shift pattern is shown on the shift

lever knob.

& Selecting reverse gear

CAUTION

Shift into reverse ONLY when the

vehicle has completely stopped. It

may cause damage to the transmis-

sion to try shifting into reverse when

the vehicle is moving.

1) Slider

You must raise the slider and hold it in that

position before you can move the shift

lever to the “R” position.

To change gears, fully depress the clutch

pedal, move the shift lever, and gradually

Black plate (265,1)

北米Model "A2440BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 5/ 7

let up on the clutch pedal.

If it is difficult to shift into gear, put the

transmission in neutral, release the clutch

pedal momentarily, and then try again.

& Shifting speeds

! Recommended shifting speeds

The best compromise between fuel econ-

omy and vehicle performance during

normal driving is ensured by shifting up

at the speeds listed in the following table.

Shift up mph (km/h)

1st to 2nd 15 (24)

2nd to 3rd 25 (40)

3rd to 4th 40 (64)

4th to 5th 45 (72)

5th to 6th

50 (80)

! Maximum allowable speeds

WARNING

When shifting down a gear, ensure

that the vehicle is not travelling at a

speed exceeding the Maximum Al-

lowable Speed for the gear which is

about to be selected. Failure to

observe this precaution can lead to

engine over-revving and this in turn

can result in engine damage.

In addition, sudden application of

engine brakes when the vehicle is

travelling on a slippery surface can

lead to wheel locking; as a conse-

quence, control of the vehicle may

be lost and the risk of an accident

increased.

The following tables show the maximum

speeds that are possible with each differ-

ent gear. The tachometer’s needle will

enter the red area if these speeds are

exceeded.

With the exception of cases where sudden

acceleration is required, the vehicle

should not be driven with the tachometer’s

needle inside the red area. Failure to

observe this preca ution can lead to

excessive engine wear and poor fuel

economy.

Gear mph (km/h)

1st 33 (54)

2nd 51 (83)

3rd 69 (112)

4th 90 (147)

5th 125 (204)

6th

Top speed

NOTE

Never exceed posted speed limits.

& Driving tips

Do not drive with your foot resting on the

clutch pedal and do not use the clutch to

hold your vehicle at a standstill on an

upgrade. Either of those actions may

cause clutch damage.

Do not drive with your hand resting on the

shift lever. This may cause wear on the

transmission components.

When it is necessary to reduce vehicle

speed due to slow traffic, turning corners,

or driving up steep hills, downshift to a

lower gear before the engine starts to

labor.

On steep downgrades, downshift the

transmission to 5th, 4th, 3rd or 2nd gear

as necessary; this helps to maintain a safe

speed and to extend brake pad life.

In this way, the engine provides a braking

effect. Remember, if you “ride” (over use)

the brakes while descending a hill, they

may overheat and not work properly.

The engine may, on rare occasions, knock

when the vehicle rapidly accelerates or

rapidly pulls away from a standstill. This

phenomenon does not indicate a problem.

Starting and operating 7-17

Black plate (266,1)

北米Model "A2440BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 5/ 7

7-18 Starting and operating

Automatic transmission – 4-

speed

The automatic transmission is electroni-

cally controlled and provides 4 forward

speeds and 1 reverse speed. Also, it has a

manual mode and a SPORT mode.

WARNING

Do not shift from the “P” or “N”

position into the “D” or “R” position

while depressing the accelerator

pedal. This may cause the vehicle

to jump forward or backward.

CAUTION

. Shift into the “P” or “R” position

only after the vehicle is comple-

tely stopped. Shifting while the

vehicle is moving may cause

damage to the transmission.

. Do not race the engine for more

than 5 seconds in any position

except the “N” or “P” position

when the brake is set or when

chocks are used in the wheels.

This may cause the automatic

transmission fluid to overheat.

. Avoid shifting from one of the

forward driving positions into the

“R” position or vice versa until

the vehicle has completely

stopped. Such shifting may

cause damage to the transmis-

sion.

. When parking the vehicle, first

securely apply the parking brake

and then place the selector lever

in the “P” position. Avoid parking

for a long time with the selector

lever in any other position as

doing so could result in a dead

battery.

NOTE

. When the engine coolant tempera-

ture is still low, your vehicle’s auto-

matic transmission will up-shift at high-

er engine speeds than when the cool-

ant temperature is sufficiently high in

order to shorten the warm-up time and

improve driveability. The gearshift tim-

ing will automatically shift to the nor-

mal timing after the engine has warmed

up.

. Immediately after ATF (automatic

transmission fluid) is replaced, you

may feel that the automatic transmis-

sion operation is somewhat unusual.

This results from invalidation of data

which the on-board computer has

collected and stored in memory to

allow the transmission to shift at the

most appropriate times for the current

condition of your vehicle. Optimized

shifting will be restored as the vehicle

continues to be driven for a while.

& Selector lever

: Shift possible with brake pedal de-

pressed

: Shift possible with brake pedal not

depressed

The selector lever has four positions, “P”,

“R”, “N”, “D” and also has manual gate for

using “SPORT” mode or manual mode.

Black plate (267,1)

北米Model "A2440BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 5/ 7

! P (Park)

This position is for parking the vehicle and

starting the engine.

In this position, the transmission is me-

chanically locked to prevent the vehicle

from rolling freely.

When you park the vehicle, first set the

parking brake fully, then shift into the “P”

position. Do not hold the vehicle with only

the transmission.

To shift the selector lever from the “P” to

any other position, you should depress the

brake pedal fully then move the selector

lever. This pre vents the vehicl e from

lurching when it is started.

! R (Reverse)

This position is for backing the vehicle.

To shift from the “N” to “R” position, stop

the vehicle completely then move the

lever to the “R” position.

! N (Neutral)

This position is for restarting a stalled

engine.

In this position the wheels and transmis-

sion are not locked. In this position, the

transmission is neutral; the vehicle will roll

freely, even on the slightest incline unless

the parking brake or foot brake is on.

Avoid coasting with the tra nsmission

neutral.

During coasting, there is no engine brak-

ing effect.

NOTE

If the selector lever is in the “N”

position when you stop the engine for

parking, you may not subsequently be

able to move it to the “R ” and “P”

positions. If this happens, turn the

ignition switch to the “ON” position.

Yo u will then be able to move the

selector lever to the “P” position.

WARNING

Do not drive the vehicle with the

selector lever in the “N” (neutral)

position. Engine braking has no

effect in this condition and the risk

of an accident is consequently in-

creased.

! D (Drive)

This position is for normal driving.

The transmission automatically shifts into

a suitable gear from 1st to 4th according to

the vehicle speed and the acceleration

you require.

When more acceleration is required in this

position, press the accelerator pedal fully

to the floor and hold that position. The

transmission will automatically downshift

to 3rd, 2nd or 1st gear. When you release

the pedal, the transmission will return to

the original gear position.

To use the “SPORT” mode, move the lever

from this position into the manual gate. To

use the manual mode, move the lever

from this position into the manual gate

then move it toward the “+” and “−” ends.

Starting and operating 7-19

– CONTINUED –

Black plate (268,1)

北米Model "A2440BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 5/ 7

7-20 Starting and operating

! While climbing a grade

When driving up a hill, undesired upshift to

4th gear is prevented from taking place

when the accelerator is released. This

minimizes t he chance of subsequent

downshifting to a lower gear when accel-

erating again. This prevents repeated

upshifting and downshifting resulting in a

smoother operation of the vehicle.

NOTE

The transmission may downshift to 2nd

or 1st gear, depending on the way the

accelerator pedal is pressed to accel-

erate the vehicle again.

! While going down a hill

When you are descending a hill or any

other slope while braking with the

“SPORT” mode selected, the transmission

may downshift to 3rd or 2nd gear depend-

ing on how hard you depress the brake

pedal, causing engine braking to work.

Reacceleration for a short time will cause

the transmission to upshift normally.

NOTE

. A 4th-to-3rd automatic downshift

will not occur at speeds above 50

mph (80 km/h) and a 3rd-to-2nd auto-

matic dow nshift will not occur at

speeds above 24 mph (38 km/h).

. Automatic downshifts to 3rd or 2nd

may occur even when driving on a level

road depending on conditions, such as

how hard you depress the brake pedal.

& Selector lever reverse inhi-

biting function

This function prevents accidental move-

ment of the selector lever to the “R”

position while the vehicle is moving.

The function becomes operational when

the vehicle reaches a speed of approxi-

mately 6 mph (10 km/h). Once opera-

tional, it prevents the selector lever from

being moved from the “N” position to the

“R” position. When the vehicle speed

drops below 6 mph (10 km/h), the function

is canceled. The selector lever can then

be moved to the “R” and “P” positions.

When the ignition switch has been turned

to the “LOCK” position, movement of the

selector lever from the “N” position to the

“R” position is possible for a limited time

period by depressing the brake pedal and

then becomes impossible. Also, the se-

lector lever cannot be moved to the “R”

position after it has been placed in the “P”

position and then placed again in the “N”

position.

When the movement of the selector lever

from the “N” position to the “R” position

has become impossible, turn the ignition

switch back to the “ON” position then

move the selector lever to the “P” position.

Pressing the selector lever release button

alsomakesitpossibletomovethe

selector lever to the “P” position at this

time.

! Selector lever release button

If you inadvertently have turned the igni-

tion switch to the “LOCK” position with the

selector lever in the “N” position, proceed

as follows. By referring to the “Shift lock

release” section in this chapter, remove

the shift lock release cover. Then, with the

screwdriver inserted into the hole, move

the selector lever to the “P” position. If the

selector lever reverse inhibiting function

fails, have the vehicle inspected by the

nearest SUBARU dealer.

Black plate (269,1)

北米Model "A2440BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 5/ 7

& Selection of manual mode

With the vehicle either moving or station-

ary, move the selector lever from the “D”

position to the manual gate then move it to

the “+” end or “−” end of the manual gate

to select manual mode.

1) Upshift indicator

2) Downshift indicator

3) Gear position indicator

When the manual mode is selected, the

gear position indicator and upshift indica-

tor and/or downshift ind icator in the

tachometer come on. The gear position

indicator shows the currently selected

gear in the 1st-to-4th-gear range. The

upshift and downshift indicators show

when a gearshift is possible. When the

upshift indicator “

” is on, upshifting is

possible. When the downshift indicator

“

” is on, downshifting is possible. When

both indicators are on, upshifting and

downshifting are both possible. When the

vehicle stops (for example, at traffic

signals), the downshift indicator goes off.

Gearshifts can be performed using the

selector lever.

Using the selector lever

Shift to the next-higher gear by briefly

pushing the selector lever toward the “+”

end of the manual gate.

Shift to the next-lower gear by briefly

pulling the selector lever toward the “−”

end of the manual gate.

NOTE

Please read the following points care-

fully and bear them in mind when using

the manual mode.

. If you attempt to shift down when

the engine speed is too high, i.e., when

a downshift would push the tachometer

needle beyond the red zone, beeps will

be emitted to warn you that the down-

shift is not possible.

Starting and operating 7-21

– CONTINUED –

Black plate (270,1)

北米Model "A2440BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 5/ 7

7-22 Starting and operating

. If you attempt to shift up when the

vehicle speed is too low, the transmis-

sion will not respond.

. You can perform a skip-shift (for

example, from 4th to 2nd) by operating

the selector lever twice in rapid suc-

cession.

. The transmission automatically se-

lects 1st gear when the vehicle stops

moving.

. If the temperature of the automatic

transmission fluid becomes too high,

the “AT OIL TEMP” warning light will

come on and upshifts to 4th gear will

not be possible. Immediately stop the

vehicle in a safe place and let the

engine idle until the warning light goes

off.

& Maximum speeds

WARNING

When down shifting, ensure that the

vehicle is not travelling at a speed

exceeding the Maximum Allowable

Speed for the gear which is about to

be selected. Failure to observe this

precaution can lead to engine over-

revving and this in turn can result in

engine damage.

In addition, sudden application of

engine braking caused by down

shifting when the vehicle is travel-

ling on a slippery surface can lead

to wheel locking; as a consequence,

control of the vehicle may be lost

and the risk of an accident in-

creased.

The following tables show the maximum

speeds that are possible with each differ-

ent gear.

When down shifting, it is important to

confirm that the current vehicle speed is

not in excess of the Maximum Allowable

Speed of the gear which is about to be

selected.

mph (km/h)

Position 2.5-liter non-turbo models

1 30 (48)

2 63 (101)

99 (160)

Never exceed posted speed limits.

NOTE

In order to prevent over-revving during

deceleration of the vehicle, the trans-

mission will remain in the current gear

if the speed of the vehicle is in excess

of the Maximum Allowable Speed for

the gear to which the selector lever has

been moved.

& Driving tips

. On a road surface where there is a risk

of wheelspin (for example, a snow- or

gravel-covered road), you can pull away

from a standstill (safely and easily) by first

selecting the 2nd gear of the manual

mode.

. Always apply the foot or parking brake

when the vehicle is stopped in the “D” or

“R” position.

. Always set the parking brake when

parking your vehicle. Do not hold the

vehicle with only the transmission.

. Do not keep the vehicle in a stationary

position on an uphill grade by using the

Black plate (271,1)

北米Model "A2440BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 5/ 7

“D” position. Use the brake instead.

. The engine may, on rare occasions,

knock when the vehicle rapidly acceler-

ates or rapidly pulls away from a standstill.

This phenomenon does not indicate a

fault.

& SPORT mode

SPORT mode is used when power is

needed for rapid acceleration or for uphill

driving. To select this mode, move the

selector lever from the “D” position to the

manual gate.

When selected, the SPORT mode indica-

tor light on the instrument panel will turn

on.

To deselect SPORT mode, move the

selector lever to the “D” position or select

manual mode.

To subsequently reselect SPORT mode,

move the selector lever to the “D” position

and from there to the manual gate.

In this mode, the transmission shifts up at

higher vehicle speeds and shifts down

more responsively than in normal mode.

& Shift lock release

If the selector lever does not move from

the “P” position with the brake pedal

depressed and the ignition switch in the

“ON” position, perform the following steps:

To override the shift lock:

1. Set the parking brake and stop the

engine.

2. Take out the screwdriver from the tool

bucket.

3. Remove the cover by prying on the

edge with a flat-head screwdriver.

Starting and operating 7-23

– CONTINUED –

Black plate (272,1)

北米Model "A2440BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 5/ 7

7-24 Starting and operating

4. Insert the screwdriver into the hole.

5. Push down on the screwdriver and

move the selector lever from the “P” to the

“N” position.

6. Remove the screwdriver from the hole.

Depress the brake pedal and start the

engine.

Take your vehicle to the nearest SUBARU

dealer immediately to have the system

repaired.

Automatic transmission – 5-

speed

The automatic transmission is electroni-

cally controlled and provides 5 forward

speeds and 1 reverse speed. Also, it has a

manual mode and SI-DRIVE mode.

WARNING

Do not shift from the “P” or “N”

position into the “D” or “R” position

while depressing the accelerator

pedal. This may cause the vehicle

to jump forward or backward.

CAUTION

. Shift into the “P” or “R” position

only after the vehicle is comple-

tely stopped. Shifting while the

vehicle is moving may cause

damage to the transmission.

. Do not race the engine for more

than 5 seconds in any position

except the “N” or “P” position

when the brake is set or when

chocks are used in the wheels.

This may cause the automatic

transmission fluid to overheat.

. Avoid shifting from one of the

forward driving positions into the

“R” position or vice versa until

the vehicle has completely

stopped. Such shifting may

cause damage to the transmis-

sion.

. When parking the vehicle, first

securely apply the parking brake

and then place the selector lever

in the “P” position. Avoid parking

for a long time with the selector

lever in any other position as

doing so could result in a dead

battery.

NOTE

. When the engine coolant tempera-

ture is still low, your vehicle’s auto-

matic transmission will up-shift at high-

er engine speeds than when the cool-

ant temperature is sufficiently high in

order to shorten the warm-up time and

improve driveability. The gearshift tim-

ing will automatically shift to the nor-

mal timing after the engine has warmed

up.

. Immediately after ATF (automatic

transmission fluid) is replaced, y ou

may feel that the automatic transmis-

sion operation is somewhat unusual.

This results from invalidation of data

Black plate (273,1)

北米Model "A2440BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 5/ 7

which the on-board computer has

collected and stored i n memory to

allow the transmission to shift at the

most appropriate times for the current

condition of your vehicle. Optimized

shifting will be restored as the vehicle

continues to be driven for a while.

& Selector lever

: Shift possible with brake pedal de-

pressed

: Shift possible with brake pedal not

depressed

The selector lever has four positions, “P”,

“R”, “N, “D” and also has a manual gate for

using the manual mode.

! P (Park)

This position is for parking the vehicle and

starting the engine.

In this position, the transmission is me-

chanically locked to prevent the vehicle

from rolling freely.

When you park the vehicle, first set the

parking brake fully, then shift into the “P”

position. Do not hold the vehicle with only

the transmission.

To shift the selector lever from the “P” to

any other position, you should depress the

brake pedal fully then move the selector

lever. This prevents the vehicle from

lurching when it is started.

NOTE (3.0-liter models only)

To protect the engine while the “P”

position is sel ected, the engine is

controlled such that the engine speed

does not become too high even if the

accelerator pedal is pressed hard.

! R (Reverse)

This position is for backing the vehicle.

To shift from the “N” to “R” position, stop

the vehicle completely then move the

lever to the “R” position.

! N (Neutral)

This position is for restarting a stalled

engine.

In this position the wheels and transmis-

sion are not locked. In this position, the

transmission is neutral; the vehicle will roll

freely, even on the slightest incline unless

the parking brake or foot brake is on.

Avoidcoastingwiththetransmission

neutral.

During coasting, there is no engine brak-

ing effect.

NOTE (3.0-liter models only)

To protect the engine while the “N ”

position is selected, the engine is

controlled such that the engine speed

does not become too high even if the

accelerator pedal is pressed hard.

NOTE

If the selector lever is in the “N”

position when you stop the engine for

parking, you may not subsequently be

able to move it to the “R” and “P”

positions. If this happens, turn the

ignition switch to the “ON” position.

You will then be able to move the

selector lever to the “P” position.

Starting and operating 7-25

– CONTINUED –

Black plate (274,1)

北米Model "A2440BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 5/ 7

7-26 Starting and operating

WARNING

Do not drive the vehicle with the

selector lever in the “N” (neutral)

position. Engine braking has no

effect in this condition and the risk

of an accident is consequently in-

creased.

! D (Drive)

This position is for normal driving. The

transmission automatically shifts into a

suitable gear from 1st to 5th according to

the vehicle speed and the acceleration

you require.

When more acceleration is required in this

position, press the accelerator pedal fully

to the floor and hold that position. The

transmission will automatically downshift

to 4th, 3rd, 2nd or 1st gear. When you

release the pedal, the transmission will

return to the original gear position.

To use the manual mode, move the lever

from this position into the manual gate.

! While climbing a grade

When driving up a hill, undesired upshift to

4th or 5th gear is prevented from taking

place when the accelerator is released.

This minimizes the chance of subsequent

downshifting to a lower gear when accel-

erating again . This prevents rep eated

upshifting and downshifting resulting in a

smoother operation of the vehicle.

NOTE

The transmission may downshift to 2nd

or 1st gear, depending on the way the

accelerator pedal is pressed to accel-

erate the vehicle again.

! While going down a hill

When you are descending a hill or any

other slope while braking with the Sport

Sharp (S#) mode selected, the transmis-

sion may downshift to 4th or 3rd gear

depending on how hard you depress the

brake pedal, causing engine braking to

work. Reacceleration for a short time will

cause the transmission to upshift normally.

NOTE

. A 5th-to-4th automatic downshift will

not occur at speeds above 78 mph (126

km/h) and a 4th-to-3rd automatic down-

shift will not occur at speeds above 53

mph (86 km/h).

. Automatic downshifts to 4th or 3rd

may occur even when driving on a level

road depending on conditions, such as

how hard you depress the brake pedal.

& Selector lever reverse inhi-

biting function

This function prevents accidental move-

ment of the selector lever to the “R”

position while the vehicle is moving.

The function becomes operational when

the vehicle reaches a speed of approxi-

mately 6 mph (10 km/h). Once opera-

tional, it prevents the selector lever from

being moved from the “N ” position to the

“R” position. When the vehicle speed

drops below 6 mph (10 km/h), the function

is canceled. The selector lever can then

be moved to the “R” and “P” positions.

When the ignition switch has been turned

to the “LOCK” position, movement of the

selector lever from the “N” position to the

“R” position is possible for a limited time

period by depressing the brake pedal and

then becomes impossible. Also, the se-

lector lever cannot be moved to the “R”

position after it has been placed in the “ P”

position and then placed again in the “N”

position.

When the movement of the selector lever

from the “N” position to the “ R” position

has become impossible, turn the ignition

switch back to the “ON” position then

move the selector lever to the “P” position.

Pressing the selector lever release button

alsomakesitpossibletomovethe

Black plate (275,1)

北米Model "A2440BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 5/ 7

selector lever to the “P” position at this

time.

! Selector lever release button

If you inadvertently have turned the igni-

tion switch to the “LOCK” position with the

selector lever in the “N” position, proceed

as follows. By referring to the “Shift lock

release” section in this chapter, remove

the shift lock release cover. Then, with the

screwdriver inserted into the hole, move

the selector lever to the “P” position. If the

selector lever reverse inhibiting function

fails, have the vehicle inspected by the

nearest SUBARU dealer.

& Selection of manual mode

With the vehicle either moving or station-

ary, move the selector lever from the “D”

position to the manual gate to select the

manual mode.

1) Upshift indicator

2) Downshift indicator

3) Gear position indicator

When the manual mode is selected, the

gear position indicator and upshift indica-

tor and/or downshift indicator in the

tachometer come on. The gear position

indicator shows the currently selected

gear in the 1st-to-5th-gear range. The

upshift and downshift indicators show

when a gearshift is possible. When the

upshift indicator “

” is on, upshifting is

possible. When the downshift indicator

“

” is on, downshifting is possible. When

both indicators are on, upshifting and

downshifting are both possible. When the

vehicle stops (for example, at traffic

signals), the downshift indicator goes off.

Gearshifts can be performed using the

Starting and operating 7-27

– CONTINUED –

Black plate (276,1)

北米Model "A2440BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 5/ 7

7-28 Starting and operating

selector lever or the paddle shift switch

behind the steering wheel (if equipped).

! Using the selector lever

Shift to the next-higher gear by briefly

pushing the selector lever toward the “+”

end of the manual gate.

Shift to the next-lower gear by briefly

pulling the selector lever toward the “− ”

end of the manual gate.

! Using the paddle shift (if equipped)

Pull the “+” of the paddle shift to upshift

one level. Also pull the “−” of the paddle

shift to downshift one level.

To deselect the manual mode, return the

selector lever to the “D” position from the

manual gate.

While driving, if you change gears by

paddle shifting, the gear position indicator

light comes on and shows the current gear

condition. At this time, the normal mode

temporarily changes to the manual mode,

and after driving for a short period of time,

the transmission mode returns to the

normal mode. (The timing of the gear

change and return is different, depending

on driving conditions existing when paddle

shifting.)

Also, if you subsequently ease off the

accelerator pedal and then accelerate

again, the transmission will automatically

switch back from manual mode to normal

mode.

CAUTION

Do not place or hang anything on

the paddle shift levers. Doing so

may result in accidential gear shift-

ing.

NOTE

Please read the following points care-

fully and bear them in mind when using

the manual mode.

. If you attempt to shift down when

the engine speed is too high, i.e., when

a downshift would push the tachometer

needle beyond the red zone, beeps will

be emitted to warn you that the down-

shift is not possible.

. If you attempt to shift up when the

vehicle speed is too low, the transmis-

sion will not respond.

. You can perform a skip-shift (for

example, from 4th to 2nd) by operating

the selector lever or a paddle switch

twice in rapid succession.

. The transmission automatically se-

lects 1st gear when the vehicle stops

Black plate (277,1)

北米Model "A2440BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 5/ 7

moving.

. If the temperature of the automatic

transmission fluid becomes too high,

the “AT OIL TEMP” warning light will

come on. Immediately stop the vehicle

in a safe place and let the engine idle

until the warning light goes off.

& Maximum speeds

WARNING

When down shifting, ensure that the

vehicle is not travelling at a speed

exceeding the Maximum Allowable

Speed for the gear which is about to

be selected. Failure to observe this

precaution can lead to engine over-

revving and this in turn can result in

engine damage.

In addition, sudden application of

engine braking caused by down

shifting when the vehicle is travel-

ling on a slippery surface can lead

to wheel locking; as a consequence,

control of the vehicle may be lost

and the risk of an accident in-

creased.

The following tables show the maximum

speeds that are possible with each differ-

ent gear.

When down shifting, it is important to

confirm that the current vehicle speed is

not in excess of the Maximum Allowable

Speed of the gear which is about to be

selected.

Legacy

mph (km/h)

Position

2.5-liter turbo

models

3.0-liter models

1 25 (40) 27 (43)

2 53 (85) 51 (82)

3 85 (137)

84 (135)

OUTBACK

mph (km/h)

Position

2.5-liter turbo

models

3.0-liter models

1 25 (40) 28 (44)

2 53 (85) 52 (84)

3 86 (138)

87 (139)

Never exceed posted speed limits.

& Driving tips

. On a road surface where there is a risk

of wheelspin (for example, a snow- or

gravel-covered road), you can pull away

from a standstill safely and easily by first

selecting the 2nd gear of the manual

mode.

. Always apply the foot or parking brake

when the vehicle is stopped in the “D” or

“R” position.

. Always set the parking brake when

parking your vehicle. Do not hold the

vehicle with only the transmission.

. Do not keep the vehicle in a stationary

position on an uphill grade by using the

“D” position. Use the brake instead.

. The engine may, on rare occasions,

knock when the vehicle rapidly acceler-

ates or rapidly pulls away from a standstill.

This phenomenon does not indicate a

fault.

. A slight reduction in output torque may

occur in the models with a 3.0-liter or 2.5-

liter turbo engine before the engine warms

up.

& Shift lock release

If the selector lever does not move from

the “P” position wi th t he brake pedal

depressed and the ignition switch in the

“ON” position, perform the following steps:

To override the shift lock:

1. Set the parking brake and stop the

engine.

2. Take out the screwdriver from the tool

bucket.

Starting and operating 7-29

– CONTINUED –

Black plate (278,1)

北米Model "A2440BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 5/ 7

7-30 Starting and operating

3. Remove the cover by prying on the

edge with a flat-head screwdriver.

4. Insert the screwdriver into the hole.

5. Push down on the screwdriver and

move the selector lever from the “P” to the

“N” position.

6. Remove the screwdriver from the hole.

Depress the brake pedal and start the

engine.

Take your vehicle to the nearest SUBARU

dealer immediately to have the system

repaired.

SI-DRIVE (Except 2.5-liter

non-Turbo models)

SI-DRIVE (Subaru Intelligent Drive) works

to maximize engine performance, control

and efficiency.

This system consists of three modes:

Intelligent (I), Sport (S), and Sport Sharp

(S#). By adjusting the SI-DRIVE selector,

the character of the power unit changes.

The multi-information display located in

the tachometer provides the driver with

the ability to monitor both vehicle perfor-

mance and the current SI-DRIVE mode.

To change the multi-information display,

refer to the “Multi-information display

(Vehicle with SI-DRIVE)” in chapter 3.

Black plate (279,1)

北米Model "A2440BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 5/ 7

& Intelligent (I) mode

For smooth, efficient performance driv-

ing

The Intelligent (I) mode provides well-

balanced performance with greater fuel

efficiency and smooth driveability without

stress. Power delivery is moderate during

acceleration for maximum fuel efficiency.

This is ideal for around-town driving and

situations that do not require full power

output. It provides better control in difficult

driving conditions, such as slippery roads

or loose surfaces, due to gentler throttle

response.

When Intelligent (I) mode is selected in

vehicles equipped with a manual trans-

mission, a shift-up indicator “

” in the

tachometer will blink to signal the best

time to shift gears for maximum fuel

efficiency.

& Sport (S) mode

For all-around performance driving

The Sport (S) mode provides the engine

power desired by those who want to make

the driving experience their own personal

adventure.

The linear acceleration characteristic of

this versatile mode is ideal for driving on

freeways and suburban streets or for

climbing mountain roads.

Starting and operating 7-31

– CONTINUED –

Black plate (280,1)

北米Model "A2440BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 5/ 7

7-32 Starting and operating

& Sport Sharp (S#) mode

For maximum performance driving

For sports-minded drivers, the Sport

Sharp (S#) mode offers an exhilarating

level of engine performance and control.

The throttle becomes more responsive

regardless of the engine speed. Delivering

maximum driving enjoyment, this mode is

ideal for tackling twisting roads and for

merging or overtaking other vehicles on

the freeway with confidence.

& SI-DRIVE selector

When you rotate the SI-DRIVE selector to

the left, it changes to Sport (S) mode, and

when you rotate it to the right, it changes

to Sport Sharp (S#) mode, and when you

push it, it changes to Intelligent (I) mode.

After performing this operation, the switch

returns to its original location.

NOTE

. While the engine is cool, the S#

PREP indicator light of the temperature

gauge comes on. In this case, you

cannot change to Sport Sharp (S#)

mode.

. The next time yo u turn on the

engine, after you turned off the engine

in the Sport Sharp (S#) mode, the SI-

DRIVE mode changes to the Sport (S)

mode.

. The next time yo u turn on the

engine, after you turned off the engine

in the Sport (S) mode or Intelligent (I)

mode, the SI-DRIVE mode will stay in

the same mode as when the engine

was turned off.

. While the engine is running, if the

CHECK ENGINE warning light/malfunc-

tion indicator lamp comes on, the SI-

drive mode changes to the Sport (S)

mode. In this case, it is not possible to

change to the Sport Sharp (S#) mode or

Intelligent (I) mode.

. If there is a possibility that the

engine could overheat because of a

temperature increase of the engine

coolant, it is not possible to change to

the Sport Sharp (S#) mode. While the

vehicle is in the Sport Sharp (S#) mode,

it changes to the Sport (S) mode when

the engine coolant temperature in-

creases.

& SI-DRIVE Sport Sharp (S#)

switch

While driving in the Sport (S) mode or

Intelligent (I) mode, when you push the

steering wheel switch, it changes to the

Sport Sharp (S#) mode.

Black plate (281,1)

北米Model "A2440BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 5/ 7

NOTE

While driving in Sport Sharp (S#) mode,

when you push the switch, it changes

to the former mode before Sport Sharp

(S#) mode.

Rear viscous limited slip dif-

ferential (LSD) (if equipped)

CAUTION

. Never start the engine while a tire

on one side is jacked up, as the

vehicle may move.

. If one rear tire is spinning in mud,

avoid continued spinning at high

speed as this could adversely

affect the LSD.

. If a different size rear tire is

temporarily used (as in an emer-

gency), it will adversely affect the

LSD. Always replace it with a

regularsizetireassoonas

possible.

The LSD provides optimum distribution of

power according to t he difference in

revolutions between the right and left rear

wheels that may be caused by certain

driving conditions, thereby improving driv-

ing stability on snow-covered, muddy or

other slippery roads.

Power steering

CAUTION

Do not hold the steering wheel at the

fully locked position left or right for

more than 5 seconds. This may

damage the power steering pump.

The power steering system operates only

when the engine is running.

If you lose power steering assist because

the engine stops or the system fails to

function, you can steer but it will take

much more effort.

NOTE

Right after the engine has been started

and before it has warmed up, you may

hear a noise coming from areas adja-

cent to the power steering pump which

is located at the right-front area of the

engine compartment. This noise is

normal. It does not indicate power

steering system trouble.

Starting and operating 7-33

Black plate (282,1)

北米Model "A2440BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 5/ 7

7-34 Starting and operating

Braking

& Braking tips

WARNING

Never rest your foot on the brake

pedal while driving. This can cause

dangerous overheating of the

brakes and needless wear on the

brake pads and linings.

! When the brakes get wet

When driving in rain or after washing the

vehicle, the brakes may get wet. As a

result, brake stopping distance will be

longer. To dry the brakes, drive the vehicle

at a safe speed while lightly depressing

the brake pedal to heat up the brakes.

! Use of engine braking

Remember to make use of engine braking

in addition to foot braking. When descend-

ing a grade, if only the foot brake is used,

the brakes may start working improperly

because of brake fluid overheating,

caused by overheated brake pads. To

help prevent this, shift into a lower gear to

get stronger engine braking.

! Braking when a tire is punctured

Do not depress the brake pedal suddenly

when a tire is punctured. This could cause

a loss of control of the vehicle. Keep

driving straight ahead while gradually

reducing speed. Then slowly pull off the

road to a safe place.

& Brake system

! Two separate circuits

Your vehicle has a dual circuit brake

system. Each circuit works diagonally

across the vehicle. If one circuit of the

brake system should fail, the other half of

the system still works. If one circuit fails,

the brake pedal will go down much closer

to the floor than usual and you will need to

press it down much harder. And a much

longer distance will be needed to stop the

vehicle.

! Brake booster

The brake booster uses engine manifold

vacuum to assist braking force. Do not

turn off the engine while driving because

that will turn off the brake booster, result-

ing in poor braking power.

The brakes will continue to work even

when the brake booster completely stops

functioning. If this happens, however, you

will have to push the pedal much harder

than normal and the braking distance will

increase.

& Disc brake pad wear warning

indicators

The disc brake pad wear warning indica-

tors on the disc brakes give a warning

noise when the brake pads are worn.

If a squeaking or scraping noise is heard

from the disc brakes while braking, im-

mediately have your vehicle inspected by

the nearest SUBARU dealer.

Black plate (283,1)

北米Model "A2440BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 5/ 7

ABS (Anti-lock Brake Sys-

tem)

WARNING

Always use the utmost care in

driving – overconfidence because

youaredrivingwithanABS

equipped vehicle could easily lead

to a serious accident.

CAUTION

. The ABS system does not always

decrease stopping distance. You

should always maintain a safe

following distan ce from other

vehicles.

. When driving on badly surfaced

roads, gravel roads, icy road, or

over deep newly fallen snow,

stopping distances may be long-

er for a vehicle with the ABS

system than one without. When

driving under these conditions,

therefore, reduce your speed and

leave ample distance from other

vehicles.

. When you feel the ABS system

operating, you should maintain

constant brake pedal pressure.

Do not pump the brake pedal

since doing so may defeat the

operation of the ABS system.

The ABS system prevents the lock-up of

wheels which may occur during sudden

braking or braking on slippery road sur-

faces. This helps prevent the loss of

steering control and directional stability

caused by wheel lock-up.

When the ABS system is operating, you

may hear a chattering noise or feel a slight

vibration in the brake pedal. This is normal

when the ABS operates.

The ABS system will not operate when the

vehicle speed is below approximately 6

mph (10 km/h).

& ABS system self-check

You may feel a slight shock in the brake

pedal and hear the operating sound of

ABS from the engine compartment just

after the vehicle is started. This is caused

by an automatic functional test of the ABS

system being carried out and does not

indicate any abnormal condition.

& ABS warning light

Vehicle with SI-DRIVE

Vehicle without SI-DRIVE

The ABS warning light comes on when the

ignition switch is turned to the “ON”

Starting and operating 7-35

– CONTINUED –

Black plate (284,1)

北米Model "A2440BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 5/ 7

7-36 Starting and operating

position and goes out after approximately

2 seconds.

This is an indication that the ABS system

is working properly.

CAUTION

If the warning light behaves as

follows, the ABS system may not

be working properly.

When the warning light is on, the

ABS function shuts down; however,

the conventional brake system con-

tinues to operate normally.

. The warning light does not come

on when the ignition switch is

turned to the “ON” position.

. The warning light comes on when

the ignition switch is turned to

the “ON” position, but it does not

go out even when the vehicle

speed exceeds approximately 8

mph (12 km/h).

. The warning light comes on dur-

ing driving.

If these occur, have the ABS system

repaired at the first available oppor-

tunity by your SUBARU dealer.

NOTE

If the warning light behavior is as

described in the following, the ABS

system may be considered normal.

. The warning light comes on right

after the engine is started but goes out

immediately, remaining off.

. The warning light remains on after

the engine has been started, but it goes

out when the vehicle speed reaches

approximately 8 mph (12 km/h).

. The warning light comes on during

driving, but it goes out immediately and

remains off.

When driving with an insufficient battery

voltage such as when the engine is jump

started, the ABS warning light may come

on. This is due to the low battery voltage

and does not indicate a mal function.

When the battery becomes fully charged,

the light will go out.

Electronic Brake Force Dis-

tribution (EBD) system

The EBD system maximizes the effective-

ness of the brakes by allowing the rear

brakes to supply a greater proportion of

the braking force. It functions by adjusting

the distribution of braking force to the rear

wheels in accordance with the vehicle’s

loading condition and speed.

The EBD system is an integral part of the

ABS system and uses some of the ABS

system’s components to perform its func-

tion of optimizing the distribution of brak-

ing force. If any of the ABS components

used by the EBD function fails, the EBD

system also stops working.

When the EBD system is operating, you

may hear a chattering noise or feel a slight

vibration in the brake pedal. This is normal

and does not indicate a malfunction.

Black plate (285,1)

北米Model "A2440BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 5/ 7

& Steps to take if EBD system

fails

Vehicle with SI-DRIVE

Vehicle without SI-DRIVE

If a malfunction occurs in the EBD system,

the system stops working and the brake

system warning light and ABS warning

light come on simultaneously.

The EBD system may be faulty if the

brake system warning light and ABS

warning light illuminate simultaneously

during driving.

Even if the EBD system fails, the conven-

tional braking system will still function.

However, the rear wheels will be more

prone to locking when the brakes are

applied harder than usual and the vehi-

cle’s motion may therefore become some-

what harder to control.

If the brake system warning light and ABS

warning light illuminate simultaneously,

take the following steps:

1. Stop the vehicle in the nearest safe,

flat place.

2. Shut down the engine, then restart it.

3. Release the parking brake. If both

warning lights go out, the EBD system

may be faulty.

Drive carefully to the nearest SUBARU

dealer and have the system inspected.

4. If both warning lights come on again

and stay illuminated after the engine has

been restarted, shut down the engine

again, apply the parking brake, and check

the brake fluid level.

5. If the brake fluid level is not below the

“MIN” mark, the EBD system may be

faulty. Drive carefully to the nearest

SUBARU dealer and have the system

inspected.

6. If the brake fluid level is below the

“MIN” mark, DO NOT drive the vehicle.

Instead, have the vehicle towed to the

nearest SUBARU dealer for repair.

WARNING

. Driving with the brake system

warning light on is dangerous.

This indicates your brake system

may not be working properly. If

the light remains on, have the

brakes inspected by a SUBARU

dealer immediately.

. If at all in doubt about whether

the brakes are operating prop-

erly, do not drive the vehicle.

Have your vehicle towed to the

nearest SUBARU dealer for re-

pair.

Starting and operating 7-37

Black plate (286,1)

北米Model "A2440BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 5/ 7

7-38 Starting and operating

Vehicle Dynamics Control

system (if equipped)

WARNING

Always use the utmost care in

driving – overconfidence because

you are driving with a Vehicle Dy-

namics Control system equipped

vehicle could easily lead to a ser-

ious accident.

CAUTION

. Even if your vehicle is equipped

with Vehicle Dynamics Control,

winter tires or snow chains

should be used when driving on

snow-covered or icy roads; in

addition, vehicle speed should

be reduced considerably. Simply

having a Vehicle Dynamics Con-

trol system does not guarantee

that the vehicle will be able to

avoid accidents in any situation.

. Activation of t he Vehicle Dy-

namics Control system is an

indication that the road being

travelled on has a slippery sur-

face; since having Vehicle Dy-

namics Control is no guarantee

that full vehicle control will be

maintained at all times and under

all conditions, its activation

should be seen as a sign that

the speed of the vehicle should

be reduced considerably.

. Whenever suspension compo-

nents, steering components, or

an ax le are removed from a

vehicle equipped with Vehicle

Dynamics Control, have an

authorized SUBARU dealer per-

form an inspection of that sys-

tem.

. The following precautions should

be observed in order to ensure

that the Vehicle Dynamics Con-

trol system is operating properly:

– Al l four wheel s should be

fitted with tires of the same

size, type, and brand. Further-

more, the amount of wear

should be the same for all

four tires.

– Keep the tire pressure at the

proper level as shown on the

vehicle placard attached to

the driver’s side door pillar.

– Use only the specified tem-

porary spare tire to replace a

flat ti re. Wit h a temporary

spare tire, the effectiveness of

the Vehicle Dynamics Control

system is reduced and this

should be taken into account

when driving the vehicle in

such a condition.

In the event of wheelspin and/or skidding

on a slippery road surface and/or during

cornering and/or an evasive maneuver,

the Vehicle Dynamics Control system

adjusts the en gine’s output and the

wheels’ respective braking forces to help

maintain traction and directional control.

. Traction Control Function

The traction control function is designed to

prevent spinning of the driving wheels on

slippery road surfaces, thereby helping to

maintain traction and directional control.

Activation of this function is shown by

steady illumination of the Vehicle Dy-

namics Control operation indicator light.

. Skid Suppression Function

The skid suppression function is designed

to help maintain directional stability by

suppressing the wheels’ tendency to slide

sideways during steering operations. Acti-

vation of this function is shown by flashing

of the Vehicle Dynamics Control operation

indicator light.

Black plate (287,1)

北米Model "A2440BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 5/ 7

NOTE

. Slight twitching of the brake pedal

may be felt when the Vehicle Dynamics

Control system operates; a small de-

gree of vehicle or steering wheel shak-

ing may also be noticed in this situa-

tion. These are normal characteristics

of Vehicle Dynamics Control operation

and are no cause for alarm.

. When driving off immediately after

starting the engine, a short-lived opera-

tion noise may be noticed coming from

the engine compartment. This noise is

generated as a result of a check being

performed on the Vehicle Dynamics

Control system and is normal.

. Depending on the timing of activa-

tion of the brakes, the brake pedal may

seem to jolt when you drive off after

starting the engine. This is a conse-

quence of the Vehicle Dynamics Con-

trol operational check and is normal.

. In the circumstances listed in the

following, the vehicle may be more

unstable than it feels to the driver.

The Vehicle Dynamics Control System

may therefore operate. Such operation

does not indicate a system fault.

. on gravel-covered or rutted roads

. on unfinished roads

. when the vehicle is towing a

trailer

. when the vehicle is fitted with

snow tires or winter tires

. Activation of the Vehicle Dynamics

Control system will cause operation of

the steering wheel to feel slightly

different compared to that for normal

conditions.

. Even if the vehicle is equipped with

a Vehicle Dynamics Control system, it

is important that winter tires be used

when driving on snow-covered or icy

roads. (All four wheels should be fitted

with tires of the same size and brand).

Furthermore, if snow chains are to be

used, they should be fitted on the front

wheels. When a vehicle is fitted with

snow chains, however, the effective-

ness of the Vehicle Dynamics Control

system is reduced and this should be

taken into account when driving the

vehicle in such a condition.

. It is always important to reduce

speed when approaching a corne r,

even if the vehicle is equipped with

Vehicle Dynamics Control.

. All four wheels should be fitted with

tires of the same size, type, and brand;

furthermore, the amount of wear

should be the same for all four tires. If

these precautions are not observed

and non-matching tires are used, it is

quite pos sib le t hat the Vehicle D y-

namics Control system will be unable

to operate correctly as intended.

. Always turn off the engine before

replacing a tire as failure to do so may

render the Vehicle Dynamics Control

system unable to operate correctly.

& Vehicle Dynamics Control

system monitor

! Vehicle Dynamics Control opera-

tion indicator light

Vehicle with SI-DRIVE

Starting and operating

7-39

– CONTINUED –

Black plate (288,1)

北米Model "A2440BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 5/ 7

7-40 Starting and operating

Vehicle without SI-DRIVE

The indicator light turns on when the

ignition switch is turned to the ON position;

it turns off approximately 2 seconds later.

This indicator light flashes during activa-

tion of the skid suppression function and is

illuminated steadily during activation of the

traction control function.

The following two situations could indicate

a malfunction of the Vehicle Dynamics

Control system; if either should occur,

have an authorized SUBARU dealer carry

out an inspection of that system at the first

available opportunity.

. The indicator light does not turn on

when the ignition switch is turned to the

ON position.

. The indicator light does not turn off

approximately 2 seconds after the ignition

switch has been turned to the ON position.

! Vehicle Dynamics Control warning

light/Vehicle Dynamics Control OFF

indicator light

Vehicle with SI-DRIVE

Vehicle without SI-DRIVE

This single light has t he function of

indicating malfunctio ns in the Vehicle

Dynamics Control system and the function

of indicating that the Vehicle Dynamics

Control system is not operating. It comes

on in the event of a malfunction in the

system and is illuminated whenever the

system is not operating.

! Vehicle Dynamics Control warning

The warning light comes on when the

ignition switch is turned to the “ON”

position and goes off several seconds

after engine startup. This lighting pattern

indicates that the Vehicle Dynamics Con-

trol system is operating normally.

The following situations could indicate a

malfunction of the Vehicle Dynamics

Black plate (289,1)

北米Model "A2440BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 5/ 7

Control system; if any should occur, have

an authorized SUBARU dealer carry out

an inspection of the system at the first

available opportunity.

. The warning light does not turn on

when the ignition switch is turned to the

ON position.

. The warning light turns on while the

vehicle is being driven.

. When a malfunction has occurred in

the Vehicle Dynamics Control electrical

system, only the warning light will turn on.

In such an event, the ABS will still be

operating normally.

. The warning light will also turn on when

a problem occurs with the ABS or Vehicle

Dynamics Control electronic control sys-

tems.

Because the Vehicle Dynamics Control

system controls each brake through the

ABS, whenever the ABS stops operating

due to a malfunction in that electrical

system, the Vehicle Dynamics Control will

also become unable to control all four

brakes. Thus Vehicle Dynamics Control

system operation halts and the warning

light turns on. Although both the Vehicle

Dynamics Control system and the ABS

will be inoperable in this situation, it will

still be possible to stop the vehicle using

normal braking. The Vehicle Dynamics

Control system and the A BS do not

adversely affect operation of the vehicle

in any way when they are inoperable;

however should such a situation occur,

drive with care and have an authorized

SUBARU dealer carry out an inspection of

those systems at the first available oppor-

tunity.

NOTE

When the warning light turns on and off

in the following way, it indicates that

the Vehicle Dynamics Control system

is operating normally.

. Although turning on after the engine

has been started, the warning light

quickly turns off and stays off.

. The warning light turns on when the

vehicle is being driven; it then turns off

and stays off.

! Vehicle Dynamics Control OFF in-

dicator light

This light comes on to indicate that the

Vehicle Dynamics Control system is in

non-operation mode. This does not con-

stitute failure of the Vehicle Dynamics

Control system.

NOTE

. The indicator light may stay on for a

while after the engine has been started,

especially in cold weather. This occurs

because the engine has not yet

warmed up and is completely normal.

The light will turn off when the engine

has reached a suitable operating tem-

perature.

. When an engine problem occurs

and the CHECK ENGINE warning light/

malfunction indicator lamp turns on,

the indicator light will also come on.

The following two situations could indicate

malfunction of the Vehicle Dynamics

Control system; if either should occur,

have an authorized SUBARU dealer carry

out an inspection of that system at the first

available opportunity.

. The indicator light does not turn on

when the ignition switch is turned to the

ON position.

. The indicator light fails to turn off after

the engine is started, even when several

minutes have passed to allow the engine

to heat up sufficiently.

Starting and operating 7-41

– CONTINUED –

Black plate (290,1)

北米Model "A2440BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 5/ 7

7-42 Starting and operating

& Vehicle Dynamics Control

OFF switch

Pressingtheswitchtodeactivatethe

Vehicle Dynamics Control system can

facilitate the following operations:

. a standing start on a steeply sloping

road with a snowy, gravel-covered, or

otherwise slippery surface

. extrication of t he vehicle when its

wheels are stuck in mud or deep snow

When the switch is pressed during engine

operation, the “

” indicator light in the

combination meter illuminates. The Vehi-

cle Dynamics Control system will be

deactivated and the vehicle will behave

like a model not equipped with the Vehicle

Dynamics Control system. When the

switch is pressed again to reactivate the

Vehicle Dynamics Control system, the “

”

indicator light goes off.

With the Vehicle Dynamics Control system

deactivated, traction and stability en-

hancement offered by Vehicle Dynamics

Control system is unavailable. Therefore

you should not deactivate the Vehicle

Dynamics Control system except under

above-mentioned situations.

NOTE

. When the switch has been pressed

to deactivate the Ve hicle Dy namics

Control system, the Vehicle Dynamics

Control system automatically r eacti-

vates itself the next time the ignition

switch is turned to the “LOCK” position

and the engine is restarted.

. If the switch is held down for 10

seconds or longer, the indicator light

goes off, the Vehicle Dynamics Control

system is activated, and the system

ignores any fur ther pressing of the

switch. To make the switch usable

again, turn the ignition switch to the

“LOCK” position and restart the en-

gine.

. When the switch is pressed to

deactivate the Vehicle Dynamics Con-

trol system, the vehicle’s running per-

formance is comparable with that of a

vehicle that does not have a Vehicle

Dynamics Control system. Do not de-

activate the Vehicle Dynamics Control

system except when absolutely neces-

sary.

Black plate (291,1)

北米Model "A2440BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 5/ 7

Tire pressure monitoring

system (TPMS) (if equipped)

Vehicle with SI-DRIVE

Vehicle without SI-DRIVE

The tire pressure monitoring system pro-

vides the driver with a warning message

by sending a signal from a sensor that is

installed in each wheel when tire pressure

is severely low.

The tire pressure monitoring system will

activate only when the vehicle is driven at

speeds above 20 mph (32 km/h). Also,

this system may not react immediately to a

sudden drop in tire pressure (for example,

a blow-out caused by ru nning over a

sharp object).

WARNING

If the low tire pressure warning light

comes on while driving, never brake

suddenly and keep driving straight

ahead while gradually reducing

speed. Then slowly pull off the road

to a safe place. Otherwise an acci-

dent involving serious vehicle da-

mage and serious personal injury

could occur.

Check the pressure for all four tires

and adjust the pressure to the COLD

tire pressure shown on the tire

placard on the door pillar on the

driver’s side.

Even when the vehicle is driven a

very short distance, the tires get

warm and their pressures increase

accordingly. Be sure to let the tires

cool thoroughly before adjusting

their pressures to the standard

values shown on the tire placard.

(Refer to the “Tires and wheels”

section in chapter 11.) The tire

pressure monitoring system does

not functi on when the vehicle is

stationary. After adjusting the tire

pressures, increase the vehic le

speed to at least 20 mph (32 km/h)

to start the TPMS re-checking of the

tire inflation pressures. If the tire

pressures are now above the severe

low pressure threshold, the low tire

pressure warning light should go off

a few minutes later.

If this light still comes on while

driving after adjusting the tire pres-

sure, a tire may have significant

damage and a fast leak that causes

the tire to lose air rapidly. If you have

a flat tire, replace it with a spare tire

as soon as possible.

When a spare tire is mounted or a

wheel rim is replaced without the

original pressure sensor/transmitter

being transferred, the low tire pres-

sure warning light will illuminate

steadily after blinking for approxi-

mately one minute. This indicates

the TPMS is unable to monitor all

Starting and operating 7-43

– CONTINUED –

Black plate (292,1)

北米Model "A2440BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 5/ 7

7-44 Starting and operating

four road wheels. Contact your

SUBARU dealer as soon as possible

for tire and sensor replacement and/

or system resetting.

Do not inject any tire liquid or

aerosol tire sealant into the tires,

as this may cause a malfunction of

the tire pressure sensors. If the light

illuminates steadily after blinking for

approximately one minute, promptly

contact a SUBARU dealer to have

the system inspected.

CAUTION

Do not place metal film or any metal

parts under the driver’s seat. This

may cause poor reception of the

signals from the tire pressure sen-

sors, and the tire pressure monitor-

ing system will not function prop-

erly.

NOTE

This device complies with Part 15 of

the FCC Rules and with RSS-210 of

Industry Canada. Operation is subject

to the following two conditions: (1) This

device may not cause harmful inter-

ference, and (2) this device must

accept any interference received, in-

cluding interference that may cause

undesired operation.

Changes or modifications not ex-

pressly approved by the party respon-

sible for compliance could void the

user’s authority to operate the equip-

ment.

Parking your vehicle

WARNING

. Never leave unattended children

or pets in the vehicle. They could

accidentally injure themselves or

others through inadvertent op-

eration of the vehicle. Also, on

hot or sunny days, the tempera-

ture in a closed vehicle could

quickly become high enough to

cause severe or possibly fatal

injuries to them.

. Do not park the ve hicle over

flammable materials such as dry

grass, waste paper or rags, as

they may burn easily if they come

near hot engine or exhaust sys-

tem parts.

. Be sure to stop the engine if you

take a nap in the vehicle. If

engine exhaust gas enters the

pass enger compartment, occu-

pants in the vehicle could die

from carbon monoxide (CO) con-

tained in the exhaust gas.

Black plate (293,1)

北米Model "A2440BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 5/ 7

& Parking brake

CAUTION

Never drive while the parking brake

is set because this will cause un-

necessary wear on the brake lin-

ings. Before starting to drive, always

make sure that the parking brake

has been fully released.

To set the parking brake, press the brake

pedal firmly and hold it down while fully

pulling up the parking brake lever.

To release the parking brake, pull the lever

up slightly, press the release button, then

lower the lever while keeping the button

pressed.

When the parking brake is set while the

engine is running, the parking brake

warning light comes on. After starting the

vehicle, be sure that the warning light has

gone out before the vehicle is driven.

Refer to the “Warning and indicator lights”

section (chapter 3).

& Parking tips

When parking your vehicle, always set the

parking brake firmly and put the shift lever

in the “1” (1st) for an upgrade or “R”

(Reverse) for a downgrade for manual

transmission vehicles, or in the “P” (Park)

position for automatic transmission vehi-

cles. Always set the parking brake firmly

when parking your vehicle. Never rely on

the transmission alone to hold the vehicle.

When parking on a hill, always turn the

steering wheel as described here. When

the vehicle is headed up the hill, the front

wheels should be turned away from the

curb.

When facing downhill, the front wheels

should be turned into the curb.

Starting and operating 7-45

Black plate (294,1)

北米Model "A2440BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 5/ 7

7-46 Starting and operating

Cruise control

Cruise control enables you to maintain a

constant vehicle speed without holding

your foot on the accelerator pedal and it is

operative when the vehicle speed is 25

mph (40 km/h) or more. Make sure the

main switch is turned “OFF” when the

cruise control is not in use to avoid

unintentionally setting the cruise control.

NOTE

If you press the main switch button

while turning the ignition switch “ON”,

the cruise control function is deacti-

vated and the “CRUISE” indicator light

flashes. To reactivate the cruise control

function, turn the ignition switch back

to the “Acc” or “LOCK” position, and

then turn it again to the “ON” position.

WARNING

Do not use the cruise control under

any of the following conditions. This

may cause loss of vehicle control:

. driving up or down a steep grade

. driving on sli ppery or winding

roads

. driving in heavy traffic

& To set cruise control

1. Push the “CRUISE” main switch but-

ton.

Vehicle with SI-DRIVE

Vehicle without SI-DRIVE

The “ ” indicator light on the combi-

nation meter will come on.

2. Depress the accelerator pedal until the

vehicle reaches the desired speed.

3. Push the “SET/COAST” button and

Black plate (295,1)

北米Model "A2440BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 5/ 7

release it. Then release the accelerator

pedal.

Vehicle with SI-DRIVE

Vehicle without SI-DRIVE

At this time, the “ ” indicator light is

illuminated in the combination meter.

The vehicle will maintain the desired

speed.

Vehicle speed can b e temporarily in-

creased while driving with the cruise

control activated. S imply de press the

accelerator pedal to accelerate the vehi-

cle. When the accelerator pedal is re-

leased, the vehicle will return to and

maintain the previous cruising speed.

& To temporarily cancel the

cruise control

The cruise control can be temporarily

canceled in the following ways:

. Push the “CANCEL” button.

. Depress the brake pedal.

. Depress the cl utch pedal (manu al

transmission vehicles only).

. Shift the selector lever into the “N”

position (automatic transmission vehicles

only).

. Shift the shift lever into neutral position

(manual transmission vehicles only).

The “

” indicator light in the combination

meter goes off when the cruise control is

canceled.

To resume the cruise control after it has

been temporarily canceled and with vehi-

cle speed of approximately 20 mph (32

km/h) or m ore, push the “RES/ACC”

button to return to the original cruising

speed automatically.

The “

” indicator light in the combination

meter will automatically come on at this

time.

Starting and operating 7-47

– CONTINUED –

Black plate (296,1)

北米Model "A2440BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 5/ 7

7-48 Starting and operating

& To turn off the cruise control

There are two ways to turn off the cruise

control:

. Push the “CRUISE” main switch button

again.

. Turn the ignition switch to the “Acc” or

“LOCK” position (but only when the

vehicle is completely stopped).

& To change the cruising speed

! To increase the speed (by button)

Push the “RES/ACC” button and hold it

until the ve hicle r eaches the desired

speed. Then, release the button. T he

vehicle speed at that moment will be

memorized and treated as the new set

speed.

When the difference between the actual

vehicle speed and the set speed is less

than 4 mph (6.8 km/h), the set speed can

be increased 1 mph (1.6 km/h) each time

by pressing the “RES/ACC” button quickly.

! To increase the speed (by accel-

erator pedal)

1. Depress the accelerator pedal to

accelerate the vehicle to the desired

speed.

2. Push the “SET/COAST” button once.

Now the desired speed is set and the

vehicle will keep running at that speed

without depressing the accelerator pedal.

NOTE

If the difference between the actual

vehiclespeedwhenthebuttonis

pushed and the speed last time you

set is less than 4 mph (6.8 km/h), the

vehicle speed will be lowered by 1 mph

(1.6 km/h). This occurs because the

cruise control system unit regards this

operation as that intended to decrease

the vehicle speed.

! To decrease the speed (by button)

Push the “SET/COAST” button and hold it

until the vehi cle rea ches the desired

speed. Then, release the button. The

vehicle speed at that moment will be

memorized and treated as the new set

speed.

When the difference between the actual

vehicle speed and the set speed is less

than 4 mph (6.8 km/h), the set speed can

be lowered 1 mph (1.6 km/h) each time by

pressing the “SET/COAST” button quickly.

! To decrease the speed (by brake

pedal)

1. Depress the brake pedal to release

cruise control temporarily.

2. When the speed decreases to the

Black plate (297,1)

北米Model "A2440BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 5/ 7

desired speed, press the “SET/COAST”

button once. Now the desired speed is set

and the vehicle will keep running at that

speed without depressing the accelerator

pedal.

& Cruise control indicator light

Vehicle with SI-DRIVE

Vehicle without SI-DRIVE

The cruise control indicator light comes on

when the ignition switch is turned to the

“ON” position and goes out after approxi-

mately 3 seconds.

The light comes on when the “CRUISE”

main switch is pressed.

NOTE

. If you press the “CRUISE” main

switch button while turning the ignition

switch “ON”, the cruise control func-

tion is deactivated and the cruise

control indicator light flashes. To re-

activate the cruise control function,

turn the ignition switch back to the

“Acc” or “LOCK” position, and then

turn it again to the “ON” position.

. If this indicator light and the CHECK

ENGINE warning light/malfunction in-

dicator lamp flash simultaneously dur-

ing driving, have the vehicle checked

by your nearest SUBARU dealer.

& Cruise control set indicator

light

Vehicle with SI-DRIVE

Starting and operating

7-49

– CONTINUED –

Black plate (298,1)

北米Model "A2440BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 5/ 7

7-50 Starting and operating

Vehicle without SI-DRIVE

The cruise control set indicator light

comes on when the ignition switch is

turned to the “ON” position and goes out

after approximately 3 seconds.

The light comes on when vehicle speed

has been set.

Black plate (15,1)

北米Model "A2440BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 5/ 7

New vehicle break-in driving – the first

1,000 miles (1,600 km) ..................................... 8-2

Fuel economy hints ............................................ 8-2

Engine exhaust gas (Carbon monoxide) ........... 8-3

Catalytic converter .............................................. 8-3

Periodic inspections ........................................... 8-4

Driving in foreign countries ............................... 8-5

Driving tips for AWD vehicles ............................ 8-5

Off road driving ................................................... 8-6

All AWD models except OUTBACK ...................... 8-6

OUTBACK........................................................... 8-6

Winter driving...................................................... 8-8

Operation during cold weather............................. 8-8

Driving on snowy and icy roads .......................... 8-9

Corrosion protection .......................................... 8-10

Snow tires ......................................................... 8-11

Tire chains ........................................................ 8-13

Rocking the vehicle ........................................... 8-13

Loading your vehicle......................................... 8-13

Vehicle capacity weight...................................... 8-14

GVWR and GAWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating

and Gross Axle Weight Rating) ........................ 8-15

Roof rail and crossbar (if equipped) ................... 8-15

Trailer hitch (if equipped) .................................. 8-19

Connecting a trailer ........................................... 8-20

When you do not tow a trailer ............................ 8-21

Trailer towing ..................................................... 8-21

Warranties and maintenance .............................. 8-21

Maximum load limits.......................................... 8-22

Trailer hitches.................................................... 8-25

Connecting a trailer ........................................... 8-26

Trailer towing tips .............................................. 8-27

Driving tips

Black plate (300,1)

北米Model "A2440BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 5/ 7

8-2 Driving tips

New vehicle break-in driving

– the first 1,000 miles (1,600

km)

The performance and long life of your

vehicle are dependent on how you handle

and care for your vehicle while it is new.

Follow these instructions during the first

1,000 miles (1,600 km):

. Do not race the engine. And do not

allow engine speed to exceed 4,000 rpm

except in an emergency.

. Do not drive at one constant engine or

vehicle speed for a long time, either fast or

slow.

. Avoi d star ting suddenly an d rapi d

acceleration, except in an emergency.

. Avoid hard braking, except in an

emergency.

The same break-in procedures should be

applied to a newly installed or overhauled

engine or w hen brake pads or brake

linings are replaced with new ones.

Fuel economy hints

The following suggestions will help to save

your fuel.

. Select the proper gear position for the

speed and road conditions.

. Avoid sudden acceleration or decelera-

tion. Always accelerate gently until you

reach the desired speed. Then try to

maintain that speed for as long as

possible.

. Do not pump the accelerator and avoid

racing the engine.

. Avoid unnecessary engine idling.

. Keep the engine properly tuned.

. Keep the tires inflated to the correct

pressure shown on the tire placard, which

is located under the door latch on the

driver’s side. Low pressure will increase

tire wear and fuel consumption.

. Use the air conditioner only when

necessary.

. Keep the f ront and rear wheels in

proper alignment.

. Avoid carrying unnecessary luggage or

cargo.

. For the turbo and 3.0-liter models, the

indication of the ECO gauge shows a

reference for saving fuel. Refer to “ECO

gauge” in the Meter and gauges (Turbo

and 3.0-liter models) section in chapter 3

for details.

Black plate (301,1)

北米Model "A2440BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 5/ 7

Engine exhaust gas (Carbon

monoxide)

WARNING

. Never inhale engine exhaust gas.

Engine exhaust gas contai ns

carbon monoxide, a colorless

and odorless gas which is dan-

gerous, or even lethal, if inhaled.

. Always properly maintain the en-

gine exhaust system to prevent

engine exhaust gas from enter-

ing the vehicle.

. Never run the engine in a closed

space, such as a garage, except

for the brief time needed to drive

the vehicle in or out of it.

. Av oid remaining in a parked

vehicle for a lengthy time while

the engine is running. If that is

unavoidable, then use the venti-

lation fan to force fresh air into

the vehicle.

. Always keep the front ventilator

inlet grille free from snow, leaves

or other obstructions to ensure

that the ventilation system al-

ways works properly.

. If at any time you suspect that

exhaust fumes are entering the

vehicle, have the problem

checked and corrected as soon

as possible. If you must drive

under these co nditions, drive

only with all windows fully open.

. Keep the trunk lid (Sedan) or rear

gate (Station wagon) closed

while driving to prevent exhaust

gas from entering the vehicle.

NOTE

Due to the expansion and contraction

of the metals used in the manufacture

of the exhaust system, you may hear a

crackling sound coming from the ex-

haust system for a short time after the

engine has been shut off. This sound is

normal.

Catalytic converter

WARNING

. Avoid fire hazards. Do not drive

or park the vehicle anywhere

near flammable materials (e.g.

grass, paper, rags or leaves),

because the catalytic converter

operates at very high tempera-

tures.

. Keep everyone and flammable

materials away from the exhaust

pipe while the engine is running.

The exhaust gas is very hot.

2.5-liter non-turbo models

Driving tips

8-3

– CONTINUED –

Black plate (302,1)

北米Model "A2440BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 5/ 7

8-4 Driving tips

2.5-liter turbo models

3.0-liter models

The catalytic converter is installed in the

exhaust system. It serves as catalyst to

reduce HC, CO and NOx i n exhaust

gases, thus providing cleaner exhaust.

To avoid damage to the catalytic conver-

ter:

. Use only unleaded gasoline. Even a

small amount of lead ed gasoline w ill

damage the catalytic converter.

. Never start the engine by pushing or

pulling the vehicle.

. Avoid racing the engine.

. Never turn off the ignition switch while

the vehicle is moving.

. Keep your engine tuned-up. If you feel

the engine running rough (misfiring, back-

firing or incomplete combustion), have

your vehicle checked and repaired by an

authorized SUBARU dealer.

. Do not apply undercoating or rust

prevention treatment to the heat shield of

catalytic converter and the exhaust sys-

tem.

Periodic inspections

To keep your vehicle in the best condition

at all times, always have the recom-

mended maintenance services listed in

the maintenance schedule in the “War-

ranty and Maintenance Booklet” per-

formed at the specified time or mileage

intervals.

Black plate (303,1)

北米Model "A2440BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 5/ 7

Driving in foreign countries

When planning to use your vehicle in

another country:

. Confirm the availability of the correct

fuel. (Refer to the “Fuel requirements ”

section in chapter 7.)

. Comply with all regulations and re-

quirements of each country.

Driving tips for AWD vehicles

WARNING

. Always maintain a safe driving

speed according to the road and

weather conditions in order to

avoid having an accident on a

sharp turn, during sudden brak-

ing or under other similar condi-

tions.

. Always use the utmost care in

driving – overconfidence be-

cause you are driving an All-

Wheel Drive vehicle could easily

lead to a serious accident.

All-Wheel Drive distributes the engine

power to all four wheels. AWD vehicles

provide better traction when driving on

slippery, wet or snow-covered roads and

when moving out of mud, dirt and sand.

By shifting power between the front and

rear whee ls, SUBARU AWD can also

provide added traction during accelera-

tion, and added engine braking force

during deceleration.

Therefore, your SUBARU AWD vehicle

may handle differently than an ordinary

two wheel drive vehicle and it contains

some features unique to AWD. For safety

purposes as well as to avoid damaging

the AWD system, you should keep the

following tips in mind:

. An AWD vehicle is better able to climb

steeper roads under snowy or slippery

conditions than a two wheel drive vehicle.

There is little difference in handling,

however, during extremely sharp turns or

sudden braking. Therefore, when driving

down a slope or turning corners, be sure

to reduce your speed and maintain an

ample distance from other vehicles.

. When replacing a tire, make sure you

use only the same size, circumference,

construction, brand, and load range as the

original tires listed on the tire placard.

Using other sizes, circumferences or

construction may result in severe mechan-

ical damage to the drive train of your

Driving tips 8-5

– CONTINUED –

Black plate (304,1)

北米Model "A2440BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 5/ 7

8-6 Driving tips

vehicle and ma y affect ride, handling,

braking, speedometer/odometer calibra-

tion, and clearance between the body

and tires. It also may be dangerous and

lead to loss of vehicle control.

. If you use a temporary spare tire to

replace a flat tire, be sure to use the

original temporary spare tire stored in the

vehicle. Using other sizes may result in

severe mechanical damage to the drive

train of your vehicle.

. Always check the cold tire pressure

before starting to drive. The recom-

mended tire pressure is provided on the

tire placard, which is located under the

door latch on the driver’s side.

. Tire chains should always be placed on

the front wheels only.

. There are some precautions that you

must observe when towing your vehicle.

For detail information, refer to the “Towing”

section in chapter 9.

Off road driving

WARNING

. Always maintain a safe driving

speed according to the road and

weather conditions in order to

avoid having an accident on a

sharp turn, during sudden brak-

ing or under other similar condi-

tions.

. Always use the utmost care in

driving – overconfidence be-

cause you are driving an All-

Wheel Drive vehicle could easily

lead to a serious accident.

& All AWD models except

OUTBACK

Your AWD vehicle is neither a conven-

tional off-road vehicle nor an all terrain

vehicle. It is a passenger car designed

primarily for on-road use. The AWD

feature gives it some limited off-road

capabilities in situations in which driving

surfaces a relatively level, obstruction-free

and otherwise similar to on-road driving

conditions. Operating it under other than

those conditions could subject the vehicle

to excessive stress which might result in

damage not eligible for repair under

warranty. If you do take your SUBARU

off road, you should review the common

sense precautions in the next section

(applicable to the OUTBACK) for general

guidance. But please keep in mind that

your vehicle’s off-road capabilities are

more limited than those of the OUTBACK.

Never attempt to drive through pools and

puddles, or roads flooded with water.

Water entering the engine air intake or

the exhaust pipe or water splashing onto

electrical parts may damage your vehicle

and may cause it to stall.

& OUTBACK

Because of the AWD feature and higher

ground clearance, your SUBARU can be

driven on ordinary roads or off-road. But

please keep in mind that an AWD

SUBARU is a passenger car and is

neither a conventional off-road vehicle

nor an all-terrain vehicle. If you do take

your SUBARU off-road, certain common

sense precautions such as the following

should be taken:

. Make certain that you and all of your

passengers are wearing seatbelts.

. Carry some emergency equipment,

such as a towing rope or chain, a shovel,

wheel blocks, first aid kit and cell phone or

citizens band radio.

Black plate (305,1)

北米Model "A2440BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 5/ 7

. Drive carefully. Do not take unneces-

sary risks by driving in dangerous areas or

over rough terrain.

. Slow down and employ extra caution at

all times. When driving off-road, you will

not have the benefit of marked traffic

lanes, banked curves, traffic signs and

the like.

. Do not drive across steep slopes.

Instead, drive either straight up or straight

down the slopes. A vehicle can much

more easily tip over sideways than it can

end over end. Avoid driving straight up or

down slopes that are too steep.

. Avoid sharp turning maneuvers, espe-

cially at higher speeds.

. Do not grip the inside or spokes of the

steering wheel. A bad bump could jerk the

wheel and injure your hands. Instead drive

with your fingers and thumbs on the

outside of the rim.

. If driving through water, such as when

crossing shallow streams, first check the

depth of the water and the bottom of the

stream bed for firmness and ensure that

the bed of the stream is flat. Drive slowly

and completely through the stream. The

water should be shallow enough that it

does not reach the vehicle’s undercar-

riage. Water entering the engine air intake

or the exhaust pipe or water splashing

onto electrical parts may damage your

vehicle and may cause it to stall. Never

attempt to drive through rushing water;

regardless of its depth, it can wash away

the ground from under your tires, resulting

in possible loss of traction and even

vehicle rollover.

. Always check your brakes for effec-

tiveness immediately after driving in sand,

mud or water. Do this by driving slowly

and stepping on the brake pedal. Repeat

that process several times to dry out the

brake discs and brake pads.

. Do not drive or park over or near

flammable materials such as dry grass or

fallen leaves, as they may burn easily. The

exhaust system is very hot while the

engine is running and right after engine

stops. This could create a fire hazard.

. After driving through tall grass, mud,

rocks, sand, rivers, etc., check that there

is no grass, bush, paper, rags, stones,

sand, etc. adhering to or trapped on the

underbody. Clear off any such matter from

the underbody. If the vehicle is used with

these materials trapped or adhering to the

underbody, a mechanical breakdown or

fire could occur.

. Secure all cargo carried inside the

vehicle and make certain that it is not

piled higher than the seatbacks. During

sudden stops or jolts, unsecured cargo

could be thrown around in the vehicle and

cause injury. Do not pile heavy loads on

the roof. Those loads raise the vehicle’s

center of gravity and make it more prone

to tip over.

. If you must rock the vehicle to free it

from sand or mud, depress the accelerator

pedal slightly and move the selector lever

back and forth betwe en “D” and “R”

repeatedly. Do not race the engine. For

the best possible traction, avoid spinning

the wheels when trying to free the vehicle.

. When the road surface is extremely

slippery, you can obtain better traction by

starting the vehicle with the transmission

in 2nd than 1st (both for MT and AT).

. Never equip your vehicle with tires

larger than those specified in this manual.

. Wash the vehicle’s underbody after off-

road driving. Suspension components are

particularly prone to dirt buildup, so they

need to be washed thoroughly.

. Frequent driving of an AWD vehicle

under hard-driving conditions such as

rough roads or off roads will necessitate

more frequent replacement of engine oil,

brake fluid and transmission oil than that

specified in the maintenance schedule

described in the “Warranty and Mainte-

nance Booklet”.

Remember that damage done to your

SUBARU while operating it off-road and

Driving tips 8-7

– CONTINUED –

Black plate (306,1)

北米Model "A2440BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 5/ 7

8-8 Driving tips

not using common sen se pr ecaution s

such as those listed above is not eligible

for warranty coverage.

Winter driving

& Operation during cold

weather

Carry some emergency equipment, such

as tire chains, a window scraper, a bag of

sand, flares, a small shovel, and jumper

cables.

Check th e battery and cables. Cold

temperatures r educe batte ry capaci ty.

The battery must be in good condition to

provide enough power for cold winter

starts.

Use an engine oil of proper grade and

viscosity for cold weather. Heavy summer

oil will cause harder starting.

Keep the door locks from freezing by

squirting them with deicer or glycerin.

Forcing a frozen door open may damage

or separate the rubber weather strips

around the door. If the door is frozen,

use hot water to melt the ice, and after-

wards thoroughly wipe the water away.

Use a windshield washer fluid that con-

tains an antifreeze solution. Do not use

engine antifreeze or other substitutes

because they may damage the paint of

the vehicle.

SUBARU Windshield Washer Fluid con-

tains 58.5% methyl alcohol and 41.5%

surfactant, by volume. Its freezing tem-

perature varies according to how much it

is diluted, as indicated in the following

table.

Washer Fluid Con-

centration

Freezing Temperature

30% 10.48F(−128C)

50% −48F(−208C)

100%

−498F(−458C)

In order to prevent freezing of washer

fluid, check the freezing temperatures in

the table above when adjusting the fluid

concentration to the outside temperature.

If you fill the reservoir tank with a fluid with

a different concentration from the one

Black plate (307,1)

北米Model "A2440BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 5/ 7

used previously, purge the old fluid from

the piping between the reservoir tank and

washer nozzles by operating the washer

for a certain period of time. Otherwise, if

the concentration of the fluid remaining in

thepipingistoolowfortheoutside

temperature, it may freeze and block the

nozzles.

CAUTION

Adjust the washer fluid concentra-

tion appropriately for the outside

temperature. If the concentration is

inappropriate, sprayed washer fluid

may freeze on the windshield and

obstruct your view, and the fluid

may freeze in the reservoir tank.

! Before driving your vehicle

Before entering the vehicle, remove any

snow or ice from your shoes because that

could make the pedals slippery and

dangerous.

While warming up the vehicle before

driving, check that the accelerator pedal,

brake pedal, and all other controls operate

smoothly.

Clear away ice and snow t hat h as

accumulated under the fenders to avoid

making steering difficult. During severe

winter driving, stop when and where it is

safe to do so and check under the fenders

periodically.

! Parking in cold weather

WARNING

Snow can trap dangerous exhaust

gases under your vehicle. Keep

snow clear of the exhaust pipe and

from around your vehicle if you park

the vehicle in snow with the engine

running.

Do not use the parking brake when

parking for long periods in cold weather

since it could freeze in that position.

Instead, observe the following.

1. Place the shift lever in “1” or “R” for

manual transmission vehicles, and in “P”

for automatic transmission vehicles.

2. Use t ire stops under the tires to

prevent the vehicle from moving.

When the vehicle is parked in snow or

when it snows, raise the wiper blades off

the glass to prevent damage to them.

When the vehicle has been left parked

after use on roads heavily covered with

snow, or has been left parked during a

snowstorm, icing may develop on the

brake system, which could cause poor

braking action. Check for snow or ice

buildup on the suspension, disc brakes

and brake hoses underneath the vehicle.

If there is caked snow or ice, remove it,

being careful not to damage the disc

brakes and brake hoses and ABS har-

ness.

! Refueling in cold weather

To help prevent moisture from forming in

the fuel system and the risk of its freezing,

use of an antifreeze additive in the fuel

tank is recommended during cold weather.

Use only additives that are specifically

designed fo r this purpose. When an

antifreeze additive is used, its effect lasts

longer if the tank is refilled whenever the

fuel level reaches half empty.

If your SUBARU is not going to be used

for an extended period, it is best to have

the fuel tank filled to capacity.

& Driving on snowy and icy

roads

WARNING

Do not use the cruise control on

slippery roads such as snowy or icy

roads. This may cause loss of

vehicle control.

Driving tips 8-9

– CONTINUED –

Black plate (308,1)

北米Model "A2440BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 5/ 7

8-10 Driving tips

CAUTION

Avoid prolonged continuous driving

in snowstorms. Snow will enter the

engine’s intake s ystem and may

hinder the air flow, whi ch could

result in engine shutdown or even

breakdown.

To prevent skidding and slipping, avoid

sudden braking, abrupt acceleration, high-

speed driving, and sharp turning when

driving on snowy or icy roads.

Always maintain ample distance between

your vehicle and the vehicle ahead of you

to avoid the need for sudden braking.

To supplement the foot brake, use the

engine brake effectively to control the

vehicle speed. (Shift into a lower gear

when necessary.)

Avoid shifting down abruptly. Such beha-

vior can cause the wheels to lock, possibly

leading to loss of vehicle control.

An anti-lock brake system (ABS) en-

hances your v ehicle’s braking perfor-

mance on snowy and icy roads. Refer to

the “ABS (Anti-lock Brake System)” and

“Vehicle Dynamics Control system” sec-

tion in chapter 7 for information on braking

on slippery surfaces.

! Wiper operation when snowing

Before driving in cold weather, make sure

the wiper blades are not frozen to the

windshield or rear window. If the wiper

blades are frozen to the windshield or rear

window, use the defroster with the airflow

control button/dial in the “

” position and

the temperature control dial set for max-

imum warmth until the wiper blades are

completely thawed out. If your vehicle is

equipped with a wiper deicer, it is helpful

to thaw the windshield wiper blades. To

thaw out the rear wiper blade, use the rear

window defogger.

When driving in snow, if frozen snow starts

to stick on the surface of the windshield

despite wiper operation, use the defroster

with the airflow control button/dial in “

”

and the temperature control dial set for

maximum warmth. After the windshield

gets warmed enough to melt the frozen

snow on i t, wash it away using the

windshield washer.

Snow stuck on the wiper arm prevents the

wiper from working effectively. If snow is

stuck on the wiper arm, pull off the road to

a safe place, then remove it. If you stop

the vehicle at road side, use the hazard

warning flasher to alert other drivers.

We recommend use of non-freezing type

wiper blades (winter blades) during the

seasons you could have snow and sub-

zero temperatures. Blades of this type

give superio r wiping performance in

snowy conditions. Be sure to use blades

that are suitable for your vehicle.

CAUTION

During hi gh-speed driving, non-

freezing type wiper blades may not

perform as well as standard wiper

blades. If this happens, reduce the

vehicle speed.

NOTE

When the season requiring non-freez-

ing type wiper blades is over, replace

them with standard wiper blades.

& Corrosion protection

Refer to the “Corrosion protection” section

(chapter 10).

Black plate (309,1)

北米Model "A2440BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 5/ 7

& Snow tires

! All models except OUTBACK or

2.5GT spec.B

WARNING

. When replacing original tires with

winter (snow) tires, make sure

you use only the s ame size,

construction and load range as

the original tires listed on the tire

placard. Using other sizes and

construction may affect speed-

ometer/odometer calibration and

clearance between the body and

tires. It also may be dangerous

and lead to loss of vehicle con-

trol.

. You must install four winter tires

that are of the same size, circum-

ferences, construction, brand,

and load range. Mixing other

sizes, circumferences or con-

structions may result in severe

mechanical damage to the drive

train of your vehicle and may

affect ride, handling, braking and

speedometer/odometer calibra -

tion. It also may be dangerous

and lead to loss of vehicle con-

trol.

. Do not use a combination of

radial, belted bias or bias tires

since it may cause dangerous

handling characteristics and lead

to an accident.

Your vehicle is equipped with “all season

tires” which are designed to provide an

adequate measure of traction, handling

and braking performance in year-round

driving. In winter, it may be possible to

enhance performance through use of tires

designed specifica lly for winter dr iving

conditions.

If you choose to install winter tires on your

vehicle, be sure to use the correct tire size

and type. You must install four winter tires

that are of the same size, construction,

brand and load range and you should

never mix radial, belted bias or bias tires

since this may result in dangerous hand-

ling characteristics. When you choose a

tire, make sure that there is enough

clearance between the tire and vehicle

body.

Remember to drive with care at all times

regardless of the type of tires on your

vehicle.

! OUTBACK models

WARNING

. When replacing original tires with

winter (snow) tires, make sure

you use only the same size and

construction as recommended.

Using other sizes or construction

may affect speedometer/od-

ometer calibration and clearance

between the body and tires. It

also may be dangerous and lead

to loss of vehicle control.

. You must install four winter tires

that are of the same size, circum-

ferences, construction, brand,

andloadrange.Mixingother

sizes, circumferences or con-

structions may result in severe

mechanical damage to the drive

train of your vehicle and may

affect ride, handling, braking and

speedometer/odometer calibra-

tion. It also may be dangerous

and lead to loss of vehicle con-

trol.

Driving tips 8-11

– CONTINUED –

Black plate (310,1)

北米Model "A2440BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 5/ 7

8-12 Driving tips

. Do not use a combi nation of

radial, belted bias or bias tires

since it may cause dangerous

handling characteristics and lead

to an accident.

Your vehicle is equipped with “all season

tires” which are designed to provide an

adequate measure of traction, handling

and braking performance in year-round

driving. In winter, it may be possible to

enhance performance through use of tires

designed specifica lly for winter driving

conditions.

If you choose to install winter tires on your

vehicle, be sure to use the correct tire size

and type. You must install four winter tires

that are of the same size, construction,

brand and load range and you should

never mix radial, belted bias or bias tires

since this may result in dangerous hand-

ling characteristics. When you choose a

tire, make sure that there is enough

clearance between the tire and vehicle

body.

Remember to drive with care at all times

regardless of the type of tires on your

vehicle.

Your OUTBACK comes with P225/

60R16 or P225/55R17 “all season tires”

as original equipment. You should be

aware that some winter tires with that

same size designation may actually be

too large for the vehicle and may cause

rubbing on sharp turns. Listed below is

the winter tire size that we recommend.

Recommended winter (snow) tire size

Original equipped tires = P225/60 R16:

Winter (snow) tires = P225/60 R16 or

P215/60 R16 Studless

Original equipped tires = P225/55 R17:

Winter (snow) tires = P215/55 R17, P225/

60 R16 or P215/60 R16 Studless

! 2.5GT spec.B

WARNING

. When replacing original tires with

winter (snow) tires, make sure

you use only the same size,

construction and load range as

the original tires listed on the tire

placard. Using other sizes and

construction may affect speed-

ometer/odometer calibration and

clearance between the body and

tires. It also may be dangerous

and lead to loss of vehicle con-

trol.

. You must install four winter tires

that are of the same size, con-

struction, brand, and load range.

Mixing other sizes or construc-

tions may result in severe me-

chanical damage to the drive

train of your vehicle and may

affect ride, handling, braking and

speedometer/odometer calibra-

tion. It also may be dangerous

and lead to loss of vehicle con-

trol.

. Do not use a combination of

radial, belted bias or bias tires

since it may cause dangerous

handling characteristics and lead

to an accident.

Your vehicle is equipped with “ summer

tires” as original equipment, which are

inadequate for driving on slippery roads

such as on snow-covered or icy roads.

Compared with winter and all-season

tires, summer tires give significantly less

grip on snowy and icy road surfaces.

Therefore, use of winter tires is strongly

recommended when dri ving with such

road conditions.

When you choose to install winter tires on

your vehicle, be sure to use the correct tire

size and type. You must install four winter

tires that are of the same size, construc-

tion, brand and load range and you should

never mix radial, belted bias or bias tires

Black plate (311,1)

北米Model "A2440BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 5/ 7

since this may result in dangerous hand-

ling characteristics. When you choose a

tire, make sure that there is enough

clearance between the tire and vehicle

body.

Remember to drive with care at all times

regardless of the type of tires on your

vehicle.

& Tire chains

CAUTION

Tire chains cannot be used on any

tires for your Legacy and Outback

because of lack of clearance be-

tween the tires and vehicle body.

Driving on snowy grades or icy roads may

require the use of tire chains, in which

case put the chains on the front wheels

only. Use only SAE class S type chains

that are of the correct size for your tires so

as not to damage the vehicle body or

suspension.

When driving with tire chains, drive at

speeds below 19 mph (30 km/h). When a

temporary spare tire is on a front wheel,

replace the temporary spare tire with the

rear tire on the same side of the vehicle,

and then fit chains on the front tires.

Always use the utmost care when driving

with tire chains – overconfidence because

you are driving with tire chains could

easily lead to a serious accident.

& Rocking the vehicle

If you must rock the vehicle to free it from

snow, sand, or mud, depress the accel-

erator pedal slightly and move the selector

lever back and forth between “D” and “R”

repeatedly. Do not race the engine. For

the best possible traction, avoid spinning

the wheels when trying to free the vehicle.

When th e road surface is extremely

slippery, you can obtain better traction by

starting the vehicle with the transmission

in 2nd than 1st (both for MT and AT).

Refer to the “Automatic transmission – 4-

speed” and “Automatic transmission – 5-

speed” section in chapter 7 for information

on holding the transmission in 2nd posi-

tion.

Loading your vehicle

WARNING

Never allow passengers to ride on a

folded rear seatback, in the trunk or

in the cargo area. Doing so may

result in serious injury.

WARNING

. Never s tack luggage or other

cargo higher than the top of the

seatback because it could tumble

forward and injure passengers in

the event of a sudden stop or

accident. Keep luggage or cargo

low, as close to the floor as

Driving tips 8-13

– CONTINUED –

Black plate (312,1)

北米Model "A2440BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 5/ 7

8-14 Driving tips

possible.

. When you carry something inside

the vehicle, secure it whenever

you can to prevent it from being

thrown around inside the vehicle

during sudden stops, sharp turns

or in an accident.

. Do not pile heavy loads on the

roof. These loads raise the vehi-

cle’s center of gravity and make it

more prone to tip over.

. Secure lengthy items properly to

prevent them from shooting for-

ward and causing serious injury

during a sudden stop.

. Never exceed the maximum load

limit. If you do, some parts on

your vehicle can break, or it can

change the way your vehic le

handles. This could result in loss

of control and cause personal

injury. Also, overloading can

shorten the life of your vehicle.

. Do not place anything on the rear

shelf behind the rear seatback

(for Sedan) or the extended lug-

gage cover (for Station wagon).

Such items could tumble forward

in the event of a sudden stop or a

collision. This could cause ser-

ious injury.

CAUTION

Do not carry spray cans, containers

with flammable or corrosive liquids

or any other dangerous items inside

the vehicle.

NOTE

For better fuel economy, do not carry

unneeded cargo.

& Vehicle capacity weight

The load capacity of you r vehicle is

determined by weight, not by available

cargo space. The maximum load you can

carry in your vehicle is shown on the

vehicle placard attached to the driver’s

Black plate (313,1)

北米Model "A2440BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 5/ 7

side door pillar. It includes the total weight

of the driver and all passengers and their

belongings, any optional equipment such

as a trailer hitch, roof rack or bike carrier,

etc., and the tongue load of a trailer.

& GVWR and GAWR (Gross

Vehicle Weight Rating and

Gross Axle Weight Rating)

Certification label

The certification label attached to the

driver’s side door shows GVWR (Gross

Vehicle Weight Rating) and GAWR (Gross

Axle Weight Rating).

The GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight) must

never exceed the GVWR. GVW is the

combined total of weight of the vehicle,

fuel, driver, all passengers, luggage, any

optional equipment and trailer tongue

load. Therefore, the GVW changes de-

pending on the situation.

In addition, the total weight applied to

each axle (GAW) must never exceed the

GAWR. The front and rear GAWs can be

adjusted by relocating luggage inside the

vehicle.

Even if the total weight of your luggage is

lower than the vehicle capacity weight,

either front or rear GAW may exceed the

GAWR, depending on the distribution of

the luggage.

When possible, the load should be evenly

distributed throughout the vehicle.

If you carry heavy loads in the vehicle, you

should confirm that GVW and front and

rear GAWs are within the GVWR and

GAWR by putting your vehicle on a

vehicle scale, found at a commercial

weighing station.

Do not use replacement tires with a lower

load range than the originals because they

may lower the GVWR and GAWR limita-

tions. Replacement tires with a higher load

range than the originals do not increase

the GVWR and GAWR limitations.

& Roof rail and crossbar (if

equipped)

1) Crossbar kit

CAUTION

. For cargo carrying purposes, the

roof rail must be used together

with a roof crossbar kit and the

appropriate carrying attachment.

The roof rail must never be used

alone to carry cargo. Otherwise,

damage to the roof or paint or a

dangerous road hazard due to

loss of cargo could result.

. When using the roof crossbar kit,

make sure that the total weight of

the crossbars, carrying attach-

Driving tips 8-15

– CONTINUED –

Black plate (314,1)

北米Model "A2440BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 5/ 7

8-16 Driving tips

ment and cargo does not exceed

the maximum load limit. Over-

loading may cause damage to

the vehicle and create a safety

hazard.

The roof rail is not designed to carry cargo

by itself. Car go can be carried after

securing the roof crossbar kit to the roof

rail and installing the appropriate carrying

attachment. When installing the roof

crossbar kit, follow the manufacturer’s

instructions.

When you carry cargo on the roof using

the roof crossbar kit and a carrying

attachment, never exceed the maximum

load limit explained in the following. You

should also be careful that your vehicle

does not exceed the Gross Vehicle Weight

Rating (GVWR) and front and rear Gross

Axle Weight Rating (GAWR). Refer to the

“Loading your ve hicle” section in this

chapter for information on loading cargo

into or onto your vehicle. The maximum

load limit of the cargo, crossbars and

carrying attachment must not exceed 100

lbs (45 kg). Place the heaviest load at the

bottom, nearest the roof, and evenly

distribute the cargo. Always p roperly

secure all cargo.

! Installing carrying attachments on

the crossbars

When installing any carrying attachment

such as a bike carrier, ski carrier, kayak

carrier, cargo basket, etc. on the cross-

bars, follow the manufacturer’s instruc-

tions and make sure that the attachment is

securely fixed to the crossbars. Use only

attachments designed specifically for the

crossbars. A set of the crossbars is

designed to carry loads (cargo and attach-

ment) of not more than 100 lbs (45 kg).

Before operating the vehicle, make sure

that the cargo is properly secured on the

attachment.

NOTE

Remember that the vehicle’s center of

gravity is altered with the weight of the

load on the roof, thus affecting the

driving characteristics.

Drive carefully. Avoid rapid starts, hard

cornering and abrupt stops. Crosswind

effects will be increased.

! Removal and installation of the

crossbars

The crossbars can be removed when you

do not use the roof to carry cargo.

! To remove the crossbar

1. Loosen and remove the T-30 torx®

head screw from the top of each crossbar

end support.

Loosen the lower clamps.

Black plate (315,1)

北米Model "A2440BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 5/ 7

2. Carefully raise the crossbar from roof

rails.

! To install the front crossbar

Front crossbar:

Front crossbar has 100 LBS Load Label

on left-hand side.

1) T-25 torx® head screw

1. Make sure that the T-25 torx® head

screw on the back of each crossbar end

support is tightened correctly.

2. Before placing the crossbar on the roof

rails, make sure that the T-30 torx® head

screw is removed from the top of each

crossbar end support.

3. The crossbar with the 100 LBS Load

Label attached onto it is the front crossbar.

An arrow is marked on the back of the

front crossbar for correct i nstallation.

Install the front crossbar so that the arrow

faces the front of the vehicle.

1) 10 in (250 mm)

4. Install the front crossbar so that the

crossbar end supports are located ap-

proximately 10 in (250 mm) rearward from

the joints between the roof rails and the

front roof rail supports.

Driving tips 8-17

– CONTINUED –

Black plate (316,1)

北米Model "A2440BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 5/ 7

8-18 Driving tips

1) Lower clamp

2) T-30 torx® head screw

5. Tighten the lower clamps onto the

crossbar. Using a torque wrench, loosely

tighten the T-30 torx® head screws.

NOTE

It may be necessary to squeeze the

lower clamp and the end support

together to compress the pads and

gain a better alignment of the pieces

while trying to start the screw. Use care

not to crossthread the screw in the

insert.

6. Adjust the alignment of the crossbar

on the roof rails, and if available, use a T-

30 torx® bit and torque wrench and tighten

the T-30 torx® head screws to 30 to 35

lbf·in (3.4 to 4.0 N·m, 0.35 to 0.41 kgf·m) of

torque (or tighten securely with the torx®

wrench provided).

Rear crossbar:

1) Zero gap

Install the rear cross bar so that the rear

edges of both crossbar end supports are

aligned (zero gap) with the front edges of

both rear roof rail supports.

Install the rear crossbar in the same

manner as the front crossbar.

CAUTION

Do not carry cargo on the roof when

the crossbars are removed. Lug-

gage on the roof will be thrown

forward or backward in sudden

stops or rapid accelerations, result-

ing in a dangerous road hazard.

Black plate (317,1)

北米Model "A2440BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 5/ 7

NOTE

Before each use of the roof crossbar,

make sure the four T-30 crossbar

clamp screws have been checked,

and retightened if necessary to 35 lbf·in

(4.0 N·m, 0.41 kgf·m), as outlined in

Step #5 above.

Trailer hitch (if equipped)

WARNING

. Never exceed the maximum

weight specified for the trailer

hitch. Exceeding the maximum

weight could cause an accident

resulting in serious personal in-

juries. Permissible trailer weight

changes depending on the situa-

tion. Refer to the next section

“Trailer towing” for possible re-

commendations and limitations.

. Trailer brakes are required when

the towing load exceeds 1,000

lbs (453 kg). Be sure your trailer

has safety chains and that each

chain will hold the trailer’s max-

imum gross weight. Towing trai-

lers without safety chains could

create a traffic safety hazard if

the trailer separates from the

hitch due to coupling damage or

hitch ball damage.

. Be sure to check the hitch pin

and safety pin for positive lock-

ing placement before towing a

trailer. If the ball mount comes off

the hitch receiver, the trailer

could g et loose and create a

traffic safety hazard.

. Use only the ball mount supplied

with this hitch. Use the hitch only

as a weight carrying hitch. Do not

use with any type of weight

distributing hitch.

The trailer hitch is designed to tow a Class

1 rated load. The maximum gross trailer

weight and maximum gross tongue weight

are indicated in the following table.

Maximum

gross trailer

weight

Maximum

gross tongue

weight

3.0-liter

models

3,000 lbs

(1,360 kg)

200 lbs

(90 kg)

All models

other than

3.0-liter

models

2,700 lbs

(1,224 kg)

When you tow a trailer, refer to “Trailer

towing” later in this section.

Driving tips 8-19

– CONTINUED –

Black plate (318,1)

北米Model "A2440BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 5/ 7

8-20 Driving tips

& Connecting a trailer

1. Remove the receiver cover from the

hitch receiver tube. Then insert the ball

mount into the hitch receiver tube.

2. Insert the hitch pin into the hole on the

hitch receiver tube so that the pin passes

through the ball mount.

3. Insert the safety pin into the hitch pin

securely.

4. Pull the ball mount to make sure it

does not come off the hitch receiver.

1) Hitch ball installation point

2) Hooks for safety chains

5. Use only a hitch ball that is appropriate

for the ball mount and your trailer. The

hitch ball must be securely installed on the

ball mount.

6. Connect your trailer to the hitch ball.

7. Connect the trailer and the hitch with

safety chains that will hold the trailer’s

maximum gross weight. The chains

should cross under the trailer tongue to

prevent the tongue from dropping onto the

ground in case it should disconnect from

the hitch ball. Allow sufficient slack in the

chains taking tight-turn situations into

account; however, be careful not to let

them drag on the ground.

Black plate (319,1)

北米Model "A2440BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 5/ 7

WARNING

Do not connect safety chains to part

of the vehicle other than the safety

chain hooks.

Hitch harness connector

8. Connect the hitch wire harness ’s black

four-pin wire connector to the towing

trailer’s wire harness.

9. Confirm proper function of the hitch

wire harness by individually activating the

brake, right turn signal, left turn signal,

stop, and parking lights on the trailer.

NOTE

Always disconnect the trailer wire har-

ness before launching or retrieving a

watercraft.

& When you do not tow a trailer

. Remove the ball mount from the hitch

receiver tube and insert the receiver cover

onto the hitch receiver tube.

. Place the dust cap over the four-pin

connector of the hitch wire harness to

protect against possible damage.

. Occasionally lubricate terminals of the

four-pin connector using the terminal

grease.

Trailer towing

Your vehicle is designed and intended to

be used primarily as a passenger-carrying

vehicle. Towing a trailer puts additional

loads on your vehicle’s engine, drivetrain,

brakes, tires and suspension and has an

adverse effect on fuel economy.

If you do decide to tow a trailer, your safety

and satisfaction depend upon proper use

of correct equipment and cautious opera-

tion of your vehicle. Seek the advice of

your SUBARU dealer to assist you in

purchasing a hitch and other necessary

towing equipment appr opriate for your

vehicle. In addition, be sure to follow the

instructions on correct installation and use

provided by the trailer and other towing

equipment manufacturers.

SUBARU assumes no responsibility for

injuries or vehicle damage that result from

trailer towing equipment, or f rom any

errors or omissions in the instructions

accompanying such equipment or for your

failure to follow the proper instructions.

& Warranties and maintenance

SUBARU warranties do not apply to

vehicle damage or malfunction caused

by trailer towing. If you use your vehicle to

tow a trailer, more frequent maintenance

will be required due to the additional load.

Driving tips 8-21

– CONTINUED –

Black plate (320,1)

北米Model "A2440BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 5/ 7

8-22 Driving tips

(Refer to “Maintenance schedule under

severe driving conditions” in the “Warranty

and Maintenance Booklet”.)

Under no circumstances should a trailer

be towed with a new vehicle or a vehicle

with any new powertrain component (en-

gine, transmission, differential, wheel

bearings, etc.) for the first 1,000 miles

(1,600 km) of driving.

& Maximum load limits

WARNING

Never exceed the maximum load

limits explained in the following.

Exceeding the maximum load limits

could cause personal injury and/or

vehicle damage.

CAUTION

. Adequate size trailer brakes are

required when the trailer and its

cargo exceed 1,000 lbs (453 kg)

total weight.

. Before towing a trailer, check the

trailer total weight, GVW, GAWs

and tongue load. Make sure the

load and its distribution in your

vehicle and trailer are accepta-

ble.

! Total trailer weight

Total trailer weight

The total trailer weight (trailer weight plus

its cargo load) must never exceed the

maximum weight indicated in the following

table.

Black plate (321,1)

北米Model "A2440BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 5/ 7

3.0-liter models

Conditions Maximum total trailer weight

When towing a trailer without brakes. 1,000 lbs (453 kg)

When towing a trailer with brakes. 3,000 lbs (1,360 kg)

When towing a trailer on a long uphill grade

continuously for over 5 miles (8 km) with an

outside temperature of 1048F (408C) or above.

1,500 lbs (680 kg)

All models other than 3.0-liter models

Model Conditions

Maximum total trailer

weight

MT models

When towing a trailer without brakes. 1,000 lbs (453 kg)

When towing a trailer with brakes. 2,700 lbs (1,224 kg)

AT models

When towing a trailer without brakes. 1,000 lbs (453 kg)

When towing a trailer with brakes. 2,700 lbs (1,224 kg)

When towing a trailer on a long uphill

grade continuously for over 5 miles (8

km) with an outside temperature of

1048F (408C) or above.

1,350 lbs (612 kg)

! Gross Vehicle Weight (GVW) and

Gross Vehicle Weight Rating

(GVWR)

Gross Vehicle Weight

The Gross Vehicle Weight (GVW) must

never exceed the Gross Vehicle Weight

Rating (GVWR).

Gross Vehicle Weight (GVW) is the

combined total of the weight of the vehicle,

driver, passengers, luggage, trailer hitch,

trailer tongue load and any other optional

equipment installed on your vehicle.

Therefore, the GVW changes depending

on the situation. Determine the GVW each

time before going on a trip by putting your

vehicle and trailer on a vehicle scale.

GVWR is shown on the certification label

located on the driver ’s door of your

vehicle.

Driving tips 8-23

– CONTINUED –

Black plate (322,1)

北米Model "A2440BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 5/ 7

8-24 Driving tips

Certification label

! Gross Axle Weight (GAW) and

Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)

Gross Axle Weight

The total weight applied to each axle

(GAW) must never exceed the Gross Axle

Weight Rating (GAWR). The front and rear

GAWs can be adjusted by relocating

passengers and luggage inside the vehi-

cle. The front and rear GAWR are also

shown on the certification label.

Certification label

To check both GVWR and GAWR and to

confirm that the total weight and weight

distribution are within safe driving limits,

you should have your vehicle and trailer

weighed at a commercial weighing station.

Be sure that all cargo is firmly secured to

prevent a change in weight distribution

while driving.

! Tongue load

Tongue load

WARNING

If the trailer is loaded with more

weight in the back of trailer’s axle

than in the front, the load is taken off

the rear axle of the towing vehicle.

This may cause the rear wheels to

skid, especially during braking or

when vehicle speed is reduced dur-

ing corne ring, r esultin g in over-

steer, spin out and/or jackknifing.

Ensure that the trailer tongue load is from

8 to 11 percent of the total trailer weight

and does not exceed the maximum value

of 200 lbs (90 kg).

Black plate (323,1)

北米Model "A2440BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 5/ 7

NOTE

For vehicles with trailer brakes, the

trailer tongue load exceeds 200 lbs (90

kg) when calculated at 8% of the

maximum total trailer weight.

Even in this case, the maximum value

is 200 lbs (90 kg).

1) Jack

2) Bathroom scale

The tongue load can be weighed with a

bathroom scale as shown in the following

illust ration. When weighing the tongue

load, be sure to position the towing

coupler at the height at which it would be

during actual towing, us ing a jack as

shown.

F: Front

The tongue load can be adjusted by

proper distribution of the load in the trailer.

Never load the trailer with more weight in

the back than in the front; approximately

60 percent of the trailer load should be in

the front and approximately 40 percent in

the rear. Also, distribute the load as evenly

as possible on both the left and right

sides.

Be sure that all cargo is firmly secured to

prevent a change in weight distribution

while driving.

& Trailer hitches

WARNING

Never drill the frame or under-body

of your vehicle to install a commer-

cial trailer hitch. If you do, danger-

ous exhaust gas, water or mud may

enter the passenger compartment

through the drilled hole. Exhaust

gas contains carbon monoxide, a

colorless and odorless gas which is

dangerous, or even lethal, if inhaled.

Also, drilling the frame or under-

body of your vehicle could cause

deterioration of strength of your

vehicle and cause corrosion around

the drilled hole.

CAUTION

. Do not modify the vehicle ex-

haust system, brake system, or

other systems when installing a

hitch or other trailer towing

equipment.

. Do not use axle-mounted hitches

as they can cause damage to the

axle housing, wheel bearings,

wheels or tires.

Choose a proper hitch for your vehicle and

Driving tips 8-25

– CONTINUED –

Black plate (324,1)

北米Model "A2440BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 5/ 7

8-26 Driving tips

trailer.

! OUTBACK wagon

The use of a genuine SUBARU trailer

hitch is recommended. A genuine

SUBARU hitch is available from your

SUBARU dealer.

If use of a non-genuine hitch is unavoid-

able, be sure the hitch is suited to your

vehicle and trailer. Consult with a profes-

sional h itch supplier to assist you in

choosing an appropriate hitch for your

vehicle. Be sure to follow all of the hitch

manufacturer’s instructions for installation

and use.

Never use a hitch that mounts only to the

rear bumper. The bumper is not designed

to handle that type of load.

For all types of hitches, regularly check

that the hitch mounting bolts and nuts are

tight.

! All vehicles except OUTBACK wa-

gon

SUBARU does not offer accessory trailer

hitches. Consult with a professional hitch

supplier to assist you in choosing an

appropriate hitch for your vehicle. Be sure

to follow all of the hitch manufacturer’s

instructions for installation and use.

Never use a hitch that mounts only to the

rear bumper. The bumper is not designed

to handle that type of load.

Regularly check that the hitch mounting

bolts and nuts are tight.

& Connecting a trailer

! Trailer brakes

WARNING

. Adequate size trailer brakes are

required when the trailer and its

cargo exceed 1,000 lbs (453 kg)

total weight.

. Do not directly connect your

trailer’s hydraulic brake system

to the hydraulic brake system in

your vehicle. Direct connection

would cause the vehicle’s brake

performance to deteriorate and

could lead to an accident.

If your trailer’s total weight (trailer weight

plus its cargo weight) exceeds 1,000 lbs

(453 kg), the trailer is required to be

equipped wi th its own brake system.

Electric brakes or surge brakes a re

recommended, and must be installed

properly. Check that your trailer’s brakes

conform with Federal, state/province and/

or other applicable regul ations. Your

SUBARU’s brake system is not designed

to be tapped into the trailer’s hydraulic

brake system. Please ask your SUBARU

dealer and professional trailer supplier for

more information about the trailer’s brake

system.

! Trailer safety chains

WARNING

Always use safety chains between

your vehicle and the trailer. Towing

trailer without safety chains could

create a traffic safety hazard if the

trailer separates from the hitch due

to coupling damage or hitch ball

damage.

In case the trailer hitch connector or hitch

ball should break or become discon-

nected, the trailer could get loose and

create a traffic safety hazard.

For safety, always connect the towing

vehicle and trailer with trailer safety

chains. Pass the chains crossing each

other under the trailer tongue to prevent

the trailer from dropping onto the ground

in case the trailer tongue should discon-

nect from the hitch ball. Allow sufficient

slack in the chains taking tight-turn situa-

tions into account; however, be careful not

to let them drag on the ground.

For more information about the safety

chain connection, refer to the instructions

for your hitch and trailer.

Black plate (325,1)

北米Model "A2440BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 5/ 7

! Side mirrors

After hitching a trailer to your vehicle,

check that the standard side mirrors

provide a good rearward field of view

without significant blind spots. If significant

blind spots occur with the vehicle’s stan-

dard side mirrors, use towing mirrors that

conform with Federal, state/province and/

or other applicable regulations.

! Trailer lights

CAUTION

Direct spli cing or other improper

connection of trailer lights may

damage your vehi cle’s electrical

system and cause a malfunction of

your vehicle’s lighting system.

Connection of trailer lights to your vehi-

cle’s electrical system requires modifica-

tions to the vehicle’s lighting circuit to

increase its capacity and accommodate

wiring changes. To ensure the trailer lights

are connected properly, please consult

your SUBARU dealer. Check for proper

operation of the turn signals, the brake

lights and parking lights each time you

hitch up.

! Tires

WARNING

Never tow a trailer when the tem-

porary spare tire is used. The tem-

porary spare tire is not designed to

sustain the towing load. Use of the

temporary spare tire when towing

can result in failure of the spare tire

and/or less stability of the vehicle.

Make sure that all the tires on your vehicle

are properly inflated.

The recommended cold tire pressure

under trailer towing conditions is shown

in chapter 12, “Specifications” and in

“GAS STATION REFERENCE” at the

end of this manual. Adjust the rear tire

pressure to the recommended pressure

when the tires are cold. Normal pressure

should be maintained in the front tires.

Trailer tire condition, size, load rating and

proper inflation pressure should be in

accordance with the trailer manufacturer’s

specifications.

In the event your vehicle gets a flat tire

when towing a trailer, ask a commercial

road service to repair the flat tire.

If you carry a regular size spare tire in your

vehicle or trailer as a precaution against

getting a flat tire, be sure that the spare

tire is firmly secured.

& Trailer towing tips

CAUTION

. Never exceed 45 mph (72 km/h)

when towing a trailer i n hilly

country on hot days.

. When towing a trailer, steering,

stability, stopping distance and

braking performance will be dif-

ferent from normal operation. For

safety’s sake, you should employ

extra caution when towing a

trailer and you should never

speed. You should also keep the

following tips in mind:

Driving tips 8-27

– CONTINUED –

Black plate (326,1)

北米Model "A2440BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 5/ 7

8-28 Driving tips

! Before starting out on a trip

. Check that the vehicle and vehicle-to-

hitch mounting are in good condition. If

any problems are apparent, do not tow the

trailer.

. Check that the vehicle sits horizontally

with the trailer attached. If the vehicle is

tipped sharply up at the front and down at

the rear, check the total trailer weight,

GVW, GAWs and tongue load again, then

confirm that the load and its distribution

are acceptable.

. Check that the tire pressures are

correct.

. Check that the vehicle and trailer are

connected properly. Confirm that

– the trailer tongue is connected

properly to the hitch ball.

– the trailer lights connector is con-

nected properly and trailer ’s brake

lights illuminate when the vehicle’s

brake pedal is pressed, and that the

trailer’s turn signal lights flash when

the vehicle’s turn signal lever is oper-

ated.

– the safety chains are connected

properly.

– all cargo in the trailer is secured

safety in position.

– the side mirrors provide a good

rearward field of view without a sig-

nificant blind spot.

. Sufficient time should be taken to learn

the “feel” of the vehicle/trailer combination

before starting out on a trip. In an area free

of traffic, practice turning, stopping and

backing up.

! Driving with a trailer

. You should allow for considerably more

stopping distance when towing a trailer.

Avoid sudden braking because it may

result in skidding or jackknifing and loss of

control.

. Avoid abrupt starts and sudden accel-

erations. If your vehicle has a manual

transmission, always start out in first gear

and release the clutch at moderate engine

revolution.

. Avoid uneven steering, sharp turns and

rapid lane changes.

. Slow down before turning. Make a

longer than normal turning radius because

the trailer wheels will be closer than the

vehicle wheels to the inside of the turn. In

a tight turn, the tra iler could hit your

vehicle.

. Crosswinds will adversely affect the

handling of your vehicle and trailer, caus-

ing sway. Crosswinds can be due to

weather conditions or the passing of large

trucks or buses. If swaying occurs, firmly

grip the steering wheel and slow down

immediately but gradually.

. When passing other vehicles, consid-

erable distance is required because of the

added weight and length caused by

attaching the trailer to your vehicle.

1) Left turn

2) Right turn

. Backing up with a trailer is difficult and

takes practice. When backing up with a

trailer, never accelerate or steer rapidly.

When turning back, grip the bottom of the

steering wheel with one hand and turn it to

the left for a left turn, and turn it to the right

for a right turn.

. If the ABS warning light illuminates

while the vehicle is in motion, stop towing

the trailer and have repairs performed

immediately by the nearest SUBARU

dealer.

Black plate (327,1)

北米Model "A2440BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 5/ 7

! Driving on grades

. Before going down a steep hill, slow

down and shift into lower gear (if neces-

sary, use 1st gear) in order to utilize the

engine braking effect and prevent over-

heating of your vehicle’s brakes. Do not

make sudden downshifts.

. When driving uphill in hot weather, the

air conditioner may turn off automatically

to protect the engine from overheating.

. When driving uphill in hot weather, pay

attention to the water temperature gauge

pointer (for all vehicles) and AT OIL TEMP

warning light (for AT models) since the

engine and transmission are relatively

prone to overheating under these condi-

tions. If the water temperature gauge

pointer approaches the OVERHEAT zone

or the AT OIL TEMP warning light illumi-

nates, immediately switch off the ai r

conditioner and stop the vehicle at the

nearest safe place. Refer to the “Engine

overheating” section in chapter 9, and

“Warning and indicator lights” section in

chapter 3.

NOTE

With AT models, the temperature of

engine coolant is less likely to rise to

the OVERHEAT zone in the “D” posi-

tion than in the manual mode position.

. If your vehicle has an automatic trans-

mission, avoid using the accelerator pedal

to stay stationary on an uphill slope

instead of using the parking brake or foot

brake. That may cause the transmission

fluid to overheat.

! Parking on a grade

Always block the wheels under both

vehicle and trailer when parking. Apply

the parking brake firmly. You should not

park on a hill or slope. But if parking on a

hill or slope cannot be avoided, you

should take the following steps:

1. Apply the brakes and hold the pedal

down.

2. Have someone place wheel blocks

under both the vehicle and trailer wheels.

3. When the wheel blocks are in place,

release the regular brakes slowly until the

blocks absorb the load.

4. Apply the regular brakes and then

apply the parking brake; slowly release

the regular brakes.

5. Shift into 1st or reverse gear (manual

transmission) or “P” (automatic transmis-

sion) and shut off the engine.

Driving tips 8-29

Black plate (17,1)

北米Model "A2440BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 5/ 7

If you park your vehi cle in an emergency......... 9-2

Temporary spare tire........................................... 9-2

Flat tires............................................................... 9-4

Changing a flat tire.............................................. 9-4

Tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS) (if

equipped).......................................................... 9-9

Jump starting ..................................................... 9-10

How to jump start............................................... 9-11

Engine overheating ............................................ 9-13

If steam is coming from the engine

compartment.................................................... 9-13

If no steam is coming from the engine

compartment ................................................... 9-13

Towing ................................................................ 9-14

Towing and tie-down hooks................................ 9-14

Using a flat-bed truck......................................... 9-17

Towing with all wheels on the ground................. 9-17

Rear gate (Station wagon) – if the rear gate

cannot be unlocked ........................................ 9-18

Maintenance tools ............................................. 9-19

Jack .................................................................. 9-19

Jack handle....................................................... 9-19

Other maintenance tools .................................... 9-20

In case of emergency

Black plate (330,1)

北米Model "A2440BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 5/ 7

9-2 In case of emergency

If you park your vehicle in an

emergency

The hazard warning flasher should be

used in day or night to warn other drivers

when you have to park your vehicle under

emergency conditions.

Avoid stopping on the road. It is best to

safely pull off the road if a problem occurs.

The hazard warning flasher can be acti-

vated regardless of the ignition switch

position.

Turn on the hazard warning by pushing

the hazard warning flasher switch. Turn it

off by pushing the switch again.

NOTE

When the hazard warning flasher is on,

the turn signals do not work.

Temporary spare tire

WARNING

. Never tow a trailer when the

temporary spare tire is used.

The temporary spare tire is not

designed to sustain the towing

load. Use of the temporary spare

tire when towing can result in

failure of the spare tire and/or

less stability of the vehicle and

may lead to an accident.

. When a spare tire is mounted or a

wheel rim is replaced without the

original pressure sensor/trans-

mitter being transferred, the low

tire pressure warning light will

illuminate steadily after blinking

for approximately one minute.

This indicates the tire pressure

monitoring system (TPMS) is un-

able to monitor all four road

wheels. Contact your SUBARU

dealer as soon as possible for

tire and sensor replacement and/

or system resetting.

Black plate (331,1)

北米Model "A2440BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 5/ 7

CAUTION

Never use any temporary spare tire

other than the original. Using other

sizes may result in severe mechan-

ical damage to the drive train of your

vehicle.

The temporary spare tire is smaller and

lighter than a conventional tire and is

designed for emergency use only. Re-

move the temporary spare tire and re-

install the conventional tire as soon as

possible because the spare tire is de-

signed only for temporary use.

Check the inflation pressure of the tem-

porary spare tire periodically to keep the

tire ready for use. The correct pressure is

60 psi (420 kPa, 4.2 kgf/cm

When using the temporary spare tire, note

the following.

. Do not exceed 50 mph (80 km/h).

. Do not put a tire chain on the temporary

spare tire. Because of the smaller tire size,

a tire chain will not fit properly.

. Do not use two or more temporary

spare tires at the same time.

. Do not drive over obstacles. This tire

has a smaller diameter, so road clearance

is reduced.

1) Tread wear indicator bar

2) Indicator location mark

. When the wear indicator appears on

the tread, replace the tire.

. The temporary spare tire must be used

only on a rear wheel. If a front wheel tire

gets punctured, replace the wheel with a

rear wheel and install the temporary spare

tire in place of the removed rear wheel.

NOTE

If your vehicle is an AWD type with an

automatic transmission but is neither a

Turbo m odel nor a 3.0-liter model,

deactivate its All-Wheel-Drive capabil-

ity as follows: Before driving your

vehicle with the temporary spare tire,

putasparefuseinsidetheFWD

connector located in the engine com-

partment and confirm that the “

”

warning light comes on. The All-Wheel-

Drive capability of the vehicle has now

been deactivated. After re-installing the

conventional tire, remove the spare

fuse from the FWD connector in order

to reactivate All-Wheel Drive.

In case of emergency 9-3

Black plate (332,1)

北米Model "A2440BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 5/ 7

9-4 In case of emergency

Flat tires

If you have a flat tire while driving, never

brake suddenly; keep driving straight

ahead while gradually reducing speed.

Then slowly pull off the road to a safe

place.

& Changing a flat tire

WARNING

. Do not jack up the vehicle on an

incline or a loose road surface.

The jack can come out of the

jacking point or sink into the

ground and this can result in a

severe accident.

. Use only the jack provided with

your vehicle. The jack supplied

with the vehicle is designed only

for changing a tire. Never get

under the vehicle while support-

ing the vehicle with this jack.

. Always turn off the engine before

raising the flat tire off the ground

using the jack. Never swing or

push the vehicle supported with

the jack. The jack can come out

of the jacking point due to a jolt

and this can result in a severe

accident.

1. Park on a hard, level surface, when-

ever possible, then stop the engine.

2. Set the parking brake securely and

shift a manual transmission vehicle in

reverse or an automatic tra nsmission

vehicle in the “P” (Park) position.

3. Turn on the hazard warning flasher

and have everyone get out of the vehicle.

4. Put wheel blocks at the front and rear

of the tire diagonally opposite the flat tire.

Sedan

1) Jack handle

2) Spare tire

3) Jack and tool bucket

Black plate (333,1)

北米Model "A2440BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 5/ 7

Station wagon

1) Jack handle

2) Jack and tool bucket

3) Spare tire

5. Take out the spare tire, jack, and jack

handle.

The spare tire and jack are stored under

the floor of the trunk or cargo area.

To remove the spare tire and jack,

proceed as follows:

Sedan:

1. Lift the handle of the floor cover and

hook the handle onto the trunk edge.

2. Remove the jack handle from the back

of the floor cover.

3. Take out the storage tray.

4. Take out the jack and tool bucket.

1) Wheel nut wrench

2) Jack

5. Take the wheel nut wrench and jack

out of the tool bucket.

In case of emergency 9-5

– CONTINUED –

Black plate (334,1)

北米Model "A2440BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 5/ 7

9-6 In case of emergency

6. Turn the attaching bolt counterclock-

wise, then take the spare tire out.

Station wagon:

1. Open the lid and hang the hook

provided on the under side of the lid on

the rear edge of the roof to keep the lid

open.

2. Remove the left-hand part of the lid

and take out the jack handle.

3. Take out the storage tray.

4. Take out the jack and tool bucket.

1) Wheel nut wrench

2) Jack

5. Take the wheel nut wrench and jack

out of the tool bucket.

Black plate (335,1)

北米Model "A2440BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 5/ 7

6. Turn the attaching bolt counterclock-

wise, then take spare tire out.

If the spare tire provided in your vehicle is

a temporary spare tire, carefully read the

section “Temporary spare tire” in this

chapter and strictly follow the instructions.

NOTE

Make sure the jack is well lubricated

before using it.

7. Loosen the wheel nuts using the wheel

nut wrench but do not remove the nuts.

8. Place the jack under the side sill at the

front or rear jack-up point closest to the flat

tire.

Turn the jackscrew by hand until the jack

head engages firmly into the jack-up point.

9. Insert the jack handle into the jack-

screw, and turn the handle until the tire

clears the ground. Do not raise the vehicle

higher than necessary.

In case of emergency 9-7

– CONTINUED –

Black plate (336,1)

北米Model "A2440BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 5/ 7

9-8 In case of emergency

10. Remove the wheel nuts and the flat

tire.

11. Before putting the spare tire on, clean

the mounting surface of the wheel and hub

with a cloth.

12. Put on the spare tire. Replace the

wheel nuts. Tighten them by hand.

WARNING

Do not use oil or grease on the

wheel studs or nuts when the spare

tire is installed. This could cause the

nuts to become loose and lead to an

accident.

13. Turn the jack handle counterclockwise

to lower the vehicle.

14. Use the wheel nut wrench to securely

tighten the wheel nuts to the specified

torque, following the tightening order in the

illustration.

The torque for tightening the nuts is 74 to

89 lbf·ft (100 to 120 N·m, 10 to 12 kgf·m).

This torque is equivalent to applying

approximately 88 to 110 lbs (40 to 50 kg)

at the top of the wheel nut wrench. Never

use your foot on the wheel nut wrench or a

pipe extension on the wrench because

you may exceed the specified torque.

Have the wheel nut torque checked at

the nearest automotive service facility.

15. Store the flat tire in the spare tire

compartment.

Put the spacer and tighten the attaching

bolt firmly.

Also store the jack and jack handle in their

storage locations.

WARNING

Never place a tire or tire changing

tools in the passenger compartment

after changing wheels. In a sudden

Black plate (337,1)

北米Model "A2440BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 5/ 7

stop or collisions, loose equipment

could strike occupants and cause

injury. Store the tire and all tools in

the proper place.

& Tire pressure monitoring

system (TPMS) (if equipped)

Vehicle with SI-DRIVE

Vehicle without SI-DRIVE

The tire pressure monitoring system pro-

vides the driver with the warning message

indicated by sending a signal from a

sensor that is installed in each wheel

when tire pressure is severely low.

The tire pressure monitoring system will

activate only when the vehicle is driven.

Also, this system may not react immedi-

ately to a sudden drop in tire pressure (for

example, a blow-out caused running over

a sharp object).

WARNING

If the low tire pressure warning light

comes on while driving, never brake

suddenly and keep driving straight

ahead while gradually reducing

speed. Then slowly pull off the road

to a safe place. Otherwise an acci-

dent involving serious vehicle da-

mage and serious personal injury

could occur.

Check the pressure for all four tires

and adjust the pressure to the COLD

tire pressure shown on the vehicle

placard on the door pillar on the

driver’s side. If this light still comes

on while driving after adjusting the

tire pressure, a tire may have sig-

nificant damage and a fast leak that

causes the tire to lose air rapidly. If

you have a flat tire, replace it with a

spare tire as soon as possible.

When a spare tire is mounted or a

wheel rim is replaced without the

original pressure sensor/transmitter

being transferred, the low tire pres-

sure warning light will illuminate

steadily after blinking for approxi-

mately one minute. This indicates

the TPMS is unable to monitor all

four road wheels. Contact your

SUBARU dealer as soon as possible

for tire and sensor replacement and/

or system resetting.

Do not inject any ti re liquid or

aerosol tire sealant into the tires,

as this may cause a malfunction of

the tire pressure sensors.

In case of emergency 9-9

– CONTINUED –

Black plate (338,1)

北米Model "A2440BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 5/ 7

9-10 In case of emergency

If the light illuminates steadily after

blinking for approximately one min-

ute, promptly contact a SUBARU

dealer to have the system inspected.

Jump starting

WARNING

. Battery fluid is SULFURIC ACID.

Do not let it come in contact with

the eyes, skin, clothing or the

vehicle.

If battery fluid gets on you,

thoroughly fl ush the exposed

area with water immediately. Get

medical help if the fluid has

entered your eyes.

If battery fluid is accidentally

swallowed, immediately drink a

large amount of milk or water,

and obtain immediate medical

help.

Keep everyone including chil-

dren away from the battery.

. The gas generated by a battery

explodes if a flame or spark is

brought near it. Do not smoke or

light a match while jump starting.

. Never attempt jump starting if the

discharged battery is frozen. It

could cause the battery to burst

or explode.

. Whenever working on or around

a battery, always wear suitable

eye protectors, and remove metal

objects such as rings, bands or

other metal jewelry.

. Be sure the jumper cables and

clamps on them do not have

loose or missing insulation.

. Do not jump start unless cables

in suitable condition are avail-

able.

. A running engine can be danger-

ous. Keep your fingers, hands,

clothing, hair and tools away

from the cooling fan, belts and

any other moving engine parts.

Removing rings, watches and

ties is advisable.

. Jump starting is dangerous if it is

done incorrectly. If you are un-

sure about the proper procedure

for jump starting, consult a com-

petent mechanic.

When your vehicle does not start due to a

run down (discharged) battery, the vehicle

may be jump started by connecting your

battery to another battery (called the

booster battery) with jumper cables.

Black plate (339,1)

北米Model "A2440BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 5/ 7

& How to jump start

1. Make sure the booster battery is 12

volts and the negative terminal is

grounded.

2. If the booster battery is in another

vehicle, do not let the two vehicles touch.

3. Turn off all unnecessary lights and

accessories.

4. Connect the jumper cables exactly in

the sequence illustrated.

In case of emergency 9-11

– CONTINUED –

Black plate (340,1)

北米Model "A2440BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 5/ 7

9-12 In case of emergency

1) Connect one jumper cable to the positive

(+) terminal on the discharged battery.

2) Connect the other end of the jumper

cable to the positive (+) terminal of the

booster battery.

3) Connect one end of the other cable to the

negative (−) terminal of the booster

battery.

4) Connect the other end of the cable to the

strut mounting nut.

Make sure that the cables are not near

any moving parts and that the cable

clamps are not in contact with any other

metal.

Black plate (341,1)

北米Model "A2440BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 5/ 7

5. Start the engine of the vehicle with the

booster battery and run it at moderate

speed. Then start the engine of the vehicle

that has the discharged battery.

6. When fini shed, carefully disconnect

the cables in exactly the reverse order.

Engine overheating

WARNING

Never attempt to remove the radia-

tor cap until the engine has been

shut off and has fully cooled down.

When the engine is hot, the coolant

is under pressure. Removing the

cap whil e the engine is still hot

could release a spray of boiling hot

coolant, which could burn you very

seriously.

If the engine overheats, pull off the road

safely and stop the vehicle in a safe place.

& If steam is coming from the

engine compartment

Turn off the engine and get everyone

away from the vehicle until it cools down.

& If no steam is coming from

the engine compartment

1. Keep the eng ine r unnin g at idl ing

speed.

2. Open the hood to ventilate the engine

compartment.

Confirm that the cooling fan is turning. If

the fan is not turning, immediately turn off

the engine and contact your authorized

dealer for repair.

3. After the engine coolant temperature

has dropped, turn off the engine.

If the temperature gauge stays at the

overheated zone, turn off the engine.

4. After the engine has fully cooled down,

check the coolant level in the reserve

tank.

If the coolant level is below the “MIN”

mark, add coolant up to the “MAX” mark.

5. If there is no coolant in the reserve

tank, add coolant to the reserve tank.

Then remove the radiator cap and fill the

radiator with coolant.

If you remove the radiator cap from a hot

radiator, first wrap a thick cloth around the

radiator cap, then turn the cap counter-

clockwise slowly without pressing down

until it stops. Release the pressure from

the radiator. After the pressure has been

fully released, remove the cap by pressing

down and turning it.

In case of emergency 9-13

Black plate (342,1)

北米Model "A2440BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 5/ 7

9-14 In case of emergency

Towing

WARNING

Never tow AWD vehicles (both AT

and MT) with the front wheels raised

off the ground while the rear wheels

are on the ground, or with the rear

wheels raised off the ground while

the front wheels are on the ground.

This will cause the vehicle to spin

away due to the operation or dete-

rioration of the center differential.

If towing is necessary, it is best done by

your SUBARU dealer or a commercial

towing service. Observe the following

procedures for safety.

& Towing and tie-down hooks

The towing hooks should be used only in

an emergency (e.g., to free a stuck vehicle

from mud, sand or snow).

CAUTION

. Use only the specified towing

hooks and tie-down hooks. Never

use suspension parts or other

parts of the body for towing or

tie-down purposes.

. Never use the tie-down hook

closest to the muffler under the

vehicle for towing purposes.

. To prevent deformation to the

bumper and the towing hook, do

not apply excessive lateral load

to the towing hooks.

Front towing hook (OUTBACK models):

1. Take out the towing hook, screwdriver

and wheel nut wrench from the on board

tool bucket.

2. Wrap a flat-head screwdriver in a vinyl

tape or cloth, insert it into the gap between

the cover and the front bumper, and use it

to lever the cover open.

3. Pull the entire front fog light cover

toward you.

Black plate (343,1)

北米Model "A2440BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 5/ 7

4. Screw the towing hook into the thread

hole until the threads can no longer be

seen.

5. Tighten the towing hook secu rely

using a wheel nut wrench.

After towing, remove the towing hook from

the vehicle and stow it in the tool bag.

Fit the towing hook cover on the bumper.

Front towing hook (except OUTBACK

models):

1. Take out the towing hook, screwdriver

and wheel nut wrench from the on board

tool bag.

2. Wrap a flat-head screwdriver with cloth

or vinyl. Then, insert the screwdriver into

the gap between the front fog light cover

and the bumper, and pry out the cover.

3. Pull the entire front fog light cover

toward you.

4. Likewise, insert the screwdriver still

wrapped with cloth or vinyl into the cutout

between the towing hook cover and the

bumper. Pry out the cover.

5. Screw the towing hook into the thread

hole until the threads can no longer be

seen.

In case of emergency 9-15

– CONTINUED –

Black plate (344,1)

北米Model "A2440BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 5/ 7

9-16 In case of emergency

6. Tighten the towing hook secu rely

using a wheel nut wrench.

After towing, remove the towing hook from

the vehicle and stow it in the tool bag.

Fit the fog light cover and towing hook

cover on the bumper.

WARNING

. Do not use the towing hook

except when towing your vehicle.

. Be sure to remove the towing

hook after towing. Leaving the

towing hook mounted on the

vehicle could interfere with prop-

er operation of the SRS airbag

system in a frontal collision.

Rear towing hook:

The rear towing hook is located below the

center of the rear bumper.

CAUTION

Never use the rear towing hook to

tie the vehicle down.

Front tie-down hooks:

The f ront tie-down hooks a re located

between each of the front tires and the

front bumper.

Rear tie-down hooks:

The rear tie-down hooks are located near

each of the jack-up reinforcements.

Black plate (345,1)

北米Model "A2440BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 5/ 7

WARNING

Use the rear tie-down hooks only for

downward ancho ring. I f they are

used to anchor the vehicle in any

other direction, cables may slip off

the hooks, possibly causing a dan-

gerous situation.

& Using a flat-bed truck

This is the best way to transport your

vehicle. Use the following procedures to

ensure safe transportation.

1. Shift the selector lever into the “P”

position for automatic transmission vehi-

cles or “1st” for manual transmission

vehicles.

2. Pull up the parking brake lever firmly.

3. Secure the vehicle onto the carrier

properly with safety chains. Each safety

chain should be equally tightened and

care must be taken not to pull the chains

so tightly that the suspension bottoms out.

& Towing with all wheels on the

ground

WARNING

. Never turn the ignition switch to

the “LOCK” position while the

vehicle is being towed because

the steering wheel and the direc-

tion of the wheels will be locked.

. Remember that the brake booster

and power steering do not func-

tion when the engine is not

running. Because the engine is

turned off, it will take gr eater

effort to operate the brake pedal

and steering wheel.

CAUTION

. If transmission failure occurs,

transport your vehicle on a flat-

bed truck.

. Do not run the engine while being

towed using this method. Trans-

mission damage could result if

the vehicle is towed with the

engine running.

. For vehicles with automatic

transmission, the traveling speed

must be limited to less than 20

mph (30 km/h) and the traveling

distance to less than 31 miles (50

km). For greater speeds and

distances, transport your vehicle

on a flat-bed truck.

1. Check the transmission and differen-

tial oil levels and add oil to bring it to the

upper level if necessary.

2. Release the parking brake and put the

transmission in neutral.

3. The ignition switch should be in the

“Acc” position while the vehicle is being

In case of emergency 9-17

– CONTINUED –

Black plate (346,1)

北米Model "A2440BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 5/ 7

9-18 In case of emergency

towed.

4. Take up slack in the towline slowly to

prevent damage to the vehicle.

Rear gate (Station wagon) – if

the rear gate cannot be un-

locked

In the event that you cannot unlock the

rear gate by operating the power door

locking switches or the remote keyless

entry system, you can unlock it from inside

the cargo area.

1. Remove the access cover at the

bottom-center of the rear gate trim using

flat-head screwdriver.

2. Locate the rear gate lock release lever

behind the rear gate trim panel.

3. Unlock the rear gate by pressing the

lever inside the trim downward.

4. Open the rear gate from outside by

raising the rear gate handle.

Black plate (347,1)

北米Model "A2440BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 5/ 7

Maintenance tools

& Jack

A jack and other maintenance tools are

stored in the tool bucket in the center of

the spare tire located in the trunk or in the

cargo area.

Sedan: To take out the jack and main-

tenance tools, open the floor cover and

remove the bucket from the center of the

spare tire. Then, take the jack out of the

bucket.

Station wagon: To take out the jack and

maintenance tools, open the center lid and

remove the bucket from the center of the

spare tire. Then, take the jack out of the

bucket.

& Jack handle

The jack handle is stowed on the back of

the floor cover of the trunk or on the back

of the center lid of the cargo area.

Sedan: Open the floor cover and remove

the jack handle from the back of the floor

cover.

Station wagon: Open the center lid,

remove the left-hand part of the lid, and

take out the jack handle.

In case of emergency 9-19

– CONTINUED –

Black plate (348,1)

北米Model "A2440BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 5/ 7

9-20 In case of emergency

For how to use the jack, refer to “Flat

tires”.

& Other maintenance tools

In addition to a jack and a jack handle, the

tool bucket on your vehicle contains the

following maintenance tools.

Screwdriver

Towing hook

Wheel nut wrench

Black plate (19,1)

北米Model "A2440BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 5/ 7

Exterior care ....................................................... 10-2

Washing............................................................. 10-2

Waxing and polishing ......................................... 10-3

Cleaning aluminum wheels ................................. 10-3

Corrosion protection.......................................... 10-4

Most common causes of corrosion ..................... 10-4

To help prevent corrosion................................... 10-4

Cleaning the interior.......................................... 10-5

Seat fabric......................................................... 10-5

Leather seat materials........................................ 10-5

Synthetic leather upholstery............................... 10-5

Climate control panel, audio panel, instrument

panel, console panel, switches, combination

meter, and other plastic surface ....................... 10-5

Navigation monitor (if equipped) ........................... 10-6

Appearance care

Black plate (350,1)

北米Model "A2440BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 5/ 7

10-2 Appearance care

Exterior care

& Washing

CAUTION

. When washing the vehicle, the

brakes may get wet. As a result,

the brake stopping distance will

be longer. To dry the brakes,

drive the vehicle at a safe speed

while lightly pressing the brake

pedal to heat up the brakes.

. Do not wash the engine compart-

ment and areas adjacent to it. If

water enters the engine air in-

take, electrical parts or the power

steering fluid res ervoir, it will

cause engine trouble or faulty

power steering respectively.

. Since your vehicle is equipped

with a rear wiper, automatic car-

wash brushes could become

tangled around it, damaging the

wiper arm and other compo-

nents. Ask the automatic car-

wash operator not to let the

brushes touch the wiper arm or

to fix the wiper arm on the rear

window glass with adhesive tape

before operating the machine.

(Station wagon models only)

NOTE

When having your vehicle washed in

an automatic car wash, make sure

beforehand that the car was h is of

suitable type.

The best way to preserve your vehicle’s

beauty is frequent washing. Wash the

vehicle at least once a month to avoid

contamination by road grime.

Wash dirt off with a wet sponge and plenty

of lukewarm or cold water. Do not wash

the vehicle with hot water and in direct

sunlight.

Salt, chemicals, insects, tar, soot, tree

sap, and bird droppings should be washed

off by using a light detergent, as required.

If you use a light detergent, make certain

that it is a neutral detergent. Do not use

strong soap or chemical detergents. All

cleaning agents should b e promptly

flushed from the surface and not allowed

to dry there. Rinse the vehicle thoroughly

with plenty of lukewarm water. Wipe the

remaining water off with a chamois or soft

cloth.

! Washing the underbody

Chemicals, salts and gravel used for

deicing road surfaces are extremely cor-

rosive, accelerating the corrosion of un-

derbody components, such as the exhaust

system, fuel and brake lines, brake

cables, floor pan and fenders, and sus-

pension.

Thoroughly flush the underbody and in-

side of the fenders with lukewarm or cold

water at frequent intervals to reduce the

harmful effects of such agents.

Mud and sand adhering to the underbody

components may accelerate their corro-

sion.

After driving off-road or muddy or sandy

roads, wash the mud and sand off the

underbody.

Carefully flush the suspension and axle

parts, as they are particularly prone to

mud and sand buildup. Do not use a

sharp-edged tool to remove caked mud.

Black plate (351,1)

北米Model "A2440BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 5/ 7

NOTE

Be careful not to damage brake hoses,

sensor harnesses, and other parts

when washi ng suspe nsion compo -

nents.

! Using a warm water washer

. Keep a good distance of 12 in (30 cm)

or more between the washer nozzle and

the vehicle.

. Do not wash the same area continu-

ously.

. If a stain will not come out easily, wash

by hand. Some warm water washers are

of the high temperature, high pressure

type, and they can damage or deform the

resin parts such as mouldings, or cause

water to leak into the vehicle.

& Waxing and polishing

Always wash and dry the vehicle before

waxing and polishing.

Use a good quality polish and wax and

apply them according to the manufac-

turer’s instructions. Wax or polish when

the painted surface is cool.

Be sure to polish and wax the chrome trim,

as well as the painted surfaces. Loss of

wax on a painted surface leads to loss of

the original luster and also quickens the

deterioration of the surface. It is recom-

mended that a coat of wax be applied at

least once a mo nth, or whenever the

surface no longer repels water.

If the appearance of the paint has dimin-

ished to the point where the luster or tone

cannot be restored, lightly polish the

surface with a fine-grained compound.

Never polish just the affected area, but

include the surrounding area as well.

Always polish in only one direction. A

No. 2000 grain compound is recom-

mended. Never use a coarse-grained

compound. Coarser grained compounds

have a smaller grain-size number and

could damage the paint. After polishing

with a compound, coat with wax to restore

the original luster. Frequent polishing with

acompoundoranincorrectpolishing

technique will result in removing the paint

layer and exposing the undercoat. When

in doubt, it is always best to contact your

SUBARU dealer or an auto paint specia-

list.

NOTE

Be careful not to block the windshield

washer nozzles with wax when waxing

the vehicle.

& Cleaning aluminum wheels

. Promptly wipe the aluminum wheels

clean of any kind of grime or agent. If dirt

is left on too long, it may be difficult to

clean off.

. Do not use soap containing grit to

clean the wheels. Be sure to use a neutral

cleaning agent, and later rinse thoroughly

with water. Do not clean the wheels with a

stiff brush or expose them to a high-speed

washing device.

. Clean the vehicle (including the alumi-

num whe els) with water as soon as

possible when it has been splashed with

sea water, exposed to sea breezes, or

driven on roads treated with salt or other

agents.

Appearance care 10-3

Black plate (352,1)

北米Model "A2440BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 5/ 7

10-4 Appearance care

Corrosion protection

Your SUBARU has been designed and

built to resist corrosion. Special materials

and protective finishes have been used on

most parts of the vehicle to help maintain

fine appearance, strength, and reliable

operation.

& Most common causes of

corrosion

The most common causes of corrosion

are:

1. The accumulation of moisture retain-

ing dirt and debris in body panel sections,

cavities, and other areas.

2. Damage to paint and other protective

coatings caused by gravel and stone

chips or minor accidents.

Corrosion is accelerated on the vehicle

when:

1. It is exposed to road salt or dust

control chemicals, or used in coastal

areas where there is more salt in the air,

or in areas where there is considerable

industrial pollution.

2. It is driven in areas of high humidity,

especially when temperatures range just

above freezing.

3. Dampness in certain parts of the

vehicle remains for a long time, even

though other parts of the vehicle may be

dry.

4. High temperatures will cause corro-

sion to parts of the vehicle which cannot

dry quickly due to lack of proper ventila-

tion.

& To help prevent corrosion

Wash the vehicle regu larly to prevent

corrosion of the body and suspension

components. Also, wash the vehicle

promptly after driving on any of t he

following surfaces:

. roads that have been salted to prevent

them from freezing in winter

. mud, sand, or gravel

. coastal roads

After the winter has ended, it is recom-

mended that the underbody be given a

very thorough washing.

Before the beginning of winter, check the

condition of underbody components, such

as the exhaust system, fuel and brake

lines, brake cables, suspension, steering

system, floor pan, and fenders. If any of

them are found to be rusted, they should

be given an appropriate rust prevention

treatment or should be replaced. Contact

your SUBARU dealer to perform this kind

of maintenance and treatment if you need

assistance.

Repair chips and scratches in the paint as

soon as you find them.

Check the interior of the vehicle for water

and dirt accumulation under the floor mats

because that could cause corrosion.

Occasionally check under the mats to

make sure the area is dry.

Keep your garage dry. Do not park your

vehicle in a damp, poorly ventil ated

garage. In such a garage, corrosion can

be caused by dampness. If you wash the

vehicle in the garage or put the vehicle

into the garage when wet or covered with

snow, that can cause dampness.

If your vehicle is operated in cold weather

and/or in areas where road salts and other

corrosive materials are used, the door

hinges and locks, trunk lid lock, and hood

latch should be inspected and lubricated

periodically.

Black plate (353,1)

北米Model "A2440BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 5/ 7

Cleaning the interior

Use a soft, damp cloth to clean the climate

control panel, audio equipment, instru-

ment panel, center console, combination

meter panel, and switches. (Do not use

organic solvents.)

& Seat fabric

Remove loose dirt, dust or debris with a

vacuum cleaner. If the dirt is caked on the

fabric or hard to remove with a vacuum

cleaner, use a soft blush then vacuum it.

Wipe the fabri c surface with a tightly

wrung cloth and dry the seat fabric

thoroughly. If the fabric is still dirty, wipe

using a solution of mild soap and luke-

warm water then dry thoroughly.

If the stain does not come out, try a

commercially-available fabric cleaner. Use

the cleaner on a hidden place and make

sure it does not affect the fabric adversely.

Use the cleaner according to its instruc-

tions.

NOTE

When cleaning the seat, do not use

benzine, paint thinner, or any similar

materials.

& Leather seat materials

The leather used by SUBARU is a high

quality natural product which will retain its

distinctive appearance and feel for many

years with proper care.

Allowing dust or road dirt to build up on the

surface can cause the material to become

brittle and to wear prematurely. Regular

cleaning with a soft, moist, natural fiber

cloth should be performed monthly, taking

care not to soak the leather or allow water

to penetrate the stitched seams.

A mild detergent suitable for cleaning

woolen fabrics may be used to remove

difficult dirt spots, rubbing with a soft, dry

cloth afterwards to restore the luster. If

your SUBARU is to be parked for a long

time in bright sunlight, it is recommended

that the seats and headrests be covered,

or the windows shaded, to prevent fading

or shrinkage.

Minor surface blemishes or bald patches

may be treated with a commercial leather

spray lacquer. You will discover that each

leather seat section will develop soft folds

or wrin kles, which is characteristi c of

genuine leather.

& Synthetic leather upholstery

The synthetic leather material used on the

SUBARU may be cleaned using mild soap

or detergent and water, after first vacuum-

ing or brushing away loose dirt. Allow the

soap to soak in for a few minutes and wipe

off with a clean, damp cloth. Commercial

foam-type cleaners suitable for synthetic

leather materials may be used when

necessary.

NOTE

Strong cleaning agents such as sol-

vents, paint thinners, window cleaner

or gasoline must never be used on

leather or synthetic interior materials.

& Climate control panel, audio

panel, instrument panel,

console panel, switches,

combination meter, and other

plastic surface

Use a soft, damp cloth to clean the climate

control panel, audio equipment, instru-

ment panel, center console, combination

meter panel, and switches.

NOTE

Do not use organic solvents such as

paint thinners or gasoline, or strong

cleaning a gents that contain th ose

solvents.

Appearance care 10-5

– CONTINUED –

Black plate (354,1)

北米Model "A2440BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 5/ 7

10-6 Appearance care

& Navigation monitor (if

equipped)

To clean the navigation monitor, wipe it

with a silicone cloth or with a soft cloth. If

the navigation monitor is extremely dirty,

clean it with a soft cloth moistened with

neutral detergent then carefully wipe off

any remaining detergent.

NOTE

. Do not spray neutral detergent di-

rectly onto the monitor. Doing so could

damage the monitor’s components.

. Do not wipe the monitor with a hard

cloth. Doing so could scratch the

monitor.

. Do not use cleaning fluid that con-

tains thinner, gasoline, or any other

volatile substance. Such cleaning fluid

could erase the let tering on the

switches at the bottom of the monitor.

Black plate (21,1)

北米Model "A2440BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 5/ 7

Maintenance schedule ....................................... 11-3

Maintenance precautions................................... 11-3

Before checking or servicing in the engine

compartment.................................................... 11-4

When you do checking or servicing in the engine

compartment while the engine is running.......... 11-4

Engine hood ....................................................... 11-4

Engine compartment overview.......................... 11-6

2.5-liter non-turbo models ................................... 11-6

2.5-liter turbo models ......................................... 11-7

3.0-liter models .................................................. 11-8

Engine oil............................................................ 11-9

Checking the oil level ......................................... 11-9

Changing the oil and oil filter............................ 11-10

Recommended grade and viscosity .................. 11-12

Recommended grade and viscosity under severe

driving conditions .......................................... 11-13

Cooling system ................................................ 11-14

Hose and connections...................................... 11-14

Engine coolant ................................................. 11-14

Air cleaner elemen t .......................................... 11-17

Replacing the air cleaner element ..................... 11-18

Spark plugs ...................................................... 11-20

Recommended spark plugs .............................. 11-20

Drive belts ........................................................ 11-21

2.5-liter models ................................................ 11-21

3.0-liter models ................................................ 11-21

Manual transmission oil .................................. 11-21

Checking the oil level ....................................... 11-21

Recommended grade and viscosity .................. 11-22

Automatic transmission fluid.......................... 11-23

Checking the fluid level.................................... 11-23

Recommended fluid ......................................... 11-24

Front differential gear oil (AT models) ........... 11-24

Checking the oil level ...................................... 11-24

Recommended grade and viscosity .................. 11-25

Rear differential gear oil.................................. 11-25

Checking the gear oil level............................... 11-25

Recommended grade and viscosity .................. 11-27

Power steering fluid ........................................ 11-28

Checking the fluid level.................................... 11-28

Recommended fluid ......................................... 11-28

Brake fluid........................................................ 11-29

Checking the fluid level.................................... 11-29

Recommended brake fluid ............................... 11-29

Clutch fluid (MT models)................................. 11-30

Checking the fluid level.................................... 11-30

Recommended clutch fluid............................... 11-30

Brake booster .................................................. 11-31

Brake pedal ...................................................... 11-31

Checking the brake pedal free play .................. 11-31

Checking the brake pedal reserve distance....... 11-31

Clutch pedal (MT models) ............................... 11-32

Checking the clutch function............................ 11-32

Checking the clutch pedal free play.................. 11-32

Replacement of bra ke pad and lining ............ 11-32

Breaking-in of new brake pads and linings ....... 11-33

Parking brake strok e ....................................... 11-33

Tires and wheels.............................................. 11-34

Types of tires................................................... 11-34

Maintenance and service

Black plate (22,1)

北米Model "A2440BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 5/ 7

Maintenance and service

Tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS)

(if equipped)................................................... 11-34

Tire inspection ................................................. 11-36

Tire pressures and wear ................................... 11-36

Wheel balance.................................................. 11-38

Wear indicators................................................ 11-39

Tire rotation direction mark .............................. 11-39

Tire rotation ..................................................... 11-39

Tire replacement .............................................. 11-40

Wheel replacement........................................... 11-40

Aluminum wheels............................................. 11-41

Windshield washer fluid .................................. 11-41

Replacement of wiper blades.......................... 11-43

Windshield wiper blade assembly ..................... 11-43

Windshield wiper blade rubber ......................... 11-44

Rear window wiper blade assembly .................. 11-45

Rear window wiper blade rubber....................... 11-45

Battery. .............................................................. 11-47

Fuses ................................................................ 11-48

Main fuse.......................................................... 11-49

Installation of accessories .............................. 11-50

Replacing bulbs............................................... 11-51

Headlight......................................................... 11-52

Front turn signal light and parking light............ 11-54

Front fog light (if equipped).............................. 11-54

Rear combination lights ................................... 11-55

Back-up light (Station wagon) .......................... 11-57

License plate light ........................................... 11-57

Dome light....................................................... 11-58

Map light ......................................................... 11-59

Vanity mirror light............................................ 11-59

Door step light................................................. 11-59

Cargo area light (Station wagon) ...................... 11-60

Trunk light (Sedan) .......................................... 11-60

High mount stop light (Sedan).......................... 11-60

Black plate (357,1)

北米Model "A2440BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 5/ 7

Maintenance schedule

The scheduled maintenance items re-

quired to be serviced at regular intervals

are shown in the “Warranty and Main-

tenance Booklet”.

For details of your maintenance schedule,

read the separate “Warranty and Main-

tenance Booklet”.

Maintenance precautions

When maintenance and service are re-

quired, it is recommended that all work be

done by an authorized SUBARU dealer.

If you perform maintenance and service

by yourself, you should familiarize yourself

with the information provided in this

section on general maintenance and

service for your SUBARU.

Incorrect or incomplete service could

cause improper or unsafe vehicle opera-

tion. Any problems caused by improper

maintenance and service performed by

you are not eligible for warranty coverage.

WARNING

. Testing of an All-W heel Drive

vehicle must NEVER be per-

formed on a single two-wheel

dynamometer or similar appara-

tus. Attempting to do so will

result in transmission damage

and in uncontrolled vehicle

movement and may cause an

accident or injuries to persons

nearby.

. Always select a safe area when

performing maintenance on your

vehicle.

. Always be very careful to avoid

injury when working on the vehi-

cle. Remember that some of the

materials in the vehicle may be

hazardous if improperly used or

handled, for example, battery

acid.

. Your vehicle should only be ser-

viced by persons fully competent

to do so. Serious personal injury

may result to persons not experi-

enced in servicing vehicles.

. Always use the proper tools and

make certain that they are well

maintained.

. Never get under the vehicle sup-

ported only by a jack. Always use

a safety stands to support the

vehicle.

. Never keep the engine running in

a poorly ventilated area, such as

a garage or other closed areas.

. Do not smoke or all ow open

flames around the fuel or battery.

This will cause a fire.

. Because the fuel system is under

pressure, replacement of the fuel

filter should be performed only

by your SUBARU dealer.

. Wear adequate eye protection to

Maintenance and service 11-3

– CONTINUED –

Black plate (358,1)

北米Model "A2440BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 5/ 7

11-4 Maintenance and service

guard against getting oil or fluids

in your eyes. If something does

get in your eyes, thoroughly

wash them out with clean water.

. Do not tamper with the wiring of

the SRS airbag system or seat-

belt pretensioner system, or at-

tempt to take its connectors

apart, as that may activate the

system or it can render it inop-

erative. The wiring and connec-

tors of these systems are yellow

for easy identification. NEVER

use a circuit tester for these

wiring.

If your SRS airbag or seatbelt

pretensioner needs service, con-

sult your nearest SUBARU deal-

er.

& Before checking or servicing

in the engine compartment

WARNING

. Always stop the engine and set

the parking brake firmly to pre-

vent the vehicle from moving.

. Always let the engine cool down.

Engine parts become very hot

when the engine is running and

remain hot for some time after

the engine is stopped.

. Do not spill engine oil, engine

coolant, brake fluid or any other

fluid on hot engine components.

This may cause a fire.

. Always remove the key from the

ignition switch. When the ignition

switch is in the “ON” position,

thecoolingfanmayoperate

suddenly even when the engine

is stopped.

& When you do checking or

servicing in the engine com-

partment while the engine is

running

WARNING

A running engine can be dangerous.

Keep your fingers, hands, clothing,

hair and tools away from the cooling

fan, belts and any other moving

engine parts. Removing rings,

watches and ties is advisable.

Engine hood

To open the hood:

1. If the wiper blades are lifted off the

windshield, return them to their original

positions.

2. Pull the hood release knob under the

instrument panel.

Black plate (359,1)

北米Model "A2440BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 5/ 7

3. Release the secondary hood release

located under the front grille by moving the

lever toward the left.

4. Lift up the hood, release the hood prop

from its retainer and put the end of the

hood prop into the slot in the hood.

To close the hood:

1. Lift the hood slightly and remove the

hood prop from the slot in the hood and

return the prop to its retainer.

2. In the case of OUTBACK models,

lower the hood to a height of approxi-

mately 5.9 in (15 cm) above its closed

position and then let it drop.

In the case of the models except OUT-

BACK, lower the hood to a height of

approximately 12 in (30 cm) above its

closed position and then let it drop.

3. After closing the hood, be sure the

hood is securely locked.

If this does not close the hood, release it

from a slightly higher position. Do not push

the hood forcibly to close it. It could

deform the metal.

WARNING

Always ch eck that the hood is

properly locked before you start

driving. If it is not, it might fly open

while t he vehicle is moving and

block your view, which may cause

an accident and serious bodily in-

jury.

Maintenance and service 11-5

Black plate (360,1)

北米Model "A2440BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 5/ 7

11-6 Maintenance and service

Engine compartment overview

& 2.5-liter non-turbo models

1) Power steering fluid reservoir

(page 11-28)

2) Manual transmission oil level gauge (MT)

(page 11-21) or Differential gear oil level

gauge (AT) (page 11-24)

3) Clutch fluid reservoir (page 11-30)

4) Automatic transmission fluid level gauge

(page 11-23)

5) Brake fluid reservoir (page 11-29)

6) Fuse box (page 11-48)

7) Battery (page 11-47)

8) Windshield washer tank (page 11-41)

9) Engine oil filler cap (page 11-9)

10) Engine coolant reservoir (page 11-14)

11) Radiator cap (page 11-14)

12) Engine oil level gauge (page 11-9)

13) Air cleaner element (page 11-17)

Black plate (361,1)

北米Model "A2440BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 5/ 7

& 2.5-liter turbo models

1) Power steering fluid reservoir

(page 11-28)

2) Manual transmission oil level gauge (MT)

(page 11-21) or Differential gear oil level

gauge (AT) (page 11-24)

3) Clutch fluid reservoir (page 11-30)

4) Brake fluid reservoir (page 11-29)

5) Automatic transmission fluid level gauge

(page 11-23)

6) Fuse box (page 11-48)

7) Battery (page 11-47)

8) Windshield washer tank (page 11-41)

9) Engine oil filler cap (page 11-9)

10) Engine coolant reservoir (page 11-14)

11) Engine oil level gauge (page 11-9)

12) Radiator cap (page 11-14)

13) Air cleaner element (page 11-17)

Maintenance and service

11-7

– CONTINUED –

Black plate (362,1)

北米Model "A2440BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 5/ 7

11-8 Maintenance and service

& 3.0-liter models

1) Power steering fluid reservoir

(page 11-28)

2) Differential g ear oil level gauge (AT)

(page 11-24)

3) Automatic transmission fluid level gauge

(page 11-23)

4) Brake fluid reservoir (page 11-29)

5) Fuse box (page 11-48)

6) Battery (page 11-47)

7) Windshield washer tank (page 11-41)

8) Engine oil filler cap (page 11-9)

9) Engine coolant reservoir (page 11-14)

10) Radiator cap (page 11-14)

11) Engine oil level gauge (page 11-9)

12) Air cleaner element (page 11-17)

Black plate (363,1)

北米Model "A2440BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 5/ 7

Engine oil

NOTE

. The engine oil consumption rate is

not stabilized, and therefore cannot be

determined until the vehicle has tra-

veled at least several thousand miles

(kilometers). Even after break-in, when

the vehicle is used under severe driv-

ing conditions such as those men-

tionedintheWarrantyandMainte-

nance Booklet, engine oil is consumed

or deteriorated more quickly than un-

der normal driving conditions. If you

drive your vehicle under these severe

conditions, you should check the oil

level at least at every second fuel fill-up

time, and change the oil more fre-

quently. Please refer to the Warranty

and Maintenance Booklet for more de-

tails.

. If the oil consumption rate seems

abnormally high after t he break-in

period, for example more than 1 quart

per 1,200 miles or 1 liter per 2,000

kilometers, we recommend that you

contact your SUBARU dealer.

& Checking the oil level

Check the engine oil level at each fuel

stop.

1. Park the vehicle on a level surface and

stop the engine.

2. Pull out the dipstick, wipe it clean, and

insert it again.

3. Be sure the dipstick is correctly in-

serted until it stops with the graphic

symbol “

” on its top appearing as

shown in the illustration.

2.5-liter models

1) Notch

2) Upper level

3) Lower level

Maintenance and service

11-9

– CONTINUED –

Black plate (364,1)

北米Model "A2440BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 5/ 7

11-10 Maintenance and service

3.0-liter models

1) Upper level

2) Lower level

4. Pull out the dipstick again and check

the oil level on it. If it is below the lower

level, add oil to bring the level up to the

upper level.

CAUTION

. Use only engine oil with t he

recommended grade and vis-

cosity.

. Be careful not to spill engine oil

when adding it. If oil touches the

exhaust pipe, it may cause a bad

smell, smoke, and/or a fire. If

engine oil gets on the exhaust

pipe, be sure to wipe it off.

If you check the oil level just after stopping

the engine, wait a few minutes for the oil to

drain back into the oil pan before checking

the level.

To prevent overfilling the engine oil, do not

add any additional oil above the upper

level when the engine is cold.

In 2.5-liter-engine models, the dipstick has

a notch above the upper level.

Just after driving or while the engine is

warm, the engine oil level reading may be

in a range between the upper level and

the notch mark. This is caused by thermal

expansion of the engine oil.

& Changing the oil and oil filter

Change the oil and oil filter according to

the maintenance schedule in the “War-

ranty and Maintenance Booklet”.

The engine oil and oil f ilter must be

changed more frequently than listed in

the maintenance schedule when driving

on dusty roads, when short trips are

frequently ma de, or when driv ing in

extremely cold weather.

1. Warm up the engine by letting the

engine idle for approximately 10 minutes

to ease draining the engine oil.

2. Park the vehicle on a level surface and

stop the engine.

3. Remove the oil filler cap.

2.5-liter models

Black plate (365,1)

北米Model "A2440BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 5/ 7

3.0-liter models

4. Drain out the engine oil by removing

the drain plug while the engine is still

warm. The used oil should be drained into

an appropriate container and disposed of

properly.

WARNING

Be careful not to burn yourself with

hot engine oil.

5. Wipe the seating surface of the drain

plug with a clean cloth and tighten it

securely with a new sealing washer after

the oil has completely drained out.

2.5-liter models

3.0-liter models

6. Open the access cover by removing

the clips and turning the access cover

counterclockwise. The oil f ilter will be

exposed.

2.5-liter models

3.0-liter models

7. Remove the oil filter with an oil filter

wrench.

8. Before installing a new oil filter, apply a

thin coat of engine oil to the seal.

Maintenance and service 11-11

– CONTINUED –

Black plate (366,1)

北米Model "A2440BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 5/ 7

11-12 Maintenance and service

9. Clean the rubber seal seating area of

the bottom of engine and install the oil

filter by hand turning. Be careful not to

twist or damage the seal.

10. Tighten the oil filter by the amount

indicated in the following table after the

seal makes contact with the bottom of

engine.

Model

Oil filter

color

Part

number

Amount of

rotation

2.5-liter

models

Black

15208AA100 1 rotation

White 15208AA09A

2/3 – 3/4

rotation

3.0-liter

models

Black 15208AA031

3/4

rotation

CAUTION

. Never over tighten the oil filter

because that can result in an oil

leak.

. Thoroughly wipe off any engine

oil that has spilled over the

exhaust pipe and/or under-cover.

If left unremoved, the oil could

catch fire.

11. Reinstall the cover under the oil filter.

12. Pour engine oil through the filler neck.

Oil capacity (Guideline):

2.5-liter models: 4.2 US qt (4.0 liters, 3.5

Imp qt)

3.0-liter models: 5.8 US qt (5.5 liters, 4.8

Imp qt)

The oil quantity indicated above is only a

guideline. The necessary quantity of oil

depends on the quantity of oil that has

been drained. The quantity of drained oil

differs slightly depending on the tempera-

ture of the oil and the time the oil is left

flowing out. After refilling the engine with

oil, therefore, you must use the dipstick to

confirm that the level is correct.

13. Start the engine and make sure that no

oil leaks appear around the filter’s rubber

seal and drain plug.

14. Run the engine until it reaches the

normal operating temperature. Then stop

the engine and wait a few minutes to allow

the oil drain back. Check the oil level

again and if necessary, add more engine

oil.

& Recommended grade and

viscosity

CAUTION

Use only engine oil with the recom-

mended grade and viscosity.

Oil grade:

ILSAC GF-4, which can be identified with

the ILSAC certification mark (Starburst

mark)

or API classification SM with the words

“ENERGY CONSERVING”

These recommended oil grades can be

identified by looking for either or both of

the following marks displayed on the oil

container.

Black plate (367,1)

北米Model "A2440BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 5/ 7

ILSAC Certification Mark (Starburst Mark)

API Service label

1) Indicates the oil quality by API designa-

tions

2) Indicates the SAE oil viscosity grade

3) Indicates that the oil has fuel saving

capabilities

In choosing an oil, you want the proper

quality and viscosity, as well as one that

will add to fuel economy. The following

table lists the recommended viscosities

and applicable temperatures.

When adding oil, different brands may be

used together as long as they are the

same API classification and SAE viscosity

as those recommended by SUBARU.

SAE viscosity number and applicable

temperature

*: 5W-30 is preferred.

Engine oil viscosity (thickness) affects fuel

economy. Oils of lower viscosity provide

better fuel econo my. However, in hot

weather, oil of higher viscosity is required

to properly lubricate the engine.

& Recommended grade and

viscosity under severe driv-

ing conditions

If the vehicle is used in desert areas, in

areas with very high temperatures, or

used for heavy-duty applications such as

towing a trailer, use of oil with the following

grade and viscosities is recommended.

API classification SM:

SAE viscosity No.:

30, 40, 10W-50, 20W-40, 20W-50

Maintenance and service

11-13

Black plate (368,1)

北米Model "A2440BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 5/ 7

11-14 Maintenance and service

Cooling system

WARNING

Never attempt to remove the radia-

tor cap until the engine has been

shut off an d has cooled down

completely. Since the coolant is

under pressure, you may suffer

serious burns from a spray of boil-

ing hot coolant when the cap is

removed.

CAUTION

. The cooling system has been

filled at the factory with a high

quality, corrosion-inhibiting,

year-around coolant which pro-

vides protection against freezing

down to −338F(−368C). For add-

ing, use genuine SUBARU cool-

ant or an equivalent: a mixture of

50% soft water (or clear and

drinkable water) and 50% phos-

phate or non-amine type coolant.

Use of improper coolants may

result in corrosion in the cooling

system. It is important to main-

tain protection against freezing

and corrosion, even if freezing

temperatures are not expected.

Never mix different kinds of cool-

ant.

. Do not splash the engine coolant

over painted parts. The alcohol

contained in the engine coolant

may damage the paint surface.

& Hose and connections

Your vehicle employs an electric cooling

fan which is thermostatically controlled to

operate when the engine coolant reaches

a specific temperature.

If the radiator cooling fan does not operate

even when the engine coolant tempera-

ture gauge exceeds the normal operating

range, the cooling fan circuit may be

defective. Check the fuse and replace it

if necessary. If the fuse is not blown, have

the cooling system checked by your

SUBARU dealer.

If frequent addition of coolant is neces-

sary, there may be a leak in the engine

cooling system. It is recommended that

the cooling system and connections be

checked for leaks, damage, or looseness.

& Engine coolant

! Checking the coolant level

Check the coolant level at each fuel stop.

1. Check the coolant level on the outside

of the reservoir while the engine is cool.

2. If the level is close to or lower than the

“LOW” level mark, add coolant up to the

“FULL” level mark. If the reserve tank is

empty, remove the radiator cap and refill

as required.

Black plate (369,1)

北米Model "A2440BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 5/ 7

3. After refilling the reserve tank and the

radiator, reinstall the caps and check that

the rubber gaskets inside the radiator cap

are in the proper position.

CAUTION

. Be careful not to spill engine

coolant when adding it. If coolant

touches the exhaust pipe, it may

cause a bad smell, smoke, and/or

a fire. If engine coolant gets on

the exhaust pipe, be sure to wipe

it off.

. Do not splash the engine coolant

over painted parts. The alcohol

contained in the engine coolant

may damage the paint surface.

! Changing the coolant

Always add genuine Subaru cooling sys-

tem conditioner whenever the coolant is

replaced.

Change the engine coolant and add

genuine Subaru cooling system condi-

tioner using the following procedures

according to the maintenance schedule

in the “Warranty and Maintenance Book-

let”.

1. Remove the under cover.

2.5-liter models

1) Drain plug

3.0-liter models

1) Drain plug

Maintenance and service

11-15

– CONTINUED –

Black plate (370,1)

北米Model "A2440BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 5/ 7

11-16 Maintenance and service

2. Place a proper container under the

drain plug and loosen the drain plug.

3. Loosen the radiator cap to drain the

coolant from the radiator. Then drain the

coolant from the reserve tank. Tighten the

drain plug securely.

WARNING

Never attempt to remove the radia-

tor cap until the engine has been

shut off an d has cooled down

completely. Since the coolant is

under pressure, you may suffer

serious burns from a spray of boil-

ing hot coolant when the cap is

removed.

4. Install the under cover.

Non-turbo models

1) Fill up to here

Turbo models

1) Fill up to here

5. Slowly pour the coolant and fill up to

just below the filler neck, allowing enough

room to add genuine Subaru cooling

system conditioner in the radiator. Add

genuine Subaru cooling system condi-

tioner until the coolant level reaches the

filler neck. Do not pour the coolant too

quickly, as this may lead to insufficient air

bleeding and trapped air in the system.

Coolant capacity (Guideline):

2.5-liter non-turbo models:

MT. 6.8 US qt (6.4 liters, 5.6 Imp qt)

AT. 6.7 US qt (6.3 liters, 5.5 Imp qt)

2.5-liter turbo models:

MT. 7.7 US qt (7.3 liters, 6.4 Imp qt)

AT. 7.6 US qt (7.2 liters, 6.3 Imp qt)

3.0-liter models:

7.6 US qt (7.2 liters, 6.3 Imp qt)

CAUTION

. Be careful not to spill engine

coolant when adding it. If coolant

touches the exhaust pipe, it may

cause a bad smell, smoke, and/or

a fire. If engine coolant gets on

the exhaust pipe, be sure to wipe

it off.

. Do not splash the engine coolant

over painted parts. The alcohol

contained in the engine coolant

Black plate (371,1)

北米Model "A2440BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 5/ 7

may damage the paint surface.

6. Pour the coolant and fill to the reser-

voir tank’s “FULL” level mark.

7. Put the radiator cap back on and

tighten firmly. At this time, make sure that

the rubber gasket in the radiator cap is

correctly in place.

8. Start and run the engine for more than

five minutes at 2,000 to 3,000 rpm.

9. Stop the engine and wait until the

coolant cools down (122 to 1408F [50 to

608C]). If there is any loss of coolant, add

coolant to the radiator’s filler neck and to

the reserve tank’s “FULL” level.

10. Put the radiator cap and reservoir cap

back on and tighten firmly.

Air cleaner element

WARNING

Do not operate the engine with the

air cleaner element removed. The air

cleaner element not only filters

intake air but also stops flames if

the engine backfires. If the air

cleaner element is not installed

when the engine backfires, you

could be burned.

CAUTION

When replacing the air cleaner ele-

ment, use a genuine SUBARU air

cleaner element. If it is not used,

there is the possibility of causing a

negative effect to the engine.

The air cleaner element functions as a

filter screen. When the element is perfo-

rated or removed, engine wear will be

excessive and engine life shortened.

The air cleaner element is a dry type. It is

unnecessary to clean or wash the ele-

ment.

Maintenance and service 11-17

– CONTINUED –

Black plate (372,1)

北米Model "A2440BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 5/ 7

11-18 Maintenance and service

& Replacing the air cleaner

element

Replace the air cleaner element according

to the maintenance schedule in the

“Warranty and Maintenance Booklet”. Un-

der extremely dusty conditions, replace it

more frequently. It is recommended that

you always use genuine SUBARU parts.

! Non-turbo models

1) Connector

2) Duct

3) Clamp

1. Unplug the connector that is attached

to the top of the air cleaner case.

2. Remove the hose that is located at the

bottom of the side surface of the air

cleaner case.

3. Undo the screw and pull the air duct

out of the air cleaner case.

4. Unsnap the two clamps holding the air

cleaner case cover.

5. Open the air cleaner case cover and

remove the air cleaner element.

6. Clean the inside of the air cleaner

cover and case with a damp cloth and

install a new air cleaner element.

7. To install the air cleaner case cover,

insert the three projections on the air

cleaner case cover into the slits on the

air cleaner case and then snap the two

clamps on the air cleaner case cover.

Black plate (373,1)

北米Model "A2440BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 5/ 7

! Turbo models

1. Use a screwdriver to undo the clips on

the air intake duct, then remove the air

intake duct.

2. Unplug the connector that is attached

to the top of the air cleaner case.

3. Use a screwdriver to remove the duct

that is connected to the air cleaner case

cover.

4. Unsnap the two clamps holding the air

cleaner case cover.

At the same time, pull the hose from the

clamp that runs next to the case cover.

5. Open the air cleaner case cover and

remove the air cleaner element.

6. Clean the inside of the air cleaner

cover and case with a damp cloth and

install a new air cleaner element.

Maintenance and service 11-19

– CONTINUED –

Black plate (374,1)

北米Model "A2440BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 5/ 7

11-20 Maintenance and service

7. To install the air cleaner case cover,

insert the three projections on the air

cleaner case cover into the slits on the

air cleaner case and then snap the two

clamps on the air cleaner case cover.

Spark plugs

CAUTION

. When disconnecting the spark

plug cables, always grasp the

spark plug cap, not the cables.

. Make sure the cables are re-

placed in the correct order.

It may be difficult to replace the spark

plugs. It is recommended that you have

the spark plugs replaced by your

SUBARU dealer.

The spark plugs should be replaced

according to the maintenance schedule

in the “Warranty and Maintenance Book-

let”.

& Recommended spark plugs

2.5-liter non-turbo models:

FR5AP-11 (NGK)

2.5-liter turbo models:

SILFR6A (NGK)

3.0-liter models:

ILFR6B (NGK)

Black plate (375,1)

北米Model "A2440BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 5/ 7

Drive belts

The alternator, power steering pump, and

air conditioner co mpressor depend on

drive belts. Satisfactory performance re-

quires that belt tension be correct.

& 2.5-liter models

1) Power steering pump pulley

2) Air conditioner compressor pulley

3) Crank pulley

in (mm)

Deflection

New belt

Used belt

0.28 – 0.35

(7.0 – 9.0)

0.35 – 0.43

(9.0 – 11.0)

0.30 – 0.33

(7.5 – 8.5)

0.35 – 0.40

(9.0 – 10.0)

To check belt tension, place a straight-

edge (ruler) across two adjacent pulleys

and apply a force of 22 lbs (98 N, 10 kg)

midway between the pulleys by using a

spring scale. Belt deflection should be the

amount specified.

& 3.0-liter models

It is unnecessary to check belt tension

periodically because your engine is

equipped with an automatic belt tension

adjuster. However, replacement of the belt

should be done according to the main-

tenance schedule in the "Warranty and

Maintenance Booklet". Consult your

SUBARU dealer for replacement.

If a belt is loose, cracked, or worn, contact

your SUBARU dealer.

Manual transmission oil

& Checking the oil level

5-speed transmission (Non-turbo models)

1) Yellow handle

Maintenance and service

11-21

– CONTINUED –

Black plate (376,1)

北米Model "A2440BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 5/ 7

11-22 Maintenance and service

5-speed transmission (Turbo models)

6-speed transmission

1. Park the vehicle on a level surface and

stop the engine.

2. Pull out the dipstick, wipe it clean, and

insert it again.

1) Upper level

2) Lower level

3. Pull out the dipstick again and check

the oil level on it. If it is below the lower

level, add oil through the dipstick hole to

bring the level up to the upper level.

CAUTION

Be careful not to spill manual trans-

mission oil when adding it. If oil

touches the exhaust pipe, it may

cause a bad smell, smoke, and/or a

fire. If oil gets on the exhaust pipe,

be sure to wipe it off.

& Recommended grade and

viscosity

Each oil manufacturer has its own base

oils and additives. Never use different

brands together.

Oil grade:

API classification GL-5

SAE viscosity No. and applicable tempera-

ture

Black plate (377,1)

北米Model "A2440BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 5/ 7

Automatic transmission fluid

& Checking the fluid level

The automatic transmission fluid expands

largely as its temperature rises; the fluid

level differs according to fluid temperature.

Therefore, there are two different scales

for checking the level of hot fluid and cold

fluid on the dipstick.

Though the fluid level can be checked

without warming up the fluid on the

“COLD” range, we recommend checking

the fluid level when the fluid is at operating

temperature.

! Checking the fluid level when the

fluid is hot

Check the fluid level monthly.

1. Drive the vehicle several miles to raise

the temperature of the transmission fluid

up to normal operating temperature; 158

to 1768F (70 to 808C) is normal.

2. Park the vehicle on a level surface and

set the parking brake.

3. First shift the selector lever in each

position. Then shift it in the “P” position,

and run the engine at idling speed.

4-speed automatic transmission

1) Yellow handle

5-speed automatic transmission

1) Yellow handle

1) HOT range

2) COLD range

3) Upper level

4) Lower level

4. Pull out the dipstick and check the fluid

level on the gauge. If it is below the lower

level on the “HOT” range, add the recom-

mended automatic transmission fluid up to

the upper level.

! Checking the fluid level when the

fluid is cold

When the fluid level has to be checked

without time to warm up the automatic

transmission, check to see that the fluid

level is between the lower level and upper

level on the “COLD” range. If it is below

that range, add fluid up to the upper level.

Be careful not to overfill.

Maintenance and service 11-23

– CONTINUED –

Black plate (378,1)

北米Model "A2440BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 5/ 7

11-24 Maintenance and service

CAUTION

Be careful not to spill automatic

transmission fluid when adding it.

If automatic transmission fluid

touches the exhaust pipe, it may

cause a bad smell, smoke, and/or a

fire. If automatic transmission fluid

gets on the exhaust pipe, be sure to

wipe it off.

& Recommended fluid

Use one of the following types of auto-

matic transmission fluid.

Genuine Subaru Automatic Transmis-

sion Fluid Type-HP

IDEMITSU ATF HP

Castrol Transmax J

NOTE

For 5-speed automatic transmission:

Using any non-specified type of auto-

matic transmission fluid could result in

damage inside the transmission. When

replacing the automatic transmission

fluid, be sure to use the kind specified.

For 4-speed automatic transmission:

For optimum transmission perfor-

mance, only use the automatic trans-

mission fluid that is recommended and

provided by Subaru.

If the recommended automatic trans-

mission fluid is unavailable, Dexron III

may be temporarily used. If the Dexron

III is used continuously there will be a

noticeable increase in the vibration and

noise from the automatic transmission.

Front differential gear oil (AT

models)

& Checking the oil level

1) Yellow handle

1. Park the vehicle on a level surface and

stop the engine.

2. Pull out the dipstick, wipe it clean, and

insert it again.

Black plate (379,1)

北米Model "A2440BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 5/ 7

1) Upper level

2) Lower level

3. Pull out the dipstick again and check

the oil level on it. If it is below the lower

level, add oil to bring the level up to the

upper level.

CAUTION

Be careful not to spill front differ-

ential gear oil when adding it. If oil

touches the exhaust pipe, it may

cause a bad smell, smoke, and/or a

fire. If oil gets on the exhaust pipe,

be sure to wipe it off.

& Recommended grade and

viscosity

Each oil manufacturer has its own base

oils and additives. Never use different

brands together.

Oil grade:

API classification GL-5

SAE viscosity No. and applicable tempera-

ture

Rear differential gear oil

& Checking the gear oil level

Your vehicle may be equipped with a rear

differential protector. The differential pro-

tector provides protection to the rear

differential assembly during off-road use.

Removal of the rear differential protector is

not required when checking the oil level.

Maintenance and service 11-25

– CONTINUED –

Black plate (380,1)

北米Model "A2440BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 5/ 7

11-26 Maintenance and service

2.5-liter non-turbo models (AT) (Without

Vehicle Dynamics Control system)

1) Filler plug

2) Drain plug

3) Oil level

2.5-liter turbo and 3.0-liter models (AT)

1) Filler plug

2) Drain plug

3) Oil level

2.5-liter turbo 6MT models

1) Filler plug

2) Drain plug

3) Oil level

Black plate (381,1)

北米Model "A2440BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 5/ 7

Others

1) Filler plug

2) Drain plug

3) Oil level

Remove the plug from the filler hole and

check the oil level. The oil level should be

kept even with the bottom of the filler hole.

If the oil level is below the bottom edge of

the hole, add oil through the filler hole to

raise the level.

CAUTION

. Be careful not to spill rear differ-

ential gear oil when adding it. If

rear differential gear oil touches

the exhaust pipe, it may cause a

bad smell, smoke, and/or a fire. If

rear differential gear oil gets on

the exhaust pipe, be sure to wipe

it off.

. If the vehicle requires frequent

refilling, there may be an oil leak.

If you suspect a problem, have

the vehicle checked at your

SUBARU dealer.

& Recommended grade and

viscosity

Each oil manufacturer has its own base

oils and additives. Never use different

brands together.

Oil grade:

API classification GL-5

SAE viscosity No. and applicable tempera-

ture

Maintenance and service

11-27

Black plate (382,1)

北米Model "A2440BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 5/ 7

11-28 Maintenance and service

Power steering fluid

& Checking the fluid level

WARNING

Be careful not to burn yoursel f

because the fluid may be hot.

CAUTION

. Whe n po wer steering flu id is

being added, use only clean fluid,

and be careful not to allow any

dirt into the tank. And never use

different brands together.

. Avoid spilling fluid when adding

it in the tank.

. Be careful not to spill power

steering fluid when adding it. If

power steering fluid touches the

exhaust pipe, it may cause a bad

smell, smoke, and/or a fire. If

power steering fluid gets on the

exhaust pipe, be sure to wipe it

off.

The power steering fluid expands greatly

as its temperature rises; the fluid level

differs according to fluid temperature.

Therefore, the reservoir tank has two

different checking ranges for hot and cold

fluids.

Check the power steering f luid level

monthly.

1. Park the vehicle on a level surface,

and stop the engine.

2. Check the fluid level of the reservoir

tank.

When the fluid is hot after the vehicle has

been run: Check that th e oil level is

between “HOT MIN” and “HOT MAX” on

the surface of the reservoir tank.

When the fluid is cool before the vehicle is

run: Check that the oil level is between

“COLD MIN” and “COLD MAX” on the

surface of the reservoir tank.

3. If the fluid level is lower than the

applicable “MIN” line, add the recom-

mended fluid as necessary to bring the

level between the “MIN” and “MAX” line.

If the fluid level is extreme low, it may

indicate possible leakage. Consult your

SUBARU dealer for inspection.

& Recommended fluid

Use one of the following types of auto-

matic transmission fluid.

Genuine Subaru Automatic Transmis-

sion Fluid Type-HP

“Dexron III” Type Automatic Transmis-

sion Fluid

Black plate (383,1)

北米Model "A2440BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 5/ 7

Brake fluid

& Checking the fluid level

WARNING

. Never let brake fluid contact your

eyes because brake fluid can be

harmful to your eyes. If brake

fluid gets in your eyes, immedi-

ately flush them thoroughly with

clean water. For safety, when

performing this work, wearing

eye protection is advisable.

. Brake flui d absor bs moisture

from the air. Any absorbed moist-

ure can cause a dangerous loss

of braking performance.

. If the vehicle requires frequent

refilling, there may be a leak. If

you suspect a problem, have the

vehicle checked at your SUBARU

dealer.

CAUTION

. Never use dif ferent b rands of

brake fluid together. Also, avoid

mixing DOT 3 and DOT 4 brake

fluids even if they are of the same

brand.

. When adding brake fluid, be care-

ful not to allow any dirt into the

reservoir.

. Never splash the brake fluid over

painted surfaces or rubber parts.

Alcohol contained in the brake

fluid may damage them.

. Be careful not to spill brake fluid

when adding it. If brake fluid

touches the exhaust pipe, it may

cause a bad smell, smoke, and/or

a fire. If brake fluid gets on the

exhaust pipe, be sure to wipe it

off.

Check the fluid level monthly.

Check the fluid level on the outside of the

reservoir. If the level is below “MIN”, add

the recommended brake fluid to “MAX”.

Use o nly bra ke fluid from a sealed

container.

& Recommended brake fluid

FMVSS No. 116, fresh DOT 3 or 4 brake

fluid

Maintenance and service

11-29

Black plate (384,1)

北米Model "A2440BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 5/ 7

11-30 Maintenance and service

Clutch fluid (MT models)

& Checking the fluid level

WARNING

Never let clutch fluid contact your

eyes because clutch fluid can be

harmful to your eyes. If clutch fluid

gets in your eyes, immediately flush

them thoroughly with clean water.

For safety, whe n performing this

work, wearing eye protection is

advisable.

CAUTION

. Clutch fluid absorbs moisture

from the air. Any absorbed moist-

ure can cause improper clutch

operation.

. If the vehicle requires frequent

refilling, there may be a leak. If

you suspect a problem, have the

vehicle checked at your SUBARU

dealer.

. Never use dif ferent b rands of

clutch fluid together.

. When clutch fluid is added, be

careful not to allow any dirt into

the tank.

. Never splash the clutch fluid over

painted surfaces or rubber parts.

Alcohol contained in the clutch

fluid may damage them.

. Be careful not to spill clutch fluid

when adding it. If clutch flui d

touches the exhaust pipe, it may

cause a bad smell, smoke, and/or

a fire. If clutch fluid gets on the

exhaust pipe, be sure to wipe it

off.

Check the fluid level on the outside of the

reservoir. If the level is below “MIN” level

mark, add the recommended clutch fluid

to “MAX” level mark.

Use only clutch fluid from a sealed

container.

& Recommended clutch fluid

FMVSS No. 116, fresh DOT 3 or 4 brake

fluid

CAUTION

Avoid mixing D OT 3 and DOT 4

brake fluids even if they are of the

same brand.

Black plate (385,1)

北米Model "A2440BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 5/ 7

Brake booster

If the brake booster does not operate as

described in the following, have it checked

by your SUBARU dealer.

1. With the engine off, depress the brake

pedal several times, applying the same

pedal force each time. The distance the

pedal travels should not vary.

2. With the brake pedal depressed, start

the engine. The pedal should move

slightly down to the floor.

3. With the brake pedal depressed, stop

the engine and keep the pedal depressed

for 30 seconds. The pedal height should

not change.

4. Start the engine again and run for

approximately one minute then turn it off.

Depress the brake pedal several times to

check the brake booster. The brake

booster operates properly if the pedal

stroke decreases with each depression.

Brake pedal

Check the brake pedal free pl ay and

reserve distance according to the main-

tenance schedule in the “Warranty and

Maintenance Booklet”.

& Checking the brake pedal

free play

1) 0.02 – 0.08 in (0.5 – 2.0 mm)

Stop the engine and firmly depress the

brake pedal several times. Lightly pull the

brake pedal up with one finger to check

the free play with a force of less than 2 lbs

(10 N, 1 kg).

If the fre e play is not within proper

specification, contact your SUBARU deal-

er.

& Checking the brake pedal

reserve distance

1) More than 2.56 in (65 mm)

Depress the pedal with a force of approxi-

mately 66 lbs (294 N, 30 kg) and measure

the distance between the upper surface of

the pedal pad and the floor.

When the measurement is smaller than

the specification, or when the pedal does

not operate smoothly, contact with your

SUBARU dealer.

Maintenance and service 11-31

Black plate (386,1)

北米Model "A2440BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 5/ 7

11-32 Maintenance and service

Clutch pedal (MT models)

Check the clutch pedal free play and

reserve distance according to the main-

tenance schedule in the “Warranty and

Maintenance Booklet”.

& Checking the clutch function

Check the clutch engagement and disen-

gagement.

1. With the engine idling, check that there

are no abnormal noises when the clutch

pedal is depressed, and that shifting into

1st or reverse feels smooth.

2. Start the vehicle by releasing the pedal

slowly to check that the engine and

transmission smoothly couple without

any sign of slippage.

& Checking the clutch pedal

free play

1) 0.02 – 0.08 in (0.5 – 2.0 mm)

Lightly press the clutch pedal down with

your finger until you feel resistance, and

check the free play.

If the fre e play is not within proper

specification, contact your SUBARU deal-

er.

Replacement of brake pad

and lining

CAUTION

If you continue to drive despite the

scraping noise from the aud ible

brake pad wea r indica tor, it will

result in the need for costly brake

rotor repair or replacement.

The right front disc brake and the right rear

disc brake have audible wear indicators

on the brake pads. If the brake pads wear

close to the ir service limit, the wear

indicator makes a very audible scraping

noise when the brake pedal is applied.

If you hear this scraping noise each time

Black plate (387,1)

北米Model "A2440BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 5/ 7

you apply the brake pedal, have the brake

pads serviced by your SUBARU dealer as

soon as possible.

& Breaking-in of new brake

pads and linings

When replacing the brake pad or lining,

use only genuine SUBARU parts. After

replacement, the new parts must be

broken in as follows:

! Brake pad and lining

While maintaining a speed of 30 to 40

mph (50 to 65 km/h), step on the brake

pedal lightly. Repeat this five or more

times.

! Parking brake lining

WARNING

A safe location and situation should

be selected for break-in driving.

CAUTION

Pulling the parking brake lever too

forcefully may cause the rear

wheels to lock. To avoid this, be

certain to pull the lever up slowly

and gently.

1. Drive the vehicle at a speed of

approximately 22 mph (35 km/h).

2. With the parking brake release button

pushed in, pull the parking brake lever

SLOWLY and GENTLY. (Pulling with a

force of approximately 33 lbs [147 N, 15

kg].)

3. Drive the vehicle for approximately

220 yards (200 meters) in this condition.

4. Wait 5 to 10 minutes for the parking

brake to cool down. Repeat this proce-

dure.

5. Check the parking brake stroke. If the

parking brake stroke is out of the specified

range, adjust it by turning the adjusting nut

located on the parking brake lever.

Parking brake stroke:

5 – 6 notches / 44 lbs (196 N, 20 kg)

Parking brake stroke

Check the parking brake stroke according

to the maintenance schedule in the

“Warranty and Maintenanc e Booklet ”.

When the parking brake is properly

adjusted, braking power is fully applied

by pulling the lever up five to six notches

gently but firmly (approximately 44 lbs,

196 N, 20 kg). If the parking brake lever

stroke is not within the specified range,

have the brake system checked and

adjusted at your SUBARU dealer.

Maintenance and service 11-33

Black plate (388,1)

北米Model "A2440BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 5/ 7

11-34 Maintenance and service

Tires and wheels

& Types of tires

You should be familiar with type of tires

present on your vehicle.

! All season tires

The factory-installed tires on your new

vehicle except 2.5GT spec.B a re all

season tires.

All season tires are designed to provide

an adequate measure of traction, handling

and braking performance in year-round

driving including snowy and icy road

conditions. However all season tires do

not offer as much traction performance as

winter (snow) tires in heavy or loose snow

or on icy roads.

All season tires are identified by “ALL

SEASON” and/or “M+S” (Mud & Snow) on

the tire sidewall.

! Summer tires

The factory-installed tires on your new

2.5GT spec.B vehicle are summer tires.

Summer tires are high-speed capability

tires best suited for highway driving under

dry conditions.

Summer tires are inadequate for driving

on slippery roads such as on snow-

covered or icy roads.

If you drive your vehicle on snow-covered

or icy roads, we strongly recommend the

use of winter (snow) tires.

When installing winter tires, be sure to

replace all four tires.

! Winter (snow) tires

Winter tires are best suited for driving on

snow-covered and icy roads. However

winter tires do not perform as well as

summer tires and all season tires on roads

other than snow-covered and icy roads.

& Tire pressure monitoring

system (TPMS) (if equipped)

The tire pressure monitoring system pro-

vides the driver with a warning message

by sending a signal from a sensor that is

installed in each wheel when tire pressure

is severely low. The tire pressure monitor-

ing system will activate only when the

vehicle is driven. Also, this system may

not react immediately to a sudden drop in

tire pressure (for example, a blow-out

caused by running over a sharp object).

If you adjust the tire pressures in a warm

garage and will then drive the vehicle in

cold outside air, the resulting drop in tire

pressures may cause the low tire pressure

warning light to come on. To avoid this

problem when adjusting the tire pressures

in a warm garage, inflate the tires to

pressures higher than those shown on the

tire placard. Specifically, inflate them by an

extra 1 psi (6.9 kPa, 0.07 kgf/cm

) for

every difference of 108F (5.68C) between

the temperature in the garage and the

temperature outside. By way of example,

the following table shows the required tire

pressures that correspond to various out-

side temperatures when the temperature

in the garage is 608F (15.68C).

Example:

Tire size: P225/55R17 95V, P225/60R16

97H

Standard tire pressures:

Front: 32 psi (220 kPa, 2.2 kgf/cm

)

Rear: 30 psi (210 kPa, 2.1 kgf/cm

)

Garage temperature: 608F (15.68C)

Outside

temperature

Adjusted pressure

[psi (kPa, kgf/cm

)]

front

rear

308F(−18C)

35 (240, 2.4) 33 (230, 2.3)

108F(−128C)

(255, 2.55)

(240, 2.4)

−108F

(−238C)

39 (270, 2.7) 37 (255, 2.55)

Example:

Tire size: 215/45R17 91W

Standard tire pressures:

Front: 35 psi (240 kPa, 2.4 kgf/cm

)

Rear: 33 psi (230 kPa, 2.3 kgf/cm

)

Black plate (389,1)

北米Model "A2440BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 5/ 7

Garage temperature: 608F (15.68C)

Outside

temperature

Adjusted pressure

[psi (kPa, kgf/cm

)]

front

rear

308F(−18C)

38 (265, 2.65) 36 (250, 2.5)

108F(−128C)

(280, 2.8)

(265, 2.65)

−108F

(−238C)

42 (295, 2.95) 40 (280, 2.8)

Example:

Tire size: 215/45R18 89Y, P215/45R18

89W, P205/50R17 88V

Standard tire pressures:

Front: 33 psi (230 kPa, 2.3 kgf/cm

)

Rear: 32 psi (220 kPa, 2.2 kgf/cm

)

Garage temperature: 608F (15.68C)

Outside

temperature

Adjusted pressure

[psi (kPa, kgf/cm

)]

front

rear

308F(−18C)

36 (250, 2.5) 35 (240, 2.4)

108F(−128C)

(265, 2.65)

(255, 2.55)

−108F

(−238C)

40 (280, 2.8) 39 (270, 2.7)

If the low tire pressure warning light

comes on when you drive the vehicle in

cold outside air after adjusting the tire

pressures in a warm garage, re-adjust the

tire pressures using the method described

above. Then, increase the vehicle speed

to at least 20 mph (32 km/h) and check to

see that the low tire pressure warning light

goes off a few minutes later. If the low tire

pressure warning light does not go off, the

tire pressure monitoring system may not

be functioning normally. In this event, go

to a SUBARU dealer to have the system

inspected as soon as possible.

While the vehicle is driven, friction be-

tween tires and the road surface causes

the tires to warm up. After illumination of

the low tire pressure warning light, any

increase in the tire pressures caused by

an increase in the outside air temperature

or by an increase in the temperature in the

tires can cause the low tire pressure

warning light to go off.

System resetting is necessary when the

wheels are changed (for example, a

switch to snow tires) and new TPMS

valves are installed on the newly fitted

wheels. Have this work performed by a

SUBARU dealer following wheel replace-

ment.

It may not be possible to install TPMS

valves on certain wheels that are on the

market. Therefore, if you change the

wheels (for example, a switch to snow

tires), use wheels that have the same part

number as the standard-equipment

wheels. Without four operational TPMS

valve/sensors on the wheels, the TPMS

will not fully function and the warning light

in the instrument panel will illuminate

steadily after blinking for approximately

one minute.

When a tire is replaced, adjustments are

necessary to ensure continued normal

operation of the tire pressure monitoring

system. As with wheel replacement, there-

fore, you should have the work performed

by a SUBARU dealer.

WARNING

If the low tire pressure warning light

does not come on briefly after the

ignition switch is turned ON or the

light illuminates steadily after blink-

ing for approximately one minute,

you should have your Tire Pressure

Monitoring System checked at a

SUBARU dealer as soon as possi-

ble.

If this light comes on while driving,

never brake suddenly and k eep

driving straight ahead while gradu-

ally reducing speed. Then slowly

pull off the road to a safe place.

Otherwise an accident involving

Maintenance and service 11-35

– CONTINUED –

Black plate (390,1)

北米Model "A2440BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 5/ 7

11-36 Maintenance and service

serious vehicle damage and serious

personal injury could occur.

If this light still comes on while

driving after adjusting the tire pres-

sure, a tire may have signif icant

damage and a fast leak that causes

the tire to lose air rapidly. If you have

a flat tire, replace it with a spare tire

as soon as possible.

When a spare tire is mounted or a

wheel rim is replaced without the

original pressure sensor/transmitter

being transferred, the low tire pres-

sure warning light will illuminate

steadily after blinking for approxi-

mately one minute. This indicates

the TPMS is unable to monitor all

four road wheels. Contact your

SUBARU dealer as soon as possible

for tire and sensor replacement and/

or system resetting. If the light

illuminates steadily after blinking

for approximately one minute,

promptly contact a SUBARU dealer

to have the system inspected.

& Tire inspection

Check on a daily basis that the tires are

free from serious damage, nail s, and

stones. At the same time, check the tires

for abnormal wear.

Contact your SUBARU dealer immedi-

ately if you find any problem.

NOTE

. When the wheels and tires strike

curbs or are subjected to harsh treat-

ment as when the vehicle is driven on a

rough surface, they can suffer damage

that cannot be seen with the naked eye.

This type of damage does not become

evident until time has passed. Try not

to drive over curbs, potholes or on

other rough surfaces. If doing so is

unavoidable, keep the vehicle’s speed

down to a walking pace or less, and

approach th e curbs as squarely as

possible. Also, make sure the tires are

not pressed against the curb when you

park the vehicle.

. If you feel unusual vibration while

driving or find it difficult to steer the

vehicle in a straight line, one of the

tires and/or wheels may be damaged.

Drive slowly to the nearest authorized

SUBARU dealer and have the vehicle

inspected.

& Tire pressures and wear

Maintaining the correct tire pressures

helps to maximize the tires’ service lives

and is essential for good running perfor-

mance. Check and, if necessary, adjust

the pressure of each tire (including the

spare) at least once a month (for example,

during a fuel stop) and before any long

journey.

Check the tire pressures when the tires

are cold. Use a pressure gauge to adjust

the tire pressures to the values shown on

the tire placard. The tire placard is located

on the door pillar on the driver’s side.

Driving even a short distance warms up

the tires and increases the tire pressures.

Also, the tire pressures are affected by the

outside temperature. It is best to check tire

pressure outdoors before driving the

vehicle.

When a tire becomes warm, the air inside

it expands, causing the tire pressure to

Black plate (391,1)

北米Model "A2440BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 5/ 7

increase. Be careful not to mistakenly

release air from a warm tire to reduce its

pressure.

NOTE

. The air pressure in a tire increases

by approximately 4.3 psi (30 kPa, 0.3

kgf/cm

) when the tire becomes warm.

. The tires are considered cold when

the vehicle has been parked for at least

three hours or has been driven less

than one mile (1.6 km).

WARNING

Do not let air out of warm tires to

adjust pressure. Doing so will result

in low tire pressure.

Incorrect tire pressures detract from con-

trollability and ride comfort, and they

cause the tires to wear abnormally.

. Correct tire pressure (tread wor n

evenly)

Roadholding is good, and steerin g is

responsive. Rolling resistance is low, so

fuel consumption is also lower.

Maintenance and service 11-37

– CONTINUED –

Black plate (392,1)

北米Model "A2440BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 5/ 7

11-38 Maintenance and service

. Abnormally low tire pressure (tread

worn at shoulders)

Rolling resistance is high, so fuel con-

sumption is also higher.

. Abnormally high tire pressure (tread

worn in center)

Ride comfort is poor. Also, the tire

magnifies the effects of road-surface

bumps and dips, possibly re sulting in

vehicle damage.

WARNING

Driving at high speeds with exces-

sively low tire pressures can cause

the tires to deform severely and to

rapidly become hot. A sharp in-

crease in temperature could cause

tread separation, and destruction of

the tires. The resulting loss of

vehicle control could lead to an

accident.

& Wheel balance

Each wheel was correctly balanced when

your vehicle was new, but the wheels will

become unbalanced as the tires become

worn during use. Wheel imbalance causes

the steering wheel to vibrate slightly at

certain vehicle speeds and detracts from

the vehicle’s straight-line stability. It can

also cause steering and suspension sys-

tem problems and abnormal tire wear. If

you suspect that the wheels are not

correctly balanced, have them checked

and adjusted by your SUBARU dealer.

Also have them adjusted after tire repairs

and after tire rotation.

NOTE

Loss of correct wheel alignment*

causes the tires to wear on one side

and reduces the vehicle’s running

stability. Contact your SUBARU dealer

if you notice abnormal tire wear.

*: The suspension system is designed to hold

each wheel at a certain alignment (relative to

the other wheels and to the road) for optimum

straight-line stability and cornering perfor-

mance.

Black plate (393,1)

北米Model "A2440BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 5/ 7

& Wear indicators

1) New tread

2) Worn tread

3) Tread wear indicator

Each tire incorporates a tread wear

indicator, which becomes vis ible when

the depth of the tread grooves decreases

to 0.063 in (1.6 mm). A tire must be

replaced when the tread wear indicator

appears as a solid band across the tread.

WARNING

When a tire’s tread wear indicator

becomes visible, the tire is worn

beyond the acceptable limit and

must be replaced immediately. With

a tire in this condition, driving at

high speeds in wet weather can

cause the vehicle to hydroplane.

The resulting loss of vehicle control

can lead to an accident.

NOTE

For safety, inspect the tire tread reg-

ularly and replace the tires before their

tread wear indicators become visible.

& Tire rotation direction mark

Example of tire rotation direction mark

1) Front

If the tire has a rotation direction specifica-

tion, the tire rotation direction mark is

placed on its sidewall.

When you install a tire that has the tire

rotation direction mark, install the tire with

the direction mark facing forward.

& Tire rotation

Vehicles equipped with 4 non-unidirec-

tional tires

1) Front

Maintenance and service

11-39

– CONTINUED –

Black plate (394,1)

北米Model "A2440BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 5/ 7

11-40 Maintenance and service

Vehicles equipped with unidirectional tires

1) Front

Tire wear varies from wheel to wheel. To

maximize the life of each tire and ensure

that the tires wear uniformly, it is best to

rotate the tires every 7,500 miles (12,000

km). Move the tires to the positions shown

in the applicable illustration each time they

are rotated.

Replace any damaged or unevenly worn

tire at the time of r otation . After tire

rotation, adjust the tire pressures and

make sure the wheel nuts are correctly

tightened.

After driving approximately 600 miles

(1,000 km), check the wheel nuts again

and retighten any nut that has become

loose.

& Tire replacement

The wheels and tires are important and

integral parts of your vehicle’s design;

they cannot be changed arbitrarily. The

tires fitted as standa rd equipment are

optimally matched to the characteristics

of the vehicle and were selected to give

the best possible combination of running

performance, ride comfort, and service

life. It is essential for every tire to have a

size and construction matching those

shown on the tire placard and to have a

speed symbol and load index matching

those shown on the tire placard.

Using tires of a non-specified size detracts

from controllability, ride comfort, braking

performance, speedometer accuracy and

odometer accuracy. It also creates incor-

rect body-to-tire clearances and inappro-

priately changes the vehicle’s ground

clearance.

All four tires must be the same in terms of

manufacturer, brand (tread pattern), con-

struction, and size. You are advised to

replace the tires with new ones that are

identical to those fitted as standard equip-

ment.

For safe vehi cle operation, SUBARU

recommends replacing all four tires at

the same time.

WARNING

. All four tires must be the same in

terms of manufacturer, brand

(tread pattern), construction, de-

gree of wear, speed symbol, load

index and size. Mixing tires of

different types, sizes or degrees

of wear can result in damage to

the vehicle’s power train. Use of

different types or sizes of tires

can als o dangero usly reduc e

controllability and braking per-

formance and can lead to an

accident.

. Use only radial tires. Do not use

radial tires together with belted

bias tires and/or bias-ply tires.

Doing so can dan gerously re-

duce controllability, resulting in

an accident.

& Wheel replacement

When replacing wheels due, for example,

to damage, make sure the replacement

wheels match the specifications of the

wheels that are fitted as standard equip-

ment. Replacement wheels are available

from SUBARU dealers.

Black plate (395,1)

北米Model "A2440BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 5/ 7

WARNING

Use only those w heels that a re

specified for your vehicle. Wheels

not meeting specifications could

interfere with brake caliper opera-

tion and may cause the tires to rub

against the wheel well housing dur-

ing turns. The resulting loss of

vehicle control could lead to an

accident.

Aluminum wheels

Aluminum wheels can be scratched and

damaged easily. Handle them carefully to

maintain their appearance, performance,

and safety.

. When any of the wheels is removed

and replaced for tire rotation or to change

a flat, always check the tightness of the

wheel nuts after driving approximately 600

miles (1,000 km). If any nut is loose,

tighten it to the specified torque.

. Never apply oil to the threaded parts,

wheel nuts, or tapered surface of the

wheel.

. Never let the wheel rub against sharp

protrusions or curbs.

. Be sure to fit tire chains on uniformly

and completely around the tire, otherwise

the chains may scratch the wheel.

. When wheel nuts, balance weights, or

the center cap is replaced, be sure to

replace them with genuine SUBARU parts

designed for aluminum wheels.

Windshield washer fluid

CAUTION

Never use engine coolant as washer

fluid because it could cause paint

damage.

If you spray washer fluid on the windshield

but the supply of washer fluid appears to

diminish, check the level of washer fluid in

the tank.

Maintenance and service 11-41

– CONTINUED –

Black plate (396,1)

北米Model "A2440BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 5/ 7

11-42 Maintenance and service

Washer fluid level gauge

Remove the washer tank filler cap, then

check the fluid level indicated by the level

gauge (attached to the inside of the cap).

If the level is near the “Low” mark, add

fluid until it reaches the “Hi” level on the

level gauge or the “Full” mark on the tank.

Use windshield washer fluid. If windshield

washer fluid is unavailable use clean

water.

In areas where water freezes in winter,

use an anti-freeze type windshield washer

fluid. SUBARU Windshield Washer Fluid

contains 58.5% methyl alcohol and 41.5%

surfactant, by volume. Its freezing tem-

perature varies according to how much it

is diluted, as indicated in the following

table.

Washer Fluid

Concentration

Freezing

Temperature

30%

10.48F(−128C)

50% −48F(−208C)

100% −498F(−458C)

In order to prevent freezing of washer

fluid, check the freezing temperatures in

the table above when adjusting the fluid

concentration to the outside temperature.

If you fill the reservoir tank with a fluid with

a different concentration from the one

used previously, purge the old fluid from

the piping between the reservoir tank and

washer nozzles by operating the washer

for a certain period of time. Otherwise, if

the concentration of the fluid remaining in

the piping is to o low for the outside

temperature, it may freeze and block the

nozzles.

CAUTION

Adjust the washer fluid concentra-

tion appropriately for the outside

temperature. If the concentration is

inappropriate, sprayed washer fluid

may freeze on the windshield and

obstruct your view, and the fluid

may freeze in the reservoir tank.

Black plate (397,1)

北米Model "A2440BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 5/ 7

Replacement of wiper blades

Grease, wax, insects, or other materials

on the windshield or the wiper blade

results in jerky wiper operation and streak-

ing on the glass. If you cannot remove the

streaks after operating the windshield

washer or if the wiper operation is jerky,

clean the outer surface of the windshield

(or rear window) and the wiper blades

using a sponge or soft cloth with a neutral

detergent or mild-abrasive cleaner. After

cleaning, rinse the windshield and wiper

blades with clean water. The windshield is

clean if beads do not form when you rinse

the windshield with water.

CAUTION

. Do not clean the wiper blades

with gasoline or a solvent, such

as paint thinner or benzine. This

will cause d eterioration of th e

wiper blades.

. Whenyouwishtoraisethe

passenger-side wiper arm, first

raise the driver-side wiper arm.

Otherwise, the passenger-side

wiper assembly and driver-side

wiper assembly will touch each

other, possibly resulting in

scratches.

. Return the passenger-side wiper

arm to its original position before

returning the driver-side wiper

arm to its ori ginal position.

Otherwise, the passenger-side

wiper assembly and driver-side

wiper assembly will touch each

other, possibly resulting in

scratches.

If you cannot eliminate the streaking even

after following this method, replace the

wiper blades using the following proce-

dures:

& Windshield wiper blade as-

sembly

1. Raise the windshield wiper arm on the

driver’s side.

2. Next, raise the windshield wiper arm

on the passenger’s side.

1) Stopper

3. Remove the wiper blade assembly by

holding its pivot area and pushing it in the

direction shown by the arrow while de-

pressing the wiper blade stopper.

4. Install the wiper blade assembly to the

wiper arm. Make sure that it locks in place.

5. Lower the windshield wiper arm on the

passenger’s side slowly while supporting

it by hand.

6. Next, lower the windshield wiper arm

on the driver’s side slowly while support-

ing it by hand.

Maintenance and service 11-43

– CONTINUED –

Black plate (398,1)

北米Model "A2440BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 5/ 7

11-44 Maintenance and service

& Windshield wiper blade rub-

ber

1) Metal support

1. Grasp the locked end of the blade

rubber assembly and pull it firmly until the

stoppers on the rubber are free of the

metal support.

1) Metal spines

2. If the new blade rubber is not provided

with two metal spines, remove the metal

spines from the old blade rubber and

install them in the new blade rubber.

3. Align the claws of the metal support

with the grooves in the rubber and slide

the blade rubber assembly into the metal

support until it locks.

1) Stopper

4. Be sure to position the claws at the

end of the metal support between the

stoppers on the rubber as shown. If the

rubber is not retained properly, the wiper

blade may scratch the windshield.

Black plate (399,1)

北米Model "A2440BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 5/ 7

& Rear window wiper blade

assembly

1. Raise the wiper arm off the rear

window.

2. Turn the wiper blade assembly coun-

terclockwise.

3. Pull the wiper blade assembly toward

you to remove it from the wiper arm.

& Rear window wiper blade

rubber

1. Pull out the end of the blade rubber

assembly to unlock it from the plastic

support.

Maintenance and service 11-45

– CONTINUED –

Black plate (400,1)

北米Model "A2440BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 5/ 7

11-46 Maintenance and service

2. Pull the blade rubber assembly out of

the plastic support.

1) Metal spines

3. If the new blade rubber is not provided

with two metal spines, remove the metal

spines from the old blade rubber and

install them in the new blade rubber.

4. Align the claws of the plastic support

with the grooves in the blade rubber

assembly, then slide the blade rubber

assembly into place.

Securely retain both ends of the rubber

with the stoppers on the plastic support

ends. If the rubber is not retained properly,

the wiper may scratch the rear window

glass.

5. Install the wiper blade assembly to the

wiper arm. Make sure that it locks in place.

6. Hold the wiper arm by hand and slowly

lower it in position.

Black plate (401,1)

北米Model "A2440BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 5/ 7

Battery

WARNING

. Before beginning work on or near

any battery, be sure to extinguish

all cigarettes, matches, and light-

ers. Never expose a battery to an

open flame or electric sparks.

Batteries give off a gas which is

highly flammable and explosive.

. For safety, in case an explosion

does occur, wear eye protection

or shield your eyes when work-

ing near any battery. Never lean

over a battery.

. Do not let battery fluid contact

eyes, skin, fabrics, or paint be-

cause battery fluid is a corrosive

acid. If battery fluid gets on your

skin or in your eyes, immediately

flush the area with water thor-

oughly. Seek medical help imme-

diately if acid has entered the

eyes.

If battery fluid is accidentally

swallowed, immediately drink a

large amount of milk or water,

and seek medical attention im-

mediately.

. To lessen the risk of sparks,

remove rings, metal watchbands,

and other metal jewelry. Never

allow metal tools to contact the

positive battery terminal and any-

thing connected to it WHILE you

are at the same time in contact

with any other metallic portion of

the vehicle because a short cir-

cuit will result.

. Keep everyone including children

away from the battery.

. Charge the battery in a well-

ventilated area.

. Battery posts, terminals, and re-

lated accessories contain lead

and lead compounds, chemicals

known to the State of California

to cause cancer and reproductive

harm. Batteries also contain

other chemicals known to the

State of California to cause can-

cer. Wash hands after handling.

CAUTION

Never use more than 10 amperes

when charging the battery because

it will shorten battery life.

It is unnecessary to periodically check the

battery fluid level or periodically refill with

distilled water.

Maintenance and service 11-47

Black plate (402,1)

北米Model "A2440BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 5/ 7

11-48 Maintenance and service

Fuses

CAUTION

Never replace a fuse with one hav-

ing a higher rating or with material

other than a fuse because serious

damage or a fire could result.

The fuses are designed to melt during an

overload to prevent damage to the wiring

harness and electrical equipment. The

fuses are located in two fuse boxes. One

is located under the instrument panel

behind the fuse box cover on the driver ’s

seat side.

Open the lid that is located above the

hood release knob and pull it toward you

to remove it.

The other one is housed in the engine

compartment.

The spare fuses are stored in the main

fuse box cover in the engine compart-

ment.

The fuse puller is stored in the main fuse

box in the engine compartment.

Black plate (403,1)

北米Model "A2440BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 5/ 7

1) Good

2) Blown

If any lights, accessories or other electrical

controls do not operate, inspect the

corresponding fuse. If a fuse has blown,

replace it.

1. Turn the ignition switch to the “LOCK”

position and turn off all electrical acces-

sories.

2. Remove the cover.

3. Determine which fuse may be blown.

The back side of each fuse box cover and

the “Fuses and circuits” section in chapter

12 in this manual show the circuit for each

fuse.

4. Pull out the fuse with the fuse puller.

5. Inspect the fuse . If it has blown,

replace it with a spare fuse of the same

rating.

6. If the same fuse blows again, this

indicates that its system has a problem.

Contact your SUBARU dealer for repairs.

Main fuse

Main fuse box

The main fuses are desig ned to melt

during an overload to prevent damage to

the wiring harness and electrical equip-

ment. Check the main fuses if any

electrical component fails to operate (ex-

cept the starter motor) and other fuses are

good. A melted main fuse must be

replaced. Use only replacements with the

same specified rating as the melted main

fuse. If a main fuse blows after it is

replaced, have the electrical system

checked by your nearest SUBARU dealer.

Maintenance and service 11-49

Black plate (404,1)

北米Model "A2440BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 5/ 7

11-50 Maintenance and service

Installation of accessories

Always consult your SUBARU dealer

before installing fog lights or any other

electrical equipment in your vehicle. Such

accessories may cause the electronic

system to malfunction if they are incor-

rectly installed or if they are not suited for

the vehicle.

Black plate (405,1)

北米Model "A2440BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 5/ 7

Replacing bulbs

Maintenance and service 11-51

– CONTINUED –

Black plate (406,1)

北米Model "A2440BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 5/ 7

11-52 Maintenance and service

Wattage Bulb No.

1) High beam headlight 12V-60W 9005 (HB3)

Low beam headlight 12V-55W H7

Front turn signal/Parking and front side marker light 12V-27/8W 3457A

Map light 12V-8W –

Dome light 12V-8W –

Door step light 12V-3W –

Vanity mirror light 12V-3W –

8) Front fog light

Except OUTBACK

12V-55W H3

OUTBACK

12V-51W 9006 (HB4)

Trunk room light (Sedan) 12V-5W (W5W)

10)

High mount stop light (Sedan) 12V-21W (W21W)

11)

Rear turn signal light (Sedan) 12V-21W (WY21W)

12)

Back-up light (Sedan) 12V-16W 921

13)

Brake/tail and rear side marker light (Sedan) 12V-21/5W (W21/5W)

14)

Cargo area light (Station wagon) 12V-13W –

15)

Brake/tail light (Station wagon) 12V-21/5W (W21/5W)

16)

Rear side marker light (Station wagon) 12V-5W 168

17)

Rear turn signal light (Station wagon) 12V-21W (WY21W)

18)

Back-up light (Station wagon) 12V-16W 921

19)

Licence plate light 12V-5W

168 (W5W)

CAUTION

Replace any bulb only with a new

bulb of the specified wattage. Using

a bulb of different wattage could

result in a fire.

& Headlight

CAUTION

Halogen headlight bulbs become

very hot while in use. If you touch

the bulb surface with bare hands or

greasy gloves, finger prints or

grease on the bulb surface develop

into hot spots, causing the bulb to

break. If there are finger prints or

grease on the bulb surface, wipe

them away with a soft cloth mois-

tened with alcohol.

NOTE

. If headlight aiming is required, con-

sult your SUBARU dealer for proper

adjustment of the headlight aim.

. It may be difficult to replace the

bulbs. Have the bulbs replaced by your

SUBARU dealer if necessary.

Black plate (407,1)

北米Model "A2440BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 5/ 7

! Low beam light bulbs

Right-hand side

1. Use a screwdriver to undo the clips on

the air intake duct, then remove the air

intake duct. (right-hand side)

Left-hand side

2. Use a screwdriver to remove the

secured clip of the washer tank. To make

it easy to access the bulb, move the

washer tank to the horizontal direction.

(left-hand side)

3. Remove the bulb cover, by turning it

counterclockwise.

4. Disconnect the electrical connector.

5. Remove the retainer spring.

6. Replace the bulb, then set the retainer

spring securely.

7. Reconnect the electrical connector.

8. Install the bulb cover.

9. Install the air intake duct with clips.

(right-hand side)

10. Set the washer tank to the original

place and secure it by clip. (left-hand side)

Maintenance and service 11-53

– CONTINUED –

Black plate (408,1)

北米Model "A2440BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 5/ 7

11-54 Maintenance and service

! High beam light bulbs

Right-hand side

1. Use a screwdriver to undo the clips on

the air intake duct, then remove the air

intake duct. (right-hand side)

Left-hand side

2. Use a screwdriver to remove the

secured clip of the washer tank. To make

it easy to access the bulb, move the

washer tank to the horizontal direction.

(left-hand side)

3. Disconnect the electrical connector

from the bulb.

4. Remove the bulb from the headlight

assembly by turning it counterclockwise.

5. Replace the bulb with new one. At this

time , use care not to touch the bulb

surface.

6. Reconnect the electrical connector.

7. To install the bulb to the headlight

assembly, turn it clockwise until it clicks.

8. Install the air intake duct with clips.

(right-hand side)

9. Set the washer tank to the original

place and secure it by clip. (left-hand side)

& Front turn signal light and

parking light

It may be difficult to replace the bulbs.

Have the bulbs replaced by your SUBARU

dealer if necessary.

& Front fog light (if equipped)

It may be difficult to replace the bulbs.

Have the bulbs replaced by your SUBARU

dealer if necessary.

Black plate (409,1)

北米Model "A2440BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 5/ 7

& Rear combination lights

! Sedan

1. Push the knobs of the cover to open

the cover.

1) Rear turn signal light

2) Back-up light

3) Brake/tail and rear side marker light

2. Remove the bulb holder from the rear

combination light assembly by turning it

counterclockwise.

3. Pull the bulb out of the bulb holder and

replace it with a new one.

4. Set the b ulb holder into th e rear

combination light assembly and turn it

clockwise until it locks.

5. Securely lock the cover against the

trunk trim.

! Station wagon

1. Using a Phillips screwdriver, remove

the upper and lower screws.

Maintenance and service 11-55

– CONTINUED –

Black plate (410,1)

北米Model "A2440BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 5/ 7

11-56 Maintenance and service

2. Wrap tape around a flat-head screw-

driver, then insert the screwdriver into the

gap between the side cover and rear

combination lamp and use it as a lever

to undo clip 1 in the illustration shown.

Undo clips 2 and 3 in the same way, then

remove the side cover.

3. Remove the upper and lower screws.

Then, straightly slide the rear combination

lamp assembly rearward and remove it

from the vehicle.

1) Brake/tail light

2) Rear turn signal light

3) Rear side marker light

4. Remove the bulb holder from the rear

combination light assembly by turning it

counterclockwise.

5. Pull the bulb out of the bulb holder and

replace it with a new one.

6. Set the bulb holder into the rear

combination light assembly and turn it

clockwise until it locks.

7. Insert the harness into the holder.

Black plate (411,1)

北米Model "A2440BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 5/ 7

8. Reinstall the rear combination light

assembly by sliding the two-pronged part

of the combination light assembly securely

to each holder of the vehicle side.

9. Tighten the upper and lower screws.

10. Reinstall the side cover.

& Back-up light (Station wagon)

1. Apply a flat-head screwdriver to the

corner of the light cover as shown in the

illustration, and pry the light cover off from

the rear gate trim.

2. Turn the bulb socket counterclockwise

and remove it.

3. Pull the bulb out of the bulb socket and

replace it with a new one.

4. Install the bulb socket by turning it

clockwise. Install the light cover on the

rear gate.

& License plate light

! Sedan

It may be difficult to replace the bulbs.

Have the bulbs replaced by your SUBARU

dealer if necessary.

Maintenance and service 11-57

– CONTINUED –

Black plate (412,1)

北米Model "A2440BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 5/ 7

11-58 Maintenance and service

! Station wagon

1. Remove the mounting screws using a

Phillips screwdriver.

2. Remove the lens.

3. Pull the bulb out of the socket. Install a

new bulb.

4. Reinstall the lens.

5. Tighten the mounting screws.

& Dome light

1. Remove the lens by prying the edge of

the lens with a flat-head screwdriver.

2. Turn the bulb until the flat surfaces at

its ends are aligned vertically. Pull the bulb

straight downward to remove it. Install a

new bulb.

3. Reinstall the lens.

Black plate (413,1)

北米Model "A2440BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 5/ 7

& Map light

1. Remove the lens by prying the edge of

the lens with a flat-head screwdriver.

2. Turn the bulb until the flat surfaces at

its ends are aligned vertically. Pull the bulb

straight downward to remove it.

3. Install a new bulb.

4. Reinstall the lens.

& Vanity mirror light

1. Remove the lens by prying the edge of

the lens with a flat-head screwdriver.

2. Pull the bulb out of the socket. Install a

new bulb.

3. Reinstall the lens.

& Door step light

Maintenance and service 11-59

– CONTINUED –

Black plate (414,1)

北米Model "A2440BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 5/ 7

11-60 Maintenance and service

1. Remove the lens by prying the edge of

the lens with a flat-head screwdriver.

2. Pull the bulb out of the socket. Install a

new bulb.

3. Reinstall the lens.

& Cargo area light (Station wa-

gon)

1. Remove the lens by prying the edge of

the lens with a flat-head screwdriver.

2. Pull the bulb out of the socket. Install a

new bulb.

3. Reinstall the lens.

& Trunk light (Sedan)

1. Push both sides of the light cover, and

then remove the cover by pulling it out.

2. Pull the bulb out of the socket. Install a

new bulb.

3. Reinstall the cover.

& High mount stop light (Se-

dan)

It may be difficult to replace the bulbs.

Have the bulbs replaced by your SUBARU

dealer if necessary.

Black plate (23,1)

北米Model "A2440BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 5/ 7

Specifications ..................................................... 12-2

Dimensions........................................................ 12-2

Engine ............................................................... 12-3

Electrical system................................................ 12-3

Capacities.......................................................... 12-4

Tires .................................................................. 12-5

Wheel alignment ................................................ 12-5

Fuses and circuits ............................................. 12-6

Fuse panel located in the passenger

compartment ................................................... 12-6

Fuse panel located in the engine

compartment ................................................... 12-8

Bulb chart........................................................... 12-9

Vehicle identification ....................................... 12-11

Specifications

Black plate (418,1)

北米Model "A2440BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 5/ 7

12-2 Specifications

Specifications

These specifications are subject to change without notice.

& Dimensions

in (mm)

Item

Legacy OUTBACK

Sedan

Station wagon

Sedan Station wagon

Non-

turbo

Turbo

2.5-liter 2.5-liter 3.0-liter

2.5-liter

3.0-liter

Except

2.5GT

spec.B

2.5GT

spec.B

Non-

turbo

Turbo

Overall length

185.0 (4,700) 188.4 (4,785) 185.0 (4,700) 189.0 (4,800)

Overall width

68.1 (1,730) 68.1 (1,730) 69.7 (1,770) 69.7 (1,770)

Overall height

56.1

(1,425)

56.5

(1,435)

58.1 (1,475) 56.5 (1,435) 63.2 (1,605)

Wheel base

105.1 (2,670) 105.1 (2,670) 105.1 (2,670) 105.1 (2,670)

Tread Front

58.9 (1,495) 58.9 (1,495) 58.9 (1,495) 58.9 (1,495)

Rear

58.5 (1,485) 58.5 (1,485) 58.5 (1,485) 58.7 (1,490)

Ground clearance 5.9

(150)

6.3

(160)

5.9

(150)

6.1

(155)

6.3 (160)

8.5

(215)

8.7

(220)

8.5 (215)

Black plate (419,1)

北米Model "A2440BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 5/ 7

& Engine

Engine model

EJ253

(2.5-liter, SOHC, non-turbo)

EJ255

(2.5-liter, DOHC, turbo)

EZ30D

(3.0-liter, DOHC, non-turbo)

Engine type

Horizontally opposed, liquid cooled 4 cylinder,

4 stroke gasoline engine

Horizontally opposed, liquid cooled 6 cylinder,

4 stroke gasoline engine

Displacement cu-in (cc) 150 (2,457) 183 (3,000)

Bore 6 Stroke in (mm) 3.92 6 3.11 (99.5 6 79.0) 3.51 6 3.15 (89.2 6 80.0)

Compression ratio 10.0 : 1 8.4 : 1 10.7 : 1

Firing order 1 – 3 – 2 – 4

1 – 6 – 3 – 2 – 5 – 4

& Electrical system

Battery type and capacity

(5HR)

2.5-liter models

MT 55D23L (12V-48AH)

AT 75D23L (12V-52AH)

3.0-liter models 75D23L (12V-52AH)

Alternator 12V-110A

Spark plugs

2.5-liter non-turbo models FR5AP-11 (NGK)

2.5-liter turbo models

SILFR6A (NGK)

3.0-liter models

ILFR6B (NGK)

Specifications

12-3

– CONTINUED –

Black plate (420,1)

北米Model "A2440BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 5/ 7

12-4 Specifications

& Capacities

Fuel tank 16.9 US gal (64 liters, 14.1 Imp gal)

Engine oil

2.5-liter models 4.2 US qt (4.0 liters, 3.5 Imp qt)

3.0-liter models 5.8 US qt (5.5 liters, 4.8 Imp qt)

Transmission oil (MT)

5-speeds 3.7 US qt (3.5 liters, 3.1 Imp qt)

6-speeds 4.3 US qt (4.1 liters, 3.6 Imp qt)

Transmission fluid (AT)

2.5-liter non-turbo models 9.8 US qt (9.3 liters, 8.2 Imp qt)

2.5-liter turbo and 3.0-liter models 10.4 US qt (9.8 liters, 8.6 Imp qt)

AT differential gear oil

2.5-liter non-turbo models 1.3 US qt (1.2 liters, 1.1 Imp qt)

2.5-liter turbo and 3.0-liter models 1.5 US qt (1.4 liters, 1.2 Imp qt)

Rear differential gear oil

Turbo 6-speeds MT models 1.1 US qt (1.0 liter, 0.9 Imp qt)

Other models 0.8 US qt (0.8 liter, 0.7 Imp qt)

Power steering fluid 0.7 US qt (0.7 liter, 0.6 Imp qt)

Engine coolant 2.5-liter non-turbo models

MT 6.8 US qt (6.4 liters, 5.6 Imp qt)

AT 6.7 US qt (6.3 liters, 5.5 Imp qt)

2.5-liter turbo models

MT 7.7 US qt (7.3 liters, 6.4 Imp qt)

AT 7.6 US qt (7.2 liters, 6.3 Imp qt)

3.0-liter models

7.6 US qt (7.2 liters, 6.3 Imp qt)

Black plate (421,1)

北米Model "A2440BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 5/ 7

& Tires

Tire size

P205/55R16

89H

P225/60R16

97H

P205/50R17

88V

215/45R17

91W

P225/55R17

95V

215/45R18

89Y

P215/45R18

89W

Wheel size 16 6 6.5JJ 17 6 7JJ 186 7JJ

Pressure Front

32 psi

(220 kPa,

2.2 kgf/cm

)

32 psi

(220 kPa,

2.2 kgf/cm

)

33 psi

(230 kPa,

2.3 kgf/cm

)

35 psi

(240 kPa,

2.4 kgf/cm

)

32 psi

(220 kPa,

2.2 kgf/cm

)

33 psi

(230 kPa,

2.3 kgf/cm

)

Rear

30 psi

(210 kPa,

2.1 kgf/cm

)

30 psi

(210 kPa,

2.1 kgf/cm

)

32 psi

(220 kPa,

2.2 kgf/cm

)

33 psi

(230 kPa,

2.3 kgf/cm

)

30 psi

(210 kPa,

2.1 kgf/cm

)

32 psi

(220 kPa,

2.2 kgf/cm

)

Rear at

trailer tow-

ing

– 32 psi

(220 kPa,

2.2 kgf/cm

)

– 32 psi

(220 kPa,

2.2 kgf/cm

)

–

Temporary

spare tire

Size T135/80R16 T155/70D17 T135/80R16 T135/70D17 T155/70D17 T155/70D17

Pressure

60 psi (420 kPa, 4.2 kgf/cm

)

& Wheel alignment

Item

Legacy OUTBACK

Sedan Station wagon Station wagon

Toe Front

0 in (0 mm)

Rear 0 in (0 mm)

Camber

Front −0815’ 0840’

Rear −0840’ −0830’

−0810’

Specifications

12-5

Black plate (422,1)

北米Model "A2440BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 5/ 7

12-6 Specifications

Fuses and circuits

& Fuse panel located in the passenger compartment

Fuse

panel

Fuse

rating

Circuit

1 20A

. Cargo fan

. Trailer hitch connector

2 Empty

3 15A

. Door locking

4 15A

. Front wiper deicer relay

. Moonroof

5 15A

. Combination meter

6 7.5A

. Remote control rear

view mirrors

. Seat heater relay

. Vanity mirror light

7 15A

. Combination meter

. Integrated unit

8 20A

. Stop light

9 20A

. Mirror heater

. Front wiper deicer

10 7.5A

. Power supply (Battery)

11 7.5A

. Turn signal unit

. Clock

12 15A

. Automatic transmission

unit

. Engine control unit

. Integrated unit

Black plate (423,1)

北米Model "A2440BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 5/ 7

Fuse

panel

Fuse

rating

Circuit

13 20A

. Cargo socket

14 15A

. Position light

. Tail light

. Rear combination light

15 Empty

16 10A

. Illumination

17 15A

. Seat heaters

18 10A

. Back-up light

19 7.5A

. Headlight right side re-

lay

20 10A

. Cigarette lighter socket

21 7.5A

. Starter relay

22 15A

. Air conditioner

. Rear window defogger

relay coil

23 15A

. Rear wiper

. Rear window washer

24 15A

. Audio unit

. Clock

25 15A

. SRS airbag system

26 7.5A

. Power window relay

27 15A

. Blower fan

Fuse

panel

Fuse

rating

Circuit

28 15A

. Blower fan

29 15A

. Fog light

30 30A

. Front wiper

. Front wiper washer

31 7.5A

. Auto air conditioner unit

. Integrated unit

32 7.5A

. Headlight left side relay

33 7.5A

. ABS/Vehicle dynamics

control unit

Specifications

12-7

– CONTINUED –

Black plate (424,1)

北米Model "A2440BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 5/ 7

12-8 Specifications

& Fuse panel located in the engine compartment

A) FWD socket (AT models – except Turbo models and 3.0-liter models)

B) Main fuse

Fuse

panel

Fuse

rating

Circuit

1 30A

. ABS unit

. Vehicle dynamics control

unit

2 25A

. Main fan (3.0-liter models)

3 10A

. Secondary air combina-

tion valve (Turbo models)

4 25A

. Sub fan (Except 3.0-liter

models)

25A

. Main fan

20A

. Audio

15A

. Headlight (right side)

8 15A

. Headlight (left side)

9 20A

. Back-up light

10 15A

. Horn

11 25A

. Rear window defogger

12 15A

. Fuel pump

13 15A

. Automatic transmission

control unit

14 7.5A

. Engine control unit

15 15A

. Turn and hazard warning

flasher

16 20A

. Parking switch

17 7.5A

. Alternator

Black plate (425,1)

北米Model "A2440BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 5/ 7

Bulb chart

Description Wattage Bulb No.

Headlight

Low beam 12V-55W H7

High beam 12V-60W 9005 (HB3)

Front fog light

Except OUTBACK 12V-55W H3

OUTBACK 12V-51W 9006 (HB4)

Front turn signal/Parking and

front side marker light

12V-27/8W 3457A

Rear combination light

Rear turn signal light (Se-

dan)

12V-21W (WY21W)

Brake/tail and rear side

marker (Sedan)

12V-21/5W (W21/5W)

Brake/tail (Station wagon) 12V-21/5W (W21/5W)

Rear side marker (Station

wagon)

12V-5W 168

Rear turn signal light (Station

wagon)

12V-21W (WY21W)

Back-up light 12V-16W 921

High mount stop light (Sedan)

12V-21W (W21W)

License plate light

12V-5W 168 (W5W)

Specifications

12-9

– CONTINUED –

Black plate (426,1)

北米Model "A2440BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 5/ 7

12-10 Specifications

Description Wattage Bulb No.

Trunk room light

12V-5W W5W

Cargo area light 12V-13W –

Dome light 12V-8W –

Map light 12V-8W –

Vanity mirror light 12V-3W –

Door step light 12V-3W –

Black plate (427,1)

北米Model "A2440BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 5/ 7

Vehicle identification

1) Emission control label

2) Vehicle identification number

3) Certification and bar code label

4) Tire inflation pressure label

5) Vehicle identification number plate

6) Model number label

7) Fuel label

Specifications

12-11

Black plate (25,1)

北米Model "A2440BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 5/ 7

For U.S.A. ........................................................... 13-2

Tire information.................................................. 13-2

Tire labeling ....................................................... 13-2

Recommended tire inflation pressure.................. 13-5

Glossary of tire terminology ............................... 13-6

Tire care – maintenance and safety practices...... 13-7

Vehicle load limit – how to determine.................. 13-8

Determining compatibility of tire and vehicle load

capacities ...................................................... 13-11

Adverse safety consequences of overloading on

handling and stopping and on tires ................ 13-11

Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit......... 13-11

Uniform tire quality grading standards .......... 13-12

Treadwear ....................................................... 13-12

Traction AA, A, B, C......................................... 13-12

Temperature A, B, C......................................... 13-13

Reporting safety defects (U.S.A.) ................... 13-13

Consumer information and Reporting safety defects

Black plate (430,1)

北米Model "A2440BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 5/ 7

13-2 Consumer information and Reporting safety defects

For U.S.A.

The following information has been

compiled according to Code of

Federal Regulations “Title 49, Part

575”.

Tire information

& Tire labeling

Many markings (e.g. Tire size, Tire

Identification Number or TIN) are

placed on the sidewall of a tire by

tire manufacturers. These marking

can provide you with useful infor-

mation on the tire.

! Tire size

Your vehicle comes equipped with

P-Metric tire size. It is important to

understand the sizing system in

selecting the proper tire for your

vehicles. Here is a brief review of

the tire sizing system with a break-

down of its individual elements.

! P Metric

With the P-Metric system, Section

Width is measured in millimeters.

To convert millimeters into inches,

divide by 25.4. The Aspect Ratio

(Section Height divided by Section

Width) helps provide more dimen-

sional information about the tire

size.

Example:

(1) P = Certain tire type used on

light duty vehicles such as passen-

ger cars

(2) Section Width in millimeters

(3) Aspect Ratio (= section height

7 section width).

(4) R = Radial Construction

(5) Rim diameter in inches

(6) ZR = Speed category above

149 mph (240 km/h)

! Load and Speed Rating Descrip-

tions

The load and speed rating descrip-

tions will appear following the size

designation.

They provide two important facts

about the tire. First, the number

designation is its load index. Sec-

ond, the letter designation indicates

Black plate (431,1)

北米Model "A2440BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 5/ 7

the tire’s speed rating.

Example:

(6) Load Index: A numerical code

which specifies the maximum load

a tire can carry at the speed

indicated by its speed symbol, at

maximum inflation pressure.

For example, “88” means 1,234 lbs

(560 kg), “87” means 1,201 lbs (545

kg), “86” means 1,168 lbs (530 kg)

WARNING

Load indices apply only to the

tire, not to the vehicle. Putting

a load rated tire on any vehicle

does not mean the vehicle can

be loaded up to the tire’s rated

load.

(7) Speed Rating: An alphabetical

system describing a tire’s capability

to travel at established and prede-

termined speeds.

For example, “V” means 149 mph

(240 km/h)

WARNING

. Speed ratings apply only to

the tire, not to the vehicle.

Putting a speed rated tire on

any vehicle does not mean

the vehicle can be operated

at the tire’s rated speed.

. The speed rating is void if

the tires are worn out, da-

maged, repaired, retreaded,

or othe rwise altered from

their original condition. If

tires are repaired, re-

treaded, or otherwise al-

tered, they may not be sui-

table for original equipment

tire designed loads and

speeds.

! Tire Identification Number (TIN)

Tire Identification Number (TIN) is

marked on the intended outboard

sidewall. The TIN is composed of

four groups. Here is a brief review

of the TIN with a breakdown of its

individual elements.

(1) M anufacturer ’s Identification

Mark

(2) Tire Size

(3) Tire Type Code

(4) Date of Manufacture

The first two figures identify the

week, starting with “01” to represent

the first full week of the calendar

year; the second two figures repre-

sent the year. For example, 0101

means the 1st week of 2001.

! Other markings

The following makings are also

placed on the sidewall.

! Maximum permissible inflation

pressure

The maximum cold inflation pres-

sure to which this tire m ay be

inflated. For example, “300 kpa

(44 PSI) MAX. PRESS”

Consumer information and Reporting safety defects 13-3

– CONTINUED –

Black plate (432,1)

北米Model "A2440BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 5/ 7

13-4 Consumer information and Reporting safety defects

! Maximum load rating

The load rating at the maximum

permissible weight load for this tire.

For example, “MAX. LOAD 730 kg

(1609 LBS) @ 300 kpa (44 PSI)

MAX. PRESS.”

WARNING

Maximum load rating applies

only to the tire, not to the

vehicle. Putting a load rated

tire on any vehicle does not

mean the vehicle can be

loaded up to the tire’s rated

load.

! Construction typ e

Applicable construction of this tire.

For example, “TUBELESS STEEL

BELTED RADIAL”

! Construction

The generic name of each cord

material used in t he plies (both

sidewall and tread area) of this tire.

For example, “PLIES: TREAD 2

STEEL + 2 POLYESTER + 1

NYLON SIDEWALL 2 POLYE-

STER”

! Uniform Tire Quality Grading

(UTQG)

For details, refer to “Uniform tire

quality grading stan dards” in this

chapter.

Black plate (433,1)

北米Model "A2440BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 5/ 7

& Recommended tire inflation pressure

! Recommended cold tire inflation pressure

Recommended cold tire inflation pressure for your vehicle’s tires is as follows,

Tire size

P205/

55R16 89H

P225/

60R16 97H

P205/

50R17 88V

215/45R17

91W

P225/

55R17 95V

215/45R18

89Y

P215/

45R18 89W

Wheel size 16 6 6.5JJ 17 6 7JJ 186 7JJ

Pres-

sure

Front

32 psi

(220 kPa,

2.2 kgf/

)

32 psi

(220 kPa,

2.2 kgf/

)

33 psi

(230 kPa,

2.3 kgf/

)

35 psi

(240 kPa,

2.4 kgf/

)

32 psi

(220 kPa,

2.2 kgf/

)

33 psi

(230 kPa,

2.3 kgf/cm

)

Rear

30 psi

(210 kPa,

2.1 kgf/

)

30 psi

(210 kPa,

2.1 kgf/

)

32 psi

(220 kPa,

2.2 kgf/

)

33 psi

(230 kPa,

2.3 kgf/

)

30 psi

(210 kPa,

2.1 kgf/

)

32 psi

(220 kPa,

2.2 kgf/cm

)

Rear at

trailer

towing

– 32 psi

(220 kPa,

2.2 kgf/

)

– 32 psi

(220 kPa,

2.2 kgf/

)

–

Tempor-

ary

spare

tire

Size

T135/

80R16

T155/

70D17

T135/

80R16

T135/

70D17

T155/

70D17

T155/70D17

Pres-

sure

60 psi (420 kPa, 4.2 kgf/cm

)

Consumer information and Reporting safety defects 13-5

– CONTINUED –

Black plate (434,1)

北米Model "A2440BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 5/ 7

13-6 Consumer information and Reporting safety defects

! Vehicle placard

The vehicle placard is affixed to the

driver’s side B-pillar.

Example:

The vehicle placard shows original

tire size, recommended cold tire

inflation pressure on each tire at

maximum loaded vehicle weight,

seating capacity and loading infor-

mation.

! Adverse safety consequences

of under-inflation

Driving at high speeds with exces-

sively low tire pressures can cause

the tires to flex severely and to

rapidly become hot. A sharp in-

crease in temperature could cause

tread separation, and failure of the

tire(s). Possible resulting loss of

vehicle control could lead to an

accident.

! Measuring and adjusting air

pressure to achieve proper in-

flation

Check and, if necessary, adjust the

pressure of each tire (including the

spare) at least once a month and

before any long journey. Check the

tire pressures when the tires are

cold. Use a pressure gauge to

adjust the tire pressures to the

specific values. Driving even a

short distance warms up the tires

and increases the tire pressures.

Also, the tire pressures are affected

by the outside temperature. It is

best to check tire pressure out-

doors before driving the vehicle.

When a tire becomes warm, the air

inside it expands, causing the tire

pressure to increase. Be careful not

to mistakenly release air from a

warm tire to reduce its pressure.

& Glossary of tire terminology

. Cold tire pressure

The pressure in a tire that has been

driven less than 1 mile or has been

standing for three hours or more.

. Maximum inflation pressure

The maximum cold inflation pres-

sure to which a tire may be inflated.

. Recommended inflation pres-

sure

The cold inflation pressure recom-

mended by a vehicle manufacturer.

. Intended outboard sidewall

(1) The sidewall that contains a

Black plate (435,1)

北米Model "A2440BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 5/ 7

whitewall, bears white lettering

or bears manufacturer, brand,

and/or model name molding that

is higher or deeper than the

same molding on the other side-

wall of the tire, or

(2) The outward facing sidewall

of an asymmetrical tire that has

a particular side that must al-

ways face outward when mount-

ing on a vehicle.

. Accessory weight

The combined weight (in excess of

those standard items which may be

replaced) of floor mats, leather

seats and cross bars to the extent

that these items are available as

factory-installed equipment

(whether installed or not).

. Curb weight

The weight of a motor vehicle with

standard equipment including the

maximum capacity of fuel, oil, and

coolant and air conditioning.

. Maximum loaded vehi cle weight

The sum of curb weight, accessory

weight, vehicle capacity weight and

production options weight.

. Normal occupant weight

150 lbs (68 kg) times the number of

occupants (3 occupants).

. Occupant distribution

Distribution of occupants in a vehi-

cle, 2 in front, 1 in rear seat.

. Production options weight

The combined weight of those

installed regular production options

weighing over 5.1 lbs (2.3 kg) in

excess of those standards items

which they replace, not previously

considered in curb weight or acces-

sory weight.

. Vehicle capacity weight

The total weight of cargo, luggage

and occupants that can be added to

the vehicle.

. Vehicle maximum load on a tire

Load on an individual tire that is

determined by distributing to each

axle its share of the maximum

loaded vehicle weight and dividing

by two.

. Vehicle normal load on a tire

Load on an individual tire that is

determined by distributing to each

axle its share of the curb weight,

accessory weight, and normal oc-

cupant weight and dividing by two.

& Tire care – maintenance and

safety practices

. Check on a daily basis that the

tires are free from serious damage,

nails, and stones. At the same time,

check the tires for abnormal wear.

. Inspect the tire tread regularly

and replace the tires before their

tread wear indicators become visi-

ble. When a tire’s tread wear

indicator becomes visible, the tire

is worn beyond the acceptable limit

and must be replaced immediately.

With a tire in this condition, driving

at even low speeds in wet weather

can cause the vehicle to hydro-

plane. Possible resulting loss of

vehicle control can lead t o an

accident.

. To maximize the life of each tire

and ensure that the tires wear

uniformly, it is best to rotate the

Consumer information and Reporting safety defects 13-7

– CONTINUED –

Black plate (436,1)

北米Model "A2440BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 5/ 7

13-8 Consumer information and Reporting safety defects

tires every 7,500 miles (12,000 km).

Rotating the tires involves switch-

ing the front and rear tires on the

right-hand side of the vehicle and

similarly switching the front and

rear tires on the left-hand side of

the vehicle. (Each tire must be kept

on its original side of the vehicle.)

Replace any damaged or unevenly

worn tire at the time of rotation.

After tire rotation, adjust the tire

pressures and make sure the wheel

nuts are correctly tightened. A

tightening torque specification and

a tightening sequence specification

for the wheel nuts can be found

“

Flat tires” section in chapter 9.

& Vehicle load limit – how to

determine

The load capacity of your vehicle is

determined by weight, not by avail-

able cargo space. The load limit of

your vehicle is shown o n the

vehicle placard attached to the

driver ’s side B-pillar. Locate the

statement “The combined weight

of occupants and cargo should

never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs”

on your vehicle’s placard.

Thevehicleplacardalsoshows

seating capacity of your vehicle.

The total load capacity includes the

total weight of driver and all pas-

sengers and their belongings, any

cargo, any optional equipment such

as a trailer hitch, roof rack or bike

carrier, etc., and the tongue load of

a trailer. Therefore cargo capacity

can be calculated by the following

method.

Cargo capacity = Load limit − (total

weight of occupants + total weight

of optional equipment + tongue

load of a trailer (if applicable))

For towing capacity information and

weight limits, refer to “

Trailer towing”

section in chapter 8.

! Calculating total and load ca-

pacities varying seating con-

figurations

Calculate the available load capa-

city as shown in the following

examples:

Example 1A

Vehicle capacity weight of the

vehicle is 800 lbs (363 kg), which

is indicated on the vehicle placard

with the statement "The combined

weight of occupants and cargo

should never exceed 363 kg or

800 lbs".

For example, if the vehicle has one

occupant weighing 154 lbs (70 kg)

plus cargo weighing 551 lbs (250

kg).

1. Calculate the total weight.

Black plate (437,1)

北米Model "A2440BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 5/ 7

2. Calculate the available load ca-

pacity by subtracting the total

weight from the vehicle capacity

weight of 800 lbs (363 kg).

3. The result of step 2 shows that a

further 95 lbs (43 kg) of cargo can

be carried.

Example 1B

For example, if a person weighing

176 lbs (80 kg) now enters the

same vehicle (bringing the number

of occupants to two), the calcula-

tions are as follows:

1. Calculate the total weight.

2. Calculate the available load ca-

pacity.

3. The total weight now exceeds

the capacity weight by 81 lbs (37

kg), so the cargo weight must be

reduced by 81 lbs (37 kg) or more.

Example 2A

Vehicle capacity weight of the

vehicle is 800 lbs (363 kg), which

Consumer information and Reporting safety defects 13-9

– CONTINUED –

Black plate (438,1)

北米Model "A2440BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 5/ 7

13-10 Consumer information and Reporting safety defects

is indicated on the vehicle placard

with the statement “The combined

weight of occupants and cargo

should never exceed 363 kg or

800 lbs”.

For example, the vehicle has one

occupant weighing 165 lbs (75 kg)

plus cargo weighing 265 lbs (120

kg). In addition, the vehicle is fitted

with a trailer hitch weighing 22 lbs

(10 kg), to which is attached a

trailer weighing 1,764 lbs (800 kg).

10% of the trailer weight is applied

to the trailer tongue (i.e. Tongue

load = 176 lbs (80 kg)).

1. Calculate the total weight.

2. Calculate the available load ca-

pacity.

3. The result of step 2 shows that a

further 172 lbs (78 kg) of cargo can

be carried.

Example 2B

For example, if a person weighing

143 lbs (65 kg) and a child weighing

40 lbs (18 kg) now enter the same

vehicle (bringing the number of

occupants to three), and a child

restraint system weighing 11 lbs (5

kg) is installed in the vehicle for the

child to use, the calculations are as

follows:

1. Calculate the total weight.

2. Calculate the available load ca-

pacity.

Black plate (439,1)

北米Model "A2440BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 5/ 7

3. The total weight now exceeds

the capacity weight by 22 lbs (10

kg), so the cargo weight must be

reduced by 22 lbs (10 kg) or more.

& Determining compatibility of

tire and vehicle load capaci-

ties

The sum of four tires’ maximum

load ratings must exceed the max-

imum loaded vehicle weight

(“GVWR”). In addition, sum of the

maximum load ratings of two front

tires and of two rear tires must

exceed each axle’s maximum

loaded capacity (“GAWR”). Original

equipment tires are designed to

fulfill those conditions.

The maximum loaded vehicle

weight is referred to Gross Vehicle

Weight Rating (GVWR). And each

axle’s maximum loaded capacity is

referred to Gross Axle Weight Rat-

ing (GAWR). The GVWR and each

axle’s GAWR are shown on the

vehicle certification label affixed to

the driver’s door.

The GVWR and f ront and rear

GAWRs are determined by not only

the maximum load rating of tires but

also loaded capacities of the vehi-

cle’s suspension, axles and other

parts of the body.

Therefore, this means that the

vehicle cannot necessarily be

loaded up to the tire’s maximum

load rating on the tire sidewall.

& Adverse safety conse-

quences of overloading on

handling and stopping and

on tires

Overloading could affect vehicle

handling, stopping distance, vehicle

and tire as shown in the following.

This could lead to an accident and

possibly result in severe personal

injury.

. Vehicle stability will deteriorate.

. Heavy and/or high-mounted

loads could increase the risk of

rollover.

. Stopping distance will increase.

. Brakes could overheat and fail.

. Suspension, bearings, axles and

other parts of the body could break

or experience accelerated wear

that will shorten vehicle life.

. Tires could fail.

. Tread separation could occur.

. Tire could separate from its rim.

& Steps for Determining Cor-

rect Load Limit

1. Locate the statement “The com-

bined weigh t of occupant s and

cargo should never exceed XXX

pounds” on your vehicle’s placard.

2. Determine the combined weight

of the driver and passengers that

will be riding in your vehicle.

3. Subtract the combined weight of

the driver and passenger s from

XXX kilograms or XXX pounds.

4. The resulting figure equals the

Consumer information and Reporting safety defects 13-11

– CONTINUED –

Black plate (440,1)

北米Model "A2440BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 5/ 7

13-12 Consumer information and Reporting safety defects

available amount of cargo a nd

luggage load capacity. For exam-

ple, if the “XXX” amount equals

1,400 lbs (635kg). and there will be

five- 150 lbs (68 kg) passengers in

your vehicle, the amount of avail-

able cargo and luggage load capa-

city is 650 lbs. (1,400 − 750 (5 6

150) = 650 lbs.)

5. Determine the combined weight

of luggage and cargo being loaded

on the vehicle. That weight may not

safely exceed the available cargo

and luggage load capacity calcu-

lated in Step 4.

6. If your vehicle will be towing a

trailer, load from your trailer will be

transferred to your vehicle. Consult

this manual to determine how this

reduces the available cargo and

luggage load capacity of your ve-

hicle.

Uniform tire quality grading

standards

This information indicates the rela-

tive performance of passenger car

tires in the area of treadwear,

traction, and temperature resis-

tance. This is to aid the consumer

in making an informed choice in the

purchase of tires.

Quality grades can be found where

applicable on the tire sidewall be-

tween tread shoulder and maxi-

mum section width. For example:

Treadwear 200 Traction AA Tem-

perature A

The quality grades apply to new

pneumatic tires for use on passen-

ger cars. However, they do not

apply to deep tread, winter type

snow tires, space-saver or tempor-

ary use spare tires, tires with

nominal rim diameters of 12 inches

or less, or to some limited produc-

tion tires.

All passenger car tires must con-

form to Federal Safety Requir e-

ments in addition to these grades.

& Treadwear

The treadwear grade is a compara-

tive rating based on the wear rate of

the tire when tested under con-

trolled conditions on a specified

government test course.

For example, a tire graded 150

would wear one and one-half (1-1/

2) times as well on the government

course as a tire graded 100. The

relative performance of tires de-

pends upon the actual conditions

of their use, however, and may

depart significantly from the norm

due to variations in driving habits,

service practices and differences in

road characteristics and climate.

& Traction AA, A, B, C

The traction grades, from highest to

lowest, are AA, A, B and C. Those

grades represent the tire’s ability to

stop on wet pavement as measured

under controlled conditions on spe-

Black plate (441,1)

北米Model "A2440BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 5/ 7

cified government test surfaces of

asphalt and concrete. A tire marked

C may have poor traction perfor-

mance.

WARNING

The traction grade assigned to

this tire is based on straight-

ahead braking traction tests,

and does not include accel-

eration, cornering, hydroplan-

ing, or peak traction charac-

teristics.

& Temperature A, B, C

The temperature grades are A (the

highest), B, and C, representing the

tire’s resistance to the generation of

heat and its ability to dissipate heat

when tested under controlled con-

ditions on a specified indoor labora-

tory test wheel. Sustained high

temperature can cause the material

of the tire to degenerate and reduce

tire life, and excessive temperature

can lead to sudden tire failure. The

grade C corresponds to a level of

performance which all passenger

car t ires mu st me et under the

Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Stan-

dards No. 109. Grades B and A

represent higher levels of perfor-

mance on the laboratory test wheel

than the minimum required by law.

WARNING

The temperature grade for this

tire is established for a tire

that is properly inflated and

not overloaded. Excessive

speed, underinflation, or ex-

cessive loading, either sepa-

rately or in combination, can

cause heat buildup and possi-

ble tire failure.

Reporting safety defects

(USA)

If you believe that your vehicle has

a defect which coul d cause a

crash or could cause injury or

death, you should immediately in-

form the National Highway Traffic

Safety Administration (NHTSA) in

addition to notifying Subaru of

America, Inc.

If NHTSA receives similar com-

plaints, it may open an investiga-

tion, and if it finds that a safety

defect exists in a group of vehi-

cles, it may order a recall and

remedy campaign. However,

NHTSA cannot become involved

in individual problems between

you, your dealer, or Subaru of

America, Inc. To contact NHTSA,

you may call the Vehicle Safety

Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236

(TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to

http://www.safercar.gov; or write

to: Administrator, NHTSA, 400

Seventh Street, SW., Washington,

Consumer information and Reporting safety defects 13-13

– CONTINUED –

Black plate (442,1)

北米Model "A2440BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 5/ 7

13-14 Consumer information and Reporting safety defects

DC 20590. You can also obtain

other information about motor ve-

hicle safety from

http://www.safercar.gov.

Black plate (27,1)

北米Model "A2440BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 5/ 7

Index

Black plate (2,1)

北米Model "A2440BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 5/ 7

14-2 Index

ABS (Anti-lock Brake System) ..................................... 7-35

Warning light ................................................. 3-34, 7-35

Accessories....................................................... 5-4, 11-50

Accessory power outlet................................................. 6-8

Active head restraint..................................................... 1-7

Air cleaner element ................................................... 11-17

Air conditioner ............................................................. 4-7

Air filtration system..................................................... 4-13

Air flow selection.......................................................... 4-2

Alarm system ............................................................ 2-15

All-Wheel Drive warning light....................................... 3-36

Aluminum wheel cleaning............................................ 10-3

Aluminum wheels...................................................... 11-41

Antenna system........................................................... 5-2

Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) ..................................... 7-35

Arming the system ..................................................... 2-16

Armrest..................................................................... 1-12

AT OIL TEMPerature warning light ............................... 3-32

Audio control button ................................................... 5-26

Audio set .................................................................... 5-5

Auto-dimming mirror/compass...................................... 3-55

Automatic climate control system ................................... 4-8

Automatic transmission

4-speed ................................................................ 7-18

5-speed ................................................................ 7-24

Capacities............................................................. 12-4

Fluid.................................................................... 11-23

Manual mode ................................................ 7-21, 7-27

Selector lever ................................................ 7-18, 7-25

Shift lock release ........................................... 7-23, 7-29

SPORT ................................................................. 7-23

Temperature warning light (AT OIL TEMP) ................. 3-32

Automatic/Emergency Locking Retractor (A/ELR) ........... 1-14

Battery .................................................................... 11-47

Jump starting ......................................................... 9-10

Replacement (Remote keyless entry system) .............. 2-8

Booster seat .............................................................. 1-33

Brake

Booster ....................................................... 7-34, 11-31

Fluid ................................................................... 11-29

Pad and lining...................................................... 11-33

Parking ....................................................... 7-45, 11-33

Pedal .................................................................. 11-31

System.................................................................. 7-34

Brake pedal

Free play............................................................. 11-31

Reserve distance.................................................. 11-31

Brake system............................................................. 7-34

Warning light.......................................................... 3-35

Braking ..................................................................... 7-34

Tips ...................................................................... 7-34

Breaking-in of new brake pads and linings................... 11-33

Bulb

Chart .................................................................... 12-9

Replacing ............................................................ 11-51

Capacities ................................................................. 12-4

Black plate (3,1)

北米Model "A2440BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 5/ 7

Cargo area

Cover ................................................................... 6-12

Light....................................................................... 6-2

Tie-down hooks ..................................................... 6-16

Catalytic converter ....................................................... 8-3

Center

Console .................................................................. 6-5

Ventilators ............................................................... 4-3

Center and side ventilators............................................ 4-3

Changing

Flat tire ................................................................... 9-4

Oil and oil filter ..................................................... 11-10

Charge warning light .................................................. 3-32

CHECK ENGINE warning light/Malfunction indicator

lamp...................................................................... 3-31

Checking

Brake pedal free play ............................................ 11-31

Brake pedal reserve distance ................................. 11-31

Clutch function...................................................... 11-32

Clutch pedal free play............................................ 11-32

Engine oil level ...................................................... 11-9

Fluid level ............................... 11-23, 11-28, 11-29, 11-30

Gear oil level........................................................ 11-25

Child restraint systems ............................................... 1-27

Installation with A/ELR seatbelt................................ 1-30

Lower and tether anchorages .................................. 1-35

Child safety .................................................................... 5

Locks ................................................................... 2-20

Chime

Key ........................................................................ 3-5

Seatbelt ........................................................ 1-15, 3-29

Cleaning

Aluminum wheels ................................................... 10-3

Interior .................................................................. 10-5

Ventilation grille ...................................................... 4-12

Climate control system

Automatic ............................................................... 4-8

Manual................................................................... 4-3

Clock ........................................................................ 3-40

Clutch

Fluid ................................................................... 11-30

Pedal .................................................................. 11-32

Coat hook.................................................................. 6-10

Coolant ................................................................... 11-14

Cooling system ........................................................ 11-14

Corrosion protection............................................ 8-10, 10-4

Cruise control ............................................................ 7-46

Set indicator light.................................................... 3-40

Cruise control indicator light......................................... 3-40

Cup holder ................................................................. 6-7

Front passenger’s.................................................... 6-8

Rear passenger’s .................................................... 6-8

Daytime running light system ....................................... 3-47

Differential gear oil

Front................................................................... 11-24

Rear ................................................................... 11-25

Dimensions................................................................ 12-2

Disarming the system ................................................. 2-18

Disc brake pad wear warning indicators ........................ 7-34

Dome light......................................................... 6-2, 11-58

Index 14-3

Black plate (4,1)

北米Model "A2440BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 5/ 7

14-4 Index

Door

Locks ..................................................................... 2-5

Open warning light ................................................. 3-36

Drive belts................................................................ 11-21

Driving

All-Wheel Drive vehicle........................................... 3-36

Car phone/cell phone .................................................. 7

Drinking ..................................................................... 6

Drugs ........................................................................ 6

Foreign countries ..................................................... 8-5

Pets .......................................................................... 7

Snowy and icy roads ................................................ 8-9

Tips....................................... 7-15, 7-17, 7-22, 7-29, 8-5

Tired or sleepy............................................................ 7

ECO gauge ................................................................. 3-8

Electrical system........................................................ 12-3

Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD)

system........................................................... 3-35, 7-36

Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR)............................. 1-14

Engine

Compartment overview ........................................... 11-6

Coolant................................................................ 11-14

Exhaust gas (Carbon monoxide) ............................ 6, 8-3

Hood .................................................................... 11-4

Oil ........................................................................ 11-9

Overheating .......................................................... 9-13

Starting................................................................... 7-9

Stopping ............................................................... 7-10

Exterior care.............................................................. 10-2

Flat tires..................................................................... 9-4

Floor mat................................................................... 6-12

Fluid level

Automatic transmission ......................................... 11-23

Brake.................................................................. 11-29

Clutch ................................................................. 11-30

Power steering ..................................................... 11-28

Fog light switch .......................................................... 3-48

Front

Differential gear oil................................................ 11-24

Fog light.............................................................. 11-54

Seatbelt pretensioners ............................................ 1-24

Seats ..................................................................... 1-2

Front seats

Fore and aft adjustment ..................................... 1-3, 1-4

Reclining .......................................................... 1-3, 1-4

Fuel ........................................................................... 7-3

Economy hints ........................................................ 8-2

Filler lid and cap...................................................... 7-5

Gauge............................................................ 3-6, 3-26

Requirements ......................................................... 7-3

Fuses ..................................................................... 11-48

Fuses and circuits ...................................................... 12-6

GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating)............................... 8-15

Gear position indicator ................................................ 3-39

Glove box................................................................... 6-5

GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating)........................... 8-15

Black plate (5,1)

北米Model "A2440BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 5/ 7

Hazard warning flasher ........................................... 3-5, 9-2

Head restraint adjustment ............................................. 1-7

Rear..................................................................... 1-10

Headlight

Flasher ................................................................. 3-46

Indicator light......................................................... 3-40

Headlights........................................................ 3-46, 11-52

Heater operation .......................................................... 4-5

High beam indicator light ............................................ 3-40

High mount stop light................................................. 11-60

High/low beam change (dimmer).................................. 3-46

Horn......................................................................... 3-59

Hose and connections ............................................... 11-14

Ignition switch.............................................................. 3-3

Light....................................................................... 3-5

Illuminated entry .......................................................... 2-9

Illumination brightness control...................................... 3-47

Immobilizer.................................................................. 2-3

Indicator light........................................................... 2-4

Immobilizer system

Indicator light......................................................... 3-38

Indicator light

Cruise control ........................................................ 3-40

Cruise control set................................................... 3-40

Front fog............................................................... 3-40

Headlight .............................................................. 3-40

High beam ............................................................ 3-40

S# PREP .............................................................. 3-38

Security................................................................. 3-38

Selector lever position............................................. 3-39

Selector lever/Gear position ..................................... 3-39

Shift-up ................................................................. 3-38

SPORT mode ........................................................ 3-38

Traction Control system OFF ................................... 3-37

Turn signal ............................................................ 3-39

Vehicle Dynamics Control OFF................................. 3-37

Vehicle Dynamics Control operation.......................... 3-36

Indicator lights

Vehicle Dynamics Control................................ 7-39, 7-40

Information display...................................................... 3-41

Inside mirror .............................................................. 3-55

Interior light................................................................. 6-2

Internal trunk lid release handle.................................... 2-24

Jack.......................................................................... 9-19

Jack handle ............................................................... 9-19

Jump starting ............................................................. 9-10

Key

Keyless entry system ............................................... 2-8

Number .................................................................. 2-2

Reminder chime ...................................................... 3-5

Replacement........................................................... 2-4

Keys .......................................................................... 2-2

Leather seat materials................................................. 10-5

Index 14-5

Black plate (6,1)

北米Model "A2440BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 5/ 7

14-6 Index

Light

Cargo area.............................................................. 6-2

Control switch........................................................ 3-45

Dome ..................................................................... 6-2

Map ....................................................................... 6-2

Limited slip differential (LSD) ....................................... 7-33

Loading your vehicle .................................................. 8-13

Low fuel warning light ................................... 3-7, 3-27, 3-35

Low tire pressure warning light .................................... 3-32

Lower and tether anchorage........................................ 1-35

LSD (Limited slip differential) ....................................... 7-33

Lumbar support ........................................................... 1-8

Main fuse................................................................. 11-49

Maintenance

Precautions ........................................................... 11-3

Schedule .............................................................. 11-3

Seatbelt ................................................................ 1-23

Tools .................................................................... 9-19

Malfunction indicator lamp........................................... 3-31

Manual

Climate control system ............................................. 4-3

Mode............................................................ 7-21, 7-27

Seat ....................................................................... 1-3

Transmission oil.................................................... 11-21

Transmission-5 speeds ........................................... 7-14

Transmission-6 speeds ........................................... 7-16

Map light........................................................... 6-2, 11-59

Maximum load limits................................................... 8-22

Meters and gauges .............................................. 3-5, 3-24

Mirrors ...................................................................... 3-55

Moonroof................................................................... 2-27

Multi-information display ............................................... 3-9

New vehicle break-in driving ......................................... 8-2

Odometer .................................................................. 3-25

Odometer/Tripmeter .................................................... 3-10

Off road driving ........................................................... 8-6

Oil filter ................................................................... 11-10

Oil level

Engine .................................................................. 11-9

Front differential gear ............................................ 11-24

Manual transmission ............................................. 11-21

Rear differential.................................................... 11-25

Oil pressure warning light ............................................ 3-32

Outside mirrors .......................................................... 3-57

Outside temperature indicator ...................................... 3-41

Overhead console ....................................................... 6-7

Overheating engine .................................................... 9-13

Parking

Brake.................................................................... 7-45

Brake stroke ........................................................ 11-33

Light switch ........................................................... 3-48

Tips ...................................................................... 7-45

Parking your vehicle ................................................... 7-44

Pcket ......................................................................... 6-7

Black plate (7,1)

北米Model "A2440BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 5/ 7

Periodic inspections ..................................................... 8-4

Power

Door locking switch .................................................. 2-7

Seat ....................................................................... 1-4

Steering................................................................ 7-33

Steering fluid ........................................................ 11-28

Windows............................................................... 2-20

Precautions against vehicle modification ............... 1-27, 1-64

Preparing to drive ........................................................ 7-8

Printed antenna ........................................................... 5-2

Rear

Combination lights................................................. 11-55

Gate............................................................. 2-26, 9-18

Seats ..................................................................... 1-9

Viscous limited slip differential ................................. 7-33

Rear differential

Gear oil ............................................................... 11-25

Rear seat

Folding down........................................................... 1-9

Rear window

Defogger button..................................................... 3-54

Wiper and washer switch ........................................ 3-52

Wiper blades ........................................................ 11-45

Recommended

Automatic transmission fluid ................................... 11-24

Brake fluid............................................................ 11-29

Clutch fluid........................................................... 11-30

OIL grade and

viscosity...................... 11-12, 11-13, 11-22, 11-25, 11-27

Power steering fluid .............................................. 11-28

Spark plugs ......................................................... 11-20

Remote engine start system ........................................ 7-11

Remote keyless entry system ....................................... 2-8

Replacement

Brake pad and lining ............................................. 11-32

Wiper blades........................................................ 11-43

Replacing

Air cleaner element............................................... 11-18

Battery (remote keyless entry system)........................ 2-8

Lost transmitters (keyless entry system) .................... 2-12

Replacing bulbs ....................................................... 11-51

Backup light/Tail light ............................................ 11-57

Cargo area light ................................................... 11-60

Dome light........................................................... 11-58

Door step light ..................................................... 11-59

Front fog light....................................................... 11-54

Front turn signal light ............................................ 11-54

Headlight............................................................. 11-52

High mount stop light ............................................ 11-60

License plate light................................................. 11-57

Map light ............................................................. 11-59

Parking light......................................................... 11-54

Rear combination light .......................................... 11-55

Trunk light ........................................................... 11-60

Vanity mirror light.................................................. 11-59

Rocking the vehicle .................................................... 8-13

Roof rail and crossbar ................................................. 8-15

S# PREP indicator light ............................................... 3-38

Index 14-7

Black plate (8,1)

北米Model "A2440BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 5/ 7

14-8 Index

Safety

Precautions when driving ............................................. 4

Symbol ...................................................................... 2

Warnings ................................................................... 2

Seat

Fabric................................................................... 10-5

Heater .................................................................... 1-8

Memory function ...................................................... 1-5

Seat height adjustment ................................................. 1-4

Seatbelt ......................................................................... 4

Maintenance.......................................................... 1-23

Pretensioners ........................................................ 1-24

Safety tips............................................................. 1-13

Warning light and chime ................................. 1-15, 3-29

Seatbelts .................................................................. 1-13

Security ID plate .......................................................... 2-3

Selector lever .................................................... 7-18, 7-25

Position indicator ................................................... 3-39

Shift lock release ............................................... 7-23, 7-29

Shift-up indicator light ................................................. 3-38

Shock sensors........................................................... 2-19

Shopping bag hook .................................................... 6-11

SI-DRIVE mode ......................................................... 7-30

Snow tires................................................................. 8-11

Snowy and icy roads .................................................... 8-9

Sounding a panic alarm .............................................. 2-10

Spark plugs.............................................................. 11-20

Specifications ............................................................ 12-2

Speedometer....................................................... 3-6, 3-24

SPORT mode indicator light ........................................ 3-38

SRS

Curtain airbag ........................................................ 1-55

Frontal airbag......................................................... 1-45

Side airbag ............................................................ 1-55

SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint System airbag)... 4, 1-40

SRS airbag system

Monitors ................................................................ 1-61

Servicing ............................................................... 1-63

Warning light.......................................................... 3-30

Starting the engine ...................................................... 7-9

State emission testing (U.S. only) .................................. 7-7

Steering wheel

Power ................................................................... 7-33

Tilt/telescopic ......................................................... 3-58

Stopping the engine.................................................... 7-10

Storage compartment................................................... 6-4

Stowage boxes .......................................................... 6-15

Sun shade......................................................... 2-28, 2-30

Sun visors .................................................................. 6-3

Supplemental Restraint System airbag (SRS) ................ 1-40

Synthetic leather upholstery ......................................... 10-5

Tachometer......................................................... 3-6, 3-26

Temperature gauge...................................... 3-7, 3-12, 3-27

Temperature warning light (AT OIL TEMP) ..................... 3-32

Temporary spare tire .................................................... 9-2

Tie-down hooks.......................................................... 9-14

Tire

Chains .................................................................. 8-13

Inspection............................................................ 11-36

Black plate (9,1)

北米Model "A2440BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 5/ 7

Pressures and wear .............................................. 11-36

Replacement ........................................................ 11-40

Rotation............................................................... 11-39

Types .................................................................. 11-34

Tire pressure monitoring system

(TPMS).......................................... 3-32, 7-43, 9-9, 11-34

Tires......................................................................... 12-5

Tires and wheels....................................................... 11-34

Top tether anchorages ................................................ 1-37

Towing...................................................................... 9-14

All wheels on the ground ........................................ 9-17

Flat-bed truck ........................................................ 9-17

Tie-down hooks ..................................................... 9-14

Weight .................................................................. 8-22

Trailer

Connecting............................................................ 8-20

Hitch .................................................................... 8-19

Hitches ................................................................. 8-25

Towing.................................................................. 8-21

Towing tips............................................................ 8-27

Trip meter ................................................................. 3-25

Trunk lid ................................................................... 2-23

Release handle ..................................................... 2-24

Trunk light................................................................ 11-60

Turn signal

Indicator lights ....................................................... 3-39

Lever.................................................................... 3-47

Under-floor storage compartment ................................. 6-16

Valet mode ................................................................ 2-18

Vanity mirror ............................................................... 6-4

Vehicle

Capacity weight...................................................... 8-14

Identification ........................................................ 12-11

Symbols .................................................................... 3

Vehicle Dynamics Control

OFF indicator light .................................................. 3-37

OFF switch ............................................................ 7-42

Operation indicator light........................................... 3-36

System.................................................................. 7-38

Warning light.................................................. 3-37, 7-40

Ventilator .................................................................... 4-2

Warning and indicator lights ......................................... 3-28

Warning light

ABS ...................................................................... 3-34

All-Wheel Drive ...................................................... 3-36

Anti-lock Brake System ........................................... 3-34

AT OIL TEMPerature............................................... 3-32

Brake system......................................................... 3-35

Charge.................................................................. 3-32

CHECK ENGINE.................................................... 3-31

Door open ............................................................. 3-36

Low fuel ................................................. 3-7, 3-27, 3-35

Low tire pressure.................................................... 3-32

Oil pressure ........................................................... 3-32

Seatbelt................................................................. 3-29

SRS airbag system................................................. 3-30

Index 14-9

Black plate (10,1)

北米Model "A2440BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 5/ 7

14-10 Index

Vehicle Dynamics Control ....................................... 3-37

Warning lights

Vehicle Dynamics Control ....................................... 7-40

Warranties ..................................................................... 1

Warranties and maintenance ....................................... 8-21

Washing ................................................................... 10-2

Waxing and polishing ................................................. 10-3

Wear indicators......................................................... 11-39

Wheel

Alignment.............................................................. 12-5

Aluminum............................................................. 11-41

Balance ............................................................... 11-38

Replacement ........................................................ 11-40

Windows................................................................... 2-20

Windshield

Washer fluid ......................................................... 11-41

Wiper and washer switches..................................... 3-50

Wiper blades ........................................................ 11-43

Wiper deicer.......................................................... 3-53

Winter driving .............................................................. 8-8

Wiper and washer...................................................... 3-49

Black plate (1,1)

北米Model "A2440BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 4/ 28

000134

Black plate (2,1)

北米Model "A2440BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 5/ 7

GAS STATION REFERENCE

Fuel:

! 2.5-liter non-turbo models

Use only unleaded gasoline with an octane rating of 87 AKI or

higher.

! 2.5-liter turbo models

Use premium unleaded gasoline with an octane rating of 91 AKI

or higher. For tempora ry purp oses i f pre mium unleaded

gasoline is not available, you may use regular unleaded

gasoline with an octane rating of 87 AKI or higher. For optimum

engine performance and driveability, it is required that you use

premium grade unleaded gasoline.

! 3.0-liter models

Use unleaded gasoline with an octane rating of 91 AKI or

higher. Regular unleaded gasoline with an octane rating of 87

AKI or higher may be used. However for optimum engine

performance and driveability, it is recommended that you use

91 AKI or higher grade unleaded gasoline. You may experience

reduced output, poor accelerator response, and reduced fuel

economy when using gasoline with an octane rating lower than

91 AKI, depending on your driving habits and conditions. If you

experience any of these conditions while using a lower octane

rated fuel, you may want to return to using 91 AKI octane rated

fuel as soon as possible. Additionally, if your vehicle knocks

heavily or persistently, or if you are driving with heavy loads

such as when towing a trailer, the use of 91 AKI or higher grade

unleaded gasoline is required.

& Fuel octane rating

This octane rating is the average of the Research Octane and

Motor Octane numbers and is commonly referred to as the Anti

Knock Index (AKI). Refer to “Fuel” section in this manual.

& Fuel capacity:

16.9 US gal (64 liters, 14.1 Imp gal)

& Engine oil:

Use only API classification SM with the words “ENERGY

CONSERVING” or ILSAC GF-4, which can be identified with

the ILSAC certification mark (Starburst mark).

& Engine oil capacity:

2.5-liter models: 4.2 US qt (4.0 liters, 3.5 Imp qt)

3.0-liter models: 5.8 US qt (5.5 liters, 4.8 Imp qt)

Black plate (3,1)

北米Model "A2440BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 5/ 7

& Cold tire pressure:

Tire size

P205/55R16

89H

P225/60R16

97H

P205/50R17

88V

215/45R17

91W

P225/55R17

95V

215/45R18

89Y

P215/45R18

89W

Wheel size 16 6 6.5JJ 17 6 7JJ 186 7JJ

Pressure Front

32 psi (220

kPa, 2.2 kgf/

)

32 psi (220

kPa, 2.2 kgf/

)

33 psi (230

kPa, 2.3 kgf/

)

35 psi (240

kPa, 2.4 kgf/

)

32 psi (220

kPa, 2.2 kgf/

)

33 psi (230 kPa,

2.3 kgf/cm

)

Rear

30 psi (210

kPa, 2.1 kgf/

)

30 psi (210

kPa, 2.1 kgf/

)

32 psi (220

kPa, 2.2 kgf/

)

33 psi (230

kPa, 2.3 kgf/

)

30 psi (210

kPa, 2.1 kgf/

)

32 psi (220 kPa,

2.2 kgf/cm

)

Rear at

trailer tow-

ing

– 32 psi (220

kPa, 2.2 kgf/

)

– 32 psi (220

kPa, 2.2 kgf/

)

–

Temporary

spare tire

Size T135/80R16 T155/70D17 T135/80R16 T135/70D17 T155/70D17 T155/70D17

Pressure

60 psi (420 kPa, 4.2 kgf/cm

)

Subaru 2008 Outback 2.5i LTD L.L. Bean dition 4dr All-wheel Drive Wagon

Product's Documents

User Manual

Specifications

Subaru 2008 OUTBACK 2.5I LTD L.L. BEAN Questions and Answers

Related Products

Subaru 2006 Forester 2.5X L.L. Bean Edition 4dr All-wheel Drive

Husqvarna R 320X AWD All-Wheel Drive Lawn Mower R 320X AWD PREUL NU INCLUDE MAS DE TIERE

HUSQVARNA AUTOMOWER 435X AWD Robotic Mower All-Wheel Drive for Efficiency and Ease of Use

Husqvarna R 216TC AWD Rider Mower All-Wheel Drive and Limited Edition Features for Superior Lawn Care R 216TC AWD LIMITED EDITION

Mammotion LUBA MINI AWD Robot Lawn Mower All-Wheel Drive, UltraSense AI, RTK Mapping for 0.37 Acre Slope Use LUBA MINI AWD 1500H

Mammotion LUBA 2 AWD Robot Lawn Mower 4G Connectivity, Precision Mapping, All-Wheel Drive for 80% Slope, Adjustable Height LUBA 2 AWD 3000X